BidFile 100

PROJ ECT MANUAL
Enola A. Dew Apartments

Chicago, Illinois
60 Unit Senior Living Apartment Building

HUD Project #071-EE232/IL06-S071-001
Architect Project #08-7910

Owner:
Housing Opportunities Mean Empowerment III, Inc.
415 S. Kilpatrick Street
Chicago, Illinois 60644

Architect:
Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C.
4000 Morsay Dr.
Rockford, IL 61107

J anuary 09, 2009

Enola A. Dew Apartments Table of Contents
08-7910
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00100 BID SOLICITATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00100-1
00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00200-1-4
BID FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
BID BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
CONTRACTORS COST BREAKDOWN (HUD 2328) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00300-1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
00500 AGREEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00500-1
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT LUMP SUM (HUD 92442-CA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
00590 CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00590-1
00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00800-1-3

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION (HUD 2554) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1-4
WAGE DETERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01100 SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01100-1
01210 ALLOWANCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01210-1
01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01300-1-4
01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01400-1-4
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01500-1-2
01585 PROJ ECT SIGNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01585-1-3
01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01600-1-3
SUBSTITUTION APPROVAL FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01700-1-7
01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01780-1-4
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
02230 SITE CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02230-1-4
02300 EARTHWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 02300-1-10
02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02510-1-6
02530 SANITARY SEWERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02530-1-6
02630 STORM DRAINAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02630-1-8
02741 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02741-1-7
02751 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02751-1-10
02821 ORNAMENTAL IRON FENCE AND GATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02821-1-5
02843 PARKING BUMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02843-1
02871 BIKE RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02871-1-2
02923 SODDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02923-1-3
02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02930-1-5

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

08-7910
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03200-1-2
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03300-1-8
03415 PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03415-1-4
03505 SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03505-1-3
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
04720 CAST STONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04720-1-4
04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04810-1-7
04816 MASONRY VENEER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 04816-1-8
DIVISION 5 METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05120-1-6
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05500-1-4
05510 METAL STAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05510-1-4
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06100-1-5
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06200-1-4
06415 COUNTERTOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 06415-1-3
06615 CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 06615-1-3
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07115-1-2
07212 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07212-1-3
07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07311-1-4
07530 FULLY ADHERED EPDM ROOFING . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07530-1-5
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07620-1-3
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07720-1-2
07840 FIRESTOPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07840-1-3
07900 J OINT SEALERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 07900-1-4
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08110-1-4
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08211-1-3
08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08310-1-2
08410 METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08410-1-5
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08520-1-5
08710 FINISH HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08710-1-26
08800 GLAZING ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08800-1-5

08-7910

DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09260-1-6
09300 TILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09300-1-3
09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09511-1-4
09650 RESILIENT FLOORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09650-1-4
09680 CARPET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09680-1-4
09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 09900-1-8
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10210 WALL LOUVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10210-1-2
10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10260-1-2
10440 INTERIOR SIGNAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10440-1-2
10441 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10441-1-2
10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10523-1-2
10552 MAIL BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10552-1-2
10672 WIRE STORAGE SHELVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10672-1-2
10800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10800-1-4
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11172 WASTE COMPACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11172-1-2
11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11450-1-3
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
12355 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12355- 1-3
12492 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12492- 1-3
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14201 PASSENGER ELEVATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14201-1-6
14560 CHUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14560-1-4
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL & PLUMBING
15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15010-1-7
15024 CODES, PERMITS & INSPECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15024-1
15040 STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15040-1-3
15045 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15045-1-2
15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15050-1-4
15051 COLOR CODING AND VALVE TAGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15051-1-2
15100 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15100-1-10
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS & LOOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15121-1-8
15140 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15140-1-9
15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 15185-1-9
15200 NOISE VIBRATION . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15200-1-4
15249 ROOF DRAIN LEADER (DOWNSPOUT ) PIPING INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15249-1-3

08-7910
15251 COLD WATER PIPING INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15251-1-3
15254 HOT WATER PIPING INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15254-1-3
15258 DUCT INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15258-1-5
15350 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15350-1-2
15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15400-1-4
15401 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15401-1-3
15405 SOIL, WASTE, VENT & DRAINAGE PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15405-1-4
15500 FIRE PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 15500-1-4
15510 HYDRONIC PIPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 15510-1-15
15514 FINNED WATER TUBE BOILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15514-1-7
15530 FURNACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15530-1-5
15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15550-1-11
15620 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15620-1-6
15652 REFRIGERANT PIPING . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15652-1-7
15671 CONDENSING UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15671-1-6
15771 PACKAGED ROOFTOP HEAT & COOL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15771-1-4
15784 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15784-1-5
15835 UNIT HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15835-1-6
15840 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15840-1-6
15849 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15849-1
15851 CENTRIFUGAL FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15851- 1-7
15852 AXIAL FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15852- 1-6
15864 FIRE DAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15864- 1-2
15867 REGISTERS,GRILLES, & DIFFUSERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15867- 1-2
15990 TESTING, ADJ USTING & BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15990- 1-22
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16010-1-5
16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16050-1-10
16111 CONDUITS . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16111-1-4
16120 WIRES AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16120-1-3
16131 PULL AND J UNCTION BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16131-1-4
16140 WIRING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16140-1-2
16147 PLATE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16147-1-2
16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16400-1-3
16403 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16403-1-3
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16410-1-6
16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16420-1-8
16442 PANELBOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16442-1-2
16450 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16450-1-2
16491 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16491-1-2
16500 LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16500-1-2
16615 EXIT/EMERGENCY LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16615-1
16721 FIRE ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16721-1-11
16725 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16725-1-9
16730 DVR SECURITY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16730-1-9

08-7910
APPENDIX A
UL Assembly Designs .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

SECTION 00100
BID SOLICITATION
FROM:
1.01 The Owner (hereinafter referred to as Owner):
A. Housing Opportunities Mean Empowerment III, Inc.
B. 415 S. Kilpatrick Street
C. Chicago, IL, 60644
1.02 And the Architect (hereinafter referred to as Architect):
A. Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C.
B. 4000 Morsay Drive
C. Rockford, IL, 61107
D. www.tysonandbilly.com
1.03 DATE: J anuary 9, 2009
1.04 TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS
A. Your firm is invited to submit an offer under seal to Owner for construction of a 5 story masonry
load bearing, 60 unit apartment building located at 4603 West Gladys Ave, Chicago, IL before
11:00 am local standard time on the 4th day of March, 2009, for the following project:
B. Bids on this project will be accepted by invitation only. Bid documents for a stipulated sum
contract may be obtained from the office of the Design Professional. Contractor has the option of
picking the plans up in person, or providing the architect with a valid UPS or FedEx shipping
number.
C. Bid Documents may be viewed online at the Architect's Website (www.tysonandbilly.com) under
the bidder list section.
D. Refer to other bidding requirements described in Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders and
Document 00300 - Information Available to Bidders.
E. Submit your offer on the Bid Form provided. Bidders may supplement this form as appropriate.
F. Your offer will be required to be submitted under a condition of irrevocability for a period of 300
(Three hundred) days after submission.
G. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
END OF BID SOLICITATION
Enola A Dew Apartments
08-7910
Section 00100
BID SOLICITATION
00100 - 1
Owner: __________ Architect: __________ Contractor: __________ Bonding:__________
01/09/2009

SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SUMMARY
INVITATION
2.01 BID SUBMISSION
A. Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Architect at
4000 Morsay Drive, Rockford, IL before 3:00 p.m. local standard time on the 4th day of March,
2009.
B. Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
C. Offers will be opened privately immediately after the time for receipt of bids.
2.02 INTENT
A. The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete a 5 story masonry
load bearing, 60 unit senior apartment located at 4603 West Gladys Ave, Chicago, IL for a
Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.03 CONTRACT TIME
A. Perform the Work within the time stated in Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions.
B. The bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts the Contract Time period stated for performing the
Work. The completion date in the Agreement shall be the Contract Time added to the
commencement date.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Invitation To Bid, Instructions to
Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Supplements To Bid Forms and Appendices
identified.
B. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
C. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal.
D. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form.
3.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 071-EE232/IL06-S071-001, as
prepared by Architect, and with contents as identified in the Project Manual.
3.03 AVAILABILITY
A. Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Architect.
B. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their
use does not grant a license for other purposes.
3.04 EXAMINATION
A. Bid Documents may be viewed at the office of Architect.
B. Bid Documents may be viewed online at the Architect's Website (www.tysonandbilly.com) under
the bidder list section.
08-7910
Section 00200
00200 - 1
01/09/2009
C. Bid Documents are on display at the offices of the following construction plan rooms:
1. McGraw-Hill Dodge Construction/1333 Burr Ridge Parkway, Suite 100/Burr Ridge, IL
60527/(800) 393-6343.
2. Reed Construction Data/ Cahners Building/ 2000 Clearwater Dr./ Oak Brook, IL 60523/(630)
288-7997.
3. Bid Tool/ One Oakbrook Terrace, Suite 510/ Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181/(888) 506-7613.
D. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the
documents be incomplete.
E. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
3.05 INQUIRIES/ ADDENDA
A. Direct questions to Thaddeus Mack, telephone 815-229-8222 or email at
thaddeus@tysonandbilly.com.
B. Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract
Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount.
C. Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
D. Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 7 days before date set for
receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded
to known recipients.
3.06 PRODUCT/ ASSEMBLY/ SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10
days before receipt of bids.
B. When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will
issue an Addendum to known bidders.
C. The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products.
D. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each
proposed substitution.
E. Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted.
F. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements for additional requirements.
SITE ASSESSMENT
4.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A. Examine the project site before submitting a bid.
BID SUBMISSION
5.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE
A. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time
prescribed.
B. Submit two copies of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the
required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project
number and Owner's name on the outside.
5.02 BID INELIGIBILITY
A. Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain
arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of
Section 00200
08-7910
01/09/2009 00200 - 2
the Owner, be declared unacceptable.
B. Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures that are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of
Owner, be declared unacceptable.
C. Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of
Owner, invalidate the bid.
D. Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders will be returned.
BID ENCLOSURES/ REQUIREMENTS
6.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT
A. Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit as follows:
1. Bid Bond of a sum no less than 5 percent of the Bid Amount on AIA A310 Bid Bond Form.
B. Endorse the Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the principal
(Contractor) and surety.
C. The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance
and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder.
D. Include the cost of bid security in the Bid Amount.
E. After a bid has been accepted, all securities will be returned to the respective bidders.
F. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned.
6.02 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A. All bidders seeking to do business with the owner are required to submit with any bid the
following documents:
1. Bid form with addendum acknowledged - (1) original and (1) copy.
2. Bid security deposit.
3. Completed HUD 2328 Contractor's Cost Breakdown
B. Taxes: Refer to Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions for tax exempt status.
6.03 BID FORM SIGNATURE
A. The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows:
1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also
sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal.
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign.
Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature.
3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures.
Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the
corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the
company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law
resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with
the Bid Form in the bid envelope.
4. J oint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their
respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the
requirements of a Partnership.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/ REJ ECTION
7.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of 300 (Three
hundred) days after the bid closing date.
08-7910
Section 00200
00200 - 3
01/09/2009
7.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER
A. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
B. After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a
written Bid Acceptance.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Section 00200
08-7910
01/09/2009 00200 - 4
Page 1
BID FORM

BID FOR: Enola A. Dew Apartments
4603 West Gladys Ave
Chicago, IL
Architect Project #08-7910

The undersigned, having familiarized themselves with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work,
and with the Specifications (including Instruction to Bidders, this bid, the Non-Conclusive Affidavit, the
Form of Labor and Material Payment Bond, the General Conditions, the Special Conditions, the General
Scope of Work, the Technical Specification and the Drawings) and acknowledge receipt of Addenda No.
______ through ________, (if any thereto), as prepared by Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. and on file in
the office of Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C., 4000 Morsay Dr., Rockford, Illinois 61107 hereby proposes
to:

1. Furnish all bonds and insurance required by the Bidding Documents.

2. Accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract.

3. Complete all work, as shown and specified herein, within three hundred sixty (360) consecutive
calendar days from the date of the HUD Closing.

Base Bid:

The bidder agrees to perform all work called for, and/or specified, and described within Contract
Documents, exclusive of Alternate bids, for the sum of:

$___________________________________________Dollars ($____________)

In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the owner. If written notice of the
acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the understood within 300 calendar days after
the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to
execute and deliver a contract in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond within ten (10) days
after the contract is presented to him for signature.

Bid Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ),
in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the Specifications.

Attached hereto is an affidavit in proof that the undersigned has not entered into any collusion with any
person in respect to this proposal or any other proposal or submitting of proposals for the contract for
which this proposal is submitted.

The bidder represents that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, participated in a previous contract or sub-contract
subject to the Equal Opportunity clause prescribed by Executive Orders 10925, 11114, or 11246, or the
Secretary of Labor; that he ( ) has, ( ) has not, filed all required compliance reports; and that
representations indicating submission or required compliance reports, signed by proposed sub-
contractors, will be obtained prior to sub-contract awards. (The above representation need not be
submitted in connection with the contracts or sub-contracts which are exempt from the clause).

Certification of Non-segregated Facilities. By signing this bid, the bidder certifies that he does not
maintain or provide for his employees, any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he
does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where

Page 2
segregated facilities are maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his
employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees
to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained.
The bidder agrees that breach of this certification is in violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this
contract. As used in this certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work
areas, rest rooms, and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms, and
other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas,
transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or
are, in fact, segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, or national origin, because of habit, local
custom or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from
proposed sub-contractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certifications from proposed
sub-contractors prior to the award of sub-contractors, exceeding $10,000.00, which are not exempt from
the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he
will forward a notice to his proposed sub-contractors as provided in the instructions to bidders.

NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.

DATE:
(Name of Bidding Entity)

Official Address: BY:

_______________________________ TITLE:

_______________________________ (SIGN ORIGINAL ONLY)

_______________________________

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we the undersigned,

as PRINCIPAL, and
(Name of Principal)

as SURETY are held
(Name of Surety)

and firmly bound unto the Owner the penal sum of:

Dollars ($ ),

lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted the
accompanying bid, dated , 20 ,
for

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified therein after
the opening of the same, or, if no period be specified, within sixty (60) days after the said opening, and
shall within the period specified therefore, or, if no period be specified within the (10) days after the
prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with the Owner in
accordance with the bid as accepted, and give bond with good and sufficient surety or sureties, as may
be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such contract; or in the event of the
withdrawal of said bid within the period specified, or the failure to enter into such contract and give such
bond within the time specified, if the Principal shall pay the Owner the difference between the
amount specified and said bid and the amount for which the Owner may procure the required work or
supplies or both, if the latter amount be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void
and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above-bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several
seals this day of , 20 , the name and corporate seal of each
corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative,
pursuant to authority of its governing body.

In presence of:

(SEAL)
(Individual Principal)

(Business Address)

(SEAL)
(Individual Principal)

(Business Address)
Attest:

(Corporate Principal)

(Business Address)

By (SEAL)

Attest:

(Corporate Surety)

(Address)

By (SEAL)

(Power-of-attorney for person signing for surety company must be attached to bond)

Previous edition is obsolete
form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Page 1 of 3
Contractor's and/or Mortgagor's
Cost Breakdown
Schedules of Values
Line Div. Trade Item Cost Trade Description
1 3 Concrete
2 4 Masonry
3 5 Metals
4 6 Rough Carpentry
5 6 Finish Carpentry
6 7 Waterproofing
7 7 Insulation
8 7 Roofing
9 7 Sheet Metal
10 8 Doors
11 8 Windows
12 8 Glass
13 9 Lath and Plaster
14 9 Drywall
15 9 Tile Work
16 9 Acoustical
17 9 Wood Flooring
18 9 Resilient Flooring
19 9 Painting and Decorating
20 10 Specialties
21 11 Special Equipment
22 11 Cabinets
23 11 Appliances
24 12 Blinds and Shades, Artwork
25 12 Carpets
26 13 Special Construction
27 14 Elevators
28 15 Plumbing and Hot Water
29 15 Heat and Ventilation
30 15 Air Conditioning
31 16 Electrical
32 Subtotal (Structures)
33 Accessory Structures
34 Total (Lines 32 and 33)
U.S. Department of Housing and
Urban Development
Office of Housing
Federal Housing Commissioner
OMB No. 2502-0044 (exp. 12/31/2009)
This form represents the Contractors and/or Mortgagors firm costs and services as a basis for disbursing dollar amounts when insured
advances are requested. Detailed instructions for completing this form are included on the reverse side.
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 4 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching existing
data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This information is required to obtain benefits.
HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays a currently valid OMB Control Number.
Section 227 of the National Housing Act (Section 126 of the Housing Act of 1954, Public Law 560, 12 U.S.C., 1715r), authorizes the collection of this information. The
information is required for a general contractor when an identity of interest exists between the general contractor and the mortgagor or when the mortgagor is a non-
profit entity and a cost plus contract has been used. The information is used by HUD to facilitate the advances of mortgage proceeds and their monitoring.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information
requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal Regulations.
While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information request.
Date Sponsor
Project No. Building Identification
Name of Project Location
200
200
200

form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Page 2 of 3
Nonresidential and Special
Exterior Land Improvement
(costs included in trade item breakdown)
Description Description Est. Cost Est. Cost
Line Div. Trade Item Cost Trade Description
35 2 Earth Work
36 2 Site Utilities
37 2 Roads and Walks
38 2 Site Improvements
39 2 Lawns and Planting
40 2 Unusual Site Condition
41 Total Land Improvements
42 Total Struct. & Land Imprvts.
43 1 General Requirements
44 Subtotal (Lines 42 and 43)
45 Builder's Overhead
46 Builder's Profit
47 Subtotal (Lines 44 thru 46)
48
49 Other Fees
50 Bond Premium
51 Total for All Improvements
52 Builder's Profit Paid by Means
Other Than Cash
53 Total for All Improvements
Less Line 52
Other Fees
Offsite Costs
(costs not included in trade item breakdown)
Demolition
(costs not included in trade item breakdown)
Description Est. Cost
Instructions for Completing Form HUD-2328
This form is prepared by the contractor and/or mortgagor as a requirement for the issuance of a firm commitment. The firm replacement
cost of the project also serves as a basis for the disbursement of dollar amounts when insured advances are requested. A detailed
breakdown of trade items is provided along with spaces to enter dollar amounts and trade descriptions.
A separate form is prepared through line 32 for each structure type. A summation of these structure costs are entered on line 32 of a master
form. Land improvements, General Requirements and Fees are completed through line 53 on the master 2328 only.
I hereby certify that all the information stated herein, as well as any information provided in the accompaniment herewith, is true and accurate.
Warning: HUD will prosecute false claims and statements. Conviction may result in criminal and/or civil penalties. (18 U.S.C. 1001, 1010, 1012; 31 U.S.C. 3729, 3802)
Mortgagor By Date
Contractor By Date
FHA (Processing Analyst) Date FHA (Chief, Cost Branch or Cost Analyst) Date
FHA (Chief Underwriter) Date
Total $
Total $
Total $ Total $
DateDate form was prepared.
SponsorName of sponsor or sponsoring organization.
Project No.Eight-digit assigned project number.
Building IdentificationNumber(s) or Letter(s) of each building as
designated on plans.
Name of ProjectSponsors designated name of project.
LocationStreet address, city and state.
DivisionDivision numbers and trade items have been developed
from the cost accounting section of the uniform system.
Accessory StructuresThis item reflects structures, such as: com-
munity, storage, maintenance, mechanical, laundry and project office
buildings. Also included are garages and carports or other buildings.
When the amount shown on line 33 is $20,000.00 or 2% of line 32
whichever is the lesser, a separate form HUD-2328 will be prepared
through line 32 for Accessory Structures.
Unusual Site ConditionsThis trade item reflects rock excavation,
high water table, excessive cut and fill, retaining walls, erosion, poor
drainage and other on-site conditions considered unusual.
CostEnter the cost being submitted by the Contractor or bids
submitted by a qualified subcontractor for each trade item. These
costs will include, as a minimum, prevailing wage rates as determined
by the Secretary of Labor.
Trade DescriptionEnter a brief description of the work included in
each trade item.
Other FeesIncludable are fees to be paid by the Contractor, such as
sewer tap fees not included in the plumbing contract. Fees paid or to
be paid by the Mortgagor are not to be included on this form.
Total For All ImprovementsThis is the sum of lines 1 through 50
and is to include the total builder's profit (line 46).
3333
dfsfsfs

form HUD-2328 (5/95)
ref. Handbook 4450.1 & 4460.1
Page 3 of 3
Line 52When applicable, enter that portion of the builder's profit
(line 46) to be paid by means other than cash and/or any part of the
builder's profit to be waived during construction.
Non-Residential and Special Exterior Land Improvement Costs
Describe and enter the cost of each improvement, i.e. on-site parking
facilities including individual garages and carports, commercial facili-
ties, swimming pools with related facilities and on-site features pro-
vided to enhance the environment and livability of the project and the
neighborhood. The Design Representative and Cost Analyst shall
collaborate with the mortgagor or his representative in designating the
items to be included.
Off-Site CostsEnter description and dollar amount including fees
and bond premium for off-site improvements.
DemolitionEnter description and dollar amount of demolition work
necessary to condition site for building improvements including the
removal of existing structures, foundations, utilities, etc.
Other FeesEnter a brief description of item involved and cost
estimate for each item.
SignaturesEnter the firm name, signature of authorized officer of
the contractor and/or mortgagor and date the form was completed.

SECTION 00300
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS
1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT
A. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is included with this document:
1. Title: Report of Subsurface Exploration and Engineering Services; Enola Dew Senior
Housing; 4603 West Gladys Avenue; Chicago, Illinois
2. Date: J uly 28th, 2008
3. Prepared by: ECS Illinois, LLC
4. Project No.: 16:7263
B. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the
design of foundations.
C. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface
conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction
of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing
to Owner.
END OF INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
08-7910
Section 00300
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
00300 - 1
01/09/2009

SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
FORM OF AGREEMENT
2.01 The Agreement to be executed is attached following this page.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF AGREEMENT
08-7910
Section 00500
AGREEMENT
00500 - 1
01/09/2009

form HUD-92442-CA (11/00)
ref. Handbooks 4571.4 & 4571.5
Previous editions are obsolete
Page 1 of 3
Capital Advance Program
Construction Contract
Lump Sum
For use under Section 202 of the Housing Act of 1959
or Section 811 of the National Affordable Housing Act)
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
OMB Approval No. 2502-0011
(exp. 7/31/2010)
Article 1 Scope of Contract
A. The Contract between the parties is set forth in the Contract
Documents which consists of this Agreement, the Drawings and
Specifications, together with any addenda thereto, the current
edition of AIA Document A201, General Conditions of the Contract
for Construction, except all paragraphs concerning arbitration, and
Form HUD 2554, Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for
Construction. The provisions of this instrument and the said HUD
Supplementary Conditions take precedience over all inconsistent
provisions in the said AIA General Conditions. This Contract
constitutes the entire agreement between the parties, and any
previously existing contract concerning the work contemplated by
the Contract Documents is hereby revoked.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all of the materials and perform all
of the work (within the property lines) shown on, and in accordance
wi t h, t he Drawi ngs and Speci f i cat i ons ent i t l ed
_____________________
_________________________________________________ ,
HUD Proj ect No. ___________________, dat ed
_______________.
C. The Drawings, which are numbered _____________________,
and the Speci fi cati ons, the pages of whi ch are
numbered__________,
and addenda numbered _________________________________ ,
have been prepared by ___________________, (Design
Architect).
The Architect administering the Construction Contract (hereinafter,
and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, referred to as the
Architect) is _______________________________________
_________________________________________________ .
D. A master set of said Drawings and Specifications, identified by
the parties hereto and by the Design Architect, the Architect, and the
Contractor's Surety or Guarantor have been placed on file with the
Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), and shall
govern in all matters which arise with respect to such Drawings and
Specifications.
E. Changes in the Drawings and Specifications or any terms of the
Contract Documents, or orders for extra work, or changes by altering
or adding to the work, or which will change the design concept, may
be affected only with the prior written approval of HUD under such
conditions as HUD may establish.
Article 2 Time
A. The work to be performed under this Contract shall be
commenced within ______ days of this Agreement, and shall be
completed by __________________, 20___. The time by which the
work shall be completed may be extended in accordance with the
terms of the said AIA General Conditions only with the prior written
approval of HUD.
B. The Contractor shall correct any defects due to faulty materials
or workmanship which appear within one year from the date of final
completion.
C. If the work is not brought to final completion in accordance with
the Drawings and Specifications, including any authorized changes,
by the date specified above, or by such date to which the contract
time may be extended, the sum stated in Article 3A below shall be
reduced by the actual cost of taxes and insurance, as approved by
HUD, for the period from the scheduled date of completion through
the date construction was actually completed, shall be determined.
This cost shall be reduced by an amount equal to the projects net
operating income (as determined by HUD) for the period upon which
the aforementioned actual costs are based.
D. The Owner and Contractor may amend this contract prior to
initial endorsement, in a form prescribed by the Commissioner, to
provide for an incentive payment to the Contractor, which will result
in an increase in the contract sum stated in Article 3A below, if the
work is completed before the date specified in this contract. The
Contractor will not be entitled to any incentive payment resulting
This Agreement, made the ____________ day of __________________ 20____, between __________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the Contractor) and
____________________________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called the Owner).
Witnesseth, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the consideration hereinafter set out, agree as follows:
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 16 hours per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching
existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. Send comments regarding this burden
estimate or any other aspect of this collection of information, including This information collection suggestions for reducing this burden, to the Reports Management
Officer, Paperwork Reduction Project (2502-0011), U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development, 451 7
th
Street, SW, Washington, DC 20410-3600.
The Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) is authorized to collect this information by provisions set forth in Article 1.E of the National Housing Act
(Public Law 479, 48 Stat. 1246, 12 U.S.C., 1701 et. seq.). It is provided by contractors and mortgagors to obtain approval from the FHA Commissioners approval for
any changes in the terms of the Contract Document, or order for extra work, or changes by altering or adding to the work, or which will change the design concept of the
Construction Contract. This information is used by HUD to ensure that viable projects are being developed. Furnishing this information is mandatory, and failure to
provide it may result in your not receiving your benefits. The information is considered non-sensitive, and no assurance of confidentiality is
provided.
Privacy Act Notice. The United States Department of Housing and Urban Development, Federal Housing Administration, is authorized to solicit the information
requested in this form by virtue of Title 12, United States Code, Section 1701 et seq., and regulations promulgated thereunder at Title 12, Code of Federal Regulations.
While no assurances of confidentiality is pledged to respondents, HUD generally discloses this data only in response to a Freedom of Information project. This agency
may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless that collection displays a valid OMB control number.

form HUD-92442-CA (11/00)
Page 2 of 3
from early completion if HUD determines that the Contractors cost
certification, if required by Article 7, is fraudulent or materially
misrepresents the Contractors actual cost of construction.
E. The date of final completion shall be the date the HUD
representative signs the final HUD Representatives Trip Report
provided that the trip report is subsequently endorsed by the Chief
Architect.
Article 3 Contract Sum and Payments
A. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for the performance of the
Contract, as hereinafter provided, the sum of $ ________________
.
B. Each month after the commencement of work hereunder, the
Contractor shall make a monthly request on Form HUD 92448 for
payment by the Owner for work done during the preceding month.
Each request for payment shall be filed at least __________ days
before the date payment is desired. Subject to the approval of HUD,
the Contractor shall be entitled to payment thereon in an amount
equal to (1) the total value of classes of the work acceptably
complete; plus (2) the value of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the work, but delivered to and suitably stored at the
site; plus (3) the value of components stored off-site in compliance
with applicable HUD requirements less (4) 10 percent holdback and
less prior payments. The values of (1), (2) and (3) shall be
computed in accordance with the amounts assigned to classes of the
work in the Contractor's and/or Mortgager's Cost Breakdown,
attached hereto as Exhibit A. The Contractor agrees that no
materials or equipment required by the Specifications will be
purchased under a conditional sale contract or with the use of any
security agreement or the vendor's title or lien retention instrument.
C. The balance due the Contractor hereunder shall be payable
upon the expiration of 30 days after the work hereunder is fully
complete, provided the following have occurred:
(1) All work hereunder requiring inspection by municipal or
other governmental authorities having jurisdiction has been
inspected and approved by such authorities and by the rating or
inspection organization, bureau, association or office having
jurisdiction;
(2) All certificates of occupancy, or other approvals, with
respect to all units of the project have been issued by State or local
governmental authorities having jurisdiction; and
(3) Permission(s) To Occupy (Form HUD-92485) for all units of
the project have been issued by HUD.
D. With its final application for payment by the Owner, the
Contractor shall disclose, on a form prescribed by HUD, all unpaid
obligations contracted in connection with the work performed under
this Contract. The Contractor agrees that, within 15 days following
receipt of final payment, it will pay such obligations in cash and
furnish satisfactory evidence of such payment to the Owner.
Article 4 Receipts and Releases of Liens
The Owner may require the Contractor to attach to each request for
payment its acknowledgement of payment and all subcontractors'
and material supplier's acknowledgements of payment for work done
and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished through the date
covered by the previous payment. Concurrently with the final
payment, the Owner may require the Contractor to obtain similar
waivers or releases from all subcontractors and material suppliers.
Article 5 Requirements of Contractor
A. The Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all building and
other permits, licenses, tools, equipment and temporary structures
necessary for the construction of the project. The Contractor shall
give all required notices and shall comply with all applicable codes,
laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and protective covenants,
and with the current regulations of the National Board of Fire
Underwriters, wherever applicable. The Contractor further shall
comply with the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act
of 1970. The Contractor shall immediately notify HUD of the delivery
of all permits, licenses, certificates of inspection, certificates of
occupancy, and any other such certificates and instruments required
by law, regardless of to whom issued, and shall cause them to be
displayed to HUD upon request.
B. If the Contractor observes that the Drawings and Specifications
are at variance with any applicable codes, laws, ordinances, rules or
regulations, or protective covenants, it shall promptly notify the
Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as
provided in this Contract for changes in the Drawings and
Specifications. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be
contrary to such codes, laws, ordinances, rules or regulations, or
protective covenants, without giving such notice to the Architect, it
shall bear all cost arising therefrom.
C. Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Owner a survey showing the location on the site of all
improvements constructed thereon, and showing the location of all
water, sewer, gas and electric lines and mains, and of all existing
utility easements. Such survey shall be prepared by a licensed
surveyor who shall certify that the work is installed and erected
entirely upon the land covered by the mortgage and within any
building restriction lines on said land, and does not overhang or
otherwise encroach upon any easement or right-of-way of others. In
addition, the Contractor shall furnish additional surveys when
required by the Owner for any improvements, including structures
and utilities, not theretofore located on a survey. The Contractor shall
furnish copies of such survey required hereunder for HUD.
D. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the
maintenance of all landscaping which may be required by the
Drawings and Specifications until such time as both parties to this
Contract shall receive written notice from HUD that such landscaping
has been finally completed. The Owner hereby agrees to make
available to the Contractor, for such purpose, without cost to the
latter, such facilities as water, hose and sprinkler.
Article 6 Assurance of Completion
The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner assurance of completion
of the work in the form of (specify) ________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
_________________________________________________ .
Such assurance of completion shall run to the Owner and HUD as
obligees.

form HUD-92442-CA (11/00)
Page 3 of 3
Article 7 Cost Certification
An identity of interest between the Owner and the Contractor is
prohibited. In the event HUD determines that there is an identity of
interest between the Owner and the Contractor, the Contractor shall
certify on a form prescribed by HUD, its cost incurred in the
performance of work under this Contract.
Article 8 Right of Entry and Interpretation
A. HUD, its agents or assigns, at all times during construction, has
the right of entry and free access to the project and the right to inspect
all work done and materials, equipment and fixtures furnished,
installed or stored in and about the project. For such purpose, the
Contractor shall furnish such enclosed working space as HUD may
require and find acceptable as to location, size, accommodations
and furnishings.
B. HUD shall also have the right to interpret the Contract
Documents and to determine compliance therewith.
Article 9 Assignments, Subcontracts and Termination
A. This Contract shall not be assignable by either party without
prior written consent of the other party and HUD, except that the
Owner may assign the Contract, or any rights hereunder, to HUD.
B. The Contractor shall not subcontract all of the work to be
performed hereunder without the prior written consent of the Owner
and HUD.
C. Upon request by the Owner, or HUD, the Contractor shall
disclose the names of all persons with whom it has contracted or will
contract with respect to work to be done and materials and
equipment to be furnished hereunder.
D. The Contractor understands that the work under this contract is
to be financed by a capital advance to be secured by a mortgage and
subject to the terms of a Capital Advance Agreement between the
Owner and HUD.
The Contractor further understands that said Capital Advance
Agreement provides that in the event of the failure of the Owner to
perform its obligations to HUD thereunder, HUD may, as attorney-in-
fact for the Owner, undertake the completion of the project in
accordance with this Contract. In the event HUD elects not to
undertake such completion, the Contractor's obligations under this
Contract shall terminate.
(Seal) Attest: Owner
Witness By
Witness Title
Note: If Contractor or Owner is a corporation, Secretary should attest.
(Seal) Contractor
Witness By
Witness Title
In Witness Whereof, the parties to these presents have executed this contract in six (6) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original,
in the year and day first above mentioned.

SECTION 00590
CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
A. See Section 00800 for the Supplementary Conditions.
B. The Agreement form is HUD 92442-CA Construction Contract Lump Sum.
C. The General Conditions are AIA A201 and HUD 2554 Supplementary Conditions of the Contract
for Construction.
1.02 FORMS
A. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
B. Bond Forms:
1. Performance and Payment Bond Form: AIA A312.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AIA A201 - General Conditions of the Contract for Construction; 2007.
B. AIA A312 - Performance Bond and Payment Bond.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 00590
CONTRACTING FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS
00590 - 1
01/09/2009

SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
1.02 These Supplementary Conditions amend and supplement the General Conditions and
other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are
not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.
1.03 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions that are defined in the General
Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions.
1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 00590 - Contracting Forms and Supplements.
1.05 MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
MODIFICATIONS TO AIA A201
4.01 ARTICLE 3.6 - TAXES
A. Add the following subparagraph:
1. 3.6.2: This project is of tax exempt status, proof of same shall be furnished to the
contractor upon request.
4.02 ARTICLE 8 - TIME
1. 8.1.5: Contract Time commences at the time of Notice To Proceed and continues for Three
hundred and Sixty (360) consecutive calendar days.
4.03 ARTICLE 11.5 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
1. 11.5.3: The bond value requirements are as follows:
a. Provide bonds on.
b. Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond.
c. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond.
d. Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract.
ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
5.01 Insurance Coverage
A. The Contractor shall carry the necessary insurance coverage as specified:
1. Workers Compensation
a. Statutory Limits
b. $1,000,000 Each Accident
2. Employer's Liability
a. $100,000 (Coverage B)
3. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance Bodily Injury
a. $1,000,000 Each Person
b. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
c. $1,000,000 Aggregate
08-7910
Section 00800
00800 - 1
01/09/2009
4. Property Damage
a. $1,000,000 Each Occurrence
b. $1,000,000 Aggregate, or
5. Excess (Umbrella)
a. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit
6. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance Bodily Injury
a. $300,000 Each Person
b. $500,000 Each Accident
c. $500,000 Aggregate
7. Property Damage
a. $100,000 Each Accident, or,
b. $500,000 Combined Single Limit
B. This insurance must include non-owned, hired and rented vehicles, as well as owned vehicles.
C. The Contractor must submit Certificates of Insurance for himself and any subcontractor before
work begins.
D. Manufacturer's and contractor's public liability with bodily injury and property damage limits of
not less than $1,000,000.00 for each event to protect the contractor and each subcontractor
against claims of personal injury or death and damage to the property of others. The Owner,
HUD, and the Architect shall also be named as additionally insured on this liability coverage. This
shall cover the use of all equipment, hoists, and vehicles on the site or sites.
5.02 List of Subcontractors
A. Prime Contractors shall list subcontractors who will perform any portion of the work as
requested. Contractor shall furnish partial waiver of liens starting with first payout request from
subcontractors and suppliers with full waiver of liens being submitted prior to final payment.
5.03 Guarantees
A. Contractors shall guarantee all materials and workmanship to be free of defects for a period of
one year from date of acceptance of said work by the owner and shall replace at his own
expense, any work that may be found defective within said one year period. Also deliver all
Manufacturers Warranties for installed items with warranties in excess of the above as offered by
Manufacturer or specified in other sections.
5.04 Responsibility of Contractor
A. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents and Technical Specifications,
the Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, tools, equipment, levies, fees or other
expenses and all other services and facilities of every nature what whatsoever necessary for the
performance of the contract and to deliver all improvements embraced in this Contract for
Construction complete in every respect within the specified time.
5.05 Contract Documents and Drawings
A. Contractor shall be furnished without charge Contact Documents, including Technical
Specifications and Drawings, as follows: General Contractor - fifteen (15) sets. Architect shall
also provide one CD with a PDF copy of the contract documets to the Awarded General
Contractor.
5.06 Record Retention
A. Federal Regulation CFR 24, Section 85.36 that requires all Contractors and Subcontractors who
work on any project to maintain all accounting records related to a project for a minimum of
three (3) years after final payout for the contract apply to this contract.
5.07 Conflict of Directions
Section 00800
08-7910
01/09/2009 00800 - 2
A. Where specifications appear to be at variance with the laws, ordinances or regulations, the
Contractor shall secure an interpretation from the owner or its representative prior to submitting
bids. Failure to comply with the above request will result in the Contractor bearing expense of
correction of work to conform with all legal requirements.
5.08 Clean-up
A. Contractor will clean-up at the end of each working day. This clean-up will include the removal
of all materials that are scheduled for disposal, restoration of walls and floors to original
condition. Dust collecting devices shall be used on all boring, shaping and sanding equipment.
5.09 Hazardous Materials
A. Building materials known to be environmentally hazardous, or containing environmentally
hazardous ingredients such as, but not limited to, Lead Mercury, Arsenic, Silver and Asbestos,
will not be purchased or used by contractors doing maintenance, construction, or rehabilitation
of this project.
5.10 Permit
A. Contractor to pull permit through the City of Chicago, Illinois with the assistance of the Architects.
DEFINITIONS
6.01 Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and
systems forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for
preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include
existing materials or components required for reuse.
6.02 Furnish or Supply: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage.
6.03 Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and ready
for use.
6.04 Provide: To furnish or supply, plus install.
6.05 Project Manual: The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which
includes the Bid Documents, Contract Documents, and Specifications.
END OF DOCUMENT
08-7910
Section 00800
00800 - 3
01/09/2009

form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
ref. Handbook 4571.1
Replaces FHA-2554 which is obsolete.
Page 1 of 4
Supplementary Conditions of
the Contract for Construction
Article 1 Labor Standards
Instructions
Whenever only FHA mortgage insurance is involved, use paragraph
(A) and (C) of Article 1 Labor Standards. Whenever any direct form
of assistance (Section 8, Section 202/811 Capital Advance, grants
etc.) is involved, use paragraphs (A) and (B) and (C) of Article 1
Labor Standards.
Applicability
The Project or Program to which the construction work covered by
this contract pertains is being assisted or insured by the United
States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provi-
sions are included in this Contract or related instrument pursuant to the
provisions applicable to such Federal assistance or insurance.
A. 1. (i) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed
or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States
Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the
construction or development of the project), will be paid uncondition-
ally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent
deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions
as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor
under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages
and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at
time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in
the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached
hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual
relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor
and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs
reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section
1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics
are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject
to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions
made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less
often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover
the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made
or incurred during such weekly period.
Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage
rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classifica-
tion of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as
provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics perform-
ing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the
rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked
therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set
forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed.
The wage determination (including any additional classification and
wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-
Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor
and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and
accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.
(ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not
listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under
the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage
determination. HUD shall approve an additional classification and
wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following
criteria have been met:
(1) The work to be performed by the classification
requested is not performed by a classification in the
wage determination; and
(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the
construction industry; and
(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide
fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the
wage rates contained in the wage determination.
(b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to
be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives,
and HUD or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate
(including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropri-
ate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by HUD or its designee
to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment
Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington,
D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will
approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action
within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee or will
notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that additional
time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and
Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.)
(c) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechan-
ics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and
HUD or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and
wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits,
where appropriate), HUD or its designee shall refer the questions,
including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation
of HUD or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. The
Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determi-
nation within 30 days of receipt and so advise HUD or its designee
or will notify HUD or its designee within the 30-day period that
additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Manage-
ment and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
(d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where
appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs A.1.(ii)(b) or (c)
of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the
classification under this contract from the first day on which work is
performed in the classification.
(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the
contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit
which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either
pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay
another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or
other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages
of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or
program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the
written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the
Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require
the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting
of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of
Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
2. Withholding. HUD or its designee shall upon its own action
or upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the
contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the
U.S. Department of Housing
and Urban Development
Office of Housing
Public reporting burden for this collection of information is estimated to average 30 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions,
searching existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information. This informa-
tion is required to obtain benefits and voluntary. HUD may not collect this information, and you are not required to complete this form, unless it displays
a currently valid OMB control number.
This information collection is necessary to ensure that viable projects are developed. It is important to obtain information from applicants to assist
HUD in determining if nonprofit organizations initially funded continue to have the financial and administrative capacity needed to develop a project and
that the project design meets the needs of the residents. The Department will use this information to sets forth the obligations of the contractor or
subcontractor performing under the covered contract. This information is required in order to obtain benefits. This information is considered non-
sensitive and no assurance of confidentiality is provided.
OMB Approval No. 2502-0470
(Expires 5/31/2010)
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
Page 2 of 4
same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract
subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held
by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or
advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and
mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed
by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages
required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or
mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper, employed or
working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing
Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or
development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the
contract, HUD or its designee may, after written notice to the
contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be
necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, ad-
vance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. HUD
or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse
such amounts withheld for and on account of the contractor or
subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The
Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of
direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts.
3. (i) Payrolls and basic records. Payrolls and basic records
relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course
of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all
laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the
United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949,
in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall
contain the name, address, and social security number of each such
worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid
(including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe
benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section
1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours
worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the
Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages
of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in
Section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain
records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is
enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that
the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers
or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or
the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employ-
ing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain
written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and
certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and
trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable
programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and budget under
OMB Control Numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017.)
(ii) (a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in
which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to HUD
or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the
agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to
the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmis-
sion to HUD or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out
accurately and completely all of the information required to be
maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be
submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for
this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of
Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Gov-
ernment Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime con-
tractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all
subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget
under OMB Control Number 1215-0149.)
(b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a
Statement of Compliance, signed by the contractor or subcontrac-
tor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the
persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:
(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the
information required to be maintained under 29 CFR
Part 5.5(a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and
complete;
(2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each
helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the con-
tract during the payroll period has been paid the full
weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or
indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either
directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other
than permissable deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part
3;
(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not
less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits
or cash equivalents for the classification of work per-
formed, as specified in the applicable wage determina-
tion incorporated into the contract.
(c) The weekly submission of a properly executed
certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347
shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the Statement of
Compliance required by paragraph A.3.(ii)(b) of this section.
(d) The falsification of any of the above certifications
may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal
prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title
31 of the United States Code.
(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records
required under paragraph A.3.(i) of this section available for inspec-
tion, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of HUD
or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such
representatives to interview employees during working hours on the
job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required
records or to make them available, HUD or its designee may, after
written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take
such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore,
failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such
records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to
29 CFR Part 5.12.
4. (i) Apprentices and Trainees. Apprentices. Apprentices
will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the
work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program regis-
tered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training
Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a
State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a
person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary
employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,
who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been
certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State
Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for proba-
tionary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of appren-
tices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not
be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire
work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a
payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise
employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable
wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work
actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on
the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered
program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the
wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a con-
tractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than
that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates
(expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) speci-
fied in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be
observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate
specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate
specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be
paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the appren-
ticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify
fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe
benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classifi-
cation. If the Administrator determines that a different practice
prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be
paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
Page 3 of 4
of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency
recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship
program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize appren-
tices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work
performed until an acceptable program is approved.
(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees
will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for
the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and
individually registered in a program which has received prior ap-
proval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of
Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of train-
ees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted
under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Adminis-
tration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified
in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, ex-
pressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in
the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe
benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If
the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall
be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determi-
nation unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division
determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with
the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination
which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any
employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered
and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and
Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable
wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work
actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the
job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program
shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage
determination for the work actually performed. In the event the
Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a
training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize
trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work
performed until an acceptable program is approved.
(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of
apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in
conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of
Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30.
5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The con-
tractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are
incorporated by reference in this contract.
6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in
any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through
(10) and such other clauses as HUD or its designee may be
appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the
subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcon-
tracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance
by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract
clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5.
7. Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract
clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract,
and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided
in 29 CFR 5.12.
8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Require-
ments. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and
Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein
incorporated by reference in this contract.
9. Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising
out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be
subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes
shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Depart-
ment of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within
the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor
(or any of its subcontractors) and HUD or its designee, the U.S.
Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
10. (i) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract
the contractor certifies neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm
who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm
ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section
3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be awarded
HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to 24 CFR
Part 24.
(ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any
person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue
of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be
awarded HUD contracts or participate in HUD programs pursuant to
24 CFR Part 24.
(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in
the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. Additionally, U.S. Criminal
Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U.S.C., Federal Housing Administra-
tion transactions, provides in part: Whoever, for the purpose of . .
. influencing in any way the action of such Administration . . . makes,
utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false . .
. shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two
years, or both.
B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used in
this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watch-
men and guards.
1. Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor
contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or
involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or
permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or
she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such
workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation
at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay
for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek.
2. Violation; liability for unpaid wages, liquidated damages. In
the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1)
of this paragraph, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible
therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such
contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in
the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or
a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated dam-
ages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to
each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards,
employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of
this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which
such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the
standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime
wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this
paragraph.
3. Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages.
HUD or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request
of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold
or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of
work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such
contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contrac-
tor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same
prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary
to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid
wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in
subparagraph (2) of this paragraph.
4. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in
any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through
(4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors
to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime
contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor
or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subpara-
graphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph.
C. The Contractor will be required to execute FHA Form No. 2403-
A, Contractor's Prevailing Wage Certificate, as a condition prece-
dent to insurance by the Federal Housing Administration of that
certain mortgage loan, or an advance thereof, made or to be made
by the mortgagee in connection with the construction of the project.
Article 2 Equal Employment Opportunity
The applicant hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be
form HUD-2554 (12/20/2005)
Page 4 of 4
incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification
thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41
CFR Chapter 60, which is paid for in whole or in part with funds
obtained from the Federal Government or borrowed on the credit of
the Federal Government pursuant to a grant, contract, loan insur-
ance, or guarantee, or undertaken pursuant to any Federal program
involving such grant, contract, loan, insurance, or guarantee, the
following equal opportunity clause:
During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as
follows:
A. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or
national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure
that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during
employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or
national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the
following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruit-
ment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or
other forms of compensation; and selection for training including
apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places
available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be
provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
B. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor state that all
qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment with-
out regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.
C. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of
workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other
contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the said
labor union or workers representatives of the Contractor's commit-
ments hereunder, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous
places available to employees and applicants for employment.
D. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order
11246 of September 24, 1965 and of the rules, regulations, and
relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.
E. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules,
regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant
thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by
the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain
compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.
F. In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondis-
crimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules,
regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or
suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared
ineligible for further government contracts or federally assisted
construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other
sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in
Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations
or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.
G. The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immedi-
ately preceding paragraph A and the provisions of paragraphs A
through G in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted
by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued
pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24,
1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontrac-
tor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any
subcontract or purchase order as the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means
of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompli-
ance. Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes
involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or
vendor as a result of such direction by the Secretary of Housing and
Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor, the Contractor may
request the United States to ener into such litigation to protect the
interests of the United States.
H. The applicant further agrees that it will be bound by the above
equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment prac-
tices when it participates in federally assisted construction work:
Provided, That if the applicant so participating is a State or local
government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to
any agency, instrumentality or subdivision of such government
which does not participate in work on or under the contract.
I. The applicant agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with
the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the
compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal oppor-
tunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the
Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish the administering agency and
the Secretary of Labor such information as they may require for the
supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise assist the
administering agency in the discharge of the agency's primary
responsibility for securing compliance.
J. The applicant further agrees that it will refrain from entering into
any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order
11246 of September 24, 1965, with a contractor debarred from, or
who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and
federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive
order and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of
the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors
and subcontractors by the administering agency or the Secretary of
Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of the Executive order. In
addition, the applicant agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with
these undertakings, the administering agency may take any or all of
the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in
part this grant (contract, loan, insurance, guarantee); refrain from
extending any further assistance to the applicant under the program
with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory
assurance of future compliance has been received from such appli-
cant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate
legal proceedings.
Article 3 Equal Opportunity for Businesses and Lower
Income Persons Located Within the Project Area
(Applicable to Section 236 projects, where the estimated replace-
ment cost of the project as determined by the Secretary of Housing
and Urban Development exceeds $500,000, and to all projects,
including Section 236 regardless of estimated replacement cost,
receiving rent supplement assistance under Title I, Section 101 of the
Housing and Urban Development Act of 1965.)
A. The work to be performed under this contract is on a project
assisted under a program providing direct Federal financial assis-
tance from the Department of Housing and Urban Development and
is subject to the requirements of Section 3 of the Housing and Urban
Development Act of 1968, as amended, 12 U.S.C. 1701u. Section 3
requires that to the greatest extent feasible opportunities for training
and employment be given lower income residents of the unit of local
government or the metropolitan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as
determined by the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development in
which the projects located and contracts for work in connection with
the project be awarded to business concerns which are located in, or
owned in substantial part by persons residing in the same metropoli-
tan area (or nonmetropolitan county) as the project.
Article 4 Health and Safety
A. No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundingss
or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or
dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction
safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor
by regulation.
B. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the
Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 (formerly part 1518)
and failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant
to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91-
54, 83 Stat. 96).
C. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in every
subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcon-
tractor. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any
subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development of
the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such
provisions.
Enola A Dew Apartments WAGE DETERMINATION
08-7910

General Decision Number: IL080009 01/02/2009 IL9

Super seded Gener al Deci si on Number : I L20070009

St at e: I l l i noi s

Const r uct i on Types: Bui l di ng, Heavy, Hi ghway and Resi dent i al

Count y: Cook Count y i n I l l i noi s.

BUI LDI NG, RESI DENTI AL, HEAVY, AND HI GHWAY PROJ ECTS ( does not
i ncl ude l andscape pr oj ect s) .

Modi f i cat i on Number Publ i cat i on Dat e
0 02/ 08/ 2008
1 02/ 22/ 2008
2 03/ 21/ 2008
3 04/ 25/ 2008
4 06/ 06/ 2008
5 07/ 04/ 2008
6 07/ 25/ 2008
7 08/ 22/ 2008
8 11/ 14/ 2008
9 11/ 21/ 2008
10 11/ 28/ 2008
11 01/ 02/ 2009

* ASBE0017- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

HAZARDOUS MATERI AL HANDLER
i ncl udes pr epar at i on,
wet t i ng, st r i ppi ng r emoval
scr appi ng, vacuumi ng,
baggi ng and di sposal of
al l i nsul at i on mat er i al s,
whet her t hey cont ai n
asbest os or not , f r om
mechani cal syst ems. . . . . . . . . . $ 29. 93 18. 75
I nsul at or / asbest os wor ker
I ncl udes t he appl i cat i on
of al l i nsul at i ng
mat er i al s, pr ot ect i ve
cover i ngs, coat i ngs, and
f i ni shes t o al l t ypes of
mechani cal syst ems. . . . . . . . . . $ 39. 90 19. 95
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* BOI L0001- 001 07/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

BOI LERMAKER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 39. 27 18. 45
WAGE DETERMINATION - 1

WAGE DETERMINATION Enola A Dew Apartments
08-7910
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
BRI L0021- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

BRI CKLAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 03 18. 25
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
BRI L0021- 004 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

Mar bl e Mason. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 03 18. 25
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
BRI L0052- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

Poi nt er , cl eaner and caul ker . . . . . $ 38. 20 16. 41
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CARP0555- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

CARPENTER
CARPENTER, LATHER,
MLLWRI GHT, PI LEDRI VER, and
SOFT FLOOR LAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . $ 39. 77 17. 74
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CARP0555- 002 10/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

CARPENTER ( Excl udi ng
st r uct ur es wi t h el evat or s and
st r uct ur es over 3 1/ 2 st or i es) . . . $ 37. 77 16. 36
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ELEC0009- 003 05/ 26/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

Li ne Const r uct i on
Gr oundman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 11 40. 66%
Li neman and Equi pment
Oper at or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 60 40. 66%
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ELEC0134- 001 06/ 04/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

ELECTRI CI AN
Bui l di ng. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 80 18. 63
Resi dent i al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 80 18. 23
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ELEC0134- 002 04/ 01/ 1998

Rat es Fr i nges

08-7910
ELECTRI CI AN ( ( CLASS B)
( I nst al l magnet i c or
el ect r oni c r epl acement
bal l ast s ei t her si ngl y or i n
gr oups i ncl udi ng necessar y
wi r i ng wi t hi n f i xt ur e;
I nst al l r epl acement l amp
hol der s and/ or socket s
i ncl udi ng necessar y wi r i ng
wi t hi n f i xt ur e i ncl udi ng
r el ocat i ng socket s wi t hi n
f i xt ur e; I nst al l r epl acement
l i ght i ng ci r cui t br eaker s
wher e necessar y; I nst al l
r epl acement l i ght i ng swi t ches
wher e necessar y; Repai r
l i ght i ng f i xt ur es ot her t han
bal l ast or socket
r epl acement s; Rewi r e
chandel i er s or i ncandescent
f i xt ur es onl y wi t hi n f i xt ur es
t hemsel ves. ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 20. 71 2. 975+a+b

FOOTNOTES:

a- Pai d Vacat i on- Empl oyees who have been empl oyed f or one
year but l ess t han t hr ee year s r ecei ve 1 week of pai d
vacat i on; empl oyees who have been empl oyed t hr ee year s but
l ess t han t en year s r ecei ve 2 weeks of pai d vacat i on;
Empl oyees who have been empl oyed t en year s but l ess t han
t went y year s r ecei ve 3 weeks of pai d vacat i on; and
empl oyees who have wor ked t went y or mor e year s r ecei ve 4
weeks of pai d vacat i on.

b- Funer al Leave- I n t he i nst ance of t he deat h of a mot her ,
ot her - i n- l aw- ; f at her , f at her - i n- l aw, si st er , br ot her ,
husband, wi f e, or a chi l d of an empl oyee shal l r ecei ve up
t o t hr ee days of pai d f uner al l eave.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ELEC0134- 003 06/ 07/ 2004

Rat es Fr i nges

ELECTRI CI AN
ELECTRI CAL TECHNI CI AN. . . . . . . $ 30. 89 12. 59

The wor k shal l consi st of t he i nst al l at i on, oper at i on,
i nspect i on, mai nt enance, r epai r and ser vi ce of r adi o,
t el evi si on, r ecor di ng, voi ce sound vi si on pr oduct i on and
r epr oduct i on, t el ephone and t el ephone i nt er connect ,
f acsi mi l e, dat a appat at us, coaxi al , f i br e opt i c and
wi r el ess equi pment , appl i ances and syst ems used f or t he
t r ansmi ssi on and r ecept i on of si gnal s of any nat ur e,
busi ness, domest i c, commer ci al , educat i on, ent er t ai nment
and r esi dent i al pur poses, i ncl udi ng but not l i mi t ed t o
communi cat i on and t el ephone, el ect r oni c and sound
equi pment , f i br e opt i c and dat a communi cat i on syst ems, and

08-7910
t he per f or mance of any t ask di r ect l y r el at ed t o such
i nst al l at i on or ser vi ce whet her at new or exi st i ng si t es,
such t asks t o i ncl ude t he pl aci ng of wi r e and cabl e and
el ect r i cal power condui t or ot her r aceway wor k wi t hi n t he
equi pment r oomand pul l i ng wi r e and/ or cabl e t hr ough
condui t and t he i nst al l at i on of any i nci dent i al condui t .
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* ELEV0002- 003 01/ 01/ 2009

Rat es Fr i nges

ELEVATOR MECHANI C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 44. 93 18. 285+A+B

FOOTNOTES:

A. Ei ght pai d hol i days: New Year ' s Day; Memor i al Day;
I ndependence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgi vi ng Day; Day af t er
Thanksgi vi ng; Vet er ans' Day and Chr i st mas Day.

B. Empl oyer cont r i but es 8%of r egul ar basi c hour l y r at e as
vacat i on pay cr edi t f or empl oyees wi t h mor e t han 5 year s of
ser vi ce; and 6%f or 6 mont hs t o 5 year s of ser vi ce.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* ENGI 0150- 006 06/ 01/ 2006

Rat es Fr i nges

POWER EQUI PMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 41. 55 15. 05
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40. 25 15. 05
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 70 15. 05
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35. 95 15. 05

POWER EQUI PMENT OPERATORS CLASSI FI CATI ONS

GROUP 1: Mechani c; Asphal t Pl ant *; Asphal t Spr eader ;
Aut ogr ade*; Backhoes wi t h Cai sson at t achment *: Bat ch Pl ant *;
Benot o( Requi r es t wo Engi neer s) ; Boi l er and Thr ot t l e Val ve;
Cai sson Ri gs*; Cent r al Redi - Mi x Pl ant *; Combi nat i on Backhoe
Fr ont Endl oader Machi ne; Compr essor and Thr ot t l e Val ve;
Concr et e Br eaker ( Tr uck Mount ed) *; Concr et e Conveyor ;
Concr et e Conveyor , Tr uck Mount ed; Concr et e Paver over 27E
cu. f t . *; Concr et e Paver 27E cu f t and Under *; Concr et e
Pl acer *; Concr et e Pl aci ng Boom; Concr et e Pump ( Tr uck
Mount ed) ; Concr et e Tower ; Cr anes*; Cr anes, Hammer head*;
Cr anes, ( GCI and si mi l ar t ype Requi r es t wo oper at or s onl y) ;
Cr et er Cr ane; Cr usher , St one, et c; Der r i cks; Der r i cks,
Tr avel i ng*; For ml ess Cur b and Gut t er Machi ne*; Gr ader ,
El evat i ng; Gr out i ng Machi nes; Hi ghl i f t Shovel s or Fr ont
Endl oader 2 1/ 4 yd. and over ; Hoi st s, El evat or s, Out si de
Type Rack and pi ni on and si mi l ar Machi nes; Hoi st s, One,
Two, and Thr ee Dr um; Hoi st s, Two Tugger One Fl oor ;
Hydr aul i c Backhoes*; Hydr aul i c BoomTr ucks; Hydr aul i c Vac
( and si mi l ar equi pment ) ; Locomot i ves; Mot or Pat r ol *; Pi l e
Dr i ver s amd Ski d Ri g*; Post Hol e Di gger ; Pr e- St r ess
Machi ne; Pump Cr et es Dual Ram( Requi r i ng f r equent
Lubr i cat i on and Wat er ) ; Pump Cr et es; Squeeze Cr et es- Scr ew
08-7910
Type Pumps GypsumBul ker and Pump; Rai sed and Bl i nd Hol e
Dr i l l *; Rot o Mi l l Gr i nder ( 36" and Over ) *; Rot o Mi l l
Gr i nder ( Less Than 36" ) *; Scoops- Tr act or Dr awn; Sl i p- For m
Paver *; St r addl e Buggi es; Tour napul l ; Tr act or wi t h Boom,
and Si de Boom; and Tr enchi ng Machi nes*.

GROUP 2: Bobcat ( over 3/ 4 cu yd) ; Boi l er s; Br oom, Power
Pr opel l ed; Bul l dozer s; Concr et e Mi xer ( Two Bag and over ) ;
Conveyor , Por t abl e; For kl i f t Tr ucks; Gr easer Engi neer ;
Hi ghl i f t Shovel s or Fr ont End l oader s under 2 1/ 4 cu yd;
Aot omat i c Hoi st s, Hoi st s, I nsi de El evat or s; Hoi st s, Sewer
Dr aggi ng Machi ne; Hoi st s, Tugger Si ngl e Dr um; Laser Scr eed;
Rock Dr i l l ( Sel f - Pr opel l ed) ; Rock Dr i l l ( Tr uck Mount ed) *;
Rol l er s; St eamGener at or s; Tr act or s; Tr act or Dr awn
Vi br at or y Rol l er ( Recei ves an addi t i onal $. 50 per hour ) ;
Wi nch Tr ucks wi t h " A" Fr ame.

GROUP 3: Ai r Compr essor - Smal l 250 and Under ( 1 t o 5 not t o
exceed a t ot al of 300 f t ) ; Ai r Compr essor - Lar ge over 250;
Combi nat i on- Smal l Equi pment Oper at or ; Gener at or - Smal l 50
kw and under ; Gener at or - Lar ge over 50 kw; Heat er s,
Mechani cal ; Hoi st s, I nsi de El evat or s ( Remodel i ng or
Renovat i n wor k) ; Hydr ual i c Power Uni t s ( Pi l e Dr i vi ng,
Ext r act i ng, and Dr i l l i ng) ; Low Boys; Pumps Over 3" ( 1 To 3
not t o exceed a t ot al of 300 f t ) ; Pumps, Wel l Poi nt s;
Wel di ng Machi nes ( 2 t hr ough 5) ; Wi nches, 4 Smal l El ect r i c
Dr i l l Wi nches; Bobcat ( up t o and i ncl udi ng 3/ 4 cu yd)

GROUP 4 - Bobcat s and/ or ot her Ski d St eer Loader s; Br i ck
For kl i f t s; Oi l er s

*- Requi r es Oi l er
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* ENGI 0150- 025 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

POWER EQUI PMENT OPERATOR
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 42. 00 20. 30
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 41. 45 20. 30
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 39. 40 20. 30
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 00 20. 30
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 80 20. 30

POWER EQUI PMENT OPERATOR CLASSI FI CATI ONS

GROUP 1: Asphal t Pl ant *; Asphal t Heat er and Pl aner
combi nat i on; Asphal t Heat er Scar f i r e*, Asphal t Spr eader ;
Aut ogr ader / GOMACO or si mi l ar ; ABG Paver *, Backhoes wi t h
Cai sson at t achment *, Bal l ast Regul at or , Bel t Loader *;
Cai sson Ri gs*Car Dumper , Cent r al Redi - Mi x Pl ant *,
Combi nat i on Backhoe; Fr ont End Loader Machi ne ( 1 cu yd or
over Backhoe bucket or wi t h at t achment s) ; Concr et e Br eaker
( t r uck mount ed) ; Concr et e Conveyor ; Concr et e Paver over 27E
cu f t *; Concr et e Pl acer *; Concr et e Tube Fl oat ; Cr anes, al l
at t achment s*; Cr anes, Hammer head, Li nden, Peco and machi nes
of a l i ke nat ur e*; Cr et er Cr ane; Cr usher , st one; Al l

08-7910
Der r i cks; Der r i ck Boat s; Der r i cks, t r avel i ng*; Dowel l
Machi ne wi t h Ai r Compr essor ( $1. 00 above Cl ass 1) ;
Dr edges*; Fi el d Mechani c Wel der ; For ml ess Cur b and Gut t er
Machi ne*; Gr adal l and machi nes of a l i ke nat ur e*; Gr ader ,
El evat i ng; Gr ader , Mot or Gr ader , Mot or Pat r ol , Aut o Pat r ol ,
For mGr ader , Pul l Gr ader , Subgr ader ; Guar d Rai l Post Dr i ver
mount ed*; Hoi st s, one, t wo, and t hr ee Dr um; Hydr aul i c
Backhoes*; Backhoes wi t h Shear at t achment s*; Mucki ng
Machi ne; Pi l e Dr i ver s and Ski d Ri g*; Pr e- St r ess Machi ne;
Pump Cr et es Dual Ram( r equi r es f r equent l ubr i cat i on and
wat er ) *; Rock Dr i l l - Cr awl er or Ski d Ri g*; Rock Dr i l l t r uck
mount ed*; Rock/ Tr ack Tamper ; Rot o Mi l l Gr i nder , ( 36" and
over ) *; Sl i p- For mPaver *; Soi l Test Dr i l l Ri g, t r uck
mount ed*; St r addl e Buggi es; Hydr aul i c Tel escopi ng For m
( t unnel ) ; Tr act or Dr awn Bel t Loader *; Tr act or Dr awn Bel t
Loader wi t h at t ached Pusher ( t wo engi neer s) ; Tr act or wi t h
boom; Tr act ai r e wi t h at t achment ; Tr af f i c Bar r i er Tr ansf er
Machi ne*; Tr enchi ng Machi ne; Tr uck Mount ed Concr et e Pump
wi t h boom*; Under gr ound Bor i ng and/ or Mi ni ng Machi nes 5 f t
i n di amet er and over t unnel , et c. *; Wheel Excavat or * &
Wi dener ( Apsco) ; Rai sed or Bl i nd Hoe Dr i l l , Tunnel & Shaf t *

GROUP 2: Bat ch Pl ant *; Bi t umi nous Mi xer ; Boi l er and Thr ot t l e
Val ve; Bul l dozer ; Car Loader Tr ai l i ng Conveyor s;
Combi nat i on Backkhoe Fr ont End Loader Machi ne, ( l ess t han 1
cu yd Backhoe Bucket wi t h at t achment s) ; Compr essor and
Thr ot t l e Val ve; Compr essor , common r ecei ver ( 3) ; Concr et e
Br eaker or Hydr o Hammer ; Concr et e Gr i ndi ng Machi ne;
Concr et e Mi xer or Paver 7S ser i es t o and i ncl udi ng 27 cu
f t ; Concr et e Spr eader ; Concr et e Cur i ng Machi ne; Bur l ap
Machi ne; Bel t i ng Machi ne and Seal i ng Machi ne; Concr et e
Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck Car s ( Hagl und or si mi l ar t ype) ;
Dr i l l s ( al l ) ; Fi ni shi ng Machi ne- Concr et e; Gr easer Engi neer ;
Hi ghl i f t Shovel s or Fr ont End Loader ; Hoi st - Sewer Dr aggi ng
Machi ne; Hydr aul i c BoomTr ucks, al l at t achment s;
Hydr o- Bl ast er ( r equi r es t wo oper at or s) ; Laser Scr eed*;
Locomot i ves, Di nky; Of f - Road Haul i ng Uni t s ( i ncl udi ng
ar t i cul at i ng) ; Pump Cr et es; Squeeze Cr et es- Scr ew Type
pumps, GypsumBul ker and Pump; Rol l er Asphal t ; Rot ar y Snow
Pl ows; Rot ot i l l er , Seaman, sel f - Pr opel l ed; Scoops- Tr act or
Dr awn; Sel f - pr opel l ed Compact or ; Spr eader - Chi p- St one;
Scr aper ; Scr aper - Pr i me Mover i n Tandemr egar dl ess of si ze
( add $1. 00 t o Gr oup 2 hour l y r at e f or each hour and f or
each machi ne at t ached t her et o add $1. 00 t o Gr oup 2 hour l y
r at e f or each hour ) ; Tank Car Heat er ; Tr act or s, Push,
pul l i ng Sheeps Foot , Di sc, or Compact or , et c; Tug Boat s

GROUP 3: Boi l er s; Br ooms, al l power pr opel l ed; Cement Suppl y
Tender ; Compr essor , Common Recei ver ( 2) ; Concr et e Mi xer ,
t wo bag and over ; Conveyor , Por t abl e; Far mt ype Tr act or s
used f or mowi ng, seedi ng, et c; Fi r eman on Boi l er s; For kl i f t
Tr ucks; Gr out i ng Machi nes; Hoi st s, Aut omat i c; Hoi st s, al l
El evat or s; Hoi st s, Tugger si ngl e Dr um; J eep Di gger s; Low
Boys; Pi pe J acki ng Machi nes; Post - hol e Di gger ; Power Saw,
Concr et e, Power Dr i ven; Pug Mi l l s; Rol l er s, ot her t han
asphal t ; Seed and St r aw Bl ower ; St eamGener at or s; St ump
Machi ne; Wi nch Tr ucks wi t h A- Fr ame; Wor k Boat s; Tamper - For m
08-7910
mot or dr i ven

GROUP 4: Ai r compr essor - Smal l 250 and under ( 1 t o 5 not t o
exceed a t ot al of 300 f t ) ; Ai r Compr essor - Lar ge over 250;
Combi nat i on - Smal l Equi pment Oper at or ; Di r ect i onal Bor i ng
Machi ne; Gener at or s - Smal l 50 kw and under ; Gener at or s -
Lar ge , over 50 kw; Heat er s, Mechani cal ; Hydr aul i c power
uni t ( Pi l e Dr i vi ng, Ext r act i ng or Dr i l l i ng) ; Li ght Pl ant s
( 1 t o 5) ; Pumps, over 3" ( 1 t o 3, not t o exceed a t ot al of
300 f t ) ; Pumps, Wel l Poi nt s; Tr act ai r e; Wel di ng Machi nes ( 2
t hr ough 5) ; Wi nches, 4 smal l el ect r i c dr i l l wi nches;

GROUP 5: Bobcat s ( Al l ) ; Br i ck For kl i f t s; Oi l er s; Di r ect i onal
Bor i ng

*Requi r es Oi l er
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I RON0001- 026 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

I RONWORKER ( St r uct ur al and
Rei nf or ci ng) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40. 25 24. 99
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I RON0063- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

I RONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL. . . . . . . . . . . $ 39. 05 19. 64
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I RON0063- 002 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

I RONWORKER
Fence Er ect or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 64 12. 75
Met al Fence Er ect or . . . . . . . . . $ 22. 54 12. 04
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I RON0136- 001 07/ 01/ 2006

Rat es Fr i nges

I RONWORKER
Machi ner y Mover s and
Ri gger s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 24 19. 87
Mast er Ri gger s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 74 19. 87
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0002- 006 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

LABORER
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 15 13. 87
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 15 13. 87
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 225 13. 87
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 25 13. 87
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 30 13. 87

08-7910
GROUP 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 35 13. 87
GROUP 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 375 13. 87
GROUP 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 375 13. 87
GROUP 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 475 13. 87
GROUP 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 60 13. 87
GROUP 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 425 13. 87
GROUP 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 34. 15 13. 87

LABORER CLASSI FI CATI ONS

GROUP 1: Bui l di ng Labor er s; Pl ast er er Tender s; Pumps f or
Dewat er i ng; and ot her uncl assi f i ed l abor er s.

GROUP 2: Fi r epr oof i ng and Fi r e Shop l abor er s.

GROUP 3: Cement Gun.

GROUP 4: Chi mney over 40 f t . ; Scaf f ol d Labor er s.

GROUP 5: Cement Gun Nozzl e Labor er s ( Guni t e) ; Wi ndl ass and
capst an per son.

GROUP 6: St one Der r i ckmen & Handl er s.

GROUP 7: J ackhammer men; Power dr i ven concr et e saws; and
ot her power t ool s.

GROUP 8: Fi r ebr i ck & Boi l er Labor er s.

GROUP 9: Chi mney on f i r e br i ck; Cai sson di gger s; & Wel l
Poi nt Syst emmen.

GROUP 10: Boi l er Set t er Pl ast i c Labor er s.

GROUP 11: J ackhammer men on f i r e br i ck wor k onl y.

GROUP 12: Dosi met er use ( any devi ce) moni t or i ng nucl ear
exposur e) ; Asbest os Abat ement Labor er ; Toxi c and Hazar dous
Wast e Removal Labor er s.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0002- 007 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

LABORER
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 15 13. 87
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 425 13. 87
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 30 13. 87
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 425 13. 87
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 34. 15 13. 87


GROUP 1: Common l abor er ; Tender s; Mat er i al expedi t or
( asphal t pl ant ) ; St r eet pavi ng, Gr ade separ at i on, si dewal k,
cur b & gut t er , st r i pper s & Al l l abor er s not ot her wi se
ment i oned
08-7910

GROUP 2: Ashpal t t amper s & smoot her s; Cement gun l abor er s

GROUP 3: Cement Gun Nozzl e ( l abor er s) , Guni t e

GROUP 4: Raker s, Lut emen; Machi ne- Scr ewmen; Ket t l emen;
Mi xer men; Dr un- men; J ackhammer men ( asphal t ) ; Pai nt men;
Mi t r e box spr eader s; Labor er s on bi r ch, over man and si mi l ar
spr eader equi pment ; Labor er s on APSCO; Labor er s on ai r
compr essor ; Pavi ng For mSet t er ; J ackhammer men ( concr et e) ;
Power dr i ve concr et e saws; ot her power t ool s.

GROUP 5: Asbest os Abat ement Labor er s; Toxi c and Hazar dous
Wast e Removal Labor er s, Dosi met er ( any devi ce) moni t or i ng
nucl ear exposur e
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0002- 008 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

LABORER ( Compr essed Ai r )
0 - 15 POUNDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 34. 15 13. 87
16 - 20 POUNDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 34. 65 13. 87
21 - 26 POUNDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35. 15 13. 87
27 - 33 POUNDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 15 13. 87
34 - AND OVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 15 13. 87
LABORER ( Tunnel and Sewer )
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 15 13. 87
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 275 13. 87
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 375 13. 87
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 50 13. 87
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 34. 15 13. 87

LABORER CLASSI FI CATI ONS ( TUNNEL)

GROUP 1: Cage t ender s; Dumpmen; Fl agmen; Si gnal men; Top
l abor er s

GROUP 2: Ai r hoi st oper at or ; Key boar d oper at or ; concr et e
l abor er ; Gr out ; Lock t ender s ( Fr ee Ai r Si de) ; St eel
set t er s; Tugger s; Swi t chmen; Car pusher

GROUP 3: Concr et e r epai r men; Lock t ender s ( pr essur e si de) ;
Mor t ar men; Mucker s; Gr out machi ne oper at or s; Tr ack l ayer s

GROUP 4: Ai r t r ac dr i l l oper at or ; Mi ner ; Br i ckl ayer t ender s;
Concr et e bl ower oper at or ; Dr i l l er s; Dynami t er s; Er ect or
oper at or ; For mmen; J ackhammer men; Power pac; Mi ni ng machi ne
oper at or s; Mucki ng machi ne oper at or ; Laser beamoper at or ;
Li ner pl at e and r i ng set t er s; Shi el d dr i ver s; Power kni f e
oper at or ; Wel der - bur ner s; Pi pe j acki ng machi ne oper at or ;
ski nner s; Mai nt enance t echni ci an

GROUP 5: Asbest os abat ement l abor er ; Toxi c and hazar dous
wast e r emoval l abor er ; Dosi met er ( any devi ce) moni t or i ng
nucl ear exposur e


08-7910
LABORER CLASSI FI CATI ONS ( SEWER)

GROUP 1: Si gnal men; Top l abor er s and Al l ot her l abor er s

GROUP 2: Concr et e l abor er s and St eel set t er s

GROUP 3: Cement car r i er s; Cement mi xer s; Concr et e r epai r men;
Mor t ar men; Scaf f ol d men; Second Bot t ommen

GROUP 4: Ai r t r ac dr i l l oper at or ; Bot t ommen;
Br acer s- br aci ng; Br i ckl ayer t ender s; Cat ch basi n di gger s;
Dr ai nl ayer s; dynami t er s; For mmen; J ackhammer men; Power pac;
Pi pel ayer s; Rodder s; Wel der - bur ner s; Wel l poi nt syst ems men

GROUP 5: Asbest os abat ement l abor er , Toxi c and hazar dous
wast e r emoval l abor er ; Dosi met er ( any devi ce) moni t or i ng
nucl ear exposur e
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0225- 001 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

LABORER ( DEMOLI TI ON/ WRECKI NG)
Gr oup 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 26. 85 13. 87
Gr oup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 40 13. 87
Gr oup 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 15 13. 87


GROUP 1 - Compl et e Demol i t i on

GROUP 2 - I nt er i or Wr ecki ng and St r i p Out Wor k

GROUP 3 - Asbest os Wor k wi t h Compl et e Demol i t i on/ Wr ecki ng or
St r i p Out Wor k
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MARB0067- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

TERRAZZO WORKER/ SETTER. . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 39 17. 38
TI LE FI NI SHER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 15 13. 62
TI LE SETTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 63 15. 34
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MARB0087- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

MARBLE FI NI SHER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 65 18. 17
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PAI N0014- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

PAI NTER
I ncl udi ng Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 90 16. 32
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
08-7910
PAI N0027- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

GLAZI ER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 00 20. 13
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PLAS0005- 002 07/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

PLASTERER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 38. 10 16. 35
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PLAS0502- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

CEMENT MASON/ CONCRETE FI NI SHER. . . $ 41. 85 15. 43
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PLUM0130- 001 06/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

PLUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 41. 00 16. 93
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PLUM0597- 002 06/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

PI PEFI TTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 42. 05 17. 58
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* ROOF0011- 001 12/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

ROOFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 40 11. 95
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SFI L0281- 001 01/ 01/ 2008

Rat es Fr i nges

SPRI NKLER FI TTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40. 50 16. 00
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SHEE0073- 001 01/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

Sheet Met al Wor ker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 96 17. 42
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SHEE0073- 002 01/ 01/ 2007

Rat es Fr i nges

Sheet Met al Wor ker
ALUMI NUM GUTTER WORK. . . . . . . . $ 24. 03 17. 42
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0731- 001 06/ 01/ 2008


08-7910
COOK COUNTY - HEAVY AND HI GHWAY

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 & 3 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 70 12. 35
4 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 95 12. 35
5 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 15 12. 35
6 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 35 12. 35

FOOTNOTES:

A. Pai d Hol i days: New Year ' s Day, Memor i al Day,
I ndependence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgi vi ng Day, and
Chr i st mas Day.

B. 900 st r ai ght t i me hour s or mor e i n 1 cal endar year f or
t he same empl oyer shal l r ecei ve 1 week pai d vacat i on; 3
year s - 2 weeks pai d vacat i on; 10 year s - 3 weeks pai d
vacat i on; 20 year s - 4 weeks pai d vacat i on.

C. An addi t i onal $. 20 per axl e shal l be pai d f or al l vehi cl es
wi t h mor e t han si x ( 6) axl es.

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:

Gr oup 1 - Fr ame Tr uck when used f or t r anspor t at i on pur poses;
Ai r Compr essor and Wel di ng Machi nes, i ncl udi ng t hose pul l ed
by car s, pi ck- up t r ucks and t r act or s; Ambul ances;
Ar t i cul at ed Dumps; Bat ch Gat e Locker s; Bat ch Hopper man; Car
and Tr uck Washer s; Car r y Al l s; For l Li f t s and Hoi st er s;
Hel per s; Mechani cs Hel per s and Gr easer s; Oi l Di st r i but or s,
t wo- man oper at i on; Pavement Br eaker s; Pol e Tr ai l er , up t o
40 f eet ; Pot hol e Repai r Tr ucks; Power Mower Tr act or s; Qui ck
Change Bar r i er ; Sel f - Pr opel l ed Chi p Spr eader ; Shi ppi ng and
Recei vi ng Cl er ks and Checker s; Ski pman; Sl ur r y Tr ucks,
t wo- man oper at i on; Sl ur r y Tr ucks, Conveyor Oper at ed - 2 or
3 man oper at i on; Teamst er s; Unski l l ed Dumpmen; War ehousemen
and Dockmen; Tr uck Dr i ver s haul i ng war ni ng l i ght s,
bar r i cades, and por t abl e t oi l et s on t he j ob si t e

Gr oup 2 - Di spat cher ; Dump Cr et s and Adget at or s under 7
yar ds; Dumpst er s, Tr ack Tr ucks, Eucl i ds, Hug Bot t omDump
Tur napul l s or Tur nat r ai l er s when pul l i ng ot her t han
sel f - l oadi ng equi pment or si mi l ar equi pment under 16 cubi c
yar ds; Mi xer Tr ucks under 7 yar ds; Ready- Mi x Pl ant Hopper
Oper at or ; Wi nch Tr ucks, 2 Axl es

Gr oup 3 - Dump Cr et s and Adget at or s, 7 yar ds and over ;
Dumpst er s, Tr ack Tr ucks, Eucl i ds, Hug Bot t omDump
sel f - l oadi ng equi pment or si mi l ar equi pment over 16 cubi c
yar ds; Expl osi ves and/ or Fi ssi on Mat er i al Tr ucks; Mi xer
Tr ucks 7 yar ds or over ; Mobi l e Cr anes whi l e i n t r ansi t ; Oi l
Di st r i but or s, one- man oper at i on; Pol e Tr ai l er , over 40
f eet ; Pol e and Expandabl e Tr ai l er s haul i ng mat er i al over 50
f eet l ong;
08-7910
Sl ur r y Tr ucks, one- man oper at i on; Wi nch Tr ucks, 3 axl es or
mor e; Mechani c - *Tr uck Wel der and *Tr uck Pai nt er *These
cl assi f i cat i ons shal l onl y appl y i n ar eas wher e and when i t
has been a past ar ea pr act i ce; Asphal t Pl ant Oper at or s i n
ar eas wher e i t has been past pr act i ce

Gr oup 4 - Dual - pur pose vehi cel s, such as mount ed cr ane t ucks
wi t h hoi st and accessor i es; For eman; Mast er Mechani c;
Sel f - l oadi ng equi pment l i ke P. B. and t r ucks wi t h scoops on
t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0786- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

COOK COUNTY - BUI LDI NG AND RESI DENTI AL

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 & 3 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 33 . 10+a
4 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 58 . 10+a
5 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 78 . 10+a
6 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 98 . 10+a

FOOTNOTES:

a. $463. 00 per week.

An addi t i onal $. 20 per axl e shal l be pai d f or al l vehi cl es

Pai d Hol i days: New Year ' s Day, Memor i al Day, I ndependence
Day, Labor Day, Thanksgi vi ng Day, and Chr i st mas Day.

900 st r ai ght t i me hour s or mor e i n 1 cal endar year f or t he
same empl oyer shal l r ecei ve 1 week pai d vacat i on; 3 year s -
2 weeks pai d vacat i on; 10 year s - 3 weeks pai d vacat i on; 20
year s - 4 weeks pai d vacat i on.

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:



08-7910

f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

WELDERS - Recei ve r at e pr escr i bed f or cr af t per f or mi ng
oper at i on t o whi ch wel di ng i s i nci dent al .
================================================================

Unl i st ed cl assi f i cat i ons needed f or wor k not i ncl uded wi t hi n
t he scope of t he cl assi f i cat i ons l i st ed may be added af t er
awar d onl y as pr ovi ded i n t he l abor st andar ds cont r act cl auses
( 29CFR 5. 5 ( a) ( 1) ( i i ) ) .

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

I n t he l i st i ng above, t he " SU" desi gnat i on means t hat r at es
l i st ed under t he i dent i f i er do not r ef l ect col l ect i vel y
bar gai ned wage and f r i nge benef i t r at es. Ot her desi gnat i ons
i ndi cat e uni ons whose r at es have been det er mi ned t o be
pr evai l i ng.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

WAGE DETERMI NATI ON APPEALS PROCESS

1. ) Has t her e been an i ni t i al deci si on i n t he mat t er ? Thi s can
be:

* an exi st i ng publ i shed wage det er mi nat i on
* a sur vey under l yi ng a wage det er mi nat i on
* a Wage and Hour Di vi si on l et t er set t i ng f or t h a posi t i on on
a wage det er mi nat i on mat t er
* a conf or mance ( addi t i onal cl assi f i cat i on and r at e) r ul i ng

On sur vey r el at ed mat t er s, i ni t i al cont act , i ncl udi ng r equest s
08-7910
f or summar i es of sur veys, shoul d be wi t h t he Wage and Hour
Regi onal Of f i ce f or t he ar ea i n whi ch t he sur vey was conduct ed
because t hose Regi onal Of f i ces have r esponsi bi l i t y f or t he
Davi s- Bacon sur vey pr ogr am. I f t he r esponse f r omt hi s i ni t i al
cont act i s not sat i sf act or y, t hen t he pr ocess descr i bed i n 2. )
and 3. ) shoul d be f ol l owed.

Wi t h r egar d t o any ot her mat t er not yet r i pe f or t he f or mal
pr ocess descr i bed her e, i ni t i al cont act shoul d be wi t h t he
Br anch of Const r uct i on Wage Det er mi nat i ons. Wr i t e t o:

Br anch of Const r uct i on Wage Det er mi nat i ons
Wage and Hour Di vi si on
U. S. Depar t ment of Labor
200 Const i t ut i on Avenue, N. W.
Washi ngt on, DC 20210

2. ) I f t he answer t o t he quest i on i n 1. ) i s yes, t hen an
i nt er est ed par t y ( t hose af f ect ed by t he act i on) can r equest
r evi ew and r econsi der at i on f r omt he Wage and Hour Admi ni st r at or
( See 29 CFR Par t 1. 8 and 29 CFR Par t 7) . Wr i t e t o:

Wage and Hour Admi ni st r at or

The r equest shoul d be accompani ed by a f ul l st at ement of t he
i nt er est ed par t y' s posi t i on and by any i nf or mat i on ( wage
payment dat a, pr oj ect descr i pt i on, ar ea pr act i ce mat er i al ,
et c. ) t hat t he r equest or consi der s r el evant t o t he i ssue.

3. ) I f t he deci si on of t he Admi ni st r at or i s not f avor abl e, an
i nt er est ed par t y may appeal di r ect l y t o t he Admi ni st r at i ve
Revi ew Boar d ( f or mer l y t he Wage Appeal s Boar d) . Wr i t e t o:

Admi ni st r at i ve Revi ew Boar d

4. ) Al l deci si ons by t he Admi ni st r at i ve Revi ew Boar d ar e f i nal .

================================================================

END OF GENERAL DECI SI ON

08-7910
General Decision Number: IL080020 11/28/2008 IL20

Super seded Gener al Deci si on Number : I L20070020

St at e: I l l i noi s

Const r uct i on Types: Bui l di ng Landscape, Heavy Landscape,
Hi ghway Landscape and Resi dent i al Landscape

BUI LDI NG CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK) :

Count i es: Boone, Cook, De Kal b, Du Page, Gr undy, Henr y, Kane,
Kankakee, Kendal l , Lake, McHenr y, McLean, Ogl e, Peor i a, Rock
I sl and, Tazewel l , Wi l l , Wi nnebago and Woodf or d Count i es i n
I l l i noi s.

LANDSCAPI NG WORK ON BUI LDI NG, RESI DENTI AL, HEAVY AND HI GHWAY
CONSTRUCTI ON PROJ ECTS.

Modi f i cat i on Number Publ i cat i on Dat e
0 02/ 08/ 2008
1 05/ 02/ 2008
2 06/ 06/ 2008
3 07/ 04/ 2008
4 07/ 25/ 2008
5 11/ 21/ 2008
6 11/ 28/ 2008

ENGI 0150- 013 01/ 01/ 2008

BUI LDI NG AND HI GHWAY CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK) : The
l andscape wor k f or t he Landscape Equi pment Oper at or excl udes
t he pr epar at i on of subgr ade pr i or t o appl i cat i on of f i ni sh
l andscape mat er i al s and t he ut i l i zat i on of any equi pment over
one cubi c yar d.

BOONE, COOK, DUPAGE, GRUNDY, KANE, KENDALL, LAKE, MCHENRY, AND
WI LL COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

Landscape Wor ker ( I ncl udes
Angl e Dozer , Smal l ; Bobcat
and ot her si mi l ar t ype
machi nes, 1 cu yd or l ess;
Chi ppi ng Machi ne; Combi nat i on
Backhoe and Fr ont End Loader
1 cu yd or l ess; For k Li f t
Tr uck; Hi - Reach and
Hi gh- Ranger ; Hydr aul i c Boom
wi t h Cl am; Log Ski dder ; St t r aw
Bl ower and Seeder ; St ump
Machi ne; Tr act or s, Cr awl er s,
08-7910
Rubber Ti r e Tr act or s,
Hi ghl i f t Shovel s or Fr ont End
Loader s 1 cu yd or l ess; Tr ee
Spades, al l ; Ut i l i t y Tr act or
and at t achment s, and Rubber
Ti r e Fr ont End l oader or
si mi l ar machi ne of 1 t o 1. 5
cu yd sol el y used f or
pl acement of l ar ge decor at i ve
boul der s, t r ees wi t h bal l ed
soi l , and ot her decor at i ve
l andscape mat er i al t oo l ar ge
t o be accommodat ed i n a 1 cu
yd bucket . Al l ot her
equi pment ut i l i zed f or
per f or mi ng l andscape wor k,
t r ee t r i mmi ng or r emoval of
st ees, and t o i nst al l pl ant s;
t r anspor t t r ees; excavat e
pl ant pi t s; pl ace soi l and
ot her l andscape mat er i al s;
and appl y f i ni sh l andscape
mat er i al on subgr ade pr epar ed
by ot her s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 23. 00 1. 65+A+B+C

FOOTNOTE:

A. Heal t h and Wel f ar e cont r i but i on i s $810. 00 per mont h
ef f ect i ve J anuar y 1, 2007 and $895. 00 per mont h ef f ect i ve
J anuar y 1, 2008.

B. Pai d Hol i days: New Year ' s Day; Memor i al Day; Four t h of
J ul y; Labor Day; Thanksgi vi ng Day; and Chr i st mas Day ar e
pr ovi ded t he empl oyee i f t hey wor k t hei r r egul ar l y
schedul ed wor k day i mmedi at el y pr ecedi ng and t he r egul ar l y
wor k day i mmedi at el y succeedi ng t he occur r ence of t he
hol i day.

C. Pai d Vacat i on: Al l empl oyees who have been i n t he empl oy
of t he Empl oyer f or a f ul l season of wor k shal l be ent i t l ed
t o one ( 1) week of vacat i on wi t h pay. Empl oyees who have
been pai d f or not l ess t han t wel ve hundr ed ( 1200) st r ai ght
t i me hour s si nce t hei r most r ecent anni ver sar y dat e of hi r e
at vacat i on t i me wi l l be deemed t o have wor ked one f ul l
season. Al l empl oyees who have been i n t he empl oy of t hei r
Empl oyer f or t hr ee( 3) or mor e consecut i ve f ul l seasons of
wor k shal l at t he concl usi on of t hei r cur r ent season be
ent i t l ed t o t wo ( 2) weeks of pai d vacat i on. Al l empl oyees
who have been i n t he empl oy of t hei r empl oyer f or ni ne ( 9)
or mor e consecut i ve f ul l seasons of wor k shal l be ent i t l ed
t o t hr ee ( 3) weeks of pai d vacat i on.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ENGI 0150- 023 01/ 01/ 2008

HI GHWAY CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK) : The l andscape wor k f or
t he Landscape Equi pment Oper at or excl udes t he pr epar at i on of
subgr ade pr i or t o appl i cat i on of f i ni sh l andscape mat er i al s

08-7910
and t he ut i l i zat i on of any equi pment over one cubi c yar d.

HENRY, MCLEAN, OGLE, PEORI A, ROCK I SLAND, TAZEWELL, WI NNEBAGO,
and WOODFORD COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

Labor er : Landscape Equi pment
Oper at or
I ncl udes t he f ol l owi ng:
Angl e Dozer , Smal l ; Bobcat
and ot her si mi l ar t ype
machi nes, 1 cu yd or l ess;
Chi ppi ng Machi ne;
Combi nat i on Backhoe and
Fr ont End Loader 1 cu yd
or l ess; For k Li f t Tr uck;
Hi - Reach and Hi gh-
Ranger ; Hydr aul i c Boomwi t h
Cl am; Log Ski dder ; St t r aw
Bl ower and Seeder ; St ump
Machi ne; Tr act or s,
Cr awl er s, Rubber Ti r e
Tr act or s, Hi ghl i f t Shovel s
or Fr ont End Loader s 1 cu
yd or l ess; Tr ee Spades,
al l ; Ut i l i t y Tr act or and
at t achment s, and Rubber
Ti r e Fr ont End l oader or
si mi l ar machi ne of 1 t o
1. 5 cu yd sol el y used f or
pl acement of l ar ge
decor at i ve boul der s, t r ees
wi t h bal l ed soi l , and
ot her decor at i ve l andscape
mat er i al t oo l ar ge t o be
accommodat ed i n a 1 cu yd
bucket . Al l ot her
equi pment ut i l i zed f or
per f or mi ng l andscape wor k,
t r ee t r i mmi ng or r emoval
of st ees, and t o i nst al l
pl ant s; t r anspor t t r ees;
excavat e pl ant pi t s; pl ace
soi l and ot her l andscape
mat er i al s; and appl y
f i ni sh l andscape mat er i al
on subgr ade pr epar ed by
ot her s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 23. 00 1. 65+A+B+C

FOOTNOTE:

A. Heal t h and Wel f ar e cont r i but i on of 735. 00 per mont h

B. Pai d Hol i days: New Year ' s Day; Memor i al Day; Four t h of
08-7910
J ul y; Labor Day; Thanksgi vi ng Day; and Chr i st mas Day ar e
pr ovi ded t he empl oyee i f t hey wor k t hei r r egul ar l y
schedul ed wor k day i mmedi at el y pr ecedi ng and t he r egul ar l y
wor k day i mmedi at el y succeedi ng t he occur r ence of t he
hol i day.

C. Pai d Vacat i on: Al l empl oyees who have been i n t he
empl oy of t he Empl oyer f or a f ul l season of wor k shal l be
ent i t l ed t o one ( 1) week of vacat i on wi t h pay. Empl oyees
who have been pai d f or not l ess t han t wel ve hundr ed ( 1200)
st r ai ght t i me hour s si nce t hei r most r ecent anni ver sar y
dat e of hi r e at vacat i on t i me wi l l be deemed t o have wor ked
one f ul l season. Al l empl oyees who have been i n t he empl oy
of t hei r empl oyer f or t hr ee ( 3) or mor e consecut i ve f ul l
seasons of wor k shal l at t he concl usi on of t hei r cur r ent
season be ent i t l ed t o t wo ( 2) weeks of pai d vacat i on. Al l
empl oyees who have been i n t he empl oy of t hei r empl oyer f or
ni ne ( 9) or mor e consecut i ve f ul l seasons of wor k shal l be
ent i t l ed t o t hr ee ( 3) weeks of pai d vacat i on.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0032- 004 05/ 01/ 2008

HI GHWAY CONSTRUCTI ON

OGLE AND WI NNEBAGO COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

Landscape Labor er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 26. 29 17. 25
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0362- 003 05/ 01/ 2008


MCLEAN COUNTY

Rat es Fr i nges

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0751- 004 05/ 01/ 2008


KANKAKEE COUNTY

Rat es Fr i nges

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0852- 004 05/ 01/ 2006


ROCK I SLAND AND HENRY COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

08-7910

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LABO0996- 004 05/ 01/ 2008


PEORI A, TAZEWELL, AND WOODFORD COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUI L1993- 001 01/ 19/ 1993

BUI LDI NG CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK) :

Rat es Fr i nges

Labor er s:
BOONE, GRUNDY, KANE,
KENDALL, LAKE, MCHENRY, &
WI LL COUNTI ES
LANDSCAPE LABORERS. . . . . . . . . $ 7. 14
COOK COUNTY
LANDSCAPE PLANTSMAN. . . . . . . . $ 9. 80 1. 82
DE KALB COUNTY
LANDSCAPE OPERATORS. . . . . . . . $ 6. 55
LANDSCAPE PLANTSMAN. . . . . . . . $ 9. 66 . 26
DU PAGE COUNTY
GRUNDY, LAKE & WI LL
COUNTI ES
LANDSCAPE DRI VER 2 & 3
Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 11. 86 2. 81
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUI L1993- 002 01/ 19/ 1993

HEAVY CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK)

Rat es Fr i nges

Labor er s:
BOONE, GRUNDY, KANE,
KENDALL, LAKE, MCHENRY &
WI LL COUNTI ES:
LANDSCAPE DRI VER, 2 & 3
AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 11. 94 2. 42
LANDSCAPE OPERATORS. . . . . . . . $ 13. 11 3. 01
COOK COUNTY:
08-7910
AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 9. 93 1. 89
LANDSCAPE OPERATORS. . . . . . . . $ 10. 98 2. 12
DE KALB COUNTY:
DU PAGE COUNTY:
AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 8. 32 1. 02
LANDSCAPE PLANTSMAN. . . . . . . . $ 10. 65
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUI L1993- 003 01/ 19/ 1993

HI GHWAY CONSTRUCTI ON ( LANDSCAPE WORK) :

Rat es Fr i nges

Labor er s:
DE KALB COUNTY
KANKAKEE COUNTY:
LANDSCAPE DRI VER. . . . . . . . . . . $ 8. 75 . 17
LANDSCAPE OPERATOR. . . . . . . . . $ 16. 57 3. 56
PEORI A, TAZEWELL, &
WOODFORD COUNTI ES:
TRUCK DRI VERS 2 & 3 AXLES. . $ 17. 58 5. 88
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TEAM0026- 005 05/ 01/ 2008

MCLEAN COUNTY ( Sout h of a st r ai ght l i ne f r omwher e Rout e 24
i nt er sect s t he Woodf or d Count y l i ne i n a Sout heast di r ect i on t o
t he Sout h Sout hwest cor ner of Li vi ngst on Count y)

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
Gr oup 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 46 8. 85+a
Gr oup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 86 8. 85+a
Gr oup 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 06 8. 85+a
Gr oup 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 31 8. 85+a
Gr oup 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 29. 06 8. 85+a

FOOTNOTE: a. $151. 90 per week

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:

GROUP 1: Dr i ver s on 2 axl es haul i ng l ess t han 9 t ons; ai r
compr essor & wel di ng machi nes and br ooms, i ncl udi ng t hose
pul l ed by separ at e uni t s; Tr uck Dr i ver Hel per , war ehouse
empl oyees; Mechani c Hel per s; gr easer s and t i r emen; pi ck- up

08-7910
t r ucks when haul i ng mat er i al , t ool s, or wor ker s t o and f r om
and on t he j ob si t e; and f or kl i f t s up t o 6, 000 l b capaci t y.

GROUP 2: 2 or 3 axl es hual i ng mor e t han 9 t ons but haul i ng
l ess t han 16 t ons; A- f r ame wi nch t r ucks; hydr ol i f t t r ucks;
Vact or Tr ucks or si mi l ar equi pment when used f or
t r anspor t at i on pur poses; For kl i f t over 6, 000 l b. capaci t y;
wi nch t r ucks; and f our axl e combi at i on uni t s.

GROUP 3: 2, 3 or 4 Axl es haul i ng 16 t ons or mor e; 5- Axl es or
mor e combi nat i on uni t s; dr i ver s on wat er pul l s; ar t i cul at ed
dump t r ucks; mechani cs and wor ki ng f or eper sons.

GROUP 4: Low Boy and Oi l Di st r i but or s.

GROUP 5: Dr i ver s who r equi r e speci al pr ot ect i ve cl ot hi ng
whi l e empl oyed on hazar dous wast e wor k.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0179- 004 06/ 01/ 2008

GRUNDY, KENDALL, MCLEAN ( Nor t h of a st r ai ght l i ne st ar t i ng at
t he i nt er sect i on of McLean- Woodf or d Count i es l i ne & Rout e 24 i n
a Sout heast er n di r ect i on t o t he Sout h Sout hwest cor ner of
Li vi ngst on Count y) , WI LL, and WOODFORD ( Nor t heast cor ner east
of Rout e 51/ 251 & Nor t h of Rout e 24) COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2- 3 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35. 65 6. 25+a
4 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 35. 80 6. 25+a
5 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 00 6. 25+a
6 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36. 20 6. 25+a
Al l Lowboy Tr ucks. . . . . . . . . . . $ 37. 20 6. 25+a

FOOTNOTE: a. $181. 00 per week.

FOOTNOTE: An addi t i onal $. 20 per axl e shal l be pai d f or al l
vehi cl es wi t h mor e t han si x ( 6) axl es.

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:

08-7910


f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0179- 008 06/ 01/ 2008

KANKAKEE COUNTY

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 or 3 axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 12 7. 90+a
4 axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 32 7. 90+a
5 axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 52 7. 90+a
6 axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 67 7. 90+a



CLASSI FI CATI ONS:


08-7910


f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0301- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

LAKE AND MCHENRY COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2- 3 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 20 . 15+a
4 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 35 . 15+a
5 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 50 . 15+a
6 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 75 . 15+a





08-7910
CLASSI FI CATI ONS:



f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0325- 004 06/ 01/ 2008

BOONE and WI NNEBAGO COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 - 3 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 11 13. 87
4 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 26 13. 87
5 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 46 13. 87
6 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 57 13. 87


08-7910

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:

by car s, pi ck- up t r ucks and t r act or s; Ambul ances; Bat ch
Gat e Locker s; Bat ch Hopper man; Car and Tr uck Washer s; For l
Li f t s and Hoi st er s; Hel per s;
Mechani cs Hel per s and Gr easer s; Oi l Di st r i but or s, t wo- man
oper at i on; Pavement Br eaker s
Pol e Tr ai l er , up t o 40 f eet ; Power Mower Tr act or s; Ski pman;
Sl ur r y Tr ucks, t wo- man oper at i on; Teamst er s; Tr uck Dr i ver s
haul i ng war ni ng l i ght s, bar r i cades, and por t abl e t oi l et s on
t he j ob si t e

Gr oup 2 - Dump Cr et s and Adget at or s under 7 yar ds; Dumpst er s,
Tr ack Tr ucks, Eucl i ds, Hug Bot t omDump Tur napul l s or
Tur nat r ai l er s when pul l i ng ot her t han sel f - l oadi ng
equi pment or si mi l ar equi pment under 16 cubi c yar ds; Mi xer
Tr ucks under 7 yar ds; Ready- Mi x Pl ant Hopper Oper at or ;
Wi nch Tr ucks, 2 Axl es

Di st r i but or s, one- man oper at i on
Pol e Tr ai l er , over 40 f eet ; Pol e and Expandabl e Tr ai l er s
haul i ng mat er i al over 50 f eet l ong, addi t i onal $0. 50 per
hour ; Sl ur r y Tr ucks, one- man oper at i on; Wi nch Tr ucks, 3
axl es or mor e
*Mechani c*Tr uck Wel der and Tr uck Pai nt er ; *Wi nt er Rat e:
Bet ween Dec. 15 and Feb. 28 t he mechani c and wel der r at e
shal l be $2. 00 l ess t han t he schedul ed scal e. Tr uck Pai nt er
and Tr uck Wel der cl assi f i cat i ons shal l onl y appl y i n ar eas
wher e and when i t has been a past ar ea pr act i ce;
Dual - pur pose vehi cel s, such as mount ed cr ane t ucks wi t h
hoi st and accessor i es

Gr oup 4 - For eman; Mast er Mechani c; Sel f - l oadi ng equi pment
l i ke P. B. and t r ucks wi t h scoops on t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0330- 004 06/ 01/ 2008

DEKALB and OGLE ( Nor t h of Rout e 72/ East of Rout e 251, Adel i ne,
Byr on, Cr est on, Dement , For r est on Nor t h of Rout e 72, Leaf Ri ver
Nor t h of Rout e 72, Lynnvi l l e, Monr oe, Rochel l e, & Scot t )
COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2- 3 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 55 . 15+a
08-7910
4 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 70 . 15+a
5 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 90 . 15+a
6 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 10 . 15+a





CLASSI FI CATI ONS:



f eet l ong;


08-7910
t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TEAM0371- 004 05/ 01/ 2008

HENRY and ROCK I SLAND COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
Gr oup 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 58 8. 85+a
Gr oup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 98 8. 85+a
Gr oup 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 18 8. 85+a
Gr oup 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 43 8. 85+a
Gr oup 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 29. 18 8. 85+a

FOOTNOTE: a. $31. 40 per day

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:





- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TEAM0627- 007 05/ 01/ 2008

PEORI A, TAZEWELL, and WOODFORD ( Al l except Nor t heast cor ner
East of Rout e 51/ 251 & Sout h of Rout e 24) COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 46 8. 85+a
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 86 8. 85+a
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 06 8. 85+a
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 31 8. 85+a
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 29. 06 8. 85+a
08-7910


CLASSI FI CATI ONS:





- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0673- 003 06/ 01/ 2008

DU PAGE and KANE COUNTI ES

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2- 3 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 55 . 15+a
4 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 70 . 15+a
5 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 32. 90 . 15+a
6 AXLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 33. 10 . 15+a





CLASSI FI CATI ONS:


08-7910


f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TEAM0722- 003 05/ 01/ 2008

OGLE COUNTY ( Sout h of Rout e 72/ West of Rout e 251)

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
Gr oup 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 46 8. 85+a
Gr oup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27. 86 8. 85+a
Gr oup 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 06 8. 85+a
Gr oup 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 28. 31 8. 85+a
Gr oup 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 29. 06 8. 85+a


CLASSI FI CATI ONS:

08-7910




- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0731- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

COOK COUNTY - HEAVY AND HI GHWAY

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 & 3 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 70 12. 35
4 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 30. 95 12. 35
5 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 15 12. 35
6 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 35 12. 35

FOOTNOTES:

A. Pai d Hol i days: New Year ' s Day, Memor i al Day,
I ndependence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgi vi ng Day, and
Chr i st mas Day.

B. 900 st r ai ght t i me hour s or mor e i n 1 cal endar year f or
t he same empl oyer shal l r ecei ve 1 week pai d vacat i on; 3
year s - 2 weeks pai d vacat i on; 10 year s - 3 weeks pai d
vacat i on; 20 year s - 4 weeks pai d vacat i on.

C. An addi t i onal $. 20 per axl e shal l be pai d f or al l vehi cl es

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:


08-7910


f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
* TEAM0786- 001 06/ 01/ 2008

COOK COUNTY - BUI LDI NG AND RESI DENTI AL

Rat es Fr i nges

TRUCK DRI VER
2 & 3 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 33 . 10+a
4 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 58 . 10+a
5 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 78 . 10+a
6 Axl es. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 31. 98 . 10+a

FOOTNOTES:

a. $463. 00 per week.



08-7910

CLASSI FI CATI ONS:



f eet l ong;

t he f r ont
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

WELDERS - Recei ve r at e pr escr i bed f or cr af t per f or mi ng
oper at i on t o whi ch wel di ng i s i nci dent al .
================================================================

Unl i st ed cl assi f i cat i ons needed f or wor k not i ncl uded wi t hi n
t he scope of t he cl assi f i cat i ons l i st ed may be added af t er
awar d onl y as pr ovi ded i n t he l abor st andar ds cont r act cl auses
( 29CFR 5. 5 ( a) ( 1) ( i i ) ) .

08-7910

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

I n t he l i st i ng above, t he " SU" desi gnat i on means t hat r at es
l i st ed under t he i dent i f i er do not r ef l ect col l ect i vel y
bar gai ned wage and f r i nge benef i t r at es. Ot her desi gnat i ons
i ndi cat e uni ons whose r at es have been det er mi ned t o be
pr evai l i ng.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

WAGE DETERMI NATI ON APPEALS PROCESS

1. ) Has t her e been an i ni t i al deci si on i n t he mat t er ? Thi s can
be:

* an exi st i ng publ i shed wage det er mi nat i on
* a sur vey under l yi ng a wage det er mi nat i on
* a Wage and Hour Di vi si on l et t er set t i ng f or t h a posi t i on on
a wage det er mi nat i on mat t er
* a conf or mance ( addi t i onal cl assi f i cat i on and r at e) r ul i ng

On sur vey r el at ed mat t er s, i ni t i al cont act , i ncl udi ng r equest s
f or summar i es of sur veys, shoul d be wi t h t he Wage and Hour
Regi onal Of f i ce f or t he ar ea i n whi ch t he sur vey was conduct ed
because t hose Regi onal Of f i ces have r esponsi bi l i t y f or t he
Davi s- Bacon sur vey pr ogr am. I f t he r esponse f r omt hi s i ni t i al
cont act i s not sat i sf act or y, t hen t he pr ocess descr i bed i n 2. )
and 3. ) shoul d be f ol l owed.

Wi t h r egar d t o any ot her mat t er not yet r i pe f or t he f or mal
pr ocess descr i bed her e, i ni t i al cont act shoul d be wi t h t he
Br anch of Const r uct i on Wage Det er mi nat i ons. Wr i t e t o:

Br anch of Const r uct i on Wage Det er mi nat i ons
Wage and Hour Di vi si on

2. ) I f t he answer t o t he quest i on i n 1. ) i s yes, t hen an
i nt er est ed par t y ( t hose af f ect ed by t he act i on) can r equest
r evi ew and r econsi der at i on f r omt he Wage and Hour Admi ni st r at or
( See 29 CFR Par t 1. 8 and 29 CFR Par t 7) . Wr i t e t o:

Wage and Hour Admi ni st r at or

The r equest shoul d be accompani ed by a f ul l st at ement of t he
i nt er est ed par t y' s posi t i on and by any i nf or mat i on ( wage
payment dat a, pr oj ect descr i pt i on, ar ea pr act i ce mat er i al ,
et c. ) t hat t he r equest or consi der s r el evant t o t he i ssue.

3. ) I f t he deci si on of t he Admi ni st r at or i s not f avor abl e, an
i nt er est ed par t y may appeal di r ect l y t o t he Admi ni st r at i ve
08-7910
Revi ew Boar d ( f or mer l y t he Wage Appeal s Boar d) . Wr i t e t o:

Admi ni st r at i ve Revi ew Boar d

4. ) Al l deci si ons by t he Admi ni st r at i ve Revi ew Boar d ar e f i nal .

================================================================

END OF GENERAL DECI SI ON


SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJ ECT
A. Project: 60 unit senior apartment building.
B. Sponser: Habilitative Systems, Inc.
C. Architect's Name: Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C..
D. The Project consists of the construction of the following structure:.
1. A five story, elevatored, masonry load-bearing structure with concrete slab on grade.
2. Construction Type: Residential Use Group, Occupancy Classification A-2, Construction
Classification 1A Protected.
3. Major Systems: Masonry Load Bearing structure with hot water through-wall heating and
electric cooling unit in apartments and gas fired heating and central air in common areas.
4. Performance requirements for completing work: 100% performance payment bond.
5. Construction contract shall include all permit and hook-up fees imposed by utility
companies, city, county and state. Contractor to verify fee amounts with the appropriate
authority prior to bidding.
6. This project is of tax exempt status. Proof of same will be furnished to contractor on
request.
7. Project funding is provided by United States Department of Housing and Urban
Development, Chicago Area Office, Section 202/L8
1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price.
1.03 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.04 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during
construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
B. Utility Outages and Shutdown:
1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 01100
SUMMARY
01100 - 1
01/09/2009

SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cash allowances.
1.02 CASH ALLOWANCES
A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less
applicable trade discounts.
B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product handling at the site, including unloading,
uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for
installation and finishing.
C. Architect Responsibilities:
1. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor.
2. Prepare Change Order.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Assist Architect in selection of products.
2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and offer recommendations.
3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with
designated supplier.
4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery.
5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit
claims for transportation damage.
E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.
1.03 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE
A. Section 04200- Unit Masonry: Include the stipulated sum of $1600/1000 for purchase and
delivery of utility bricks.
B. Section 10440 - Interior Signage: Include the stipulated sum of $5000 for purchase and delivery
of Interior Signage.
C. Section 10441 - Exterior Signage: Include the stipulated sum of $7000 for purchase and delivery
of Exterior Sign. Contractor to include brick base indicated on Landscaping plans as part of the
construction contract.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 01210
ALLOWANCES
01210 - 1
01/09/2009

SECTION 01300
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Progress meetings.
C. Construction progress schedule.
D. Coordination drawings.
E. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
F. Number of copies of submittals.
G. Submittal procedures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
B. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, schedule of values, and progress schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, HUD, and Architect.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. All reports and documentation shall be submitted according to HUD regulations
8. Scheduling.
D. Architect will record meeting minutes and distribute to owner, HUD, and General Contractor.
3.02 PAYOUT MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B. Attendance Required: J ob superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
C. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
08-7910
Section 01300
01300 - 1
01/09/2009
2. Review of Work progress.
a. Progress of the past 30 days.
b. Projected progress of the next 30 days.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Status of RFI's, and Change Orders.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
12. Other business relating to Work.
13. Review Pay Request Submittal.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
B. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
D. Include HUD Form#5372 Construction Progress Schedule with each application for payment.
3.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article
below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
3.05 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJ ECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents: As-built plans and specifications.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Contractor to provide As-built survey with utility locations shown and HUD surveyor's report
#2457 including one survey update at HUD final closing.
6. Other types as indicated.
B. Submit to Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. for review, for Owner's benefit a minimum of one week
prior to substantial completion meeting.
3.06 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Documents for Review:
1. Product Data, 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the Contractor
Section 01300
08-7910
01/09/2009 01300 - 2
requires, plus three copies which will be retained by the Architect.
2. Shop drawings, Not Larger Than 24x36 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and
one opaque reproduction. Reviewed and annotated by the contractor.
3. Mock-Ups: as required by the individual sections
4. Inspection and Test Reports: Submit a minimum of 4 Copies
5. Warranties: Submit a minimum of 4 Copies
6. Survey Data: Submit a minimum of 4 Copies
7. Closeout Submittals: Submit a minimum of 3 Copies
B. Samples and shop drawings shall be prepared specifically for this project. Shop drawings shall
include dimensions and details, including adjacent construction.
C. Provide required resubmittals and provide distribution of approved copies.
D. Provide warranties as specified. Warranties shall not limit length of time for remedy of damages
Owner may have by legal statute. Warranties shall be signed by Manufacturer and Contractor.
All warranties shall have a start date of substantial completion, except punch list items which will
have a start date of final completion.
E. Provide products specified or approved equal. Products submitted for substitution shall be
submitted with the acceptable documentation and include costs of substitution including related
work.
F. Samples: Submit 2 plus extra samples as to indicate range of color, finish, and texture to be
expected; one of which will be retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with transmittal sheet.
B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information
is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. Submittals without
Contractors stamp will be returned to the contractor without review.
E. Deliver submittals to Architect at business address.
F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
J . When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any
inability to comply with requirements.
L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
08-7910
Section 01300
01300 - 3
01/09/2009
END OF SECTION
Section 01300
08-7910
01/09/2009 01300 - 4
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. References and standards.
B. Quality assurance submittals.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Testing services.
F. Manufacturers' field services.
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
A. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
B. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or
Testing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of
full time specialist and responsible officer.
B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose
of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents, or for Owner's information.
C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and
to Contractor.
1. Include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f. Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test/inspection.
i. Results of test/inspection.
j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.
2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited
purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed
in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
08-7910
Section 01400
01400 - 1
01/09/2009
manufacturer and Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or
for Owner.
1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.
2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for
Owner.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect or
Owner.
1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included
in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform
specified testing.
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance
with requirements of Contract Documents.
C. Contractor Employed Agency:
1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 548, and ASTM C 1077.
2. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Illinois.
3. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time specialist on staff to review services.
4. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST
established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality
assurance program.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
Section 01400
08-7910
01/09/2009 01400 - 2
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do
not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance
of services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.
6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
08-7910
Section 01400
01400 - 3
01/09/2009
testing/inspection services.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
the same agency on instructions by Architect.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the
Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum.
3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance
of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will
direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
Section 01400
08-7910
01/09/2009 01400 - 4
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telephone and facsimile service.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E. Security requirements.
F. Waste removal facilities and services.
G. Project identification sign.
H. Field offices.
A. Section 01585 - Project Signs.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation
required for construction purposes.
B. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project
mobilization.
B. Telecommunications services shall include:
C. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and a dedicated telephone line to field office at
time of project mobilization.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.06 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing
facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.
C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.07 FENCING
A. Provide min. 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
08-7910
Section 01500
01500 - 1
01/09/2009
gates with locks.
1.08 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,
vandalism, or theft.
1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.10 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly
condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.
1.11 PROJ ECT SIGNS - See Section 01585
1.12 FIELD OFFICES
A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.
B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate minimum 10 persons.
1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
END OF SECTION
Section 01500
08-7910
01/09/2009 01500 - 2
SECTION 01585
PROJ ECT SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Project identification sign.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design sign and structure to withstand 50 miles/hr wind velocity.
B. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for duration of
construction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawing: Show content, layout, lettering, color, foundation, structure and grades of
members.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SIGN MATERIALS
A. Structure and Framing: New, wood, structurally adequate.
B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade plywood with medium density overlay, minimum 3/4 inch thick,
standard large sizes to minimize joints.
C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized.
D. Paint and Primers: Exterior quality, two coats; sign background of color as selected.
E. Lettering: Exterior quality paint, colors as selected.
2.02 PROJ ECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
A. One painted sign, 32 sq ft area, bottom 6 feet above ground.
B. Content:
1. Project Rendering title, logo and name of Owner as indicated on Contract Documents.
2. Names and titles of authorities (HUD) and Funding Agencies.
3. Names and titles of Architect.
4. Name of Prime Contractor.
5. Space to post wage rates.
6. Sign layout shall be approved by owner and architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B. Erect at location of high public visibility adjacent to main entrance to site.
C. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to resist wind
loadings.
D. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
E. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
08-7910
Section 01585
PROJ ECT SIGNS
01585 - 1
01/09/2009
3.02 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.
3.03 REMOVAL
A. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations at completion of Project and restore the area.
END OF SECTION
Section 01585
PROJ ECT SIGNS
08-7910
01/09/2009 01585 - 2

SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. General product requirements.
B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C. Product option requirements.
D. Substitution limitations and procedures.
E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
A. Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to
bid date.
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.
B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's
standard colors, textures, and patterns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for
connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification
sections.
2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
08-7910
Section 01600
01600 - 1
01/09/2009
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during
the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
D. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level
of the specified product in all respects.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the
Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related cost under this
contract except architect's redesign fees and that he Waives claims for additional costs or
time extension related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request; when they are requested directly by a
subcontractor or supplier; or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.
F. By Providing substitute products the contractor shall assume responsibility for and pay costs for
the following
1. Making changes to the work of other trades necessitated by the substitutions, in order for
the substitutions to be properly installed.
2. If substitution necessitates change in structural work:
a. Provide structural drawings, sealed by a licensed structural engineer, which detail the
structural changes.
b. Making the structural changes in accordance with those structural drawings.
3. Electrical work, such as conduits, disconnect switches, starters, breakers, fuses, and wire
sizes, voltage and phases shown on electrical drawings are selected on the basis of the
prime scheduled and specified equipment of the General, Plumbing, HVAC, and fire
protection Drawings and Specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor
furnishing alternate or substitute equipment to provide and pay for all changes to such
Electrical work, due to increased current requirements, horsepower, amps, watts, voltage,
phase, or motor sizes. The contractor furnishing alternate or substitute equipment shall
pay for different conduits, disconnect switches, starters, breakers, fuses, and wire sizes,
and installation. Contractor shall submit to the architect written documentation of such
changes in Electrical work. Such changes shall be approved by Architect before installation.
Section 01600
08-7910
01/09/2009 01600 - 2
G. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution. Substitution Approval Form ,which immediatly follows this section,
must be included with each request. Include product identification, including
manufacturer's name and address.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, samples, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed product equivalence. Submit name and address of similar projects on which
product has been used, and date of each installation. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. Submit Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List
significant variations. Provide data relating to changes in construction schedule.
4. Submit Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.
5. Submit designation of required license fees or royalties, availability of maintenance services,
sources of replacement materials.
6. Submit list of changes required in other work or products.
7. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
H. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of Architect.
3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
or damage.
I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 01600
01600 - 3
01/09/2009

SUBSTITUTION APPROVAL FORM

PROJECT:

Request for substitution requires burden of proof on Proposer and constitutes a representation
that the submitter:

Yes No

Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified product in all respects.
Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.

Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required
for the work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related cost under
this contract except architect's redesign fees and that he waives claims for additional
costs or time extension related to the substitution which may subsequently become
apparent.

Will reimburse Owner and Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C. for review or redesign
services associated with re-approval by authorities.

Submit three (3) copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
proposed substitution. Substitution Approval Form must be included with each request. Include
product identification, including manufacturer's name and model no.

Submit Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified; List significant
variations. Provide data relating to changes in construction schedule.

Submit list of changes required in other work or products.

PRODUCT SPECIFIED: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

Manufacturer:

Model #:

Cost:

Manufacturer:

Model #:

Cost:

COST DIFFERENCE:

Tyson and Billy Architects, P.C.
Company Name Architect Firm

Signature Signature

Date Date

SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Cutting and patching.
C. Surveying for laying out the work.
D. Cleaning and protection.
E. Starting of systems and equipment.
F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
H. General requirements for maintenance service.
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C. Section 01510 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.
D. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties and bonds.
E. Section 02225 - Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof; site utility
demolition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and
locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Date and time work will be executed.
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
08-7910
Section 01700
01700 - 1
01/09/2009
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Illinois and acceptable to Architect.
Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an
Insurance Certificate.
B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in Illinois.
1.05 PROJ ECT CONDITIONS
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
D. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by
construction operations.
E. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging
the work.
F. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or
invading premises.
G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water,
and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that
are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
Section 01700
08-7910
01/09/2009 01700 - 2
and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01600.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
08-7910
Section 01700
01700 - 3
01/09/2009
I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
J . Contractor shall provide 2 copies of final as-built survey showing utility locations and 2 copies
surveyor's report HUD #2457 and subsequent updates as required by HUD.
3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work
in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or
non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to
provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute
patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to
specified condition.
E. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture
resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids
with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
J . Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
unit.
Section 01700
08-7910
01/09/2009 01700 - 4
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair
substrate prior to repairing finish.
K. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
L. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where
new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
M. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections
due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce
uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire
surface to nearest intersections.
3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or
remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose
off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
08-7910
Section 01700
01700 - 5
01/09/2009
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to
date of Substantial Completion.
B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season
within six months.
D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
and instruction of owner personnel.
E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual
with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
3.10 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.11 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
E. Clean filters of operating equipment.
F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose
of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect.
B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
Section 01700
08-7910
01/09/2009 01700 - 6
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's review.
E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.
F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.
G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.
3.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever
is longer.
C. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections for ONE year
from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
and lubricate as required.
E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
F. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 01700
01700 - 7
01/09/2009

SECTION 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product
data, and samples.
B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
C. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
D. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Prerequisites to Substantial Completion.
1. Punch list with items of delayed completion and its value.
2. Support documentation.
3. Complete Operation and Maintenance manuals
4. Warranties and Certificates as required by other sections of this manual.
5. Occupancy permit.
6. Start-up testing of building systems and copies of test results.
7. Change over of Locks.
8. Air handling balance report.
B. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
C. Prerequisites to final acceptance.
1. Final payment request with supporting affidavit.#2448
2. Completed Punch List
3. As-built survey and surveyor's report #2457 provided by the general contractor.
D. Provide Closeout Procedures
1. Turnover to owner personnel.
2. Final Cleaning and touch-up.
3. Removal of temporary facilities.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will
be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of
all document sets as required prior to final submission.
2. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
F. Warranties and Bonds:
1. Make submittals within 10 days before Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
2. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,
submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of
08-7910
Section 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01780 - 1
01/09/2009
the warranty period.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJ ECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended
schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
Section 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08-7910
01/09/2009 01780 - 2
C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations
for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for
insertion of data.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance
and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment,
adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required
for maintenance.
J . Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.
L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to
be maintained in storage.
N. Include test and balancing reports.
O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of
described products.
B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
08-7910
Section 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
01780 - 3
01/09/2009
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product
and major component parts of equipment.
F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description
identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods
and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Certificates.
c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
J . Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for
insertion of data.
K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products
and systems, indexed to content of the volume.
3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of
Contents.
END OF SECTION
Section 01780
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08-7910
01/09/2009 01780 - 4
Enola A Dew Apartments Section 02230
08-7910 SITE CLEARING

02230 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 02230
SITE CLEARI NG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain.
2. Removing trees and other vegetation.
3. Clearing and grubbing.
4. Topsoil stripping.
5. Removing above-grade site improvements.
6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place.
7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 2 Section "Building Demolition" for demolition of structures and site
improvements.
2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.
3. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing
topsoil for lawns and planting.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and
clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than
underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than
2 inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials
shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

02230 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings,
adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by site clearing.
B. Record drawings according to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical,
and mechanical conditions.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration
work on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of
Contract.
C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on
Owner's premises where indicated.
D. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water
runoff or airborne dust per the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

02230 - 3 01/09/2009


1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 UTILITIES
A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated private utilities that serve existing
structures before site clearing when requested by Contractor.
1. Verify that private utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with
site clearing.
B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. (OR)
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new
construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be
relocated.
2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner
where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.
3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a minimum
depth of 12 inches below proposed subgrade.
4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,
unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact
each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
3.4 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with
underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

02230 - 4 01/09/2009


1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other
waste materials.
3.5 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of
existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces
vertically.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials,
and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's
property.
END OF SECTION 02230
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings.
2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade.
4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
5. Base course for asphalt paving.
1. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for a schedule of unit prices.
2. Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and
protecting trees to remain.
3. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing
topsoil for lawns and plantings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1. Undercut Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect.
Undercut excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 2 01/09/2009


2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial
work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
F. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and
boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that when tested by an independent
geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586, exceeds a standard penetration
resistance of 100 blows/2 inches.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
H. Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or
layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill
or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
J . Utilities include on-site and off-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, SW, SP, ML, CL
and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 2- inches in
any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a
combination of these group symbols.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 3 01/09/2009


1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material content;
free of stones -inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to
plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled
surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay
lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
a. Supplement with imported topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are
insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or
mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from bogs
or marshes.
F. Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve
and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and
natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; conforming to State of Illinois, Dept of Transportation
Gradation CA-5, CA-6, or CA-7.
H. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; conforming to State of Illinois, Dept of
Transportation Gradation CA-5, CA-6, or CA-7
I. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone,
and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not
more than 8 percent passing a No. 16 sieve.
J . Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate with 90-100 percent passing a 1/2- inch sieve and 0 to
5 percent passing a No. 16 sieve.
K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile;
made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties
determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf ; ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491.
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50; ASTM D 4751.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 4 01/09/2009


B. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation
geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum
properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:
1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf; ASTM D 4632.
2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf; ASTM D 4533.
3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833.
4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491.
5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30; ASTM D 4751.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide
protective insulating materials as necessary.
C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage
ditches.
2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
3.3 EXPLOSIVES
A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.
3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 5 01/09/2009


1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth.
1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material
not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock.
a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by Architect.
C. Furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of
supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed
and construction loads.
1. Conform to the requirements of the Municipality and all authorities having jurisdiction.
3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.
Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete
formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and
grades.
3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
3.8 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions for changes in the Work.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 6 01/09/2009


C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of
excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect.
3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials
without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to
prevent windblown dust.
1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
3.10 BACKFILL
A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents.
3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities.
4. Removing concrete formwork.
5. Removing trash and debris.
6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
B. Place and compact initial backfill to a height shown on the drawings over the utility pipe or
conduit.
1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of utility system.
2. Under paved areas, curbs, slabs, sidewalks, structures and footings and within 2 feet of
same backfill with engineered fill.
3. Under Grass and planted areas backfill with satisfactory soil.
C. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
D. Place and compact final backfill to final subgrade.
1. Under paved areas, curbs, slabs, sidewalks, structures and footings and within 2 feet of
same backfill with engineered fill.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 7 01/09/2009


2. Under Grass and planted areas backfill with satisfactory soil.
3.12 FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.
B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost
or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Compact cohesive satisfactory soils to not less than the following percentages of minimum
density according to ASTM D 1557 at 2% optimum moisture content.:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify as necessary and
recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at
95 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 92 percent.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 8 01/09/2009


D. Compact cohesionless granular fill to calculated Maximum Relative Density not les than the
following percentages according to ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254.
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements 85 percent.
2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill material at 80 percent.
3.15 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a
10-foot straightedge.
3.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions,
overlapping sides and ends.
B. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on separation fabric according to fabric
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade and as follows:
1. Place base course material over subbase.
2. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to ASTM D 1557.
3. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place materials
in a single layer.
5. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials
in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when
compacted.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 9 01/09/2009


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing
agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other
footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade
when approved by Architect.
D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in
no case fewer than three tests.
2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
3.18 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
08-7910 EARTHWORK

02300 - 10 01/09/2009


B. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.

08-7910 WATER DISTRIBUTION

02510 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 02510
WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the
following:
1. Water services.
2. Fire-service mains.
3. Combined water service and fire-service mains.
B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for
installation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS Combined Water Service and Fire-Service Main: Exterior water piping for both
domestic-water and fire-suppression piping.
B. Water Service: Exterior domestic-water piping.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Precast concrete vaults, including frames and covers, ladders, and drains.
C. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Sections include the
following: Valves.

02510 - 2 01/09/2009

A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of piping and
specialties and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,
including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-service
piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.
C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of the appropriate testing agency.
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve
and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.
B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:
1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient
dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures
when outdoor storage is necessary.
C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.
Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or
rigging points.
D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor when storing inside.
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.
G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless

02510 - 3 01/09/2009

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Mechanical-J oint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint, bell- and plain-spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
1. Mechanical-J oint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Per the requirements of the water purveyor.
2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509, gray- or ductile-iron body
and bonnet; with bronze or gray- or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and
stem nut.
a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig.
b. End Connections: Mechanical joint.
c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.
2.4 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES
A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: Comply with MSS SP-60. Include sleeve and valve compatible
with drilling machine.
1. Manufacturer:
a. Per the requirements of the water purveyor.
2. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with
flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe
material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

02510 - 4 01/09/2009

3. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face
flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.
B. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench,
extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.
2.5 CONCRETE VAULTS
A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete vault, designed for A-16 load designation according to
ASTM C 857 and made according to ASTM C 858.
B. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps.
C. Manhole frame and cover: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron, 24-inch minimum-
diameter traffic frame and cover with WATER cast in.
D. Drain: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body
anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze
ball or clapper-type backwater valve.
2.6 FREESTANDING FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502, one 4-1/2 and two 2-1/2 outlets, 5-1/4-inch main
valve, drain valve, and 6-inch mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to
AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against
pressure and closing with pressure, and 150-psig minimum working-pressure design.
1. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department.
Include cast-iron caps with steel chains.
2. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat.
3. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or
counterclockwise.
4. Exterior Finish: Red alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Application: Use mechanical-joint-end valves for 3-inch and larger underground
installation.
B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Use the following for valves in vaults:

02510 - 5 01/09/2009

a. Gate Valves, 6-inch and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem, resilient
seated.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
1. Install PE corrosion-protection encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B. Install piping by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other
obstructions that cannot be disturbed.
C. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building water piping
systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.
1. Terminate water-service piping five (5) feet from building wall until building water piping
systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for
piping material. Make connections to building water piping systems when those systems
are installed.
D. Sleeves are specified in Division 15.
E. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 15.
F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.
G. See Division 15 Sections for potable-water piping inside the building.
H. See Division 13 Sections for fire-suppression water piping inside the building.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground
valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.
3.6 VAULT INSTALLATION
A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.

02510 - 6 01/09/2009

A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have
hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize
system. Use only potable water.
B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours.
1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments.
Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test
pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per
100 joints or as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Remake leaking joints
with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.
C. Prepare reports of testing activities and submit as required by the authorities having
jurisdiction.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have
been altered, extended, or repaired before use.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in
AWWA C651
B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities and submit as required by the authorities
having jurisdiction.
08-7910 SANITARY SEWERAGE

SECTION 02530
SANITARY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary sewerage five (5) feet outside the building.
1. Division 15 Sections
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VCP: Vitrified Clay Pipe
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments for the following:
1. Precast concrete manholes, including frames and covers.
2. Piping Materials.
B. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Do not store plastic pipe and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written
rigging instructions.
02530 - 1 01/09/2009


A. Site Information: Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility
locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP): ASTM C 700, bell and spigot ends, extra strength unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Fittings: Vitrified clay bell and spigot, same strength as adjoining pipe, compression
joints complying with ASTM C 425.
2.2 MANHOLES
A. Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is
required. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
3. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber.
4. Grade Rings: Include reinforced-concrete rings that match diameter frame and cover.
5. Steps: ASTM C 478, individual steps, cast in. Omit steps for manholes less than 52
inches deep.
6. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to
base section.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for
heavy-duty service. Include indented top design with lettering "SANITARY SEWER" or as
required by the authorities having jurisdiction cast into cover.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
02530 - 2 01/09/2009


3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious
materials ratio.
1. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel.
C. Structure Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. Include
channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58
maximum water-cementitious materials ratio.
2.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading
classifications according to the following applications:
1. Light Duty: In earth or grass foot-traffic areas.
2. Medium Duty: In paved foot-traffic areas.
3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas.
4. Extra-Heavy Duty: In roads.
5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe
and fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
3.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
02530 - 3 01/09/2009


A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is
specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods.
1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications:
a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD.
b. Increaser/reducer-pattern, sleeve type to join piping of different sizes.
3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it
is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations
indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless
otherwise indicated.
F. Install vitrified clay pipe according to ASTM C12.
3.5 PIPE J OINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: J oin and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. VCP Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ASTM C12 and the manufacturers written
instructions.
C. J oin piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application.
Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
D. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
02530 - 4 01/09/2009


B. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.
C. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes. Install precast concrete
manhole sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil
pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions
to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with surface.
3.9 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as
nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch
overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, 24-inch or larger, or to underground
structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be
packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or
structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated.
On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for
minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
1. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless
D. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making
tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.10 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below:
02530 - 5 01/09/2009


1. In pavement areas: remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final
grade. Fill to finished subgrade with self compacting coarse aggregate (CA-7).
2. In landscaped areas: remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final
grade. Fill to within 24-inches of finished subgrade with self compacting coarse
aggregate (CA-7) and to within 6-inches of finished grade with compacted satisfactory
soil per Section 02300. Topsoil to finished grade.
3. In Building Areas: Remove entire structure. Fill to within 12-inches of finished subgrade
with self compacting coarse aggregate (CA-7). Fill to finished subgrade with concrete,
3500psi.
A. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours
advance notice.
4. Submit separate reports for each test.
a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.
1) Allowable leakage is maximum of 100 gal. per inch of nominal pipe size per
mile of pipe, during 24-hour period.
2) Close openings in system and fill with water.
3) Purge air and refill with water.
4) Disconnect water supply.
5) Test and inspect joints for leaks.
6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, Section
"Hydrostatic Testing." Use test pressure of at least 10 psig.
5. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
6. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
02530 - 6 01/09/2009

08-7910 STORM DRAINAGE

02630 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 02630
STORM DRAI NAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes storm drainage outside the building.
1. Division 15 Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RCP: Reinforce Concrete Sewer Pipe
B. VCP: Vitrified Clay Pipe
A. Gravity-Flow, Nonpressure-Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.
A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer's written
rigging instructions.
A. Site Information: Perform site survey and verify existing utility locations.
B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

02630 - 2 01/09/2009

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements.
2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile-Iron Sewer Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push-on joints.
1. Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on
joints.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.
B. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP): ASTM C 700, bell and spigot ends, extra strength unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Fittings: Vitrified clay bell and spigot, same strength as adjoining pipe, compression
joints complying with ASTM C 425.
C. Reinforced-Concrete (RCP) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class IV, for gasketed joints.
2.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly
fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for nonpressure joints.
1. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443, rubber.
2. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber.
3. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal.
4. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.
5. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert.
2.4 MANHOLES
A. Normal-Traffic Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
1. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,
as required to prevent flotation.
3. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place
both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step.

02630 - 3 01/09/2009

B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron castings designed for
heavy-duty service. Include indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into
cover.
2.5 CATCH BASINS
A. Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of
depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints.
2. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place
both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Retain
subparagraph above or below.
B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for heavy-duty service.
2.6 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio.
1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2.7 POLYMER-CONCRETE CHANNELS
A. General: Modular system of precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and
appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include
number of units required to form total lengths indicated.
B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems: Include the following components:
1. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4-
inch inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent
(Minimum) and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension
sections necessary for required depth.
a. Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate.
2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots that fit recesses in
channels.
a. Material: Gray iron.
b. Material: Ductile iron.
3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated.

02630 - 4 01/09/2009

4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel
sections.
C. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Channel-Section J oining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer.
E. Gray-Iron Trench Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide top surface, rectangular
body with anchor flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular, secured grate. Include
units of total lengths indicated and number of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot
connections, of sizes indicated. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the
following applications:
2. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas.CLEANOUTS
A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and
round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot
connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading
classifications according to the following applications:
1. Light Duty: In earth or grass foot-traffic areas.
3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas.
4. Extra-Heavy Duty: In roads.
5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe
and fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Refer to Part 2 of this Section for detailed specifications for pipe and fitting products listed
below. Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods according to applications indicated.
3.3 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLING AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Special Pipe Couplings: Use where required to join piping and no other appropriate method is
specified. Do not use instead of specified joining methods.
1. Use the following pipe couplings for nonpressure applications:
a. Sleeve type to join piping, of same size, or with small difference in OD.
B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use where indicated. Include PE film, pipe encasement.

02630 - 5 01/09/2009

3.4 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping
layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it
is completed.
C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes
and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations
F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building's storm drains, of sizes and in locations
3.5 PIPE J OINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General: J oin and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.
B. Concrete Pipe and Fittings: Install according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
Use the following seals:
1. Round Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets.
2. Elliptical Pipe: ASTM C 877, Type I, sealing bands.
3. Arch Pipe: ASTM C 877, Type I, sealing bands.
C. Install vitrified clay pipe according to ASTM C12.
1. Install fittings according to the manufacturers written instructions.
D. J oin piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this application.
Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems' materials and dimensions.
3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface. Install precast concrete manhole
sections with gaskets according to ASTM C 891.
3.7 CATCH-BASIN INSTALLATION

02630 - 6 01/09/2009

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.
3.9 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives,
fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom
and sides where indicated and as recommended by the system manufacturer.
3.10 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil
pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions
to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 12 by 12 by 12 inches
deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade or flush with pavement grade
3.11 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.
B. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.
3.12 TAP CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as
nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.
B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of
existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch
overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.
C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, 21-inch or larger, or to underground
structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be
packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or
structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated.

02630 - 7 01/09/2009

On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 12 inches of concrete for
minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to
undisturbed ground.
1. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless
D. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making
tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in
place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may
result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:
1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads.
2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable
methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.
B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below:
1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping.
2. Remove top of structure down to at least 24 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12
inches of top with stone or gravel. Fill to top with concrete in pavement areas and
topsoil in landscaped areas.
A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses.
Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.
1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning.
2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.
3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has
occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion
of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder
of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

02630 - 8 01/09/2009

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate reports for each test.
5. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
08-7910 HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVING

02741 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 02741
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.
3. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay.
4. Asphalt surface treatments.
5. Pavement-marking paint.
6. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for
aggregate pavement shoulders.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.
B. IDOT: Illinois Department of Transportation.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable
requirements of standard specifications of state or local DOT.
1. Standard Specification: Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,
Adopted J anuary 1, 2002
2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in
standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

02741 - 2 01/09/2009

A. J ob-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix
proposed for the Work.
B. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.
C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.
1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge
Construction, Adopted J anuary 1, 2002 for asphalt paving work.
A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken
and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of
manufacture, and directions for storage.
B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range
required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively
damp or if the following conditions are not met:
1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F.
2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910.
3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of
placement.
4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 45 deg F and rising at time of
placement.
B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a
minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for
water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AGGREGATES

02741 - 3 01/09/2009

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly
cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel,
properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.
1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total
aggregate mass.
D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1, PG 70-22.
B. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30.
C. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977, emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade
and consistency for application.
D. Water: Potable.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular,
liquid, or wettable powder form.
B. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot,
and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.
C. J oint Sealant: ASTM D 3405, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous
sealant.
D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with FS TT-P-115, Type I or AASHTO M 248, Type N.
1. Color: As indicated.
2.4 MIXES
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes, IDOT Binder Course Mixture B
and Surface Course Mixture C designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design
Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types."
PART 3 - EXECUTION

02741 - 4 01/09/2009

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that
require further compaction.
C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold
milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections
indicated.
1. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 inches 2 inches 3 inches.
2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges.
3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course.
4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling.
5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material
separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.
6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility.
7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material
from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not
dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
2. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over
surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic.
Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have
evaporated.
3. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gal./sq.
yd.
1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.
2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.
Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
3.4 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION
A. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd.

02741 - 5 01/09/2009

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer's written instructions. Broom or roll
geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and
transverse joints 6 inches.
1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving
overlay the same day.
3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING
A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place
asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation
of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.
1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated.
2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift.
3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.
4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of
one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and
tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser
width are required.
1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to
overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt
surface course.
C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools
to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent
segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
3.6 J OINTS
A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct
joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix
asphalt course.
1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints.
2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches.
3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.
4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt
Pavements."
5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive
displacement.
6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
3.7 COMPACTION

02741 - 6 01/09/2009

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without
excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate
compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and
outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade,
and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-
mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix
asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:
1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to
AASHTO T 245, but not less than 92 percent nor greater than 100 percent.
D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still
warm.
E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to
proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and
replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface
smoothness.
G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled
and hardened.
H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following
tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the
following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or
longitudinally to paved areas:
1. Base Course: 1/4 inch.
2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch.
3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.
Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING

02741 - 7 01/09/2009

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Architect.
B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.
C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions
indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide
a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.
B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549.
D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for
compliance with smoothness tolerances.
E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and
compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.
1. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples
according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.
a. One core sample will be taken for every 500 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement,
with no fewer than 2 cores taken.
b.
F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements
indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.11 DISPOSAL
A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and
legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.

08-7910 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

02751 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 02751
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement not identified on the Structural
Drawings.
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.
2. Division 2 Section "Pavement J oint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement
and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.
3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, expansive hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated
blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of
current materials:
1. Aggregates.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

02751 - 2 01/09/2009

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with
ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mix Concrete
Association's Plant Certification Program.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.
E. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified
by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 15 feet or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat
sheets.
B. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
C. J oint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
D. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

02751 - 3 01/09/2009

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. General: Use the same brand and type of cementitious material from the same manufacturer
throughout the Project.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
C. Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse aggregate as
follows:
1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
D. Water: ASTM C 94.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-J oint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B. Expansion- and Isolation-J oint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, Polyethylene closed cell joint filler
C. Hot Applied Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405.
D. Coloring Agent: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing
admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Stamping Equipment: Pattern mat from Concrete Coatings of Illinois (877-253-8903) or equal.
Pattern as selected by Architect and as per approved mock-ups.
F. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type; ready mixed; complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I,
or AASHTO M 248, Type N.
1. Color: As indicated.
2. Color: Red for handicapped requirements
2.6 CONCRETE MIXES

02751 - 4 01/09/2009

A. Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field
experience.
B. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit: 3 inches.
C. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing chemicals.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional
compaction. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected
and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and
with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

02751 - 5 01/09/2009

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one
full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps
in either direction.
3.4 J OINTS
A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line
with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right
angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction J oints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at
locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour, unless
pavement terminates at isolation joints.
1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not
continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation J oints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
3. Terminate joint filler at manufacturers recommendation below finished surface if joint
sealant is indicated.
4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated.
5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on
both sides of joint.
D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate one-half of
dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
E. Contraction J oints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated.
1. Grooved J oints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with groover tool to the following radius. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
a. Radius: 1/4 inch.
F. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with
an edging tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

02751 - 6 01/09/2009

1. Radius: 1/4 inch.
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement
steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their
work.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete.
Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do
not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish
elevation and alignment.
D. Comply with requirements and with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing,
transporting, and placing concrete.
E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 309R.
1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.
H. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more
than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by
Architect.
I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Commence initial floating using
bull floats or darbies to form an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess
moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces
before beginning finishing operations or spreading dry-shake surface treatments.
J . Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement,
submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed
concrete.

02751 - 7 01/09/2009

K. Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised
mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to
required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
paver machine during operations.
L. When adjoining pavement lanes or sections are placed in separate pours, do not operate
equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive
strength.
M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 35 deg F uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
N. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as
follows when hot-weather conditions exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement
below 90 deg F Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcement steel with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, reinforcement steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations
is prohibited.
B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-
driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces
to true planes. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

02751 - 8 01/09/2009

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations
in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any
holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3.8 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES
A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows:
1. Elevation: 1/8 inch.
2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch , minus 1/4 inch.
3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/8 inch (6
mm).
4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch.
7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: Length of
dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
8. J oint Spacing: 3 inches.
9. Contraction J oint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. J oint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified
with Architect.
B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.

02751 - 9 01/09/2009

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated
with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a
minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample
materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and
testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.
B. Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests
will be required when concrete consistency changes.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 35 deg F
and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-
strength specimens.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; one set of four standard cylinders for
each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded
and stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are
required.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu.
yd. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one
specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
7. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a
given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be
provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive compressive-strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive
strength and no individual compressive-strength test result falls below specified
compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
C. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency,
concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in pavement, design compressive strength
at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of
break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

02751 - 10 01/09/2009

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as the sole basis for approval or rejection.
E. Additional Tests: Testing agency shall make additional tests of the concrete when test results
indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met,
as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete
by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.
3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not
meet requirements in this Section.
B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks
or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.
C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 02751a
SECTION 02821
ORNAMENTAL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Total Welded Ornamental Fence System. The system shall include all components (i.e., panels,
posts, gates and hardware) required.
B. Excavation for post bases; concrete foundation for posts.
C. Horizontal Sliding Cantilever Automatic gates and related hardware.
D. Provide pre-wired, self -contained, slide gate operator for horizontal sliding gates, including all
selected attachments and accessory equipment.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts.
B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Proximity Reader for Gate Operator.
C. Division 16 - Electrical Service and Connections.
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
B. ASTM D 523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.
C. ASTM D 714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint
D. ASTM D 822 - Practice for Conducting Tests on Paint and Related Coatings and materials using
Filtered Open-Flame Carbon Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus
E. ASTM D 1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to
Corrosive Environments.
F. ASTM D 2244 - Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences form Instrumentally Measured
Color Coordinates.
G. ASTM D 2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact)
H. ASTM D 3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on posts, accessories, fittings and hardware.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,
hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. Show connections to adjacent construction,
range of travel, and all electrical and mechanical connections to the operator. Show size and
location of concrete mounting pad. Underground electrical runs and inductive vehicle obstruction
loop locations shall be shown on the shop drawings.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements, post foundation
anchor bolt templates, and installation of accessories and gate operator.
08-7910
Section 02821
02821 - 1
01/09/2009
E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts
relative to property lines and easements.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five year limited warranty against all defects in materials or workmanship on gate
operator. Defective materials shall be replaced with comparable materials furnished by the
manufacturer, at a no cost to the owner.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment, provide proof of
attending a HYSecurity factory technical training within previous three years, or obtain other
significant manufacturer endorsement of technical aptitude.
C. Each operator shall bear a label indicating that the operator mechanism has been tested for full
power and pressure of all hydraulic components, full stress tests of all mechanical components
and electrical test of all overload devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fences and Gates:
1. Ameristar Fence Products; Product Montage Plus ATF Welded Ornamental Steel
Genesis Three Rail Design with Rings. Bottom Rail Flush and Transport Aluminum
Cantilever gate: www.ameristarfence.com
B. Gate Operator:
1. HySecurity; Product SlideDriver 10 (Part# 222 SS ST) Slide gate Operator with Smart touch
Controller; www.hysecurity.com
C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel Material for Fence panels and posts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A653/
A653M, with a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi and a minimum zinc (hot-dip galvanized)
coating weight of 0.60 oz/ft2. Coating designation G-60.
B. Material for Pickets shall be 3/4" square x 16 Ga. tubing. The rails shall be steel channel, 1.5" x
1.4375" x 14 Ga. Picket holes in the rails shall be spaced 4.675" o.c. Posts shall be a minimum
of 3" square x 12 Ga.
C. The materials used for cantilever gate framing shall be manufactured from aluminum
(designation 6063-T-6) with a yield strength of 25,000psi, a tensile strength of 30,000 psi and a
standard mill finish. The Trasnport top track shall be manufactured from aluminum (Designation
6063-T-6) with a yield strength of 25,000 psi, a tensile strength of 30,000 psi and a standard mill
finish. Gate frame shall be covered with ornamental fence to match. Each Gate section shall be
supplied with truss cables for proper bracing. Two upper suspension rollers and two lower guide
rollers shall be included with each gate.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Pickets, rails, and posts shall be pre-cut to specified lengths. Rails shall be pre-punched to accept
pickets.
B. Pickets shall be inserted into the pre-punched hoes in the rails and welded to obtain a rigid panel
Section 02821
08-7910
01/09/2009 02821 - 2
assembly.
C. Gates shall be fabricated using welded ornamental panel material and gate ends having a 1-3/4"
square cross sectional size. All rail and upright intersections shall be joined by welding. All
picket and intersections shall also be joined by welding.
2.04 GATE OPERATOR
A. Operators shall be built to UL 325 standards and be listed by a testing laboratory. Complete all
electrical work according to local codees . All fieldwork shall be performed in a neat and
professional manner, completed to journeyman standards.
B. Provide multiple external sensors capable of reversing the gate in either direction upon sensing
an obstruction.
C. Operation
1. Operation shall be by means of a metal rail passing between a pair of hydraulically driven
solid metal wheels with polyurethane threads. Operator motors shall be hydraulic, geroller
type, and system shall not include belts, gears, pulleys, roller chains or sprockets to
transfer power from operator to gate panel. The operator shall generate a minimum
horizontal pull of 300 pounds without the drive wheels slopping and without distortion of
supporting arms. Operator shall be capable of handling gates weighing up to 1000 pounds.
Gate panel velocity shall not be less than 1.0 feet per second and shall be stopped
gradually to prevent shock loads to the gate and operator assembly.
2. Standard mechanical components shall include as a minimum
a. Supporting arms: Cast aluminum channel. Arms shall incorporate a fully bushed,
1-1/2: bronze bearing surface, acting on arm pivot pins. See item b.
b. Arm pivot pins: 3/4" diameter, stainless steel with integral tabs for ease of removal.
c. Tension spring: 2-1/2" heavy duty, 800 pound capacity.
d. Tension adjustment: finger tightened nut, not requiring the use of tools
e. Drive release: Must instantly release tension on both drive wheels and disengage them
from contact with drive rail in a single motion, for manual operation.
f. Limit switches: Fully adjustable, toggle types.
g. Electrical enclosure: oversized , metal , with hinged lid gasketed for protection from
intrusion of foreign objects and providing ample space for the addition of accessories.
h. Chassis: 1/4" steel base plate, and 12 ga. sides, back welded and ground smooth.
i. Cover: 16 Ga. galvanized sheet metal with a textured paint finish. all joints welded.
j. Finish: Prime painted with a textured finish coat, proven to withstand 1000 hour salt
spray test.
k. Drive Wheels: 6" Dia. Metal hub with polyurethane tread.
l. Drive Rail: Shall be extruded 6061 T6, not less than 1/8" thick. Drive rail shall
incorporate alignment pins for ease of replacement or splicing. Pins shall enable a
perfect butt splice.
m. Hydraulic hose: Shall be 1/4" synthetic rated to 2750 psi.
n. Hydraulic Valves: Shall be individually replaceable cartridge type, in an integrated
hydraulic manifold.
o. Hose fittings; At manifold shall be quick-disconnect type, others shall be swivel type.
p. Hydraulic fluid: High performance type with a viscosity Indebt greater than 375 and
temperature range -40F to 167F degrees.
q. A zero to 2000-psi pressure gauge, mounted on the manifold for diagnostics shall be a
standard component.
r. The hydraulic fluid reservoir shall be formed from a single piece of metal, non-welded,
and shall be powder painted on the inside and the outside, to prevent fluid
contamination.
3. Minimum standard electrical components
a. Pump Motor: shall be 1 HP, 56C, TEFC, continuous duty motor, with a service factor of
08-7910
Section 02821
02821 - 3
01/09/2009
1.15 or greater.
b. All components shall have overload protection.
c. Controls: Smart Touch Controller Board with 256K of program memory containing:
1) Inherent entrapment sensor
2) Built in "warn before operate" system
3) Built in timer to close
4) Liquid Crystal display for reporting of functions
5) 26 programmable output relay options
6) Anti-tailgate mode
7) Built-in power surge/ lightning strike protection
8) Menu configuration, event logging and system diagnostics easily accessible with a
PC and manufacturer's START software
9) RS232 port for connection to laptop or other computer peripheral and RS485
connection of Master/Slave systems or network interface.
d. Transformer: 75 VA, non-jumpered taps, for all common voltages.
e. Closed circuit: 24 VDC
4. Required external sensors: See 1.05B. Specify photo eyes or gate edges or a combination
thereof to be installed such that the gate is capable of reversing in either direction upon
sensing an obstruction.
5. Optional control devices: Fob Reader outside property lines and vehicle detectors inside
property lines. Fob reader shall operate with the Key Fobs utilized to open the building
vestibule doors. - See 08710
6. Options:
a. Lock for Operator Cover
b. Drive wheel manual release indicator switch.
c. Heater with thermostat control.
d. Weather-stripped drive rail slot in chassis and snow wiper blades for drive rail.
e. Loop detectors as required for proper operation.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Finish shall be a duplex application of an epoxy primer and an acrylic topcoat. The minimum
cumulative coating thickness of the epoxy and acrylic shall be 2 mills. The color shall be black.
The coated panels and posts shall be capable of meeting the following performance
requirements:
B. Adhesion: Comply with ASTM D3359 - Method B: Adhesion (Retention of Coating) over 90% of
test area (Tape and knife test).
C. Corrosion Resistance: ASTM B117, ASTM D714, and ASTM D1654: Corrosion Resistance over
1,500 hours (Scribed per ASTM D1654; failure mode is accumulation of 1/8" coating loss from
scribe or medium #8 blisters)
D. Impact Resistance: ASTM D2794 - Impact resistance over 60 inch lb. (Forward impact using
0.625 ball.)
E. Weathering Resistance: ASTM D822, ASTM D2244, ASTM D523 (60 degree method) Weathering
Resistance over 1,000 hours (Failure mode is 60% loss of gloss or color variance of more than 3
delta-E color units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: ASTM F 567.
Section 02821
08-7910
01/09/2009 02821 - 4
C. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual conditions before installation of gate
operators. Do not proceed until gate panel is aligned and operates without binding.
D. Installer shall insure that the electric service to the operator is at least 20 AMPS. Operator
wattage is 1500.
E. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts.
A. Test gate operator thorough ten full cycles and adjust for operation without binding, scraping, or
uneven motion. Test limit switches for proper "at rest" gate position.
B. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation
3.03 CONTINUED SERVICE AND OWNER TRAINING
A. Train owner's personnel on how to safely shut off electrical power, release and manually operate
the gate. Additionally demonstrate the general maintenance of the gate operator and accessories
and provide one copy of the "Installation and Reference" manual for the owner's use.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch.
C. Components shall not infringe adjacent property lines.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 02821
02821 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 02843
PARKING BUMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage.
A. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
D. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following:
1. Nominal Size: 6 inches high, 8 inches wide, 7 feet long.
2. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends.
3. Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland Type II - Sulfate Resistant; white color.
4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 33 aggregate, water, and sand.
5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed steel bars; galvanized finish, strength
and size commensurate with precast unit design.
6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 3500 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent.
8. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish.
Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
9. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels.
10. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as
non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
B. Dowels: Steel, galvanized finish; 3/4 inch diameter, 6 inch long, pointed tip.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units.
B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work.
C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 02843
PARKING BUMPERS
02843 - 1
01/09/2009

SECTION 02871
BICYCLE RACKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Bicycle racks.
A. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Mounting surface for bicycle racks.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate size, shape, and dimensions, including clearances from adjacent walls,
doors, and obstructions.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Handle racks with sufficient care to prevent scratches and other damage to the finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bicycle Racks:
1. Columbia Cascade Company: www.timberform.com.
2. Creative Pipe, Inc: www.creativepipe.com.
3. Huntco Supply, LLC: www.huntco.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Bicycle Racks: Tubular steel pipe formed to allow at least one bicycle to lock simultaneously on
each bend and each end, securing one wheel and part of the frame.
1. Style: Serpentine rack formed from a continuous S.
2. Pipe: Stainless steel, ASTM A 312/A 312M, Type 304; NPS 2, Schedule 40S (2-3/8 inch
O.D., 0.154 inch wall).
3. Capacity: 7 bicycles.
4. Mounting: In-ground anchor.
5. Finish: Satin brushed.
6. Accessories: In-ground grout cover.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive bicycle racks.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
08-7910
Section 02871
BICYCLE RACKS
02871 - 1
01/09/2009
preparation before proceeding.
C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory substrates have been properly repaired.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install bicycle racks level, plumb, square, and correctly located as indicated on the drawings.
C. In-Ground Anchor Installation:
1. Prepare holes in size according to manufacturers instructions.
2. Place anchoring bolts through the holes in the pipe.
3. Lower rack into holes, ensuring the bottom of lower bends are at least 1-1/2 inch from the
ground.
4. Pour concrete and level rack.
5. Support until dry.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. Do not use cleaning materials or methods that could
damage finish.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 02871
BICYCLE RACKS
08-7910
01/09/2009 02871 - 2
SECTION 02923
SODDING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparation of subsoil.
B. Placing topsoil.
C. Fertilizing.
D. Sod installation.
E. Maintenance.
A. Section 02300 - Grading: Topsoil material.
B. Section 02300 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the
work of this section.
A. TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; Turfgrass Producers International.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Includes Dandelion, J imsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, J ohnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source.
C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass
height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.
A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum three years
experience, and certified by the State of Illinois.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company approved by the sod producer.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
A. Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.
B. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.
C. Furnish service and maintenance of sodded areas for two months from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
08-7910
Section 02923
SODDING
02923 - 1
01/09/2009
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Sod: TPI, Approved Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated below; with
strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5
weeds per 1000 sq ft. Minimum age of 24 months, with root development that will support its
own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two corners.
1. Kentucky Blue Grass Type.
B. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth,
taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay, or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of
minimum 5.4 and maximum 7.0.
C. Fertilizer: Commercial; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from
organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, to the following
proportions:
1. Nitrogen: 2 percent.
2. Phosphoric Acid: 4 percent.
3. Soluble Potash: 2 percent.
D. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of grass.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Edging: PVC.
2.03 HARVESTING SOD
A. Machine cut sod and load on pallets in accordance with TPI Guidelines.
B. Cut sod in area not exceeding 1 sq yd, with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum 1 inch topsoil base.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 02310.
B. Place topsoil in accordance with Section 02310.
C. Install edging at periphery of seeded areas in straight lines to consistent depth.
3.03 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.
C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.
D. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
E. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.04 LAYING SOD
A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.
B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration.
C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches
minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.
Section 02923
SODDING
08-7910
01/09/2009 02923 - 2
D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas.
E. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining edging.
F. On slopes 3 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every row
with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.
G. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.
H. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and
to remove minor depressions and irregularities.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Proivde maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.
B. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut
more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.
C. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.
D. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.
E. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.
F. Roll surface to remove irregularities.
G. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.
H. Immediately replace sod to areas that show deterioration or bare spots.
I. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 02923
SODDING
02923 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Preparation of subsoil.
B. Topsoil bedding.
C. New trees, plants, and ground cover.
D. Relocated trees, plants, and ground cover.
E. Mulch and Fertilizer.
F. Maintenance.
G. Tree Pruning.
A. Section 02300 - Grading: Topsoil material.
A. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock.
B. ANSI A300 Part 1 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations -- Tree, Shrub and
Other Woody Plant Maintenance -- Standard Practices.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Include Dandelion, J imsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak,
Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, J ohnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will,
Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section, and described in ANSI
Z60.1.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method; types, application frequency, and
recommended coverage of fertilizer.
C. Submit list of plant life sources.
A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with three
years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with three
years experience.
C. Tree Pruner Qualifications: Company specializing in pruning trees with proof of Arborist
Certification.
D. Tree Pruning: NAA - Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.
08-7910
Section 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930 - 1
01/09/2009
E. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer.
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
B. Plant Materials: Certified by federal department of agriculture; free of disease or hazardous
insects.
A. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of
manufacturer.
B. Protect and maintain plant life until planted.
C. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above
90 degrees F.
B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy
plants.
C. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing season,
with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
D. Maintain plant life for two months after Date of Substantial Completion.
E. Maintenance to include:
1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits.
2. Applying herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides.
3. Remedy damage from use of insecticides.
4. Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system.
5. Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas or
other wounds.
6. Disease control.
7. Maintaining wrapping, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires
tight. Repair or replace accessories when required.
8. Replacement of mulch.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER
A. Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in
climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the Work.
B. Planting Substitutions:
1. If unable to locate specified landscape materials, notify Owners Representative or Architect
for alternative sources or substitutions. Adjustment will be made at no additional cost to
the Owner. If replacements are down sized, credits to the Owner will be based on
comparable cost differentials customary for material and sizes involved.
Section 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
08-7910
01/09/2009 02930 - 2
2. Plants shall be supplied at the sizes specified. Plants of larger size may be used if
acceptable to the Owner and if size of roots or balls are increased proportionately.
2.02 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth,
taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; minimum pH
value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0.
2.03 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion
necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis..
1. Nitrogen: 5 percent.
2. Phosphoric Acid: 10 percent.
3. Soluble Potash: 10 percent.
B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic
materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4
to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.
C. Lime: Ground limestone, dolomite type, minimum 95 percent carbonates.
D. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of
plants.
2.04 MULCH MATERIALS
A. Mulching Material: well aged species wood ground bark, free of growth or germination inhibiting
ingredients.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Wrapping Materials: Balled, Burlapped, and Grade in accordance with American Standard for
Nursery Stock; ANSI z60.1.
B. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind
pressure and resulting movement of plant life.
C. Membrane: 8 mil thick, black polyethylene.
2.06 TOP SOIL MIX
A. A uniform mixture of 1 part peat and 3 parts topsoil by volume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared subsoil are ready to receive work.
B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.
C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in
grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated
subsoil.
C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas
08-7910
Section 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930 - 3
01/09/2009
where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.
D. Dig pits and beds 12 inches larger than plant root system.
3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 24 inches over area to be planted. Rake smooth.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 12
inches.
3.04 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil.
C. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.05 PLANTING
A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Architect.
B. Excavate planting pits for trees to a width 1-1/2 times diameter of tree ball and not less than 6
inches deeper than tree ball. Excavate planting pits or trenches for shrubs to a width of 1-1/2
times diameter of plant balls or containers, or 1'-0" wider than spread of roots (whichever is
larger), and 3 inches deeper than required for positioning at proper height.
C. Set plants vertical.
D. When planting ground cover dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots. Space
plants as indicated on drawings.
E. Remove non-biodegradable root containers.
F. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch
layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position.
G. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
H. At trees build a 3 inch high berm of topsoil beyond edge of excavations. Apply a 3 inch thick
mulch of shredded hardwood bark, with a 3 foot diameter circle around deciduous trees. Apply
mulch to the drip line of evergreen trees.
I. At planting beds and shrubs form grade slightly dished, and bermed at edges of excavation.
Apply a three inch thick mulch of shredded hardwood bark. Lift plant foliage above mulch.
3.06 PLANT RELOCATION AND RE-PLANTING
A. Relocate plants as indicated by Architect.
B. Replant plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared topsoil mixture, at a minimum depth of
6 inches under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball.
C. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
Section 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
08-7910
01/09/2009 02930 - 4
A. Place decorative cover and membrane, where indicated on drawings.
B. Wrap deciduous shade and flowering tree trunks and place tree protectors.
3.08 PLANT SUPPORT
A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following:
1. Tree Caliper: 1 to 2 inches; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties
2. Tree Caliper: 2 to 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
3.09 TREE PRUNING
A. Perform pruning of trees as recommended in ANSI A300.
B. Prune newly planted and existing trees and shrubs, as required to remove dead, broken, and
split branches, improve natural shape, and thin out structure.
C. When pruning do not remove more than 15 percent of branches. Do not prune back terminal
leader.
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400.
B. During periods of hot sun and wind at time of planting, provide protective cover for Ground
Cover.
3.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.
B. Irrigate sufficiently to saturate root system and prevent soil from drying out.
C. Remove dead or broken branches and treat pruned areas or other wounds.
D. Neatly trim plants where necessary.
E. Immediately remove clippings after trimming.
F. Water to prevent soil from drying out.
G. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Control insect damage and disease. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
I. Remedy damage from use of herbicides and pesticides.
J . Replace mulch when deteriorated.
K. Maintain wrappings, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight.
Repair or replace accessories when required.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
02930 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International.
B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International.
C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
E. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
F. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society.
G. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
H. CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent
bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in
design of work of this type and licensed in Illinois.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI (DA4), CRSI (P1), and ACI 301.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
08-7910
Section 03200
03200 - 1
01/09/2009
B. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, unfinished.
C. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.
1. Flat Sheets.
2. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings.
D. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform
welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
C. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Reinforcement may be field adjusted within specified tolerances to avoid interference with other
reinforcement, conduits or embedded items. Do not heat, bend or cut bars in the field.
C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
D. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
E. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Beams:2 inch
2. Supported Slabs and J oists: 2 inch.
3. Column Ties: 2 inch.
4. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 1-1/2 inch.
5. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 2 inch.
6. Slabs on Fill: 2 inch.
F. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
G. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Division 16.
H. Structural Slabs: Install reinforcing fabric in longest practical length.
1. Lap adjoining pieces a minimum of one full mesh and tie splices with tie wire spaced at 18"
o.c.
2. Do not make laps midway between support beams or directly over beams of continuous
structures.
3. Offset laps in adjacent width to prevent continuous laps.
4. Slabs on Grade: Place reinforcing fabric one-fifth of slab thickness plus 1/4" from top of
finished slab. Lap fabric 6" all around and wire together not over 4' apart.
END OF SECTION
Section 03200
08-7910
01/09/2009 03200 - 2
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Concrete formwork.
B. Floors and slabs on grade.
C. Concrete foundation walls.
D. J oint devices associated with concrete work.
E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, and manholes.
F. Concrete curing.
A. Section 02751 - Cement Concrete Pavement: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
B. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers.
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International.
C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International.
D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete
Institute International.
E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.
F. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.
G. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International.
H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
J . ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
L. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
M. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method.
N. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
O. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
08-7910
Section 03300
03300 - 1
01/09/2009
Continuous Mixing.
P. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink).
Q. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion J oint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required
with adjacent construction for concrete accessories.
D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
E. Submit test Reports for test required in Quality Assurance.
F. Submit Mix Designs
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project.
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
D. Employ an Illinois Registered Professional Engineer, engaged in soil testing to advise the
Architect, in writing, that all footings will have bearing on soil design capacity.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Steel.
2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
application of coatings.
3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03200.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type.
1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
cement.
Section 03300
08-7910
01/09/2009 03300 - 2
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
C. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260.
D. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating,
and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
1. Provide products manufactured by Euclid, Master Builders, Sika, L & M or approved equal.
2. Use admixtures as required for workability.
3. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by
weight of cement.
4. Calcium chloride admixtures are not permitted.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 6 mils thick.
B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 3000 psi.
2.06 BONDING AND J OINTING PRODUCTS
A. J oint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM
D 1751, 1/2 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile.
B. Construction J oint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; 0.25 inch thick, formed to tongue and
groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6
inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of
trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Do not change mix design without approval from Architect.
D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days:
3,000 psi.
2. Concrete exposed to the exterior shall have cement content increased by 1/2 bag.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
4. Total Air Content: 6 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M.
5. Maximum Slump: 4 inches.
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch.
2.08 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not
less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
08-7910
Section 03300
03300 - 3
01/09/2009
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
3.02 FORMWORK
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads
until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
1. Chamfer exposed edges/ corners to achieve straight lines.
2. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings
at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels,
flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not show in exposed concrete
surfaces.
3. Install void forms. Protect from moisture before concrete placement. Protect from crushing
during concrete placement.
4. Do-not displace or damage in place vapor retarder.
5. Construct formwork to maintain specified tolerances.
B. Inserts, Imbedded parts and openings:
1. Provide formed openings for work embedded in or passing through concrete.
2. Coordinate work with other contractors in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses,
chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
3. Securely attach anchoring devices, metal profile items, inserts, sleeves, conduit and pipes to
formwork in locations not affecting position of main reinforcement or placing concrete.
a. Ensure that conduits and pipes embedded in concrete do not displace more than 4%
of cross-section area of structural member.
b. Ensure that embedded conduits and pipes, other than those merely passing through,
are not larger in outside diameter than 1/3 the thickness of slab, wall or beam in
which they are embedded; do not space these items closer than 3 dia. o.c.
C. Earth forms not permitted.
D. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
1. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's current printed
instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcement, anchoring devices and embedded items.
2. Do not apply form release agent where concrete finishes are scheduled to receive special
finishes and/or applied coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of
treated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
E. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
F. Form Removal:
1. Do not remove forms and shoring/bracing until concrete has sufficient strength to support
its own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed on it. Remove
load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75% of specified 28 day compressive
strength, provided construction is reshored.
2. Reshored structural members due to design requirements or construction condition to
permit successive construction.
G. Cleaning Formwork:
1. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds.
2. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
3. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not
use water to clean out completed forms, unless formwork and construction proceed within
heated enclosure. Use compressed air to remove foreign matter.
3.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder:
Section 03300
08-7910
01/09/2009 03300 - 4
1. Prior to installing vapor retarder verify fill materials are dry and clean, ready to receive
work. Remove all loose and foreign matter and all protuberances that would puncture or
otherwise damage membrane. Coordinate work with progress of work of other trades
affected.
B. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Use non-shrink grout for grouting of setting plates. See details.
2. Mix and apply in strict accordance with grout manufacturer's current printed instructions.
3.04 EXPANSION & CONTRACTION J OINTS
A. Properly locate and form expansion, control, isolation, and contraction joints in accord with
drawings and approved shop drawings.
B. Construction J oints:
1. In addition to locations shown on drawings or approved by Architect/Engineer prior to
construction, install construction joints in slabs on fill at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
2. Use keyways continuing reinforcement through joints.
C. Isolation joints: Provide between slabs and vertical elements such as columns and structural
walls.
D. Control J oints: Provide swan or tooled joints or removable insert strips; depth equal to 1/4 slab
thickness. For interior slabs on grade saw or form control joints between construction joints at
20-25 Feet on center. See typical slab details.
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Retamping will not be allowed.
D. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 feet.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint
devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.
G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations.
Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
H. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set
top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
J . Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and
test samples taken.
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.
Continue placing until panel or section is completed.
L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
M. Weather conditions:
1. Concrete temperatures when deposited:
a. Minimum: 50 degrees F.
b. Maximum: 85 degree F.
2. Cold Weather Concrete comply with ACI 306 except as follows:
08-7910
Section 03300
03300 - 5
01/09/2009
a. In freezing weather, provide suitable means for maintaining concrete tempeture at a
minimum 70 degrees F. for three days, or 50 degrees F. for 5 days after placing.
b. Cooling of concrete to outside tempeture: Not faster than 1 degree F. per hour for the
first day and 2 degree F. per hour thereafter until outside tempeture is reached.
c. Maximum tempeture of concrete produced with heated aggregate, heated water, or
both, at any time during its production or transportation: 90 degrees F.
d. Do not mix salt, chemicals, or other foreign materials in concrete to prevent freezing
or to accelerate hardening of concrete, except as approved by Architect/Engineer.
N. Slabs on Aggregate Base:
1. Install vapor retarder, reinforcement, embedded items as specified.
2. Provide wood runways for wheeled equipment for transporting concrete over in-place
construction.
3. Place concrete for all slabs continuously between construction joints; consolidate by
vibration. Bring to level with straight edge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to force
aggregate down and to produce a smooth surface free of lumps and hollows.
4. Provide control joints in locations as shown on drawings or as approved by Architect.
5. Pitch to drains 1/4 in/ft. nominal, except as otherwise indicated on drawings.
6. For interior slabs on grade: Maximum slab pouring unit is 1200 sq. ft., 60 feet in length.
Use checkerboard layout: allow 24 hours to elapse between adjacent pours.
O. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,
not more than 24 hours after form removal.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R; thick
floor coverings include quarry tile and ceramic tile with full bed setting system.
2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R; thin
floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, and seamless flooring.
3. Steel trowel exterior surfaces that will be left exposed, such as exterior walks, steps, and
ramps. After trowel finishing, roughen surface by fine brooming perpendicular to traffic
direction.
E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at
1/4 in/ft. nominal.
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
Section 03300
08-7910
01/09/2009 03300 - 6
and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, or
water-fog spray.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M and ASTM C172. For each test, mold and cure
four 12" concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 50 cu yd or fraction thereof of
each class of concrete placed. Specimens taken at point of discharge from truck immediately
before placing of each design mix daily. Two cylinders will be tested at 7 days, the other two at
28 days. The complete test set will be picked up in 24 hours after casting and taken to the
laboratory for further curing and testing.
F. Take three additional test cylinder during any placement which requires temporary heating.
These cylinders will be cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. One
cylinder will be tested at 3 days, one at 7 days, and the third at 28 days, to verify adequacy of
temporary heating system.
G. Perform one slump test for each 25 cu. yards. of concrete or fraction thereof, following
procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Air Entrainment test will be preformed in accord with ASTM C173 or C231, with one test made
for each 25 cu. yds. of concrete or fraction thereof.
I. Contractor may, at his own expense, have additional tests made, including compression tests on
cored cylinders in accord with ACI 318.
3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements, improper slump or air entrainment, or when visual defects indicate
poor quality concrete has been placed.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Architect/Engineer will order the removal of all non conforming or defective concrete and its
replacement with concrete meeting project specifications.
E. If mix design is found to be defective, modify mix, subject to Architect/Engineer's approval, until
satisfactory concrete is obtained.
F. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
Architect for each individual area.
08-7910
Section 03300
03300 - 7
01/09/2009
END OF SECTION
Section 03300
08-7910
01/09/2009 03300 - 8
SECTION 03415
PRECAST CONCRETE HOLLOW CORE PLANKS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Precast floor and roof planks.
B. Connection plates with brackets and hangers.
C. Grouting plank joint keys.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International.
B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
C. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
D. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society.
E. PCI MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast
Concrete Products; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute.
F. PCI MNL-120 - PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Institute.
G. PCI MNL-123 - Design and Typical Details of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete;
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute.
H. PCI MNL-124 - Design for Fire Resistance of Precast Prestressed Concrete; Precast/Prestressed
Concrete Institute.
I. PCI MNL-126 - Manual For The Design of Hollow Core Slabs; Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute.
J . PCI MNL-135 - Tolerance Manual For Precast and Prestressed Concrete Construction;
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute.
K. PCI (CERT) - PCI Plant Certification; Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design planks in accordance with the requirements of PCI MNL-120, PCI MNL 126, PCI MNL-124,
ACI 318, and ACI 301.
B. Design connections in accordance with PCI MNL-123.
C. Design components to withstand dead loads and design loads in the configuration indicated on
the drawings and as follows:
1. Design components to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of other building
structural members and clearances of intended openings.
2. Grouted Keys: Capable of transmitting horizontal shear force of 2,000 lb/ft.
D. Fire Resistance: Design planks in accordance with PCI MNL-124 to achieve hourly ratings as
08-7910
Section 03415
03415 - 1
01/09/2009
indicated on the drawings:
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work
and cutting of field openings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Indicate standard component configuration, design loads, deflections, and
cambers.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plank locations, unit identification marks, connection details, edge
conditions, bearing requirements, support conditions, dimensions, openings, openings intended
to be field cut, and relationship to adjacent materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
A. Designer Qualifications: Under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Illinois.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
A. Lifting or Handling Devices: Capable of supporting member in positions anticipated during
manufacture, storage, transportation, and erection.
B. Mark each member with date of production and final position in structure.
A. Coordinate with framing components directly associated with the work of this section.
B. Coordinate field cut openings with affected section.
C. Coordinate location of hanger tabs and devices for mechanical and electrical work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Precast Concrete Hollow Core Planks:
1. Any manufacturer with PCI Plant Certification, and complies with the listed UL Fire
Resistance Ratings.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials: ACI 301.
B. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-metallic, minimum compressive strength of 10,000 psi at 28 days.
C. Cement Grout: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Connecting and Supporting Devices: Plates, angles, items cast into concrete, items connected to
steel framing members, and inserts: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel; prime painted.
Section 03415
08-7910
01/09/2009 03415 - 2
B. Sill Seal: Compressible glass fiber strips.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Planks: Plant cast, prestressed, hollow core.
1. Dimensions as indicated on drawings.
B. Weld reinforcing in accordance with AWS D1.4.
C. Embed anchors, inserts, plates, angles, and other items at locations indicated.
D. Provide openings required by other sections, at locations indicated.
E. Cut exposed ends flush.
F. Plant Finish: Finish members to PCI MNL-116 Standard Grade.
G. Connecting and Supporting Steel Devices: Do not paint surfaces in contact with concrete or
surfaces requiring field welding.
2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Conform to PCI MNL-116 and PCI MNL-135, except as specifically amended below.
1. Maximum Variation From Nominal Dimensions:
a. Width: Plus or minus 1/4 in.
b. Length: Plus or minus 1/2 in.
c. Depth: Plus or minus 1/4 in.
2. Maximum Variation From Intended Camber: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3. Maximum Variation from Plan End Squareness: Plus or minus 1/4 in.
4. Maximum Misalignment of Anchors, Inserts, Openings: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
5. Maximum Bowing of Members: Length/360.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 03300 for testing of concrete and grout, materials, and mix designs.
B. Produce planks in accordance with requirements of PCI MNL-116. Maintain plant records and
quality control program during production of precast planks. Make records available upon
request.
C. Inspect and test stressing tendons before delivery for compliance with specified standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on
shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare support devices for the erection procedure and temporary bracing.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Erect members without damage to structural capacity, shape, or finish. Replace or repair
damaged members.
B. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and end joints, as erection progresses.
C. Maintain temporary bracing in place until final connection is made. Protect members from
staining.
D. Adjust differential camber between precast members to tolerance before final attachment and
08-7910
Section 03415
03415 - 3
01/09/2009
grouting.
E. Adjust differential elevation between precast members to tolerance before final attachment.
F. Grout longitudinal keys as indicated.
G. Tape seal underside of plank joints to prevent grout leakage.
H. Make plank-to-plank joints smooth using grout, troweled smooth. Transition differential
elevation of adjoining planks with grout to a maximum slope of 1:12.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Conform to PCI MNL-135.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect members from damage caused by field welding or erection operations.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean weld marks, dirt, and blemishes from surface of exposed members.
END OF SECTION
Section 03415
08-7910
01/09/2009 03415 - 4
SECTION 03505
SELF-LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.
1. Use cementitious type at locations indicated on drawings.
A. ASTM C 109/C 109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens).
B. ASTM C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars.
C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and
product limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on mixing instructions.
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years of experience.
A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
underlayment materials in the required fire rated assembly.
A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours
after installation of underlayment.
C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cementitious Underlayment:
1. Dayton Superior Corporation; Product EconoLevel: www.daytonsuperior.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Underlayment: Blended cement mix, that when mixed with water in accordance
with manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following
properties:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 4000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2. Flexural Strength: Minimum 1000 psi after 28 days, tested per ASTM C 348.
3. Density: Maximum 113 lb/cu ft.
08-7910
Section 03505
03505 - 1
01/09/2009
4. Final Set Time: 1-1/2 to 2 hours, maximum.
5. Thickness: Feather edge to maximum 2 inch.
6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in
accordance with ASTM E 84.
B. Aggregate: Dry, well graded, washed silica aggregate, approximately 3/8 inch in size and
acceptable to underlayment manufacturer.
C. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.
D. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type.
E. J oint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.
2.03 MIXING
A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Add aggregate for areas where thickness will exceed 1 inch. Mix underlayment and water for at
least two minutes before adding aggregate, and continue mixing to assure that aggregate has
been thoroughly coated.
C. Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi-products, or
other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces.
C. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry.
D. Close floor openings.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Pump or pour material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.
1. Pump, move, and screed while the material is still highly flowable.
2. Be careful not to create cold joints.
3. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks.
C. Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
D. Place to thickness indicated.
E. Place after partition installation.
F. Where additional aggregate has been used in the mix, add a top layer of neat mix (without
aggregate), if needed to level and smooth the surface.
3.04 CURING
A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached.
B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Section 03505
08-7910
01/09/2009 03505 - 2
3.05 APPLICATION TOLERANCE
A. Top Surface: Level to 1/16 inch in 10 ft.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and
cracking.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 03505
03505 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 04720
CAST STONE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Architectural cast stone.
B. Units required are:
1. Exterior wall units, including wall caps, sills, medallions, and banding.
2. Other items indicated on the drawings.
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
B. Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
C. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast
stone work.
A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
B. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
C. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete.
D. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
E. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
F. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
G. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
H. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
I. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
J . ASTM C 1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Manufacturer's Qualification Data: Documentation showing compliance with specified
requirements.
C. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer.
D. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement,
exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers.
E. Mortar Color Selection Samples.
F. Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 12 inches square,
illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project.
08-7910
Section 04720
CAST STONE
04720 - 1
01/09/2009
G. Full-Size Samples: One unit of each shape, for review.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm with a minimum of 5 years of experience in producing cast
stone of the types required for project.
B. Mock-Up: Provide full size cast stone components for installation in mock-up of exterior wall.
1. Approved mock-up will become standard for appearance and workmanship.
2. Mock-up may remain as part of the completed work.
3. Remove mock-up not incorporated into the work and dispose of debris.
A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and
discoloration. Protect corners from damage.
B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule.
C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt.
E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or
other damage.
F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided.
G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry
work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Architectural Cast Stone:
1. Custom Cast Stone; www.customcaststone.com.
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural
stone, complying with ASTM C 1364.
1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C 1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field
cut at 80 percent of uncut piece.
2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience.
3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface
blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet.
4. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings.
1. Provide 16"H x 24"W x 4"D Rock face units in locations indicated on the exterior elevations
2. Provide 12" Bands with Smooth Recess profile BNDRC-12S as manufactured by Custom Cast
Stone in locations indicated on the exterior elevations.
3. Provide Cast Stone Double Sloped Cap Stone at Screen Wall.
4. Provide Watertable sills with drip edge sizes and shapes as indicated on the drawings.
5. Provide in locations indicated on the extrerior elevations: 12"x12" Blank Medallions:
12SM-034 as manufactured by Pineapple Grove; www.pineapplegrove.com.
6. Provide in locations indicated on the extrerior elevations: 16"x16" Blank Medallions:
Section 04720
CAST STONE
08-7910
01/09/2009 04720 - 2
16SM-034 as manufactured by Pineapple Grove; www.pineapplegrove.com.
7. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus
1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch.
8. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide:
a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.
b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible.
c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.
C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses;
comply with ACI 318.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150.
1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather.
B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.
C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.
D. Pigments: ASTM C 979, inorganic iron oxides; do not use carbon black.
E. Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M.
F. Water: Potable.
G. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated.
H. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, galvanized or epoxy coated.
I. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required
for conditions.
J . Shelf Angles and Similar Structural Items: Hot-dip galvanized steel per ASTM A123/A 123M, of
shapes and sizes as required for conditions.
K. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, ASTM C 270, Type N.
L. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
M. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence,
and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging
masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner
manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect if construction is not
acceptable.
B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of
Section 04816.
B. Setting:
1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.
2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.
08-7910
Section 04720
CAST STONE
04720 - 3
01/09/2009
4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
5. J oints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed.
6. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing.
7. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.
8. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile.
9. Leave the following joints open for sealant:
a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
b. J oints in projecting units.
c. J oints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
d. J oints below lugged sills and stair treads.
e. J oints below ledge and relieving angles.
f. J oints labeled "expansion joint".
C. Sealant J oints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07900.
D. Installation Tolerances:
1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.
2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch
maximum.
3. Variation in J oint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width,
whichever is less.
4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch
difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with
units.
E. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 10
feet.
1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean completed exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner.
2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
4. Do not use acidic cleaners.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed work from damage.
B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar-splashed work to condition of new work.
END OF SECTION
Section 04720
CAST STONE
08-7910
01/09/2009 04720 - 4
SECTION 04810
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Concrete Block.
B. Mortar and Grout.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D. Flashings.
E. Accessories.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
B. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated masonry and at top of
fire-rated walls.
C. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American
B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute
International.
D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
F. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
G. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
H. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
I. ASTM C 140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and
Related Units.
J . ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
L. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
M. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
N. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
O. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.
P. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars
for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
08-7910
Section 04810
04810 - 1
01/09/2009
Q. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry
Construction; International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council.
R. IMIAWC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry
S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except
where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.
B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Conform to applicable code for assembly requirements for fire rated
masonry construction.
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as
indicated on the drawings for specific locations.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, headers, and
other detailed conditions.
3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, weight as indicated on the structural drawings.
a. Both hollow and solid block, as indicated.
b. Compy with UL Listing at rated walls.
c. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.
4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129.
a. Hollow block.
b. Lightweight.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample.
1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144.
3. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
Section 04810
08-7910
01/09/2009 04810 - 2
C. Water: Clean and potable.
D. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
E. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Manufacturers of J oint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.
3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com.
4. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com..
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C. Single Wythe J oint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized
after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross
rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar
coverage on each exposure.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet; 0.040 inch total
thickness; with cross-linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces.
1. Flashing system for all heads, sills, shelf angles, thru-wall conditions and other locations.
System shall consist of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt laminate flashing material,
self-adhesive pre-formed corners and end dams, and stainless steel drip-edge, all provided
by a single source and installed as a flashing system.
a. Field fabrication of inside corners, outside corners, or end-dams shall not be allowed.
All corners and end-dams must be pre-formed by the manufacturer to insure the
integrity of all corner conditions. Flashing material shall overlap the pre-formed
corners, and end-dams to form a continuous moisture barrier system.
b. Stainless steel drip edge shall be provided on the edges of the exterior masonry or
shelf angle. Stainless steel drip edge shall measure .015"x2.0"x8.0' and contain a
hemmed edge. Stainless steel drip edge shall extend beyond vertical face of masonry
wall.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Illinois Products Corporation; Product IPCO flashing system with preformed corners
and end dams; stainless steel drip edge and drip edge corners; follow manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control J oints: Extruded Neoprene Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee
accessories, fused joints.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.
c. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com..
d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. J oint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding.
1. Manufacturers:
08-7910
Section 04810
04810 - 3
01/09/2009
c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
C. Weeps: Polyethylene tubing.
D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
B. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.
C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 FIRE RATING
A. Where ratings are indicated, provide assemblies identical to tested assemblies and accepted by
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar J oints: Concave.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
Section 04810
08-7910
01/09/2009 04810 - 4
D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
I. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint.
J . Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
3.06 WEEPS/ CAVITY VENTS
A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall
flashing.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. Comply with recommendations of
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry
or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
4. Carry flashing vertically as detailed, but not less than 6 inches above horizontal plane.
5. Extend head and sill flashings not less than 6 inches beyond edges of openings and turn up
to form watertight pan; seal with mastic.
B. Coordination: Interface flashing work with adjacent and adjoining work to ensure best possible
weather resistance and durability of completed flashing.
C. Stainless steel drip edge shall be held in place during construction with a continous bead of
urethane sealant or equivalent. The bent hemmed edge portion of the stainless steel drip edge
must extend beyond the vertical face of the masonry wall.
D. Install the laminate flashing over the stainless steel drip edge and recessed 3/4" from the vertical
face of the masonry wall. This will allow the flashing to be completely covered by mortar when
the remainder of the masonry wall is constructed. Overlap the flashing segments and/or any
flashing corners and end-dams a minimum of 4" forming a continuous moisture barrier to direct
the flow of water to the exterior and/or weep holes. All top edges and overlaps will be sealed
with a bead of mastic - as recommended by the flashing manufacturer.
E. If flashing terminates in a vertical position, install a bead of mastic, recommended by the
manufacturer, along the top edge of the flashing.
08-7910
Section 04810
04810 - 5
01/09/2009
F. The flashing system is not to be installed when the ambient air temperature is below 25 degree
F.
G. Flashing material is not to be exposed to direct sunlight for longer than 30 days.
3.09 LINTELS
A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.10 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of
dimensioned position.
C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
D. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION J OINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
3.12 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work
and furnished under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or
more.
D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft.
E. Maximum Variation of J oint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
3.14 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,and
location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
Section 04810
08-7910
01/09/2009 04810 - 6
A. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C 140 for conformance to requirements of this specification.
B. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780, testing with same
frequency as masonry samples.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 04810
04810 - 7
01/09/2009

SECTION 04816
MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Concrete Block.
B. Clay Facing Brick.
C. Mortar.
D. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
E. Installation of Lintels.
F. Accessories.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels.
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud backup for masonry veneer.
C. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 01210 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section.
B. This allowance includes purchase and delivery of bricks. Installation is not included in the
allowance but is specified in this section and is part of the Contract Sum/Price.
A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American
B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute
International.
D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
F. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.
G. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale).
I. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
J . ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
K. IMIAWC (CW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry
08-7910
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
04816 - 1
01/09/2009
L. IMIAWC (HW) - Recommended Practices & Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry
M. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, mortar, and masonry accessories.
C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of
color range.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except
where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.
A. Conform to applicable code for standard requirements for fire rated masonry construction.
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent damage and contamination
by other materials. Follow manufacturers recommendations.
B. Store all products in a secure, dry location, out of way of construction operations. Store
materials on pallets, a minimum of 4" off of the ground. Prevent intermixing of granular
materials.
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,
B. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with recommendations of IMIAWC (CW).
C. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,
D. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with IMIAWC (HW).
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
B. Provide 50 of each size, color, and type of masonry units for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 4
inches.
2. Non-Loadbearing Units: Split face
a. Solid block.
b. Pattern: Country Materials Corporation: Aztec Block (8"x8" divided image)
3. Decorative Banding: Split face with chamfer
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
08-7910
01/09/2009 04816 - 2
a. Solid Block
b. Pattern: Country Materials Corporation: Boss band (3/4" chamfer and split face)
2.02 BRICK UNITS
A. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
1. Color and texture as selected by Architect.
2. Actual size: 3-5/8" x 3-5/8" x 11-5/8".
3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can
be sawn to produce equivalent effect.
2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type N. One part portland cement, one half part lime. No more
than four and one half parts sand, measured damp and loose. Compressive strength of 1800 psi
at 28 days; Type M, high strength mortar with 2500psi compressive strength below grade, other
types as required by application.
B. Water: Clean and potable.
C. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
D. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, grade 60 (420) yield grade, deformed billet bars;
galvanized.
B. J oint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after
fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch deformed side rods with 0.1483 inch
cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of
mortar coverage on each exposure.
1. Manufacturers:
c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com.
C. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry
veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.105 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup
through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and
insulation to provide positive anchorage.
2. Wire ties: Triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick.
3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 5-1/2 inches.
4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not less
than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1483 inch diameter.
2.05 FLASHINGS
A. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet; 0.040 inch total
thickness; with cross-linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces.
1. Flashing system for all heads, sills, shelf angles, thru-wall conditions and other locations.
System shall consist of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt laminate flashing material,
self-adhesive pre-formed corners and end dams, and stainless steel drip-edge, all provided
by a single source and installed as a flashing system.
a. Field fabrication of inside corners, outside corners, or end-dams shall not be allowed.
All corners and end-dams must be pre-formed by the manufacturer to insure the
08-7910
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
04816 - 3
01/09/2009
integrity of all corner conditions. Flashing material shall overlap the pre-formed
corners, and end-dams to form a continuous moisture barrier system.
b. Stainless steel drip edge shall be provided on the edges of the exterior masonry or
shelf angle. Stainless steel drip edge shall measure .015"x2.0"x8.0' and contain a
hemmed edge. Stainless steel drip edge shall extend beyond vertical face of masonry
wall.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Illinois Products Corporation; Product IPCO flashing system with preformed corners
and end dams; stainless steel drip edge and drip edge corners; follow manufacturer's
written installation instructions.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control J oints: Extruded Neoprene Rubber, closed cell virgin material. Provide with
corner and tee accessories, fused joints.
1. Manufacturers:
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.
B. J oint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding with
backer rod.
1. Manufacturers:
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com.
C. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt.
D. Cavity Vents: Polyester mesh.
E. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of
wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and
allow proper cavity drainage. Provide system manufactured by Masonry Reinforcing Corporation
of America, www.wirebond.com.
1. "Mortar Net" Weep Vent 1" thick x 10" height x 5'-0" length trapezoidal configuration.
F. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.07 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type M.
2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
3. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Cold weather: Heat mortar water and sand, enclose walls and provide temporary heat as
recommended by BIA Tech Notes 1, 1A, 1B, and 1C.
B. Hot Weather: Use Mortar within 1-1/2 hour after mixing for ambient 80 degree F or above.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
08-7910
01/09/2009 04816 - 4
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.03 FIRE RATING
A. Where rating are indicated, provide assemblies identical to tested assemblies and accepted by
3.04 PREPERATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.05 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: As indicated for different locations.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
D. Brick Units:
1. Bond: As indicated for different locations. Except where areas of special coursing ,
patterns, and bonding are indicated on drawings.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 12 inches.
E. Provide full bed, head and collar joints except at weepholes.
F. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints
facing cavity flush.
3.06 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head and collar joints, except at weepholes,
uniformly jointed with other work.
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. Keep cavity clean of mortar dropping and other
material during construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush.
E. Interlock intersections and external corners.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Isolate top joint of masonry veneer from horizontal and vertical structural framing members or
support angles with compressible joint filler.
08-7910
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
04816 - 5
01/09/2009
3.07 WEEPS/ CAVITY VENTS
A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing,
above shelf angles and lintels, at bottom of walls, and ledges.
B. Install cavity vents in veneer walls at 32 inches on center horizontally below shelf angles and
lintels and at top of walls.
C. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. Drainage system to be continuous at the
base of the wall.
D. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 24 inches on center vertically
and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends
of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 on center.
C. Stud back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer
at maximum 2.0 sq ft of wall surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of
openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 on center.
D. Seismic Reinforcement: Connect veneer anchors with continuous horizontal wire reinforcement
before embedding anchors in mortar.
3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. Comply with recommendations of
SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry
or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
4. Carry flashing vertically as detailed, but not less than 6 inches above horizontal plane.
5. Extend head and sill flashings not less than 6 inches beyond edges of openings and turn up
to form watertight pan; seal with mastic.
B. Coordination: Interface flashing work with adjacent and adjoining work to ensure best possible
weather resistance and durability of completed flashing.
C. Stainless steel drip edge shall be held in place during construction with a continous bead of
urethane sealant or equivalent. The bent hemmed edge portion of the stainless steel drip edge
must extend beyond the vertical face of the masonry wall.
D. Install the laminate flashing over the stainless steel drip edge and recessed 3/4" from the vertical
face of the masonry wall. This will allow the flashing to be completely covered by mortar when
the remainder of the masonry wall is constructed. Overlap the flashing segments and/or any
flashing corners and end-dams a minimum of 4" forming a continuous moisture barrier to direct
the flow of water to the exterior and/or weep holes. All top edges and overlaps will be sealed
with a bead of mastic - as recommended by the flashing manufacturer.
E. If flashing terminates in a vertical position, install a bead of mastic, recommended by the
manufacturer, along the top edge of the flashing.
F. The flashing system is not to be installed when the ambient air temperature is below 25 degree
F.
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
08-7910
01/09/2009 04816 - 6
G. Flashing material is not to be exposed to direct sunlight for longer than 30 days.
3.10 LINTELS
A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.
B. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION J OINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B. Provide expansion joint as detailed and at spacing no greater than 30 feet O.C. at locations
approved by architect.
C. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
E. Provide expansion joints as detailed and at spacing no greater than 30'-0" o.c.at locations
approved by Architect.
3.12 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, window frames, steel angle, lintels, wood
nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items supplied by other sections.
B. Build-in items plumb and true.
C. Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill
masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build-in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration.
3.13 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/8 inch in 20 ft.
C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch in 20 ft.
D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 20 ft.
E. Maximum Variation of J oint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
3.14 DAMAGED UNITS
A. Remove and replace damaged units
B. Enlarge holes in mortar.
C. Prepare joints to receive sealant.
3.15 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for sleeves, pipes, conduit, and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval from Architect/Engineer prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated on
drawings or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
08-7910
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
04816 - 7
01/09/2009
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean brick using bucket and brush method in compliance with BIA Tech Note 20.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
Section 04816
MASONRY VENEER
08-7910
01/09/2009 04816 - 8
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Structural steel framing members, support members and struts.
B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
C. Grouting under base plates.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc..
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of
Steel Construction, Inc..
C. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
D. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
E. ASTM A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished.
F. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
G. ASTM A 242/A 242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
H. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength.
I. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength.
J . ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric).
K. ASTM A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi
L. ASTM A 490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3,
for Structural Steel J oints (Metric).
M. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
N. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
O. ASTM A 514/A 514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding.
P. ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality.
08-7910
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 1
01/09/2009
Q. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
R. ASTM A 563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric].
S. ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium
Structural Steel.
T. ASTM A 759 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails.
U. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
V. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink).
W. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.
X. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
for Use with Structural Fasteners.
Y. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product data: If requested by the Architect, submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications
and installation instructions for the following products (include laboratory test reports and other
data to show compliance with specifications and standards):
1. Structural steel (each type), including certified copies of mill reports covering chemical and
physical properties.
2. High strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
3. Structural steel primer paint.
4. Shrinkage resistant grout.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings showing complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly
of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections,
camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and
show size, length and type of each weld. Provide setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.
2. Submit calculations and connection drawings prepared by a registered structural engineer
licensed in the state in which the project is located. The engineer's seal and signature must
be on each calculation computation sheet, or in lieu thereof, on the cover sheet
accompanied by a note which indicates the computation sheets for which the seal and
signature applies. The fabricator's structural engineer is not required to supply his
structural engineering seal and signature on the steel shop drawings, but a note must be
provide in lieu thereof on the shop drawings which states:
a. "All Connections shall be fabricated in accordance with the design calculations
prepared by (insert fabricator's structural engineer's name), license number (insert
fabricator's structural engineer's license number), dated (insert date shown on
calculations)."
D. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test
analysis.
F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
08-7910
01/09/2009 05120 - 2
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."
B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for
architecturally exposed structural steel.
1. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence:
"This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design
adequacy of any detail configuration of connections designed by the fabricator as a part of
his preparation of these shop drawings." The Fabricator is responsible for all detail
configuration of connection development and fabrication.
C. AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings,"
including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued.
D. AISC "Specifications for Structural J oints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts," approved by the
Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural J oints of the Engineering Foundation.
E. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure."
F. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
G. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of
documented experience.
H. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Illinois.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: For work which will be exposed to view in finished areas, provide only materials which
are smooth and free of surface blemishes such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roller trade
names and roughness.
B. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
D. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
E. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant
structural steel.
F. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 529/A 529M high-strength, carbon-manganese
structural steel, Grade 50.
G. Crane Rails: ASTM A 759 high strength alloy, head-hardened, heat-treated, ends hardened,
ends chamfered, and ends prepared fror welding; cross section and length as indicated on the
drawings.
H. Steel Shapes, Plates, Sheet Piling, and Bars: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength,
columbium-vanadium steel.
I. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.
J . Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501, seamless or welded.
K. Steel Bars: ASTM A 108.
L. Steel Plate: ASTM A 514/A 514M.
08-7910
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 3
01/09/2009
M. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black and galvanized, as indicated.
N. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.
O. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
P. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A 153/A
153M, Class C.
Q. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,
medium carbon, galvanized.
R. High-Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), with matching ASTM A 563 (ASTM
A 563M) nuts and ASTM F 436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel.
S. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade C.
T. High-Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1 medium carbon, galvanized.
U. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections
requiring high-strength bolts.
V. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
W. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated.
X. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and
capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days.
Y. Paint: Provide steel with shop coat of zinc chromate, red oxide, or other primer as approved by
the Architect.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assemble. Fabricate for delivery sequence
which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
D. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
E. Connections:
1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. Use 3/4" diameter ASTM A 325 bolts, unless
otherwise noted.
2. Bolt field connections, except where other connections are indicated. Use 3/4" diameter
ASTM A 325 bolts, unless otherwise noted, with washers.
F. Provide bearing plates with anchor bolts under all columns, beams, girders, and trusses bearing
on footings, piers, and walls. Minimum thickness, when not indicated, shall match the flange
thickness of the supported member. Provide minimum 3/4" diameter anchor bolts with a
minimum of 6" of embedment.
G. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearances, and quality of welds
and methods used in correcting welding work.
H. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of
their work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces or portions of members to be
imbedded in concrete.
I. Develop required camber for members.
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
08-7910
01/09/2009 05120 - 4
2.03 FINISH
A. When finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of
finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces or members exposed in the final structure free of
markings, burrs, and other defects.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
C. All structural steel exposed to weather shall be galvanized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Furnish anchor bolts with anchor bolt layout and other connectors required for securing structural
steel to foundations and other work
B. Furnish templates and other devices as neccessary for pre-setting bolts and other anchors to
accurate locations.
C. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges".
B. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond reducing materials and roughen to
improve grout bond to surfaces
C. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe
condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
D. Accurately set and level setting plates and bearing plates for structural members. Set plates on
wedges, shims or as otherwise detailed, and then grout in place.
1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.
E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. Align and
adjust the various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before fastening.
Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly.
Perform neccessary adjustment to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment.
1. Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC Tolerances.
2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating temperature
of the structure. Make allowances for the difference between tempeture at time of erection
and the mean tempeture at which the structure will be when completed and in service.
3. Splice members only where indicated on final shop drawings.
F. Field weld components indicated on drawings.
G. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind
smooth at exposed surfaces.
H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins, except in secondary
bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
I. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.
J . Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Apply
08-7910
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120 - 5
01/09/2009
paint using same material as used for shop painting.
K. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Section 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
08-7910
01/09/2009 05120 - 6
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.
B. Section 05510 - Metal Stairs.
C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.
A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural
Manufacturers Association.
B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
C. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements.
D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
F. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
G. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
H. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates.
I. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
J . ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric).
K. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
L. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
M. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric].
N. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American
Welding Society.
O. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.
P. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel J oist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.
08-7910
Section 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 1
01/09/2009
Q. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings.
R. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where
applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C. Plates: ASTM A 283.
D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, hot-dip galvanized finish.
E. Fasteners: Zinc coated fasteners designed for loading and use.
F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A
153M where connecting galvanized components.
G. Steel bar Grating: ASTM A569.
H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
J . Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
K. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic, Euso NS by Euclid or approved equal.
L. Concrete Inserts: Galvanized ferrous coatings.
2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.
C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Verify Dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
B. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
Section 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
08-7910
01/09/2009 05500 - 2
E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS
A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments;
galvanized finish.
1. Side Rails: 5/8 x 2 inches members spaced at 20 inches.
2. Rungs: 5/8 inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center.
3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface.
B. J oist Hangers: Strap anchors; galvanized finish.
C. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For
support of masonry; galvanized finish.
D. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. Minimum 8 inch bearing on each end.
E. Custom Suspended Canopy from E.L. Burns Co., Inc: www.elburns.com or approved equal.
1. Protective cover shall be all welded extruded aluminum system complete with internal
drainage. Non-welded systems are not acceptable. Roll formed deck is not acceptable.
Expansion joints shall be included to accommodate temperature changes of 120F.
Expansion joints shall have no metal to metal contact.
2. Beams: Beams shall be open-top tubular extrusion of size and shape shown on drawings,
top edges thickened for strength and designed to receive deck members in self-flashing
manner. Structural ties shall be installed in tops of all beams.
3. Deck: Deck shall be extruded self-flashing sections interlocking into a composite unit.
Closures at deck ends shall be welded plates.
4. Fascia: Fascia shall be manufacturers standard shape. Size as indicated on drawings.
F. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish. Per Elevator Manufacturers
Requirements.
2.05 FINISHES - STEEL
A. Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and ferrous metal
items at exterior walls and where exposed to metal.
2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is
required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.
B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2.
C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D. Prime Painting: One coat. Tnemec 10-99, PPG Inhibitive Metal Primer, Rustoleum Rusty Metal
Primer, or approved equal
E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M
requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M
requirements.
2.06 FINISHES - ALUMINUM
08-7910
Section 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 3
01/09/2009
A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: high performance organic coating.
B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized.
C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils thick.
D. High Performance Organic Coating System: AAMA 2604 multiple coat, thermally cured
fluoropolymer system; color as scheduled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay
project. Allow for cutting and fitting if field measurements are not practical.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Obtain Architects approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
B. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
C. Make provisions for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
D. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, true to line with
sharp angles and edges.
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components; welds shall be continuous, ground flush and made smooth at all exposed
surfaces.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
END OF SECTION
Section 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
08-7910
01/09/2009 05500 - 4
SECTION 05510
METAL STAIRS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Stairs with metal treads.
B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.
C. Handrails and guards.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete.
B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.
C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
D. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
E. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile
Strength (Metric).
F. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
G. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
H. ASTM A 786/A 786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates.
I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American
Welding Society.
J . AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.
K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel J oist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.
L. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
08-7910
Section 05510
METAL STAIRS
05510 - 1
01/09/2009
2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.
C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Welders' Certificates.
A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this
work and licensed in Illinois, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.
B. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Stair Fabricators:
1. American Stair, Inc.: www.americanstair.com.
2.02 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL
A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and
horizontal supports, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and
to building structure.
1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent
requirements of local, State, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract
documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.
2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the
applicable local code.
3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for
transport and access to site.
5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch.
6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.
B. Metal J ointing and Finish Quality Levels:
1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical;
underside of stair not covered by soffit IS considered exposed to view.
a. Welded J oints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded
smooth and flush.
b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush.
c. Mechanical J oints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline.
d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts.
e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius.
f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte
finish.
C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with
design and specified quality level.
D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except
where specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.
2.03 METAL STAIRS WITH METAL TREADS
A. J ointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above.
B. Risers: Closed.
Section 05510
METAL STAIRS
08-7910
01/09/2009 05510 - 2
C. Treads: Checkered steel plate.
1. Tread Thickness: 1/4 inch, minimum.
2. Anchorage to Stringers: Welded or bolted to carrier angles welded or bolted to stringers.
D. Risers: Steel sheet.
1. Riser Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch minimum.
2. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius.
E. Stringers: Rolled steel channels.
1. Stringer Depth: 10 inches.
2. End Closure: Sheet steel of same thickness as risers welded across ends.
F. Landings: Same construction as treads, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design
load capacity.
G. Railings: Steel picket railings.
H. Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted.
2.04 HANDRAILS AND GUARDS
A. Wall-Mounted Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.
1. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum.
B. Guards:
1. Top Rails: Round pipe or tube rails unless otherwise indicated.
a. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inch, minimum, to 1-1/2 inches, maximum.
2. Infill at Picket Railings: Vertical pickets.
a. Horizontal Spacing: Maximum 4 inches on center.
b. Material: Solid steel bar.
c. Shape: Square.
d. Size: 1/4 inch square.
e. Top Mounting: Welded to underside of top rail.
f. Bottom Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.
3. End and Intermediate Posts: Same material and size as top rails.
a. Horizontal Spacing: As indicated on drawings.
b. Mounting: Welded to top surface of stringer.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 or ASTM A 501 structural tubing, round and shapes as indicated.
C. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
D. Checkered Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled steel floor plate; pattern no. 2.
E. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A
153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components.
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.06 SHOP FINISHING
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
08-7910
Section 05510
METAL STAIRS
05510 - 3
01/09/2009
C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer.
1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
2. Number of Coats: One.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and embedded in masonry with setting templates.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure.
C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in
accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations
specified for jointing quality levels.
F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled.
G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
Section 05510
METAL STAIRS
08-7910
01/09/2009 05510 - 4
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Rough opening framing for windows.
B. Structural wall and roof framing at shed.
C. Preservative treated wood materials.
D. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood
framing.
B. Section 06173 - Plate Connected Wood Trusses.
A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; American
Forest and Paper Association.
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association.
D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American
Wood-Preservers' Association.
E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American
Lumber Standards Committee.
B. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or
exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping.
C. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA
standards.
08-7910
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 1
01/09/2009
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading
agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified
requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B. Moisture Content: 15% max..
C. Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):
1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules.
2. Grade: SPF No. 2 at all Exterior shed walls, unless otherwise noted.
D. J oist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 ):
1. Species: Spruce-Pine-Fir (South).
2. Grade: No. 2.
E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
F. Miscellaneous Nailers:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Roof Sheathing: APA PRP-108/APA PRPR-108, Form B455,Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, and as
follows:
1. Span Rating: 32/20.
2. Thickness: 5/8" inch, nominal.
B. Wall Sheathing: APA PRP-108/APA PRP-108, Form B455Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, and as
follows:
1. Span Rating: 24/0.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, nominal.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations,
unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times
thickness of sheathing.
3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
08-7910
01/09/2009 06100 - 2
B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Provide
connectors manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185
galvanizing per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
C. J oist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Provide joist
hangers manufactured by Simpson Strong Tie.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185
galvanizing per ASTM A 653/A 653M.
D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
E. See Section 04720 Cast Stone and 07464 Vinyl Siding for required weather resistant membrane.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B. Preservative Treatment:
C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B,
Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft
retention.
1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
4. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.
D. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA Use Category UC4A,
Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.4 lb/cu ft
retention.
1. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer of
factory treatment chemicals for brush-application in the field.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly
to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
08-7910
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 3
01/09/2009
A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would
lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing
indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction
Manual.
E. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by
applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story
and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid
wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty
items, and trim.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels to framing members, with ends staggered and sheet ends over
firm bearing.
1. Use sheathing clips between roof framing members.
2. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets.
3. Screw panels to framing; staples are not permitted.
B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension parallel to wall studs or as indicated by fire rating,
with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws.
1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges
over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs
in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings.
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
08-7910
01/09/2009 06100 - 4
3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,
complying with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.08 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Finish carpentry items.
B. Wood casings and moldings.
C. Hardware and attachment accessories.
A. Section 06615-Cast Marble Fabrications:: Cultured Marble window stools.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing.
C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing:
E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
F. Section 12355 - Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work.
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.
B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association.
F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch long.
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,
grades as indicated.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of experience.
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements.
08-7910
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
B. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - GENERAL
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: suitable for exposure and loading, maximum moisture content of 6
percent.[<>]
B. Hardwood Lumber: Red oak species, quarter sawn, maximum moisture content of 8 percent
with closed grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish, exposure and loading.
C. Prefinished Oak for moldings, bases, casing, and miscellaneous trim.
1. Manufacturer: Moldings and Millwork: www.moldingsandmillwork.com
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1 Grade A-B; Veneer core; Birch face species, quarter sawn cut.
B. Hardwood Plywood: Veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; Oak face species.
C. Particleboard: composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of 45 pound density, made with
waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch
thick, smooth one side (S1S).
2.05 ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application.
2.06 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; mill finish in concealed locations and polished
finish in exposed locations.
B. Concealed J oint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Lumber for Shimming and, Blocking: Softwood lumber of pine species.
B. Plain Glass: ASTM C 1036 annealed float glass, clear, 6 mm thick minimum.
C. Safety Glass: ASTM C 1048, fully tempered; clear; 6 mm thick minimum.
D. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.
E. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
F. Hardware: See Section 08710-Finish Hardware.
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
08-7910
01/09/2009 06200 - 2
2.08 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable
of providing flame spread index of as required by code or local Authorities, maximum, and
smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne
preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
C. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking.
D. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material.
E. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
F. Kiln dry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 15 percent moisture content.
2.09 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. Fit exposed sheet material edges with 3/8 inch matching hardwood edging. Use one piece for
full length only.
C. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during site erection.
D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
D. Stain, seal, and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Brush apply only.
E. Seal internal surfaces and semi-concealed surfaces. Brush apply only.
F. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
G. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
C. See Section 06100-Rough Carpentry for installation of recessed wood blocking.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
C. Install trim with nails at 6 inch on center.
08-7910
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200 - 3
01/09/2009
D. Install hardware supplied by Section 08710 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Site Finishing: See Section 09900.
C. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with
cementitious materials.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A. Interior:
1. Handrails: 1-1/2 inch oak rail with Ives model HB159B finish to match door hardware.
Stained rail boards as detailed on drawings. Mount 1-1/2 inches clear to wall as per
accessibility codes. Rail and rail boards to match prefinished wood doors.
2. Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Colonial Style. Prefinished to match prefinished
wood doors.
3. Provide one Knox box for fire department keys. Mount in location indicated by local fire
department - Recess. Contractor to purchase directly from fire department or purchase
model specified by local fire department.
END OF SECTION
Section 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
08-7910
01/09/2009 06200 - 4
SECTION 06415
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Countertops for manufactured casework.
B. Wall-hung counters.
A. Section 12355 - Residential Casework.
A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.
B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
F. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES
08-7910
Section 06415
COUNTERTOPS
06415 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGP, 0.039 inch nominal thickness.
a. NSF approved for food contact.
b. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
c. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
d. Finish: Matte.
e. Surface Color and Pattern: To be selected from manufacturer's full line.
f. Manufacturers:
1) Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.
2) Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.
3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Postformed laminate; front edge substrate built up to minimum
1-1/2 inch thick with raised radiused edge, integral coved backsplash with radiused top
edge.
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
4. Metal Support Brackets: 208 Ultimate L-Bracket by Knape & Vogt; 500mm size.
A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
C. J oint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. J oin lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings,
finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
Section 06415
COUNTERTOPS
08-7910
01/09/2009 06415 - 2
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board
of 5/8 inch.
C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 06415
COUNTERTOPS
06415 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 06615
CAST MARBLE FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Synthetic marble countertops with integral lavatory bowls.
B. Synthetic marble windowsills.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
B. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers.
C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.
D. Section 15145 - Plumbing Piping.
E. Section 15146 - Plumbing Specialties.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI Z124.3 - American National Standard for Plastic Lavatories; American National Standards
Institute.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's printed product data indicating compliance with specified requirements.
2. Manufacturer's cleaning and maintenance data.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit plans, elevations, and detail sections.
2. Indicate overall dimensions, material thickness, location and size of cutouts, anchorage
provisions and attachment methods.
3. Indicate coordination requirements for adjacent and interfacing work.
D. Selection Samples: For each product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches
square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of International Cast Polymer Association (ICPA), with not
less than five years of experience in manufacturing products similar to those required for this
project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Not less than five installations of comparable scope within the past three
years.
A. Packing and Shipping: Pack countertops, tub and shower surrounds, and other flat products in
08-7910
Section 06615
06615 - 1
01/09/2009
wooden crates to minimize shipping damage. Palletize other components.
B. Check for shipping damage during unloading at site and notify manufacturer immediately of any
obvious damage.
C. Store products under cover, off the ground, and protected from moisture. Handle products to
prevent physical damage. Protect surfaces from staining, scratching, and other damage during
handling and installation.
A. Field Measurements: Verify shop drawings with field measurements.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities of this section with construction activities
specified in related sections.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Vanity Tops with Integral Lavatories: Manufacturer's standard one-year limited warranty on
defective materials.
C. Window Sills: Manufacturer's standard ten-year limited warranty on defective materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide cast marble fabrications made of proprietary resin and gel coat finish with finished
properties as described under specific product types.
B. Adhesives and Sealants: As specified in Section 07900, and as follows:
1. To adhere cast marble panels to gypsum wallboard, use LN-601 Liquid Nails, Nail-No-More,
or other product recommended by manufacturer.
2. For joints between cast marble panels, use a mildew resistant 100 percent silicone joint
sealer; siliconized calking compound is not acceptable.
3. For sealing cast marble panels at adjoining surfaces such as gypsum wallboard, use mildew
resistant acrylic calk joint sealer, such as Phenoseal Acrylic Caulk by Gibson-Homans, or
other product recommended by cast marble panel manufacturer.
C. Polishing Cream: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.02 VANITY TOPS AND LAVATORY COUNTERTOPS
A. Material: Manufacturer's standard proprietary cast marble material.
B. Configuration: Homogeneous with integral backsplash, minimum thickness of 3/4 inch; other
dimensions as indicated on the drawings.
1. Provide end splashes of matching material.
2. Provide cut out for soap dispenser in public restrooms as specified under toilet accessories.
C. Integral Lavatory Bowls: Cast elliptical depression; comply with ANSI Z124.3 and test quarterly
on a random basis by accredited laboratory.
1. Bowl depth 6-1/8".
D. Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standards.
2.03 WINDOW SILLS
A. Material: Manufacturer's standard proprietary cast marble material.
B. Configuration: Minimum thickness of 3/4 inch; other dimensions as indicated on the drawings.
Section 06615
08-7910
01/09/2009 06615 - 2
C. Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's standards.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Use molds, materials, methods, and procedures that will result in proper texture and finish.
B. Fabricate to required profiles and dimensions. To the greatest extent possible, fabricate each
unit as a continuous piece, without joints, and configured to minimize on-site cutting or other
modifications.
C. Ease all edges and sand smooth; provide uniform gloss finish on all exposed surfaces.
D. Cure components prior to shipping, and remove traces of material that may be toxic or
incompatible with other building materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
Install components to be plumb, level, and rigid. Neatly scribe to adjoining surfaces, and field
trim as required for snug fit. Replace any component that is cracked, chipped, broken, or
otherwise defective.
B. Vanity Tops and Lavatory Countertops: Install on rigid wooden framework, following
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
C. Window Sills: Attach to solid substrate with silicone joint sealer, as recommended by
manufacturer.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 06615
06615 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 07115
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Bituminous dampproofing, provide below grade at exterior surface of elevator pit foundation
walls and footings only.
B. Protection boards.
A. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill.
A. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D 1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing.
C. ASTM D 2822 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Containing.
D. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing; National Roofing Contractors Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years experience.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application
until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Karnak Chemical Corp: www.karnakcorp.com.
2. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com.
2.02 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS
A. Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D 1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type
II).
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41, compatible with substrate.
08-7910
Section 07115
07115 - 1
01/09/2009
C. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D 2822, Type I.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Protection Board: 1/8 inch thick biodegradable hardboard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
dampproofing system.
C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply bitumen by spray application.
C. Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of 10 gal/100 sq ft.
D. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight.
E. Place protection board directly over dampproofing, butt joints, and adhere to tacky
dampproofing.
F. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
END OF SECTION
Section 07115
08-7910
01/09/2009 07115 - 2
SECTION 07212
BOARD AND BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs,
exterior wall behind gypsum wall finish, and as indicated on the drawings.
B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
B. Section 07533 - Mechanically Attached Single-Ply Ethylene Propylene Roofing: Board insulation
specified as part of roof system.
C. Section 07840 - Firestopping.
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation.
A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
B. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
E. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
1.06 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work
of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut
cell surfaces; with the following characteristics:
1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
08-7910
Section 07212
07212 - 1
01/09/2009
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Board Size: 24 x 96 inch.
4. Board Edges: Square.
5. Compressive Resistance: 20 psi.
6. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed blanket; conforming to the following:
1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for
facing, if any.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed
insulation surfaces.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A. Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
B. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.
C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS
A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.
B. Install boards horizontally on walls.
C. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing
Section 07212
08-7910
01/09/2009 07212 - 2
slab.
3.06 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 07212
07212 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Asphalt shingle roofing at Shed.
B. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
C. Associated metal flashings and accessories.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
B. Section 07110-Manufactured Roof Specialties: Attic space vent within shingled roof area.
A. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D 1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
C. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced
With Mineral Granules.
D. NRCA MS104 - The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association.
E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
F. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics, performance criteria, and
limitations.
C. Shop Drawings: For metal flashings, indicate specially configured metal flashings, jointing
methods and locations, fastening methods and locations, and installation details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
texture/pattern; for color selection.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Standard 30 year warranty.
A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surface or ambient air temperatures
are below 45 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHINGLES
08-7910
Section 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
07311 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Manufacturers:
1. Owens Corning Corp; Product Oakridge Pro 30 Architectural Style Shingle:
www.owenscorning.com.
B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surfaced, complying with ASTM D
3462; Class A fire resistance.
1. Color: As selected.
A. Eave Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM
D 1970; 40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top
surface.
B. Underlayment: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt, unperforated, complying with ASTM D
226, Type I ("No.15").
C. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet complying with ASTM D 1970;
40 mil total thickness; with strippable treated release paper and polyethylene sheet top surface.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel,.08 inch shank
diameter, 3/8 inch head diameter, of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 1/2
inch into roof sheathing or decking.
B. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphalt type, recommended for use in application of
underlayment, free of toxic solvents.
C. Ridge Vents: Plastic, formed with vent openings that do not permit direct water or weather
entry; flanged to receive shingles; Vent Sure 4' rigid strip externaly baffled with min. 17 sq. in.
per liner foot of net free area manufactured by Owens Corning.
2.04 METAL FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge and gable edge.
1. Form flashings to protect roofing materials from physical damage and shed water.
2. Form sections square and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
3. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.
4. Coat concealed surfaces of flashings with bituminous paint.
B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished aluminum, 0.016 inch thick; PVC coating, color as selected.
C. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners.
C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surface.
D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
E. Verify deck surfaces are dry, free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3.02 PREPARATION
Section 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
08-7910
01/09/2009 07311 - 2
A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch with deck tape.
B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fill knot holes and
surface cracks with latex filler.
C. Broom clean deck surfaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
D. Install eave edge and gable edge flashings tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches
and seal with plastic cement. Secure flange with nails spaced 8 inches on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE
A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 4 ft up-slope beyond interior face
of exterior wall.
B. Install eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION - UNDERLAYMENT
A. Install underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof, with ends and edges weather lapped
minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place. Weather lap
minimum 4 inches over eave protection.
B. Items projecting through or mounted on roof: Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic
cement.
3.05 INSTALLATION - VALLEY PROTECTION
A. Install one ply of flexible flashing, minimum 24 inches wide, centered over valleys.
B. Install flexible flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches.
D. Nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch from edges.
E. At Exposed Valleys: Install minimum 36 inches wide roll roofing with mineral surface side up
over first layer of protection, centered. Apply a 4 inch wide band of lap cement along each edge
of first, press roll roofing into cement, and nail in place minimum 18 inches on center, 1 inch
from edges.
3.06 INSTALLATION - SHINGLES
A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fasten individual shingles using 2 nails per shingle, or as required by code, whichever is
greater.
2. Fasten strip shingles using 4 nails per strip, or as required by code, whichever is greater.
B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5-1/3 inch weather exposure to produce double
thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
C. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond fascia boards.
D. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
E. Extend shingles on one slope across valley and fasten. Trim shingles from other slope 2 inches
from valley center line to achieve closed cut valley, concealing the valley protection.
F. Extend shingles on both slopes across valley in a weave pattern and fasten. Extend shingles a
minimum of 12 inches beyond valley center line to achieve woven valley, concealing the valley
protection.
G. Cap hips with individual shingles, maintaining 5 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid exposed
nails.
08-7910
Section 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
07311 - 3
01/09/2009
H. After installation, place one daub of plastic cement, one inch diameter under each individual
shingle tab exposed to weather, to prevent lifting.
I. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof with
weather tight placement of counterflashings.
J . Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
END OF SECTION
Section 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
08-7910
01/09/2009 07311 - 4
SECTION 07530
FULLY ADHERED EPDM MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Elastomeric roofing membrane, adhered conventional application.
B. Insulation, flat and tapered.
C. Vapor retarder.
D. Flashings.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs.
B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings.
C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units.
A. ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
B. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
C. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board.
D. ASTM D 4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane.
E. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
F. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors
Association.
G. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor
retarder, surfacing, and fasteners.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other
materials, and setting plan for tapered insulation.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions, special
procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity,
wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's
08-7910
Section 07530
07530 - 1
01/09/2009
instructions.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels
intact.
B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.
A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as
the work of this section proceeds.
A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.
C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is
expected or occurring.
D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
1.09 WARRANTY
B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide twenty year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent
penetration of water from the date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. EPDM Membrane Materials:
1. Firestone Building Products Co: www.firestonebpco.com.
B. Insulation:
1. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com.
2. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com.
3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
2.02 ROOFING
A. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over insulation. Firestone
RubberGard EPDM Membrane with White AcryliTop PC-100 Coating
B. Roofing Assembly Requirements:
1. Roof Covering External Fire-Resistance Classification: UL Class A.
Section 07530
08-7910
01/09/2009 07530 - 2
2. Factory Mutual Classification: Class I and windstorm resistance of I-60, in accordance with
FM DS 1-28.
C. Acceptable Insulation Types - Constant Thickness Application: Any type that meets requirements
and is approved by membrane manufacturer for application.
D. Acceptable Insulation Types - Tapered Application: Any of the types specified.
1. Uniform thickness polyisocyanurate board covered with tapered extruded polystyrene board.
2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Membrane: Ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM); externally reinforced with fabric;
complying with minimum properties of ASTM D 4637.
1. Thickness: 0.60 inch.
B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Colored Finish Coating: Acrylic,; finish coat of white color. Firestone AcryliTop PC-100 Top Coat
and manufacturer recommended base coat.
D. Vapor Retarder: Reinforced Kraft paper laminate; compatible with roofing and insulation
materials.
E. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane; conforming to the following:
1. Thickness: 60 mil.
2.04 INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289, Type I,
aluminum foil both faces; Class 1, non-reinforced foam core and with the following
characteristics:
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded expanded polystyrene
board with natural skin surfaces, with drainage channels one face; with the following
characteristics:
1. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch.
2. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/2 in; fabricate of fewest layers
possible.
4. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18 as determined by ASTM C 177.
5. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi.
6. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft.
7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Cant and Edge Strips: Wood fiberboard, compatible with roofing materials; cants formed to 45
degree angle.
B. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer.
C. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.
E. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane.
F. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
G. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped type, size and configuration as required to suit application.
08-7910
Section 07530
07530 - 3
01/09/2009
H. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped
and suitable for installation of roof system.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips
are in place.
3.02 CONCRETE DECK PREPARATION
A. Verify adjacent precast concrete roof members do not vary more than 1/4 inch in height. Verify
grout keys are filled flush.
B. Fill surface honeycomb and variations with latex filler.
C. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum.
3.03 INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE
A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge.
2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and
seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane.
B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation.
C. Attachment of Insulation: Embed insulation in adhesive in full contact, in accordance with
roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions.
D. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of
preceding layer.
E. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to
perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.
G. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 24
inches.
H. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
3.04 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Begin Roofing installation only in the presence of manufacturer's representative.
B. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate as recommended by membrane
manufacturer. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3
inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.
Section 07530
08-7910
01/09/2009 07530 - 4
D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal
permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E. At intersections with vertical surfaces:
1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 6 inches onto vertical surfaces.
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
3. Secure flashing to nailing strips at 4 inches on center.
4. Insert flashing into reglets and secure.
F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing.
G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings.
3.05 FINISHING UNBALLASTED SURFACES
A. Apply finish coating to membrane and flashing surfaces exposed to view, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and
inspection.
B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation
of the Work.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable
materials.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 07530
07530 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts,
conductor heads, copings, and other items indicated in Schedule.
A. Section 07530 -Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.
B. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
D. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
E. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
F. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric].
G. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
H. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of
experience.
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
08-7910
Section 07620
07620 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick
base metal.
B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre
coated with modified silicone coating of color as selected.
1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603;
baked enamel finish system; color as scheduled.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Hook strip or Clip Type, Same material and finish as flashing metal.
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
F. Solder: ASTM B 32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B. Form pieces in 8 foot lengths.. Make allowance for expansion joint.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
drip.
G. After Soldering remove flux immediatly. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.
B. Downspouts: Size indicated.
C. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
D. Downspout Boots: Plastic.
E. Seal metal joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
Section 07620
08-7910
01/09/2009 07620 - 2
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
E. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
F. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum.
G. Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight.
H. Counter-flash mechanical and electrical items projecting through membrane roofing.
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements.
B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
C. Remove damaged pieces and replace with new, acceptable material meeting the requirements of
the specifications.
D. Completed work shall be cleaned as required in accordance with the metal manufacturer's
instructions and left free of stains and discoloration.
E. Remove all scrap debris and dispose of off-site, leave all work areas clean.
3.05 SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 07620
07620 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Roof hatches.
A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet
metal.
A. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ROOF HATCHES
A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:
1. Bilco Co.Type S with Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System: www.bilco.com
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
C. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release
hardware.
1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck.
3. Size(s): As indicated on drawings; single-leaf style unless indicated as double-leaf.
4. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 36 inches.
D. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick.
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.
3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber, located on outside face of curb.
4. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum.
E. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction.
1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.
08-7910
Section 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
07720 - 1
01/09/2009
2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch
thick.
3. Finish: Factory prime paint.
4. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber.
5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.
F. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
6. Provide safety rail accessory.
7. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Clean installed work to like-new condition.
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES
08-7910
01/09/2009 07720 - 2
SECTION 07840
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Firestopping systems.
B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant
assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not.
A. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
B. ASTM E 814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
C. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.
D. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly,
and firestopping test or design number.
C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the specified fire ratings
when tested in accordance with methods indicated.
1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL or FM will be considered
as constituting an acceptable test report.
2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above
substantiation exists.
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions
during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after
installation of materials.
B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.
1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 that
has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F
Rating and that meets all other specified requirements.
08-7910
Section 07840
FIRESTOPPING
07840 - 1
01/09/2009
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and
compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following:
1. Durability and Longevity: Permanent.
2. Color: Black, dark gray, or red.
3. Manufacturers:
a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com.
b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
B. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound; conforming to the following:
2. Manufacturers:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.
c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com.
C. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos
fibers; conforming to the following:
2. Manufacturers:
b. USG: www.usg.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
D. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer
forming airtight bond to opening; conforming to the following:
2. Manufacturers:
b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
c. USG: www.usg.com.
E. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and collar, intended to
be installed after penetrating item has been installed; conforming to the following:
2. Manufacturers:
a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.
F. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain; conforming to
the following:
1. Potential Expansion: Minimum 1000 percent.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Grace Construction Products: www.na.graceconstruction.com.
G. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for
Section 07840
FIRESTOPPING
08-7910
01/09/2009 07840 - 2
tested assembly design.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could
adversely affect bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.
C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, completely closing openings.
B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction.
C. Install labelling required by code.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 07840
FIRESTOPPING
07840 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 07900
J OINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. Hollow gaskets.
A. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications.
C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric J oint Sealants.
D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of J oint Sealants.
E. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell).
F. ASTM D 2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric J oint Seals for
concrete Pavements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and surface preparation.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years experience.
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.08 WARRANTY
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
08-7910
Section 07900
J OINT SEALERS
07900 - 1
01/09/2009
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Silicone Sealants:
1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.
4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com.
B. Polyurethane Sealants:
C. Butyl Sealants:
D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:
2.02 SEALANTS
A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G,
and A; single component.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
2. Product: Dymonic manufactured by Tremco.
3. Product: Dynatrol manufactured by Pecora.
4. Product: Sonolastic NP manufactured by BASF.
5. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. J oints between concrete and other materials.
c. J oints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
B. Exterior Expansion J oint Sealer: ASTM D 2628, hollow neoprene (polychloroprene) compression
gasket.
1. Black color.
2. Size and Shape: As indicated on Drawings.
a. Exterior wall expansion joints.
C. Exterior Metal Lap J oint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.
1. Product: J S-773 manufactured by Tremco.
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.
Section 07900
J OINT SEALERS
08-7910
01/09/2009 07900 - 2
D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single
component, paintable.
2. Product: Tremflex 834 manufactured by Tremco.
3. Product: AC-220 manufactured by Pecora.
4. Product: Sonolastic NP manufactured by Sonneborne.
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. J oints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
E. Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Product: Tremsil 200 manufactured by Tremco.
a. J oints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. J oints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.
F. Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and
A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.
G. Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G, O; single
component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water
immersion, non-sagging type.
a. Exterior J oints.
b. Vertical Surfaces.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. J oint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C. J oint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
08-7910
Section 07900
J OINT SEALERS
07900 - 3
01/09/2009
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Width/depth ratio of 2:1.
2. Neck dimension no greater than 1/3 of the joint width.
3. Surface bond area on each side not less than 75 percent of joint width.
E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints concave.
I. Compression Gaskets: Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with
adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
Section 07900
J OINT SEALERS
08-7910
01/09/2009 07900 - 4
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
B. Steel frames for wood doors.
C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.
D. Thermally insulated steel doors.
E. Steel glazing frames.
A. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council.
B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames.
D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
E. ASTM C 236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building
Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box.
F. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by
Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
G. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames.
H. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and
Hardware Institute (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).
I. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
J . NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.
K. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
L. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.
08-7910
Section 08110
08110 - 1
01/09/2009
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and
identifying location of different finishes, if any.
D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames:
1. Assa Abloy Curries or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com.
3. Windsor Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com.
4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.
2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges.
4. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings.
6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
7. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed),
manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.
B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.03 STEEL DOORS
A. Exterior Doors:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 1, full flush.
2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF180 coating.
4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.24 btu/hr/sf/deg.F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C
1363 or ASTM C 236.
Section 08110
08-7910
01/09/2009 08110 - 2
5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710.
B. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated:
1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C
("positive pressure").
a. Rate of Temperature Rise Across Door Thickness for Stair Doors: 450 F degrees.
b. Provide units listed and labeled by UL.
c. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
3. Core: Mineral fiberboard.
2.04 STEEL FRAMES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
a. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8
for Level 2
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to
be grouted.
4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high
to fill opening without cutting masonry units.
5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head,
flush with top.
B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710.
C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door
frames, and as indicated on drawings.
A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed.
B. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08710.
1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped.
C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner
pumpable grout is prohibited.
D. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
E. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.06 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Touch up areas where galvanized coating has been removed due to sanding and handling.
Chemically treat surfaces.
08-7910
Section 08110
08110 - 3
01/09/2009
C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard.
B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Provide jamb anchors: SDI-100. Weld floor jamb anchors in place.
E. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
F. Coordinate installation of hardware.
G. Coordinate installation of glazing.
H. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
I. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.06 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
Section 08110
08-7910
01/09/2009 08110 - 4
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.
C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing.
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.
B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural
Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.
C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.
D. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association.
E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
F. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C. Specimen warranty.
D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts
required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory
finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing.
E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6x6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain
color, and sheen.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
G. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and
finishing.
this section with minimum three years of experience.
C. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.
08-7910
Section 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Provide warranty for the following term:
1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.
D. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Masonite Corp. www.masonite.com; Product Flush series Embossed Prefinished Hardboard.
2.02 DOORS
A. Interior Doors: 1-3/8 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations except provide hollow core doors at locations
indicated.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252, UL
10B, or UBC Standard 7-2-94 ("neutral pressure"); UL labeled without any visible seals
when door is open.
3. Embossed Hardboard facing with factory finish to match prehung door frames.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces
as indicated above.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking
as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.
C. Hollow Core Doors: Type Standard (SHC/FSHC); plies and faces as indicated above.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: AHA A135.4, Class 2 - Standard, S2S (smooth two sides)
hardboard, composition face, 1/8 inch thick.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink
style tamper proof screws.
Section 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08-7910
01/09/2009 08211 - 2
B. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge,
specifically for double doors.
2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails:
C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
1. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
G. Factory Bevel doors.
H. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion.
3.04 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 08310
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall, and ceiling locations. Provide
in the following locations:
1. Access to fire dampers
2. Concealed items requiring maintenance.
3. As shown on the drawings.
A. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.
A. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of
adjoining work.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated access doors.
1. Provide access doors of fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they are to
be installed.
B. Provide products listed and labeled by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors:
1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be
installed in.
B. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating equivalent to the fire rated assembly in which they
are to be installed.
08-7910
Section 08310
08310 - 1
01/09/2009
2.03 ACCESS DOOR UNITS - WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.
1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel.
2. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet.
3. Size: As indicated.
4. Hardware:
a. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin.
b. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit.
5. Prime coat with alkyd primer.
B. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings:
1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring:
a. Model #3210-016 manufactured by Milcor.
C. Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings:
1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring:
a. 1 hour fire rating.
b. Model # 3218-27 manufactured by Milcor.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
Section 08310
08-7910
01/09/2009 08310 - 2
SECTION 08410
METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Infill panels of glass.
B. Aluminum doors and frames.
C. Weatherstripping.
D. Perimeter sealant.
A. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association (part of AAMA 501).
C. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
D. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
E. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
F. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
G. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design
wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
1. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with
full recovery of glazing materials.
B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection
of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
08-7910
Section 08410
08410 - 1
01/09/2009
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused
by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage
and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, dimensional
limitations.
E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each
door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision
of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at Illinois.
B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum
glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping and air barrier components or materials.
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include
provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Section 08410
08-7910
01/09/2009 08410 - 2
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Kawneer North America; Product 360 Insulclad Thermal Doors: www.kawneer.com.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section
insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Glazing stops: Flush.
2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.
B. Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide.
3. Vertical Stiles: 4 inches wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 16 inches wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C. Perimeter Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
D. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.
E. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
2.04 FINISHES
2.05 HARDWARE
A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08710.
B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
D. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.
G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
08-7910
Section 08410
08410 - 3
01/09/2009
H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed
assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
B. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
D. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
E. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
F. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
G. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
H. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
I. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
J . Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection
requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing.
B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3.05 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
Section 08410
08-7910
01/09/2009 08410 - 4
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 08410
08410 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Extruded aluminum windows with fixed sash, operating sash, and insert ventilator.
B. Factory glazing.
C. Operating hardware.
D. Insect screens.
A. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and
Wood Windows and Glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural
C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of
Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.
D. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association.
E. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil
Engineers.
F. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
G. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
H. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
I. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
J . ASTM F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window
Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.
A. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional requirements:
B. Design and size windows to withstand the following load requirements, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E 330 using test loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads with 10
second duration of maximum load:
1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.
2. Positive Design Wind Load: 80 lbf/sq ft.
3. Negative Design Wind Load: 80 lbf/sq ft.
4. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with
08-7910
Section 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 1
01/09/2009
full recovery of glazing materials.
C. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of
lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
D. The fixed window Thermal Transmittance U-Value shall be 0.34 BTU/hr/ft2/F when tested in
accordance with AAMA 1503-98
E. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
F. Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 74 when measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.
G. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly.
H. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, or migrating moisture occurring
within system.
I. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F 588 requirements for performance level 40 for
first floor operable windows only.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, information on glass and glazing, internal
drainage details, and descriptions of hardware and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening
tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage
locations,, and installation requirements.
D. Samples: Submit one sample, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical corner construction,
accessories, and finishes.
E. Submit one sample of operating hardware.
F. Certificates: Certify that windows meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning
requirements for both window and insert ventilator.
A. Comply with requirements of AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Designation AW-80.
A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not
use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or
weather.
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.09 WARRANTY
Section 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08-7910
01/09/2009 08520 - 2
B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide two year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include
provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kawneer; www.kawneer.com; Product 5500 ISOWEB Window with 512 Ventrow Isolock
Ventilator where indicated..
B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
2.02 WINDOWS
A. Windows: Tubular aluminum sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, thermally broken,
vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
B. Fixed, Non-Operable Type:
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.
3. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
4. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
C. Outswinging Awning Type:
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Provide screens.
3. Glazing: Double; clear; low-e.
4. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
5. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Frames: 1-3/4 inch wide x 1-3/4 inch deep profile, of 4 inch thick section; thermally broken with
interior portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of lock-in screwless
type.
B. Provide 512 Ventrow intake ventilators as manufacturered by Kawneer in locations indicated on
the drawings. Ventilator shall be a two part pivoted componet with no operating hardware. Finish
shall match window finish.
C. Insect Screen Frame: Extruded aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable
hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit. Frame finish to match window.
D. Insect Screens: 18x16 mesh, glass fiber strands.
E. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective
weather seal.
F. Fasteners: 300 Series Stainless steel.
G. Weathering and glazing gaskets shall be extruded, black, closed cell or dense elastomer of
durometer appropriate to the function.
H. Exterior weathering shall be Tremco VISIONstrip.
08-7910
Section 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 3
01/09/2009
I. Thermal separators shall be rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC).
J . Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
2.05 HARDWARE
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with smallest possible clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly that will enable window installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices.
D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for operating hardware.
F. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
G. Assemble insect screen frames with mitered and reinforced corners. Secure wire mesh tautly in
frame. Fit frame with four, spring loaded steel pin retainers.
H. Double weatherstrip operable units.
I. Factory glaze window units.
2.07 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than
0.7 mils thick.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive
aluminum windows.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
D. Install sill and sill end angles.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
G. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.
H. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with requirements specified in Section 07900.
Section 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08-7910
01/09/2009 08520 - 4
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1/16 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/8 inches
per 10 ft, whichever is less.
3.04 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer;
rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant
and window manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08520 - 5
01/09/2009

08-7910 FINISH HARDWARE
SECTION 08710

FINISH HARDWARE

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Refer to General and Special Conditions and Instructions to Bidders,
Division 1 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the
project drawings shall govern work in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.
2. Proximity Reader control system.
3. Power supplies for electric hardware.
4. Low energy door operators plus actuators.
5. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware.
6. Wiring and riser diagrams for electric hardware.
7. Key Cabinets.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Finish Hardware Installation.
2. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers exterior thresholds.
3. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.
4. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors.
5. Section 08400 Metal Framed Entrances and Storefronts.

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated
elsewhere.

1. Windows.
2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks.
3. Signs, except where scheduled.
4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars.
5. Installation.
6. Rough hardware.

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.
B. American National Standards Institute ANSI 156.18 Materials and
Finishes.
08710-1 1/9/2009
FINISH HARDWARE ENOLA A DEW APARTMENTS
08710 08-7910
C. ANSI A117.1 Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by
physically handicapped people.
D. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990
E. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
F. DHI Door and Hardware Institute
G. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows
2. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
3. NFPA 105 Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
4. NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

H. UL Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL10C Fire Test of Door Assemblies as amended to incorporate
positive pressure testing.

I. WHI Warnock Hersey Incorporated
J . SDI Steel Door Institute
K. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. SUBMITTALS: Organize vertically formatted schedule into Hardware
Sets following guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute
Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule with
index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every
item required for each door or opening. Horizontal schedule format will
be returned Not Approved . Include following information:

1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.
2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door
schedule.
5. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
8. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with
address and phone number.
9. Catalog cuts.
10. Manufacturers technical data and installation instructions for
electronic hardware.
1/9/2009 08710-2
11. Date of jobsite visit.

B. Bid and submit manufacturers updated/improved item if scheduled item is
discontinued.

C. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Include product
data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on
request.

1. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested
by Owner to meet existing standard.

D. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including
keying schedule, manufacturers installation, adjustment and maintenance
information, and suppliers final inspection report.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Qualifications:

1. Hardware supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware
supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing
hardware in the projects vicinity for a period of not less than 2
years. Who is or who employs an experienced Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available, at reasonable times
during the course of the Work, for consultation about projects
hardware requirements to Owner, Architect and Contractor.

2. Electrified hardware supplier: An experienced door hardware
supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware
similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this
project, who has a record of successful in-service performance and
is acceptable to manufacturer of materials. Shall prepare data for
electrified door hardware based on testing and engineering analysis
of manufacturers assemblies similar to those in this project.

3. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish
hardware.

B. Hardware: New, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain
each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and
closers) from one manufacturer.

C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a
key or special knowledge or effort.
08710-3 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910

D. Fire-Rated Openings: In compliance with NFPA 80. Provide proper
latching hardware, non-flaming door closers and approved-bearing hinges.
Furnish openings complete.

E. Pre-Installation Meetings: Prior to start of hardware installation, contractor
shall schedule and conduct pre-installation meeting with hardware
supplier, lock, exit device, and door closer manufacturers
representative(s), installer and related trades, to coordinate materials and
techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems
installation. Proper and correct installation and adjustment of hardware is
to be reviewed, and criteria for punch list review will be established.
Convene at least one week prior to commencement of related work.
Written documentation of date and attendees/participants is to be provided
to architect and owner for record.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field).

B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers original
containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly
mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and
door numbers. Shipments direct from manufacturer to Site are not
acceptable.

C. Storage: Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture,
sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc

1.6 PROJ ECT CONDITIONS:

A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished
shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types
having as nearly as practical as the same operation and quality as type
specified, subject to Architects approval.

B. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish
hardware required to complete Work, including size, strike plate size,
quantities, and sill conditions material. If conflict between the scheduled
material and existing conditions, submit request for directions from
Architect.

1.7 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION:

A. Reinforce walls for wall stops.
1/9/2009 08710-4

B. Coordinate finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.

C. Conduit and raceways as needed for electrical and electronic hardware
items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams
plus riser diagrams to related trades.

D. Furnish manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators.

E. Use hardware consultant to check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances
to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware
installation.

F. Provide proper power supply for all electrified hardware specified.

1.8 WARRANTY:

A. Part of respective manufacturers regular terms of sale. Provide
manufacturers warranties:

1. Mortise Locksets: Three years.
2. Bored Locksets: Two years.
3. Closers: Ten years mechanical, two years electrical.
4. Exit Devices: Three years.
5. Hinges: Life of Building.
6. Other Hardware: Two years.

1.9 COMMISSIONING:

A. Test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell
pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation.

B. Test electrical hardware systems for satisfactory operation.

C. Test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation
and release.

1.10 MAINTENANCE:

A. Furnish operating and maintenance data of manufacturers for door
hardware items. Include instructions for operation, adjustments and
maintenance and parts list.

08710-5 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
B. Instruct personnel of Owner in proper adjustments and maintenance of
door hardware and hardware finishes during final adjustment phase of
hardware installation.

C. Key bitting list shall be delivered from lock manufacturer directly to
representative of Owner with return receipt. Furnish copy of transmittal
letter to Architect.
D. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for continued
adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware by
Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit for review products with
equivalent function and features of scheduled products.

ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE
SUB:

Hinges (IVE) Ives McKinney, Stanley
Continuous Hinges (IVE) Ives Pemko, Zero
Key System (SCH) Schlage No Substitution
Locks (SCH) Schlage No Substitution
Aluminum Door Locks (ADA) Adams Rite No Substitution
Exit Devices (VON) Von Duprin No Substitution
Closers (LCN) LCN Dor-O-Matic
Flush Bolts (IVE) Ives Hiawatha, Trimco
Coordinators (IVE) Ives Hiawatha, Trimco
Push & Pull Plates (IVE) Ives Hiawatha, Trimco
Kickplates (IVE) Ives Hiawatha, Trimco
Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Hiawatha, Trimco
Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-J ohnson No Substitution
Thresholds (NGP) National Guard Pemko, Reese
Seals & Bottoms (NGP) National Guard Pemko, Reese
Key Cabinets (TEL) TelKey Lund

B. Provide hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with
these specifications and manufacturers instructions.

1/9/2009 08710-6
1. Include items inadvertently omitted from this specification. Note
these items in submittal for review. There will not be any extras
allowed for items that should have been picked up during bidding.
2. Where scheduled item is now obsolete, bid and furnish
manufacturers updated item at no additional cost to the project.

2.2 HANGING MEANS:

A. Conventional Hinges: Hinge open widths minimum, but, of sufficient throw
to permit maximum door swing. Steel or stainless steel pins and
concealed bearings.

1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 foot, 6 inch height. Add one for each
additional 30 inches in height, or any fraction thereof.
2. Extra heavy weight hinges on doors over 3 foot, 5 inches in width.
3. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP)
pins.
4. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive
atmospheric conditions.
5. Provide shims and shimming instructions for proper door
adjustment.
6. Scheduled Hinges are Ives 5BB1
7. Finish of hinges is to be 652
8. Accepted substitutions: McKinney TB2714, Stanley FBB179

B. Continuous Hinges: A pinless assembly of three interlocking extrusions
applied to the full height of the door and frame without mortising. The door
leaf and jamb leaf shall be geared together for the entire length of the
hinge and joined by a channel. Hinge knuckle shall be monolithic in
appearance. Continuous hinge with visible knuckle separations are not
acceptable. Vertical door loads shall be carried on minimum acetal
bearings through a full 180 degrees. The door leaf and jamb leaf shall
have templated screw hole locations for future replacement needs. All
heavy duty hinges (HD) shall have a minimum of 32 bearings for a 7
length.

1. Factory machine hinge leaves for electric power transfer device
where specified in Hardware Sets.
2. Scheduled Hinge: Ives 224HD
3. Accepted substitution: Pemko CFM-SLFHD, Zero 914DB

2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS:

A. Standard Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches:
08710-7 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910

1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled
steel, through-bolted.
2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, interlocking design.
3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-
resistant plated steel or stainless steel.
4. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage
supported, minimum 2 clearance from lever mid-point to face of
door.
5. Lock Series and Design: Schlage AL series, Saturn design.
6. Certifications:

a. ANSI A156.2, 1994, Series 4000, Grade 2
b. UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft

7. Accepted substitutions: No Substitutions per owners request.

B. Interconnected Locks:

1. Interconnected linkage housing connects deadbolt and latch
operation.
2. Enlarged turn piece for ease of operation.
3. Inside lever provides simultaneous retraction of deadbolt and latch.
4. 1 throw deadbolt with hardened steel roller.
5. Lock Series and Design: Schlage S200 series, Saturn design.
6. Certifications:

c. ANSI A156.2, 1992, Grade 2
d. UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft

7. Accepted substitutions: No Substitutions per owners request.

2.4 EXIT DEVICES/PANIC HARDWARE

A. General features:

1. Independent lab-tested 2,000,000 cycles.
2. Push-through touch pad design. No exposed touch bar fasteners,
no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners
and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices.
3. throw deadlocking latchbolts.
4. No exposed screws to show through glass doors.
1/9/2009 08710-8
5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable
with all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of
function.
6. Releasable with 32 lb. maximum pressure under 250 lb. load to the
door.
7. Heavy cast metal flush mounted end caps finished to match exit
device.

B. Specific features:

1.
2.
3.
Lever Trim: Breakaway type (996L), forged brass or bronze
escutcheon min .130 thickness, match lockset lever design.
Exterior doors to have Ives Vandal-Resistant pulls.
Fire-Labeled Devices: UL label indicating Fire Exit Hardware.
Vertical rod devices less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise
scheduled.
4. Electrically Operated Devices: Single manufacturer source for
electric latch retraction devices, electrically controlled trim, power
transfers, power supplies, monitoring switches and controls.
5. Furnish one 98/99MK parts maintenance kit per project.
6. Scheduled Exit Device: Von Duprin 99 series or 33 Series
7. Finish of Exit Devices is to be 626
8. Accepted substitutions: No Sub per Owners Request

2.5 CLOSERS

A. General: One manufacturer for closer units throughout the Work, including
surface closers, high security closers, overhead concealed closers, floor
closers, low-energy door operators and electromagnetic hold-open
closers.

B. Surface Closers:

1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover
and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece
forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring.
2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code.
3. Independent lab-tested 5,000,000 cycles.
4. Thru-bolts at wood doors unless doors are provided with closer
blocking. Non-sized, non-handed and adjustable. Place closers
inside building, stairs and rooms.
08710-9 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface
with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring
hardware.
6. Opening pressure: Exterior doors 8.5 lb., interior doors 5 lb.,
labeled fire doors 15 lb.
7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and
backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled.
8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at all doors scheduled with parallel arm
units.
9. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures
from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish data on request.
10. Non-flaming fluid will not fuel door or floor covering fires.
11. Scheduled Closer: Dor-O-Matic SC80 series and SC60 Series
12. Finish of Door Closers is to be 689 (Aluminum)
13. Accepted substitutions: LCN 1461 and LCN 1231

C. Low-Energy Door Operators:
1. Where Low Energy Power Operated Door as defined by ANSI
Standard A156.19 is indicated for doors required to be accessible
to the disabled, provide pneumatically powered operators
complying with the ADA requirements.
2. Full closing force shall be provided when the power or assist cycle
ends.
3. Modular design, adjustments easily accessible from the front, UL
listed for use on labeled doors.
4. Shall have Second Chance function to accommodate momentary
resistance, Breakaway function in the electronically controlled
clutch, Soft Start motor control function and Maintain Hold-Open
Switch to hold the door open at 90 degrees.
5. Shall have built in 12V and 24V power supply for actuators, card
readers, electric strikes and magnetic door locks, inputs for both
swing and stop side sensors and available to accept either 120VAC
or 220VAC input power. All wiring connections between operator
modules made by easy-to-handle electrical connectors. Shall
comply with both UL and NEC requirements for Class 1 and Class
2 wiring by providing separate conduits for each.
6. Shall have seven independent electronic adjustments to tailor the
operator for specific site conditions. Opening speed, holding force
at 90 degrees, sequential trigger and time delay, hold-open time at
90 degrees, opening force, clutch breakaway force setting,
electric strike trigger and dime delay.
7. Shall have separate and independent adjustments for back check,
main speed and latch speed.
8. Furnish actuators and other controls as specified in Hardware Sets.
1/9/2009 08710-10
9. Scheduled Operators: LCN 4640 series
10. Approved substitutions: No Sub per Owners Request

2.6 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES, COORDINATORS

A. Constant Latching Flush Bolts shall be UL listed for use in pairs or as
single top bolt with auxiliary latch for labeled pairs of wood or hollow metal
doors. Low actuation forces. Inactive door will re-latch automatically.

1. Scheduled constant latching flush bolts: Ives FB51P / FB52
2. Finish of constant latching flush bolts is to be 630
3. Accepted substitutions: Trimco 3820

B. Manual Flush Bolts shall be provided in pairs, be non-handed, fit standard
ANSI metal door prep and be UL listed for use on doors with fire ratings
up to 3 hours. Bolts shall have minimum 5/8 bolt throw with 7/8 vertical
adjustment. Top bolt rod shall be provided in length to position activating
lever not more than 80 inches above the finished floor.

1. Scheduled manual flush bolts: Ives FB458
2. Finish of manual flush bolts is to be 626
3. Accepted substitutions: Hiawatha 1520, Trimco 3917

C. Dustproof Strikes are to be spring loaded plunger type, with locking ring
for use with threshold, or mounting flange for installation where no
threshold is present.

1. Scheduled dustproof strikes: Ives DP2
2. Finish of dustproof strike is to be 626
3. Accepted substitutions: Hiawatha 1400, Trimco 3910

D. Coordinators shall prevent the active door from closing before inactive
door. Stop mounted channel 1-5/8 x 5/8 steel tubing x length to suit door
opening. Coordinator shall be UL listed. Furnish filler bars to fill gap
between end of coordinator and inactive door frame. Furnish mounting
brackets for all stop mounted hardware such as exit device strikes, door
closer PA shoes, etc. Coordinators shall be prepared (cutout) at the
factory for surface applied or concealed vertical rod panic devices if
required.

1. Scheduled coordinator: Ives COR
2. Accepted substitutions: Hager 297D

2.7 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS

08710-11 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
A. Surface mounted and concealed overhead stops and holders shall be
heavy duty 300 series stainless steel, brass/bronze and steel materials, as
required for specified finish, with finished metal end caps. Holders shall
incorporate selective, adjustable hold-open mechanism. Templating of
both surface and concealed overhead stops and holders allows for 85 to
115 degree stop/hold open position.

1. Scheduled surface mounted overhead stops and holders are
Glynn-J ohnson 90 Series; scheduled concealed overhead stops
and holders are Glynn-J ohnson 100 series.
2. Finish is to be 630
3. Accepted substitutions: No Sub per Owners Request

2.8 PROXIMITY READERS CONTROLLERS AND SOFTWARE

A. Locknetics HID Compatible Proximity Reader, SNAP compatible, and 1
year warranty.

1. Prior to completion of project, manufacturer of programmable
system will provide set up, programming, and training with the
architect/owner.
2. Accepted substitutions: NO SUBSTITUTIONS

B. As part of this contract, in addition to the proximity readers and controllers
listed in the Hardware Sets, the hardware supplier will supply the following
access items;

1. 1 Schlage 56-037 SNAP Programmer with cables and SMS
software
2. 3 Schlage 48-530 I Button (300 buttons required)
3. 1- Schlage 48-515 Red Programmer button

2.9 OTHER HARDWARE

A. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height
and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel
to match other hardware.

1. Scheduled kick plates are: Ives 8400
2. Finish of kick plates is to be US32D
3. Accepted substitutions: Hiawatha J 102, Trimco K0050

B. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.

1/9/2009 08710-12
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with
appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide
overhead type.
2. Scheduled door stops are: Ives WS407CCV
3. Finish of door stops is to be US32D
4. Accepted substitutions: Hiawatha, Trimco

C. Seals: Specially formulated to withstand greater temperature extremes
while providing maximum protection against air infiltration. UL label
applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute products: certify that the
products equal or exceed specified materials thickness and durability.
Proposed substitutions: submit for approval.

1. Meets UL10B and ASTM E283 classification.
2. Sound control openings: Use components tested as a system using
nationally accepted standards by independent laboratories. Ensure
that the door leafs have the necessary sealed-in-place STC ratings.
3. Scheduled seals: National Guard Products 160SA, 5050B
4. Finish of seals is to be Aluminum
5. Accepted substitutions: Pemko, Reese

D. Sweeps: Specially formulated to withstand greater temperature extremes
while providing maximum protection against air infiltration. Neoprene or
nylon brush type as scheduled.

1. Scheduled sweeps: National Guard Products 200NA, 600
2. Finish of sweeps is to be Aluminum

G. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Substitute products: certify that
the products equal or exceed specified materials thickness. Proposed
substitutions: submit for approval.

1. Exteriors: Set in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 Thermal and
Moisture Protection. Non-ferrous inch fasteners and lead
expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved
equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL).
2. Fire-rated openings, 90min or less duration: use thresholds to
interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material
has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square
centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none
scheduled, request direction from Architect.
3. Sound control openings: Set in bed of mastic sealant.
08710-13 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
4. Scheduled thresholds: National Guard Products 513, 896S
5. Finish of thresholds is to be mill finish aluminum.

I. Pulls: When specified for use with exit devices pulls shall be 1 round bar
offset type with 10 center-to-center offset pulls.

1. Scheduled pulls: Ives 8190-0
2. Finish of pulls is to be
3. Accepted substitutions: Hiawatha 658A, Trimco 1191-3

F. Electric Strikes: Provide remote release of a locked door. They shall be
designed for use with the type of locks shown at each opening where
required. Strikes will be UL listed for Burglary-Resistant Electric Door
Strike, and where required, shall be UL listed as electric strikes for Fire
Doors or Frames. Faceplates shall be stainless steel with finish as
specified for each opening. The locking components shall be stainless
steel to resist damage and abuse. Solenoids shall be of the continuous
duty type for the voltage specified. Plug connectors will be furnished.
Strikes shall have an adjustable backbox to compensate for misalignment
of door and frame.

1. Scheduled electric strikes: Von Duprin 6111
2. Finish of electric strikes is to be 630
3. Accepted substitutions: Folger Adams 712

L. Viewers: One way wide angle viewer: Ives U698 two viewers to be
provided at handicapped accessible units.

M. Knox box: recessed mount with lift-off door, UL listed tamper switches.
plates steel housing, thick steel door with interior gasket seal. Box and
lock UL Listed. Lock has 1/8 thick stainless steel dust cover with tamper
seal mounting capability.

1. Exterior dimensions: 7H x 7W x 3-1/4D.
2. Lock: UL Listed Double-action rotating tumblers and hardened
steel pins accessed by biased cut key.
3. Finish: Knox-Coat proprietary finish process; Aluminum
4. Product; 3200 Series KNOX BOX
5. Locate in location indicated by local fire department.

2. Latch Guards: Where shown in Hardware Sets at out-swing single and
out-swing or in-swing pairs of doors, provide stainless steel latch guard
to cover latch area or gap between door and frame, or between doors
in pairs. Latch guards to be thru-bolted through door, with fasteners
1/9/2009 08710-14
above and below mortise lock case. Provide proper width latch guard
for use with specified lock operating trim.

1. Scheduled latch guards: Ives
2. Finish of latch guards is to be 630

R. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive.
Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors
(FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread.
Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.

S. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of
doors. Omit where adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no
unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes.

T. Key Cabinet: As part of this contract, the finish hardware supplier shall
provide one TelKey surface mounted key cabinet, Aristocrat AWC
model. Cabinet shall be fully set-up and indexed with all keys attached to
hook clips, indexed and recorded. Capacity of key cabinet shall be same
as number of locks and cylinders on project, plus an additional 50% for
future expansion. Components of key cabinet shall include, in quantities to
accommodate job plus 50% requirements listed above, the following:
1. Numbered Label Sheets
2. Key Gathering Envelopes
3. Key Tags
4. Permanent Key Tags for File Keys
5. Duplicate Key Tags
6. System Index Sheets:
a. Alphabetical Index
b. Hook Number Index
c. Key Numerical Index
d. Master Index
e. Cross Index
7. Signature Cards
8. Permanent Loan Register

Completely set up and indexed key cabinet shall be delivered with a
signed receipt to District Construction Manager.

2.10 FINISH:

A. Generally BHMA 626/628/630 as indicated in hardware sets.

08710-15 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection
plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted.

B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless
otherwise noted.

C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to
coordinate with frame color.

2.11 KEYING REQUIREMENTS:

A. Key System: Schlage Primus patented keyway, non-interchangeable core
typically with interchangeable core type operating cylinders for panic
hardware. Key blanks available only from factory-direct sources, not
available from after-market key blank manufacturers. For estimate use
factory GMK charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner to
determine system keyway(s) and structure. Furnish Owners written
approval of the system.

1. New factory registered master key system.
2. Primus Level 3
3. Furnish 6 master keys per master key group
4. Furnish 3 control keys
5. Furnish 1 extractor tool 35-057.
6. Re-combinate entire project at no extra expense to Owner if
missing any key.

B. Key Cylinders: utility patented, 6-pin solid brass construction.

C. Locks and cylinders: keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where
permanent records are maintained. Locks and cylinders same
manufacturer.

D. Permanent keys: secured shipment direct from point of origination to
Owner.

E. Bitting List: secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner.

F. Supply three (3) cut keys per cylinder or lock.

G. Supply 50 key blanks stamped with Do Not Duplicate

H. All keys to be stamped with Do Not Duplicate

I. Stamp all keys with appropriate key set.
1/9/2009 08710-16

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS:

A. Installer must demonstrate suitable competence and experience with
installing finish hardware on like projects.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware
installation.

B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety,
accessibility, and security codes.

1. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering material.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware per manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed
on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust
and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation.

1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead
stops, rim strikes, etc. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors
before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals
to tops of sweeps.
2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and
insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar
anchoring device for screws.

B. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

3.4 ADJ USTING

A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which
cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.

1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods
to be repaired or replaced to Owners satisfaction at no additional
cost to Owner.
08710-17 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910

B. Inspection: Use hardware supplier. Include suppliers with closeout
documents.

C. Follow-up inspection: Installer to provide letter of agreement to Owner that
approximately 6 months after substantial completion, installer will visit
Project with representatives of the manufacturers of the locking devices
and door closers to accomplish following:

1. Re-adjust hardware.
2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or
additions, and instruct Owners personnel.
3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed.
4. Submit written report identifying problems and likely future
problems.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Demonstrate electrical hardware systems, including adjustment and
maintenance procedures.

3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING:

A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering,
carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just
prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from
installation/reinstallation process.

3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments.

B. Manufacturers and their abbreviations used in this schedule:

DOR Dor-O-Matic
GLY Glynn-J ohnson Hardware
IVE H. B. Ives
LCN LCN Closers
LOC Locknetics
NGP National Guard Products
SCH Schlage Lock Company
TEL TelKey
VON Von Duprin
1/9/2009 08710-18

C. The following is a general listing of finish hardware requirements and is
not intended as a final detailed schedule. It is the responsibility of the
finish hardware supplier to thoroughly review these plans and
specifications, and to include in his bid any items of finish hardware,
whether or not specifically called for in the following hardware groups,
required by established standards or practices, or as necessary to meet
state and local building codes. These items include, but are not
specifically limited to, special templates, wiring diagrams, shim kits for exit
devices, filler bars and door closer arm mounting brackets for bar type
coordinators, drop plates or other door closer accessory items, special
fasteners required for attachment of hardware to doors, frames, or other
substrates, and filler plates for use as required by the permanent removal
of hardware items from existing doors and/or frames. Where there is
unclear or conflicting information in the Hardware Sets, the hardware
supplier shall make every effort to gain clarity from the architect prior to
bid date. If clarification is not made prior to bid date, the hardware supplier
is to make note of any ambiguities or conflicts in the documents in his bid,
and these issues will be resolved post-bid. There will be no Extras or
Change Orders to cover errors and/or omissions which should have been
evident prior to bidding.

3.8 HARDWARE SETS

HW SET: 01
Single Door 120A Exterior from Vestibule 120
Single Door 127A Exterior from Vestibule 127

1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE 224HD 628 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 33A-NL-OP 626 VON
1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-0 630 IVE
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 3215 SCHLAGE B502-191 CAM 626 SCH
1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG 689 LCN
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 630 GLY
2 EA ACTUATOR 7910-952 630 LCN
2 EA ESCUTCHEON 7910-972-6 LCN
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA PROXIMITY READER S5395 ThinLine II Proximity Reader SCH
1 EA KEYSWITCH 653-04-L2 LCN
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-728 626 SCH
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS-871-AO VON
THRESHOLD AND SWEEP BY DOOR SUPPLIER
WEATHERSTRIPPING BY DOOR SUPPLIER

Note: Coordinate voltage, current, and other electrical requirements with related trades.
Function: Actuator Releases the Electric Strike then Activates the Operator
Function: Proximity Reader releases the Electric Strike then Activates the Operator
Function: Key switch turns the outside Actuator ON and OFF
08710-19 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910

HW SET: 02
Single Door 124B Exterior from Recreation Room 124

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99L-06 X 996L 626 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 HD/PA 689 DOR

HW SET: 03
Single Door 128A Exterior from Stair 1 128
Single Door 129B Exterior from Stair 2 129

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99EO 626 VON
1 EA KICKPLATE 8400 8 X 2 LDW 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 160SA AL NGP
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NA AL NGP
1 EA THRESHOLD 896S AL NGP

HW SET: 04
Single Door 104B Exterior from Electrical 104
Single Door 115A Exterior from Elevator Machine Room 115

1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD SAT WITH TACTILE WARNING 626 SCH
1 EA AL CYLINDER 20-728 626 SCH
1 EA ARMORPLATE 8400 36X 2 LDW 630 IVE
1 EA THRESHOLD 513 AL NGP

HW SET: 05
Double door 110B - Exterior from Mechanical 110

2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 626 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE
1/9/2009 08710-20
Note: Astragal to be supplied by door manufacturer.

HW SET: 06
Double door 114B Exterior from Trash Room 114


HW SET: 07
Single Door 120B Vestibule 120 from Corridor 130
Single Door 126A Vestibule 127 from Lobby 126

1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 33A-NL-OP 626 VON
1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-0 630 IVE
1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 3215 SCHLAGE B502-191 CAM 626 SCH
1 EA AUTO-EQUALIZER 4642 REG 689 LCN
1 EA ACTUATOR 7910-952 630 LCN
1 EA ESCUTCHEON 7910-972-6 LCN
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA PROXIMITY READER S5395 ThinLine II Proximity Reader SCH
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS-871-AO VON
VESTIBULE INTERCOM BY OTHERS

Function: Actuator located in the Lobby Releases the Electric Strike then Activates the Operator
Function: Proximity Reader located in the vestibule releases the Electric Strike then Activates the
Operator
Function: Vestibule Intercom located in the Vestibule releases the Electric Strike then Activates the
Operator

HW SET: 08
Single Door 106A Laundry Room 106 from Corridor 132
Single Door 124A Lobby 126 from Recreation Room 124
Single Door 128B Stair 128 from Corridor 130
Single Door 129A Stair 129 from Corridor 132
Single Door 216A Computer Room 216 from Corridor 214
Single Door 218A Stair 1 218 from Corridor 220
08710-21 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
Single Door 316A Laundry Room 316 from Corridor 314
Single Door 416A Fitness Room 416 from Corridor 414
Single Door 516A Library 516 from Corridor 514

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET AL10S SAT 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 689 DOR
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE
1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP

HW SET: 08.1
Single Door 113A Rubbish Room 113 from Corridor 131
Single Door 215A Trash Room 215 from Corridor 214

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET AL10S SAT 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 DEL 689 DOR
1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV 630 IVE

HW SET: 09
Single Door 111A Mens 111 from Corridor 131
Single Door 112A Womens 112 from Corridor 131

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK W301S DANE LEVERS 626 SCH

HW SET: 10
Single Door 107A Office 107 from Lobby 126
Single Door 122A Office 122 from Mail 121

1/9/2009 08710-22
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK AL70PD SAT 626 SCH

HW SET: 11
Single Door 108A office 108 from Office 107
Single Door 109A Office 109 from Office 107

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK AL50PD SAT 626 SCH

HW SET: 12
Single Door 105A Storage Room 105 from Corridor 132
Single Door 110A Mechanical Room 110 from Corridor 131
Single Door 125A Recreation Room 124 from Meter Closet 125

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

HW SET: 12.1
Single door 104A Corridor 132A from Electrical 104

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

HW SET: 13
Single Door 114A Trash 114 from Rubbish 115

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
08710-23 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
1 EA ARMORPLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW 630 IVE

HW SET: 14
Double Door 133A Recreation Room 124 from Storage 133
Double Door 133B Recreation Room 124 from Storage 133

6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK AL80PD SAT 626 SCH
1 EA DUMMY TRIM AL170 SAT 626 SCH

HW SET: 15
Single Bi-Fold Door C5 Unit C Entry from Closet

1 EA DOOR PULL 34 626 IVE
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY BI-FOLD DOOR MANUFACTURER

HW SET: 15.1
Double Bi-Fold Door 107B Office 107 from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door A4 Unit A Bedroom from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door A5 Unit A Entry from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door B4 Unit B Bedroom from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door B5 Unit B Entry from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door BH4 Unit BH Bedroom from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door BH5 Unit BH Entry from Closet
Double Bi-Fold Door C6 Unit C Bedroom from Closet

2 EA DOOR PULL 34 626 IVE
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY BI-FOLD DOOR MANUFACTURER

HW SET: 16
Single Door A1 Unit A Entry from Corridor
Single Door B1 Unit B Entry from Corridor
Single Door C1 Unit C Entry from Corridor

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRY LOCK S210LD SAT 626 SCH
1 EA BC100 CYLINDER 20-729 626 SCH
2 EA HINGE PIN STOP 70 669 IVE
1 EA VIEWER U798 MOUNT@ 60 AFF 626 IVE

1/9/2009 08710-24
HW SET: 16.1
Single Door BH1 Unit BH Entry from Corridor

3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRY LOCK S210LD SAT 626 SCH
1 EA BC100 CYLINDER 20-729 SCH
2 EA VIEWER U798 MOUNT @ 60 AND 48 AFF 626 IVE

HW SET: 17
Single Door A2 Unit A Hall from Bathroom
Single Door B2 Unit B Hall from Bathroom
Single Door BH2 Unit BH Hall from Bathroom
Single Door C2 Unit C Hall from Bathroom

1 EA PRIVACY LOCK S40D SAT 626 SCH
HINGES BY PRE-HUNG DOOR SUPPLIER

HW SET: 18
Single Door A3 Unit A Hall from Bedroom
Single Door B3 Unit B Hall from Bedroom
Single Door BH3 Unit BH Hall from Bedroom
Single Door C3 Unit C Hall from Bedroom
Single Door C4 Unit C Hall from Linen Closet

1 EA PASSAGE SET S10D SAT 626 SCH
1 EA DOOR STOP 60 ALL DOORS EXCEPT C4 669 IVE
2 EA HINGE PIN STOP 70 DOOR C4 ONLY 669 IVE
HINGES BY PRE-HUNG DOOR SUPPLIER

HW SET: 19
Double door at Exterior Shed See Landscaping Plans


HW SET: 20
Exterior Access Controlled Parking Gate

08710-25 1/9/2009
08710 08-7910
1 EA PROXIMITY READER S5375 24VDC SCH

Function: Actuator Releases the Electric Strike then Activates the Operator
Function: Proximity Reader releases the Electric Strike then Activates the Operator
Function: Key switch turns the outside Actuator ON and OFF


1/9/2009 08710-26
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Glass.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Framed components with requirement for glass.
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors.
D. Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors.
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric J oint Sealants.
C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass.
E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of J oint Sealants.
F. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
G. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units.
H. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation.
I. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
J . GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D. Samples: Submit one samples 2 x 2 inch in size of glass units.
E. Samples: Submit 1 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
08-7910
Section 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing
installation methods.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by
manufacturer.
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,
including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
1. Zeledyne: www.versaluxglass.com.
2. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com.
3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com.
4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C 1048.
3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated.
4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind
load design regardless of specified thickness.
C. Clear Float Glass AIA A312: Clear, fully tempered.
D. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered.
1. Laminated with 0.030 inch thick plastic interlayer
2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select) and ASTM C 1048.
3. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.
4. 6 mm minimum thick.
5. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code.
a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors.
b. Glazed sidelights to doors.
E. Low E Glass: Float type, heat strengthened, clear.
1. Coating on inner surface.
2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Quality Q3 (glazing select).
3. 6 mm minimum thick.
Section 08800
GLAZING
08-7910
01/09/2009 08800 - 2
F. Wired Glass: Clear.
1. Stainless steel wire in square mesh pattern.
2. 1/2 inch grid size.
3. Polished both sides.
4. 1/4 inch thick.
2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated above.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
C. Insulated Glass Units: Double pane with silicone sealant edge seal.
1. Place Blocking, Furring, and low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190.
3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum.
D. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
E. Edge Seal Material: Architect to select color.
2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Manufacturers:
2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
3. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com.
6. Tremco Inc: www.tremcosealants.com.
B. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade
NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
C. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss
of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,
and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.05 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,. Length of 0.1 inch for each
square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x
height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness,. Minimum 3 inch long x one
half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on
08-7910
Section 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 3
01/09/2009
release paper; 1 x 1 inch size; black color.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
c. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics: www.plastics.saint-gobain.com.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; Architect
to select color.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/ DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal
corners by butting tape and dabbing with manufacturer's approved sealant.
B. Apply heel bead of manufacturer's approved sealant along intersection of permanent stop with
frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air
and vapor seal.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch
below sight line.
F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not
more than 3/8 inch below sight line.
G. Apply cap bead of sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with
sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)
A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit.
B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at 24
inch intervals, 1/4 inch below sight line.
C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than
Section 08800
GLAZING
08-7910
01/09/2009 08800 - 4
3/8 inch below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal.
D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer
shims at 24 inch centers, kept 1/4 inch below sight line.
B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool
surface to straight line.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in other
ways during the construction period
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 5
01/09/2009

SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Metal stud wall framing.
B. Metal channel ceiling framing.
C. Shaft wall system.
D. Fire rated area separation walls.
E. Acoustic insulation.
F. Gypsum wallboard.
G. J oint treatment and accessories.
H. Textured finish system for exposed concrete ceilings as indicated on drawings.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
B. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
A. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for J oint Compound and J oint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board.
B. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.
C. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.
D. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
E. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
F. ASTM C 954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness.
G. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application
of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.
H. ASTM C 1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base.
I. ASTM C 1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.
J . ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
K. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building
Construction.
L. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association.
M. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association.
08-7910
Section 09260
09260 - 1
01/09/2009
N. GA-253 - Recommended Specifications for the Application of Gypsum Sheathing; Gypsum
Association.
O. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association.
P. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing.
C. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing
compliance with requirements.
E. Test Reports: For all stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C 645 or C 754,
provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and
deflections.
F. Samples: Submit two samples of proposed texture application, 12 by 12 inches in size,
illustrating finish color and texture.
G. LEED Submittals:
1. For gypsum wallboard, submit documentation of recycled content and location of
manufacture.
2. For steel products, submit documentation of steel mill process, location of mill, and location
of manufacture.
A. Perform in accordance with GA-214 and GA-216. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for
fire-rated assemblies.
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:
1. Clark Western Building Systems: www.clarkwestern.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Marino\Ware: www.marinoware.com.
4. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.
5. Telling Industries: www.tellingindustries.com.
B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C
645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is
continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and
maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using
Section 09260
08-7910
01/09/2009 09260 - 2
assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs.
3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
4. Ceiling Channels: C shaped.
5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties
necessary to comply with ASTM C 754.
D. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required.
E. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as
indicated on drawings.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:
1. Manufactures as listed in the UL assemblies in Appendix A.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Regular Type:
a. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, as indicated.
3. Edges: Square.
C. Fire Resistant Type: Complying with Type X requirements; UL or WH rated.
1. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly;
if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.
a. Thickness: 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, as indicated.
2. Special Fire Resistant Type: "Type C"; meeting and exceeding requirements of Type X; UL
or WH rated.
a. Application: Where required for fire-rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, as indicated.
3. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant type.
a. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
c. Edges: Tapered.
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut.
1. Application: In locations indicated on drawings as M.R. Drywall.
2. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated.
3. Thickness: 1/2 inch, 5/8 inch, as indicated.
4. Edges: Square.
E. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, square long edges, ends
square cut.
1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C
1396/C 1396M; water-resistant faces.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced.
B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
D. J oint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
08-7910
Section 09260
09260 - 3
01/09/2009
conditions.
E. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; containing fine aggregate.
1. Product: Sheetrock Brand Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture - Sand Finish Texture 12
manufactured by USG.
F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members,
and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior
locations.
G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C 954;
steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.
H. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION
A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven
fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center.
2. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.
B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special
friction studs.
1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.
2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as permitted by standard.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.
C. Studs: Space studs as indicated.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less
than double studs at jambs.
E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more
than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
1. Orientation: Horizontal.
2. Spacing: As indicated.
F. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over
framing members.
Section 09260
08-7910
01/09/2009 09260 - 4
G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated.
H. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and
any other locations indicated on the drawings. Comply with Section 06114 for wood blocking.
3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and
rough-in boxes.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-216 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,
especially in highly visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
D. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C 1280. Install sheathing horizontally, with edges butted
tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
E. Exterior Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing
members or other solid backing.
F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.
G. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:
1. Single-Layer Applications: Adhesive application.
H. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior
gypsum soffit board with sealant.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control J oints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and in consistent
pattern as directed.
1. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.07 J OINT TREATMENT
A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840, as follows:
1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
B. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840 and as
scheduled below.
08-7910
Section 09260
09260 - 5
01/09/2009
C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
3.08 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and to match approved sample.
B. Texture Required: Fine Sand.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in
any direction.
B. Remove and redo defective rough finish or unsightly work.
END OF SECTION
Section 09260
08-7910
01/09/2009 09260 - 6
SECTION 09300
TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Tile for floor applications.
A. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers.
A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the
Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium).
1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar.
2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement
Mortar.
3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.
4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile
with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.
with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout.
with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in
Tilework.
10. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for
Tile Installation.
11. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement
Grouts for Tile Installation.
12. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Selection samples: Sample of actual tile for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
08-7910
Section 09300
TILE
09300 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5
years of documented experience.
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar
materials.
A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
1. American Olean: www.americanolean.com.
2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com.
B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:
1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaics manufactured by American Olean or approved equivalent
product.
2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.
3. Size and Shape: 2 inch square.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Colors: As scheduled.
7. Trim Units: Matching cove shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.
2.02 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
2. Mapie Corporation: www.mapei.com.
B. Standard Grout: Any type specified in ANSI A118.6 or A118.7.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.
Section 09300
TILE
08-7910
01/09/2009 09300 - 2
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through
A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners neatly.
Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints
watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
G. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
J . Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry-set
or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 09300
TILE
09300 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B. Acoustical units.
A. Section 07900 - J oint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C 636/C 636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.
C. ASTM E 580/E 580M - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
D. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling
finishes, and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling.
C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 4x4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units.
E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 6 inches long, of suspension system main runner.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent
prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient
heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,
tested, and approved.
B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
08-7910
Section 09511
09511 - 1
01/09/2009
B. Provide 2 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit and suspension grid
for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A.
C. Acoustical Tile: Painted mineral fiber, mounted flush with gridASTM E 1264 Type III, with to the
following characteristics:
1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inches.
3. Composition: Wet Felted, No added Formaldehyde, 80% Recycled Content.
4. Edge: Square Lay in.
5. Surface Color: White.
6. Product: Cirrus HRC by Armstrong.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Same as for acoustical units.
B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with
stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.
C. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled;
intermediate-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Finish: White.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling
system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
C. Gypsum Board: Fire rated type; 5/8 inch thick, ends and edges square, paper faced.
D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07900.
E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Section 09511
08-7910
01/09/2009 09511 - 2
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's
instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B. Produce finished ceiling of true lines and levels free from warped, soiled or damaged grid or
lay-in panels.
C. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
D. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or
support components independently.
J . Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant.
2. Use longest practical lengths.
3. Miter corners.
L. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with
fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
C. Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace any part which is
damaged or faulty.
08-7910
Section 09511
09511 - 3
01/09/2009
END OF SECTION
Section 09511
08-7910
01/09/2009 09511 - 4
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Resilient sheet flooring.
B. Resilient base.
C. Installation accessories.
A. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
B. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.
C. ASTM F 1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
D. ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.
E. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.
F. ASTM F 2034 - Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering.
G. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.
C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial
selection.
D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
B. Deliver materials in good condition tot he jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened
containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and
shipping and handling instructions.
C. Protect adhesives from freezing.
A. Store materials for not less than 72 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation, in area
of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter,
maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
B. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other
heating fixtures and appliances.
08-7910
Section 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 1
01/09/2009
B. Provide 10 sq ft of flooring, 20 lineal feet of base, of each type and color specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET FLOORING
A. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: Homogeneous wear layer bonded to backing, with color and pattern
through wear layer thickness:
1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 2034, Type I.
2. Backing: J ute fabric.
3. Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch, minimum, excluding backing.
4. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range.
5. Seams: Heat welded.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Product Marmorette Linoleum: www.armstrong.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Linoleum Welding Rod: Solid color linoleum produced by flooring manufacturer for heat welding
seams, in color in color matching predominant flooring color.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style B, Cove, and as
follows:
1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Class 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA
253.
2. Height: 4 inch and 6 inch as indicated.
3. Thickness: 0.080 inch thick.
4. Finish: Matte.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.
7. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.
8. Manufacturers:
a. J ohnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.
b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.
c. Armstrong: www.armstrong.com.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Metal.
D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
E. Vinyl Transition Strips: Transition strips at termination of dissimilar floor materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that
might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,
and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
Section 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
08-7910
01/09/2009 09650 - 2
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive resilient flooring.
C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,
are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.
D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding
of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.
E. Verify that concrete sub-floor and self leveling underlayment surfaces are dry enough and ready
for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance
with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by
resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare sub-floor surfaces as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects
with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.
C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
D. Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D. Fit joints tightly.
E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate
flooring under centerline of door.
G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated.
H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
3.04 SHEET FLOORING
B. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
C. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum
number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns
carefully at seams.
E. Seams are prohibited in bathrooms and toilet rooms.
F. Double cut sheet at seams.
G. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.
08-7910
Section 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650 - 3
01/09/2009
H. Finish seams in linoleum by heat welding.
I. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline
of door.
J . Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated. After installation of flooring, secure metal strips with stainless steel screws. Secure
resilient strips by adhesive.
K. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall
junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap
strip.
L. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
3.05 RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use
premolded units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
E. Install base and trim accessories to minimize joints. End pieces less than 12" will not be
accepted.
F. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8 inch over 10 feet.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Section 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
08-7910
01/09/2009 09650 - 4
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Carpet, direct-glued.
B. Accessories.
A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source.
C. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 8x8 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet
material specified.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and
suggested schedule for cleaning.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with
minimum three years experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years
experience.
A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 48 hours prior to installation.
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 72 hours prior to, during and 48 hours
after installation.
C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Upon completion of the work, turn over all useable carpet, in widths of less than 12 feet to the
owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
08-7910
Section 09680
CARPET
09680 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Carpet:
1. J & J Industries, Inc: www.jjindustries.com.
2.02 CARPET
A. Carpet Type 1: Realm Style 6259 with TitanBac backing by J & J Commercial, conforming to the
following criteria:
1. Dye Method: Solution Dyed
3. Roll Width: 12 ft.
4. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3.0 Kv. @ 20 percent R.H..
5. Pile Weight: 24 oz/sq yd min.
B. Carpet Type 2: Radius Style 2522 with TitanBac Backing By J &J Commercial, conforming to the
following criteria:
3. Pile Weight: 22 oz/sq yd min.
C. Carpet Type 3: Solutions Style 2510 with TitanBac Backing By J &J Commercial, conforming to
the following criteria:
3. Pile Weight: 20 oz/sq yd.
4. This carpet shall be provided in all units.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Mounting: Direct Glue Down; Waterproof, strippable adhesive.
C. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application,
with attachment devices.
D. Termination strips and transition strips: Vinyl, color as selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive carpet.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
adhesives to sub floor surfaces.
C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture
emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended
by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and
other defects with sub-floor filler.
B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is
cured.
C. Clean substrate.
Section 09680
CARPET
08-7910
01/09/2009 09680 - 2
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's current printed instructions.
C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.
D. Lay out carpet:
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main
traffic.
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent
pieces.
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.
6. Lay carpet in adjacent areas in the same direction
E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.
F. Unsatisfactory work: Work installed not in accord with manufacturer's instructions, or in a
manner unacceptable to the Architect/Engineer, will be deemed unsatisfactory and may require
removal and relaying at the contractor's expense.
3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET
A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.
Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.
B. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient
open time, press carpet into adhesive.
C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam
straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. Apply seam glue so that it will be over or
as high as primary backing.
D. Roll with appropriate roller, minimum 100 pound roller, for complete contact of adhesive to
carpet backing.
E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.
F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.
3.05 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS
A. Install tackless strips at back of treads, with pins facing riser, and at bottom of riser, with pins
facing tread.
B. Install cushion on stair treads and lap over nosing.
C. Install carpet on stairs with the run of the pile in opposite direction of anticipated traffic to avoid
peaking of backing at nosings.
D. Stretch carpet over stair treads, full width in one piece. Fold carpet under 1-1/2 inches on each
side.
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from carpet, floor and wall surfaces without damage.
B. Upon completion of carpet work, restrict all traffic in finished areas to normal foot traffic for a
minimum of two days.
08-7910
Section 09680
CARPET
09680 - 3
01/09/2009
C. Provide and maintain proper protection. Vacuum clean all carpet prior to placing protection.
Place protection continuously with all seams lapped a minimum of six inches and taped.
Maintain in good condition until directed
D. When directed by the Architect/Engineer, completely remove all protection and tape, and legally
dispose of off site. Removal will be required no later than Project Acceptance.
E. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces with an upright beater bar or upright stiff nylon brush type
vacuum cleaner.
END OF SECTION
Section 09680
CARPET
08-7910
01/09/2009 09680 - 4
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
E. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section.
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
B. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
C. VOC content of all interior opaque coatings actually used.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated
surfaces.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with
minimum 3 years experience.
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
08-7910
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F
for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior,
unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
A. Supply 1 gallon of each color; store where directed.
B. Label each container with color and type in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. ICI Paints: www.icipaintsinna.com.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.
3. Sherwin-Williams Co: www.sherwin-williams.com.
C. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08-7910
01/09/2009 09900 - 2
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and
Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:
1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.
2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.
3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum.
4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at
project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Paint WE-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer sealer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
B. Paint CE-OP-3A - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Flat: Two coats of alkyd enamel.
C. Paint GE-OP-3A - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
D. Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer.
E. Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
F. Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR -Use Low VOC Paint, see 2.02 Part C
A. Paint WI-OP-3A - Wood, Opaque, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat alkyd primer sealer.
B. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain:
1. One coat of stain.
2. One coat sealer.
3. Satin: Two coats of varnish.
C. Paint CI-OP-3L - Concrete/Masonry, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of block filler.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel.
08-7910
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 3
01/09/2009
D. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer.
E. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with latex primer.
F. Paint MgI-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
G. Paint CI-OP-3Af - Concrete/Masonry, Alkyd Floor Enamel, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkali resistant primer.
2. Gloss: Two coats of alkyd floor enamel.
H. Paint GI-OP-3A - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of USG "Sheet Rock First Coat" or Gold Bond "Drywall Primer", wallboard primer
sealer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; Public Restrooms.
I. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of USG "Sheet Rock First Coat" or Gold Bond "Drywall Primer", wallboard primer
sealer.
2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; Interior Walls and Unit Ceilings.
3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; Interior Common Area Ceilings.
J . Paint FI-OP-3A - Fabrics/Insulation J ackets, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically
indicated or not; commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
6. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08-7910
01/09/2009 09900 - 4
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
C. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of
inadequate or unsuitable protection
1. Furnish sufficient drop clothes, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from fouling surfaces not being painted and in particular, surfaces within storage
and preparation area.
D. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and
fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned
and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvent to clean hardware that
may remove permanent lacquer finish.
E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or
repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals
with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
I. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime
defects after repair.
J . Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex
patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high
alkali surfaces.
K. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer.
L. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
M. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse
floors with clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
N. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure
water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately
following cleaning.
O. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
P. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld
splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire
brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid
solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface;
spot prime after repairs.
Q. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent.
08-7910
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 5
01/09/2009
Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
R. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
S. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing,
seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer
has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25
percent with thinner.
T. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound
after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
U. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.
V. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 for color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and
conduit.
B. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated.
C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
D. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to
the color coding scheme indicated.
E. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
A. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
3.06 CLEANING
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08-7910
01/09/2009 09900 - 6
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.07 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
3. Stainless steel items.
B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.
3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to
match face panels.
D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before
installing equipment.
3.08 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Concrete, Concrete Block, Brick Masonry: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Exterior: CE-OP-3A, flat.
2. Interior: CI-OP-3L, semi-gloss.
B. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
C. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
D. Wood Doors: Factory-finished.
E. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Exterior: ME-OP-3A, semi-gloss.
2. Interior: MI-OP-3L, semi-gloss.
F. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Exterior:MgE-OP-3A
2. Interior: MgI-OP-3A
G. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view.
1. Finish the following items:
a. Exposed surfaces of lintels.
b. Elevator pit ladders.
c. Mechanical equipment.
d. Electrical equipment.
H. Pipe and Duct Insulation J ackets: Finish all surfaces exposed to view; FI-OP-2A, flat.
3.09 SCHEDULE - COLORS
A. Contractor Note:
1. Owner has the option to chose different colors for the walls, ceiling, doors, and frames of
each room at no extra charge to the contract sum in common areas.
2. Ceilings and Walls in each individual apartment units, mechanical rooms, electrical room,
and elevator machine room shall be sprayed the same color.
3. See floor plans, enlarged floor plans, and interior elevations for locations of accent paint,
08-7910
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09900 - 7
01/09/2009
these walls will be painted a different color than surrounding walls. These walls will be a
dark color and shall receive one coat of primer and three coats of paint.
END OF SECTION
Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
08-7910
01/09/2009 09900 - 8
SECTION 10210
WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Louvers, frames, and accessories.
A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, materials and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate louver layout plan and elevations, opening and clearance dimensions,
tolerances; head, jamb and sill details; blade configuration, blankout areas required, and frames.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 2 by 2 inches in size illustrating finish and color of exterior
surfaces.
1.05 WARRANTY
B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of
connections.
1. Finish: Include coverage against degradation of exterior finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Louvers: Greenheck Fan Corporation: Product - Thin-line Lover
2.02 LOUVERS
A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories.
B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction.
1. Blades: Positioned at 30 degree angles.
2. Frame: Depth as indicated on drawings, channel profile; corner joints mitered and
mechanically fastened, with continuous recessed caulking channel each side.
3. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.063 inch; blades 0.063 inch.
4. Finish: Clear anodized; finish welded units after fabrication.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M),.
1. Clear Anodizing: AAMA 611 Class I, AA-M12C22A41.
08-7910
Section 10210
WALL LOUVERS
10210 - 1
01/09/2009
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Blank-Off Panels: Same material as louver, painted black on exterior side; provide where
packaged terminal air conditioner connected to louver is smaller than louver frame, sealing off
louver area outside packaged terminal air conditioner.
B. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one
piece per location.
C. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions
are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion
of moisture to exterior.
D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.
E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900.
F. Coordinate with installation of Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Strip protective finish coverings.
B. Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
Section 10210
WALL LOUVERS
08-7910
01/09/2009 10210 - 2
SECTION 10260
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Corner guards.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, anchorage details, and rough-in
measurements.
C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard, 24 inch long, illustrating component design,
configuration, color and finish.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention.
A. Coordinate the work with wall or partition sections for installation of concealed blocking or
anchor devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wall and Corner Guards:
1. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc; Product CGS-3S: www.ardenarch.com.
2. InPro Corporation; Product 150: www.inprocorp.com.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Corner Guard - Surface Mounted: High impact vinyl with extruded aluminum full height retainer.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 25 or less
and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Size: 3 inches.
3. Corner: Square.
4. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
5. Length: 48" Tall One piece.
6. Preformed end caps.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams.
B. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings, concealed blocking, and anchors are correctly sized and located.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
08-7910
Section 10260
10260 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured
rigidly in position to wall framing members only.
B. Maintain minimum 70 deg. F air tempeture for 3 days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after
installation.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Install on all outside corners in the Accessible units.
B. Install on all outside corners in all common areas including lobbies and cooridors.
END OF SECTION
Section 10260
08-7910
01/09/2009 10260 - 2
SECTION 10440
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Interior signage of the following types:
1. ADA compliant interior signage, custom construction.
2. Fire evacuation, area of rescue assistance and specialty signs.
1.02 ALLOWANCES
1. Interior Building Sign Allowance of $5000 for purchase and delivery of Interior Signage;
installation is included in this section and is part of the Contract Sum
A. Section 10441 - Exterior Signage.
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities.
B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities (ADAAG); U.S. Architectural Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature.
C. Shop Drawings: List sign styles, lettering, locations and dimensions of each interior sign.
D. Selection Samples: One complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of
available colors.
E. Verification Samples: Two full size samples, representing type, style and color specified including
method of attachment.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1 and ADAAG.
A. Inspect products upon receipt. Store products in manufacturer's packaging until ready for
installation.
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR SIGNS
A. ADA-Compliant Interior Signage, Custom Design:
1. Signage to be selected by the owner during the construction process.
2. Braille: Grade 2 Braille, placed directly below last line of letters or numbers.
08-7910
Section 10440
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
10440 - 1
01/09/2009
3. Contrast: Letters, numbers and symbols shall contrast with background.
B. Fire Evacuation, Area of Rescue Assistance and Specialty Signs:
1. Area of Rescue Assistance Signs: 8 by 14 inches 'MP' plastic with copy, symbol and Grade 2
Braille raised 1/32 inch.
2. Emergency Exit Only Signs: 18-1/2 by 6-1/2 inches 'MP' plastic with copy raised with
background and symbol painted 2 standard paint colors.
3. Lettering Style: Typeface as selected, upper case.
4. Lettering Location: Centered on sign..
5. Corners: As selected.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation.
B. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Verify mounting heights and locations for interior signage will comply with referenced standards.
B. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install signs level, plumb, without distortion, and in proper relationship with adjacent surfaces
using manufacturer's recommended standard mounting system.
B. Remove adhesive from exposed sign surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Clean signs after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Section 10440
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
08-7910
01/09/2009 10440 - 2
SECTION 10441
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Specialty parking signage
B. Specialty signage identifying handicap accessible entrances
C. Exterior Building Signage
D. Cash allowance for signs.
1.02 ALLOWANCES
1. Exterior Building Sign Allowance of $7000 for purchase, and delivery of Exterior Building
Sign. Installation of exterior sign based as shown on the landscape drawings and Purchase,
delivery and installation of Metal handicap signs shall be included in the contract sum.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations,
overall dimensions of each sign.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL SIGNS
A. Metal, Handicap Signs: painted metal signs on steel angle post by Lynn Sign Co. or approved
equal. Signs which have peel off symbols will not be accepted.
1. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Concealed metal fasteners, non-corrosive to sign material or mounting surface.
B. Anchors and Inserts: Non Ferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized for exterior installations and
where required for corrosion resistance. Toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled
in place anchors. Inserts for concrete or masonry work.
C. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Non Fading, colored coatings, including inks and paints
08-7910
Section 10441
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
10441 - 1
01/09/2009
for copy and background colors, recommended by manufacturers.
2.03 FINISHING
A. Color as indicated or, as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard.
B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for polished aluminum; use
manufacturers clear organic coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations as directed.
C. Install signs level, plumb and at the appropriate hight.
D. Set Posts in Concrete
E. Metal Letters:
1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the
manufacturer and heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes and
fasteners.
2. Flush mount letters with backs in contact with wall surface
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior Building Sign.
B. Parking Signage (see drawings).
C. Accessible entrance pictoral signage - building mount.
END OF SECTION
Section 10441
EXTERIOR SIGNAGE
08-7910
01/09/2009 10441 - 2
SECTION 10523
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
C. Accessories.
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association.
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
C. USCG Approved.
A. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed
cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, and location.
C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage details.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories:
1. J L Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified
and indicated.
B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class A:B:C.
08-7910
Section 10523
10523 - 1
01/09/2009
2. Size 10.
3. Finish: Epoxy finish.
4. Product: Cosmic 10E as manufactured by J L Industries
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type. For use in fire rated walls & meeting ADA Guidelines
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim: Flat, 4 inch wide face.
C. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing.
D. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
E. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
F. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
G. Product: Ambassador 1012 F10FX with Flush pull handles.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Cabinet Signage: FIRE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 27 inches from finished floor to inside bottom
of cabinet.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Provide Fire Extinguisher and Cabinet at locations labled F.E. on drawings.
B. Provide a wall bracket mounted Fire Extinguisher in each Mechanical room, Trash Compactor
Room, Elevator Machine Room, and Electrical Room.
END OF SECTION
Section 10523
08-7910
01/09/2009 10523 - 2
SECTION 10552
MAIL BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Grouped mail boxes located indoors.
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for specified products.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of mail boxes, wall cuts,
and interface with other products.
A. Comply with United States Postal Service Regulations.
A. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received.
B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions.
C. Handle materials to prevent damage or marring of finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Auth-Florence Manufacturing Company; 591 Mitchell Road, Glendale
Heights, IL 60139; ASD. Tel: (630) 545-1784, Tel: (800) 275-1747, Fax: (630) 545-1896.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
C. Provide all mail boxes from a single manufacturer.
2.02 MAIL BOXES
A. Mail Boxes: USPS approved, recessed, heavy gage extruded aluminum and 300 series stainless
steel components.
1. Model: Front Loading 4C Series. Six Model 4CET8-13, 4CET1-1 and two Model 4CET6-6.
multi-unit connector kit
2. Total Number of Units: 60 tenant boxes 1 office box and 7 parcel lockers.
3. Configuration as shown on interior elevation drawing.
4. Compartment Depth: 17 Inches.
5. Locks: USPS 1172-910A with three keys.
6. Box Identification: Engraved numbers with black fill. Verify mailbox numbering and order
with owner prior to ordering
7. Finish: To be selected from manufacturer's full line of (9) standard powder coat finishes
8. Matching snap-on trim.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
08-7910
Section 10552
MAIL BOXES
10552 - 1
01/09/2009
A. Verify that openings in wall are correctly located, aligned, and sized for mail boxes.
B. Installer's Examination:
1. Examine conditions under which construction activities of this section are to be performed;
submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of installer's report to Architect.
3. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install mail boxes in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation
instructions.
B. Align, plumb, and level; anchor in accordance with requirements.
3.03 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust doors and locks to operate correctly.
3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Protect finishes from damage by subsequent construction activities.
END OF SECTION
Section 10552
MAIL BOXES
08-7910
01/09/2009 10552 - 2
SECTION 10672
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Wall mounted wire closet shelving.
B. Accessories.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in walls for attachment of shelving.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, with installation
instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of
shelving and attachment to substrates.
B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.
C. Store flat to prevent warpage and bending.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHELVING APPLICATIONS
A. See interior elevations for shelving configurations.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Wire Shelving: Factory-assembled coated wire mesh shelf assemblies for wall-mounting, with all
components and connections required to produce a rigid structure that is free of buckling and
warping.
1. Construction: Cold-drawn steel wire with average tensile strength of 100,000 psi resistance
welded into uniform mesh units, square, rigid, flat, and free of dents or other distortions,
with wires trimmed smooth.
2. Coating: PVC or epoxy, applied after fabrication, covering all surfaces.
3. PVC Coating: 9 to 11 mils thick.
4. Epoxy Coating: Non-toxic epoxy-polyester powder coating baked-on finish, 3 to 5 mils thick.
5. Standard Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 7/8 inch.
6. Close-Mesh Shelves: Cross deck wires spaced at 1/2 inch.
7. Free-Sliding Hanging Rod: Integral hanging rod that permits uninterrupted sliding of
hangers the full width of the shelf.
B. Mounting Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard mounting hardware; include support
braces, wall brackets, back clips, end clips, poles, and other accessories as required for complete
and secure installation; factory finished to match shelving.
C. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
08-7910
Section 10672
10672 - 1
01/09/2009
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect areas to receive shelving, to verify that spaces are properly prepared to receive shelf
units, and are of dimensions indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify appropriate fastening hardware.
C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with shelf surfaces level.
B. Cap exposed ends of cut wires.
C. Install back clips, end clips at side walls, and support braces at open ends. Install intermediate
support braces as recommended by manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled surfaces after installation.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work from damage.
B. Clean soiled surfaces after installation.
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion in a manner that
eliminates evidence of replacement.
END OF SECTION
Section 10672
08-7910
01/09/2009 10672 - 2
SECTION 10800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, and residential bathrooms.
B. Grab bars.
A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
B. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
C. GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor
attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toilet Accessories:
1. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
2. Franklin Brass: www.franklinbrass.com.
3. Basco Inc.: www.bascoinc.com.
4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper
coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID
A-A-3002.
D. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized.
E. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
08-7910
Section 10800
10800 - 1
01/09/2009
2.03 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel.
1. Product: #5508BFS manufactured by Franklin Brass.
B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Semi-Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel;
seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors.
1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl.
2. Towel dispenser capacity: minimum 400 C-fold.
3. Waste receptacle capacity: 4.9 gallons.
4. Product: 2017-10 manufactured by Bradley Corp.
C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, recessed, with stainless steel cover and
horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window
gage refill indicator, tumbler lock.
1. Minimum Capacity: 32 ounces.
2. Product: Model #643 manufactured by Bradley Corp.
D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.
1. Size: as indicated on drawings and approved shop drawings.
2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes, with mitered and welded and ground corners, and
tamperproof hanging system; No.4 finish.
3. Fixed Tilt Mirrors: Minimum 3 inches tilt from top to bottom.
4. Product: HTM-16x30 manufactured by Basco Inc.
E. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/2 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,
nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall
and inside of grab bar.
1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Product: Model 812 manufactured by Bradley Corp.
2.05 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES
A. Towel Bar: Die Cast, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment,
satin finish.
1. Length: as indicated on the drawings.
2. Product: Futura Collection Model # D2430SN and D2418SN manufactured by Franklin Brass.
B. Towel Pin: Stainless steel, 3 inch extension from wall; rectangular-shaped bracket and
backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.
1. Product: Model # 5501SF manufactured by Franklin Brass.
C. Robe Hook: Heavy-duty stainless steel, double-prong, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate
for concealed attachment, bright polished finish.
1. Product: Futura Collection Model #D2402SN manufactured by Franklin Brass.
2.06 RESIDENTIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Surface Mounted Medicine Cabinet Type 1 - accessible units: One-piece construction of
heavy-gage steel with factory-applied, gloss white, baked enamel finish, surface-mounted, bright
polished finish stainless steel mirror frame.
1. Shelves: Adjustable, aluminum or glass; provide not less than 3 shelves.
2. Product: Model # WM327PE-W manufactured by Basco Inc.
Section 10800
08-7910
01/09/2009 10800 - 2
B. Surface Mounted Medicine Cabinet Type 2 - standard units: Stainless steel cabinet, shelves,
door, hinge, and mirror frame, reversible type, surface-mounted.
1. Shelves: Adjustable, aluminum or glass; provide not less than 3 shelves.
2. Product: Model # F3030SM-W manufactured by Basco Inc.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Provide solid wood blocking behind grab bars, shower rod, towel bars, etc.
C. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
D. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on
drawings, and as follows:
1. Bottom of Mirrors: Maximum 40" above finished floor.
2. Grab Bars at Barrier-Free Stalls: 36" above finished floor.
3. Mount other fixtures in public areas: dispensers at 48" max above finished floor.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Unit Type "A1", "A2", "B1", "B2", and "B3"
1. 1 Toilet Paper Dispenser per unit.
2. 1- 42" grab bar per unit.
3. 1 - 36" grab bar per unit.
4. 1- 30" Towel Bar per unit.
5. 1 -18" Towel Bar per unit.
6. 1 - Double Prong Robe Hook per unit.
7. 1 - Medicine Cabinet Type "2" per unit.
B. Unit Type "C"
C. Unit Type "BH"
2. 1 fixed tilt mirror per unit.
3. 1- 42" grab bar per unit.
4. 1 - 36" grab bar per unit.
6. 1 - Towel Pin or Hook per unit.
D. Public Restroom - Men's and Women's.
08-7910
Section 10800
10800 - 3
01/09/2009
1. 1 Toilet Paper Dispenser per restroom.
2. 1 Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle per restroom.
3. 1 Soap Dispenser per restroom.
4. 1 fixed tilt mirror per restroom.
5. 1- 42" grab bar per restroom.
6. 1 - 36" grab bar per restroom.
END OF SECTION
Section 10800
08-7910
01/09/2009 10800 - 4
SECTION 11172
WASTE COMPACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Packaged waste compactor unit and discharge container.
A. WASTEC (SCRG) - WASTEC Listing of Rated Stationary Compactors; Waste Equipment
Technology Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide unit capacities, physical dimensions, utility requirements and locations,
point loads.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate machine location, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and
tolerances, clearances required.
D. Test Reports: Indicate WASTEC (SCRG) ratings accompanied with certified test results.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.
F. Operation Data: Include description of system operation, adjusting and testing required.
G. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubrication
types required and local spare part sources.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years of documented experience.
1.05 WARRANTY
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all parts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Waste Compactors:
1. Marathon Equipment Co; Product Mini-Mac: www.marathonequipment.com.
2.02 WASTE COMPACTORS
A. Compactor Operational Criteria:
1. Service Location: Interior.
2. Type: Top loading, horizontal operating.
3. Control Mode: Fully automatic.
08-7910
Section 11172
WASTE COMPACTORS
11172 - 1
01/09/2009
4. Refuse Source: Chute.
5. Cycle Time: 28 seconds.
B. Compactor Functional Criteria:
1. Clear Entry Opening: 22.5x28 inch.
2. Ram Face Pressure - Normal: 23.2 psi.
3. Ram Face Pressure - Peak: 27.3 psi.
C. Compactor Features:
1. Construction: Steel, welded.
2. Trash Inlet and Outlet: Galvanized.
3. Unit Frame and Accessories: Zinc chromate primer; two baked enamel finish coats to
standard color.
4. Motor: 3 hp, 208/230/460 volt, 3 phase.
5. Control Panel: On/Off key switch, emergency STOP button, cycle selector switch for single
cycle operation.
6. Cycling: Governed by electric eye connected to signal light to indicate discharge bag is full.
7. Compacted Discharge: Rear loading.
D. Discharge Container:
1. Type: Manufacturer's standard of fabricated steel, enamel finish.
2. Transport Mechanism: Steel wheels, fixed and castering.
3. Volume Capacity: 2 cu yd.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that anchors are correctly positioned.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with standards required by
authority having jurisdiction.
B. Coordinate with waste chute discharge.
C. Anchor unit securely in place.
D. Touch-up minor damaged surfaces caused during installation. Replace damaged components as
directed by Architect.
E. Adjust unit mechanism to achieve specified requirements.
3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate and instruct Owner on unit operation. Describe unit limitations.
END OF SECTION
Section 11172
WASTE COMPACTORS
08-7910
01/09/2009 11172 - 2
SECTION 11450
RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Kitchen appliances.
A. Section 15145 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances.
B. Section 16155 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical connections for appliances.
A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of
each piece of residential equipment specified.
C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
A. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards.
B. Product nomenclature may change from the manufacturer before project start date. Contractor
responsible to meet criteria established by original products specified.
1.06 WARRANTY
B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES
A. Refrigerator Standard Unit: Free-standing, Top-mounted freezer, frost free.
1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 18.0 cubic ft.
2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant.
3. Features: 29-1/2" W x 66-5/8" H x 32-1/8" D, include shelves, light in freezer
compartment, 1 ice tray
4. Finish: White on white, color matched handle
5. Manufacturers:
a. GE Appliances; Product GTH18IBXWW: www.geappliances.com..
B. Refrigerator Accessible Units and Community Room: Free-standing, side-by-side, frost-free.
1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 23.2 cubic ft; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity.
2. Energy Usage: Energy Star Compliant.
3. Features: 69 1/2" H x 32 1/2" D x 32 3/4" W, include glass shelves, light in freezer
compartment, and in-door water and ice dispenser.
4. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color white, color matched handle
08-7910
Section 11450
11450 - 1
01/09/2009
5. Manufacturers:
a. GE Appliances; Product GSHF3KGXWW: www.geappliances.com.
C. Range: Electric, free-standing, with coil elements with chrome drip bowls.
1. Size: 30 inches.
2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.
3. Elements: 4.
4. Controls: Solid state electronic, front mounted.
5. Features: Include storage drawer, oven door window, and oven light.
6. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color white.
7. Manufacturers:
a. GE Appliances; Product J BP15DMWW: www.geappliances.com.
D. Range: Electric, Drop-In.
1. Size: 30 inches.
2. Oven: Self-cleaning.
3. Elements: 4.
4. Controls: Electronic, front mounted.
5. Features: Oven door window, oven interior light.
6. Finish: White on white
7. Backgaurd Kit:
a. Broan; Product SP300108
8. Electric, Drop-In Range:
a. GE Appliances; Product J DP39DNWW: www.geappliances.com..
E. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood.
1. Size: 30 inches.
2. Fan: Two- speed, 150 cfm
3. Exhaust: Recirculating.
4. Features: Include cooktop light and removable grease filter.
5. Finish: Painted steel, color white.
6. Accessories: Wall Shield, 30" W x 24" H White, by range hood manufacturer.
7. Manufacturers:
a. GE Appliances; Product J N327HWW: www.geappliances.com.
b. Broan;Product #413001: www.broan.com.
F. Bathroom Exhaust Fan: Refer to the Mechanical Plans.
2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES
A. Coin operated units to be supplied by the owner
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.
3.03 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove packing materials from equipment.
Section 11450
08-7910
01/09/2009 11450 - 2
B. Wash and clean equipment.
C. Leave in clean condition and ready for operation.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 11450
11450 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 12355
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Kitchen cabinets.
B. Vanity cabinets.
C. Casework hardware.
A. Section 06415 - Countertops.
A. ANSI/KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets;
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, construction details, and joint details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, scale plans, elevations, clearances required,
rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances.
D. Submit 2 sets of samples of available finishes for selection included as part of the interior color
selection package.
A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1.
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of experience.
C. Do not deliver cabinets until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations have been
completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or, if that is , in areas with
similar ambient conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Residential Casework:
1. Armstrong Cabinets; Product Prima Advanta.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet Construction:<>.
1. Back Panels: 1/8" thick hardboard with maple grained interior surface.
2. Top/bottom panels: Nominal 1/2" tick industrial grade wood based composite panel.
3. End Panels: Nominal 1/2" tick industrial grade wood based composite panel.
B. Countertops: As specified in Section 06415.
C. All cabinets in accessible units to have adjustable roll out trays.
08-7910
Section 12355
12355 - 1
01/09/2009
D. Toe space 8"min in accessible units.
E. Vanity top specified in section 06615 - Cast Marble Fabrications.
F. Shelving: 1/2" thick industrial grade wood based composite panels.
G. Face Frames: Construction of kiln dried hardwood. Stiles 1-1/2" wide, Mulls 3" wide, rails 1-3/4"
wide
H. Drawer Fronts: 3/4" solid kiln dried hardwood.
I. Provide finished end panels, toe kicks at all exposed areas.
J . Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
K. Concealed J oint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
2.03 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise specified below.
B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Finish to match door hardware wire pulls, 4 inches wide.
C. Drawer Slides: Side mount 75lb load capacity epoxy coated, self-closing.
D. Hinges: self-closing, 110 degree opening concealed hinges.
E. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Nylon track with roller bearing followers.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture
could accumulate.
C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on adjacent units for rigidity.
D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, appliances, and fixtures and fittings. Prime paint contact
surfaces of cut edges.
E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of support framing.
B. Field measurements: Verify sizes and shapes of cabinets by field measurements.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered.
C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use
filler strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose.
E. Close ends of units, back splashes, shelves and bases.
3.03 ADJ USTING
Section 12355
08-7910
01/09/2009 12355 - 2
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function
smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
B. Restore damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 12355
12355 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 12492
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Horizontal slat louver blinds.
B. Operating hardware.
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances,
and operation.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 3 inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, wand type
and color.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support
blinds.
B. Take field measurements to determine sizes required.
B. Provide ten additional slats.
C. Provide two additional complete blind assemblies of each size.
D. Provide 2 extra control wands.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com.
2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com.
2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS
A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual
control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control
08-7910
Section 12492
12492 - 1
01/09/2009
wand; complying with WCMA A100.1.
B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing
burrs removed.
1. Width: 1 inch.
2. Thickness: 0.006 inch.
C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration.
D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware,
pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats
1. Color: Same as slats .
E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail.
F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop.
G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape.
1. Removable type.
2. Length of window opening height less 3 inches.
H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets.
I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate blinds to cover window frames completely.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.
C. Place intermediate head supports at 18 inch on center.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch.
3.04 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Provide blinds for all exterior windows located in units and common areas including offices,
recreation rooms, laundry rooms, corridors, and stairs.
Section 12492
08-7910
01/09/2009 12492 - 2
END OF SECTION
08-7910
Section 12492
12492 - 3
01/09/2009

SECTION 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Complete elevator systems.
B. Excavating and backfilling for hydraulic cylinder casing.
C. Elevator maintenance.
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Elevator machine foundation and pit.
B. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Masonry hoistway enclosure; building-in and grouting
hoistway door frames.
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Pit ladder, Sill supports, divider beams, overhead hoist
beams, and misc. hoistway framing.
D. Section 09680 - Carpet: Floor finish in cab.
E. Section 10523 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: Fire extinguisher in elevator
machine room.
F. Division 16 - Fire Alarm System:
1. Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices.
2. Fire alarm signal lines to elevator controller cabinet.
G. Division 16: Electrical Requirements.
A. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National fire Protection Association.
C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.
D. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
E. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information:
1. Locations of machine room equipment: driving machines, controllers, governors and other
component.
2. Hoistway components: Car machine beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes, and other
components.
3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to
building structural framing.
4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.
5. Loads on hoisting beams.
6. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight.
7. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for car light
08-7910
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
14201 - 1
01/09/2009
and telephone.
8. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames.
9. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room.
10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
11. Show arrangement of equipment in machine room so rotating elements, sheaves, and other
equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without disturbing other components.
Arrange equipment for clear passage through access door.
C. Product Data: Provide data on the following items:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators.
2. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components.
3. Cab and hoistway door and frame details.
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
5. Elevator Color Selections will not be made until complete interior color selection package
has been submitted to the Architect.
D. Maintenance Data: Include:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with
equipment description and identifying code.
2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment.
3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment
and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on
machine room and hoistway apparatus.
A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this section.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, and anchors under direct supervision of a
Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Illinois.
C. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.
D. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70.
E. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
F. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and
approved by elevator equipment manufacturer.
G. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by UL.
H. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
A. Construction Use of Elevator: Enclose elevator when required for transport of construction
personnel and materials.
1. Enclose cab with protective plywood on floor, walls, and ceiling.
2. Provide temporary lighting.
3. Provide control panel with manual and emergency operation with key operation for
attendant operator.
1.07 WARRANTY
B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty from the date of substantial completion signed by
Manufacturer, contractor, and installer, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
08-7910
01/09/2009 14201 - 2
workmanship, including without limitation: Operational and control failures, substandard
performance, unusual wear, unsafe.
C. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
D. Examine system components semi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
E. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain
hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment.
F. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
G. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.
H. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes on the Project site.
Have personnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this maintenance service, without
unreasonable loss of time.
I. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in
the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
J . Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Otis Elevator Co; www.otis.com; Product Hole Hydraulic 2500.
B. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator No.1: Passenger, hydraulic with cylinder in buried casing.
1. Operation and Controls: Standard ADA Compliant.
2. Standard Cab Design: Laminated Plastic with standard diffused lighting, 1-1/2" Cylindrical
Stainless Steel handrails on all three sides by Elevator Manufacturer.
3. Hoistway Doors and Frames: Baked enamel on steel.
4. Ceiling Height: 7'-11 inches.
5. Hoistway and Cab Entrance Frame Opening Size: 3'-6" W x 7'-0" H inches.
6. Door Type: Single leaf.
7. Door Operation: Side opening.
8. Rated Net Capacity: 2500 lbs.
9. Rated Speed: min. 100 ft/min.
10. Clear Net Platform Size: 6'-8" x 4'-3" inches.
11. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings.
12. Number of Stops: 5.
13. Number of Openings: As indicated on drawings.
14. Provide automatic self leveling feature.
15. General Contactor to provide all required divider hoistway beams and framing required for
the installation of elevator.
16. Pad Hooks: Stainless steel type.
17. Protective Pads: Canvas cover, padded with sponge fill material, sewn with piping edges;
brass grommets spaced to match pad hook spacing in cab, covering side and rear walls and
front return, except cut-out for control panel; provide one set.
18. Hydraulic Motor and Pump Location: Adjacent to hoistway.
08-7910
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
14201 - 3
01/09/2009
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons, hall lanterns, and lobby panel.
B. Door Controls:
1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor.
2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching terminal with
doors open.
3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an
obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until
obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer.
4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with
object proximity detector device.
C. Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN
calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows.
D. Landing Position Indicators: Illuminating white.
E. Car Direction Indicators: Illuminating white.
F. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems.
G. Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code. Designated Landing: to be
selected by the local fire department.
2.04 EMERGENCY POWER
A. Arrange elevator operation to operate under emergency power when normal power supply fails.
B. Emergency Power Supply: Self-contained battery power.
C. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power.
D. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected landing,
stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby condition.
2.05 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 208 volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
2. Solid State Motor Starter
3. Refer to Division 16 for additional requirements.
2.06 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS
A. Wall-Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one for master
electric and hydraulic schematic and one for lubrication chart. Install charts.
B. Key Cabinet: Wall-mounted, lockable, keyed to building keying system, for control/operating
panel keys.
1. Provide two extra key cabinet keys.
2. Provide two extra control/operating panel keys.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.
C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
08-7910
01/09/2009 14201 - 4
D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.
E. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities.
B. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories.
C. Mount machines on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on
structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral
displacement.
D. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
E. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts.
Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
F. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates.
G. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.
H. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set
entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.
I. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime
two coats.
J . Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of
enamel.
K. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1.
B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral or
oscillating movement or vibration.
A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.
1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.
2. Obtain permits required to perform tests.
3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections in accordance with the requirements of
Section 01400.
4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.
5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements of Section 01400.
1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2.
2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests.
3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests.
C. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect.
D. Operational Tests:
1. At an agreed time during the contract warranty period, and with the building normally
08-7910
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
14201 - 5
01/09/2009
occupied using normal building traffic, conduct tests to verify performance. Furnish event
recording of all hall call registrations, time initiated, and response time throughout entire
normal working day.
3.06 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort.
B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch from flush.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.
B. Protect installed products until project completion.
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in
the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
C. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of Owner.
D. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from Date of
E. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. Maintain
hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the
required factor of safety.
G. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
H. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.
I. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes locally, near the
place of the Work. Have personnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this maintenance
service, without unreasonable loss of time.
3.10 CLEANING and PROTECTION
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
C. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.
END OF SECTION
Section 14201
PASSENGER ELEVATORS
08-7910
01/09/2009 14201 - 6
SECTION 14560
CHUTES
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Gravity chutes for waste (trash, refuse).
A. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashing at chute roof vent.
B. Section 11172 - Waste Compactors: Compactors.
C. Division 15 - Plumbing Piping:
1. Water piping connections to spray cleaning equipment.
D. Section 16155 - Equipment Wiring:
1. Wiring and conduit between discharge room spray cleaning switch and flushing spray head.
A. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process.
B. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection Association.
C. NFPA 82 - Standard on Incinerators and Waste and Linen Handling Systems and Equipment;
National Fire Protection Association.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for additional requirements.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets on each component, indicating which options
are provided.
C. Shop Drawings: Detailed layout of chute and components, indicating interface with structure,
enclosing walls, and utilities; show:
1. Openings in floors and required clearances.
2. Location and size of each field connection to structure.
3. Pipe sizes and locations.
4. Clearly indicate components required but not furnished by chute installer.
D. Reports: Submit for each test/inspection; see Section 01400 for requirements.
E. Certificates: Certify that chute assembly meets or exceeds NFPA 82 and specified requirements.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping and electrical connections.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's operation instructions.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Sanitizing Solution or Chemicals for Cleaning Chute: 2 gallons.
A. See Section 01400 for additional requirements.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
08-7910
Section 14560
CHUTES
14560 - 1
01/09/2009
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in making products specified in this section.
1. With not less than three years of experience.
2. With similar installation in satisfactory service for at least one year.
1.06 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE SERVICE
B. Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Maintenance Service: Provide service and maintenance of chute and equipment for one year
from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chutes and Chute Components: Use one of the following:
1. Wilkinson-Hi-Rise LLC: www.whrise.com.
2. U. S. Chutes Corp: www.uschutes.com.
B. All components need not be made by the same manufacturer, provided manufacturer providing
assembled units assumes responsibility for all components.
2.02 CHUTES
A. Waste Chutes: Sheet metal, round, constant diameter extending from above roof to lowest
floor, with intake doors at each floor and bottom outlet into room designated on drawings;
complying with requirements of NFPA 82 and local code.
1. Diameter: 24 inches inside.
2. Intake Doors: Hopper type, no locks.
3. Intake Door Size: 18 by 18 inches wide by high.
4. Manual controls to activate spray cleaning from discharge room.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Chute: Factory-fabricated to the greatest extent possible, with continuously welded or
lock-seamed joints and smooth, non-snag interior (no protruding bolts, rivets, hardware, sharp
edges or corners).
1. Material: Aluminum-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 463/A 463M CS Type B,
with minimum T1-40/T1M-120 coating.
2. Sheet Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.06 inch.
3. Chute Offsets: Reinforced with additional layer of sheet metal at impact zones.
4. Throat Sections: Provide sloped throat sections for intake doors, of same material and
construction as chute.
5. Factory-coat outside of chute with sprayed sound-dampening material.
6. Fabricate with support frames at each floor with sound isolator pads and expansion joints in
chute between each support point.
B. Intake Doors: Factory-assembled door and frame, self-closing and positive-latching; frame
designed for chase construction, flush-mounted.
1. Material: Stainless steel, brushed or satin finish.
2. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hour ("B" label) with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 degrees F .
3. Pulls: T-handle latch; polished stainless steel.
4. Signs: Mark on frame or door face the purpose of the chute, using engraving, integral
raised lettering, or other permanent signs.
C. Discharge Doors: Aluminum-coated steel; normally-open, 1-hour ("B" label) fire rated, with
fusible link closing; style as required by chute configuration.
Section 14560
CHUTES
08-7910
01/09/2009 14560 - 2
D. Access Doors: Same construction and fire rating as intake doors, with locks; provide wherever
equipment requiring maintenance is located inside chute, including sprinklers and plumbing and
electrical connections.
E. Access Door Locks: Mortise or rim cylinder locks keyed to building keying system; key
removable only when door is locked.
1. Access Doors: Provide 2 keys for each door.
F. Roof Vent: Full diameter, extending minimum 36 inches above roof level, with roof deck flange.
1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet.
2. Counterflashing and clamping ring of non-ferrous metal compatible with chute material.
3. Top Unit: Screened vent.
G. Spray Cleaning Equipment:
1. Flushing Spray: Solenoid controlled 3/4 inch NPS spray head mounted above top intake
door.
2. Sanitizing Unit: Tank and feeder to introduce disinfectant into flushing spray line.
a. Provide backflow preventer valve and actuator switch.
b. Minimum 1 gallon capacity.
c. Accessible through access door immediately above top intake door.
H. Nameplates: Identify the manufacturer in conspicuous location on chute doors and equipment,
using permanent nameplate, casting, or stamping.
2.04 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
B. Sanitizing Solution or Chemicals: Two containers for Owner's use in cleaning chute.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Complete chute installation and testing before completion of enclosing construction.
B. Coordinate sprinkler and spray cleaning devices with with size, location and installation of service
utilities.
C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install chutes and equipment in accordance with NFPA 82 requirements and manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Maintain fire-resistive capacity of enclosing walls.
C. Install chute plumb and without offsets or obstructions that might prevent free fall of materials,
except where indicated on drawings.
D. Anchor securely in manner required to withstand impact and weight of materials in chute.
E. Install roof vent flange to roof deck prior to installation of roofing.
F. Install counterflashing after roofing installation.
G. Adjust doors and other operating components for smooth operation.
08-7910
Section 14560
CHUTES
14560 - 3
01/09/2009
B. Place bagged material of expected size in chute to verify free fall.
C. Test all components for proper operation.
1. Operate doors, locks, and interlocks.
2. Operate spray cleaning devices.
3. Simulate fire conditions inside chute to verify sprinkler and detector operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completion of enclosing walls, clean exposed chute components; do not remove testing
agency labels.
END OF SECTION
Section 14560
CHUTES
08-7910
01/09/2009 14560 - 4
08-7910 GENERAL PROVISIONS
15010 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15010

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The "Instructions to Bidders," the standard form of "General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction," the "Supplementary General Conditions," and Division
I requirements are a part of this Specification and together with applicable notes
on Drawings govern all work.

B. The work includes the furnishing by each contractor of all materials, supplies,
labor, equipment, tools, transportation, facilities and services necessary for and
required in connection with or properly incidental to all work as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein or reasonably implied therefore.

1.2 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

A. It is presumed that the Contractor has visited the site and has familiarized himself
with the conditions under which the work must be carried out before submitting
his bid. No additional compensation and/or extension of time will be allowed on
account or errors or omissions by the Contractor in this connection.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings show generally the arrangement of equipment, but, due to their
small scale, are essentially diagrammatic and do not detail every point at which
exigencies of construction may occur. Should conditions necessitate any
deviation from the general layout shown on the Drawings of if such deviations are
advantageous, Drawings shall be submitted for approval showing the proposed
method of installation and if approved shall become part of the contract to which
they are applied.

1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Refer to Division 1 in connection with permit fees.

B. These contractors shall obtain all permits and inspections, related to their work
as required by governing authorities having jurisdiction and as outlined in the
Specifications.


A. Standards and Regulations: The work under the Mechanical sections shall
comply with the latest editions of the following applicable Standard Specifications
and Codes.

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

15010 - 2 01/09/2009

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
and Air Conditioning Engineers

ACRI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

ASTM American Society of Testing Materials

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AWWA American Waterworks Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

NEMA National Electric Manufacturer's Association

NEC National Electric Code

CBC Chicago Building Code / Latest Edition

B. Include all items of labor and material required to comply with such codes in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Where quantities, sizes or other
requirements indicated on the Drawings or herein specified are in excess of
Code requirements, the Specifications and/or Drawings shall govern regardless of
Code requirements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

Refer to Division 1.

2. All shop drawings pertaining to a Section of the Mechanical Work shall be
submitted at the same time. Any deviation from the Drawings shall
be submitted to the Architect for approval in the form of a minimum of
1/4" scale drawings clearly indicating changes.

3. The Architect's approval, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for errors, as the Architect's and Engineer's approval of
shop drawings and working drawings is general only and does not relieve the
Contractor from furnishing equipment and performing work as required by
the Contract Documents.

4. No extension of time will be allowed the Contractor because of failure to
submit Drawings as scheduled.

15010 - 3 01/09/2009

5. All shop drawings and brochures shall be thoroughly checked by the
Contractor and shall bear his stamp of approval, before submitting to the
Architect.

6. Each shop drawing shall contain the following information:

a. Name and location of the project.
b. Name of Architect.
c. Name of Equipment Manufacturer and supplier.
d. Specification Reference Division, Section and Paragraph
applicable to the item being submitted.
e. System and area being served by the item being submitted. Plan
location (either room name and number, or column line, cross
reference and floor level) of the item being submitted.

7. The HVAC Contractor shall provide the following:

a. Shop drawings of each floor plan, equipment room and fan room,
including:

1. HVAC piping systems
2. Duct systems

All floor plans shall be drawn at 1/4" - 1' - 0" scale and all equipment rooms, fan rooms,
elevations and cross sections shall be drawn 1/2" - 1' - 0" scale.
Elevation and cross sections of equipment rooms and congested areas. Drawings shall
show the coordinated arrangement of all piping, ductwork, equipment, equipment bases,
adjacent items, allowing proper clearances and headroom. Show all dimensions.

b. Floor plans shall show location of all valves, strainers, gauges,
thermometers, etc.

c. Provide sleeve drawings showing dimensioned location of all
sleeves.

d. Submit details of all ductwork, construction, elbows, turns, access
doors, etc. with the submission of first shop drawings.

e. Submit to the Architect one (1) reproducible transparency and one
(1) prints of each shop drawing, which have been checked
and stamped by the General Contractor.

f. Submit one (1) set of all shop drawings of systems to be tested to
the independent Testing, Adjusting and Balancing subcontractor.

8. At the termination of the work, at the time the building is turned over to
the Owner, furnish to the Architect two (2) complete portfolios. Each portfolio
shall be bound separately containing shop drawings, maintenance and
operating instructions, produce data, control diagrams, warranties, etc.,
on all equipment furnished under this contract. Mark identification on each
portfolio. As required for any special equipment, furnish a competent
15010 - 4 01/09/2009

instructor to advise the Owner's operating personnel as to the proper
operation, servicing, repair of said equipment.

Construction Record Drawings: See Division 1

B. Operations and Maintenance Instructions: Furnish two (2) sets of manuals, in
bound form, containing data covering capacities, maintenance and operation of
each major item of equipment and apparatus. Instruction books may be standard
booklets, but should be clearly marked to indicate applicable equipment and
paragraphs. Operation instructions shall cover all phases of control and shall
also include the following:

1. Performance Curves: For pumps, fans and compressors and similar
equipment at the operating conditions.

2. Lubrication Schedule: Indicating type and frequency of lubrication
required.

3. List of spare parts: Recommended for normal service requirements.

4. Parts List: Identifying the various parts of the equipment for repair and
replacement purposes. In particular, sheaves, V-belts, bearing and similar
items should be clearly identified as to the manufacturer, size and type
and stocking points.

C. ASME Certificates: Submit to the Architect an ASME certificate for each pressure
vessel which is specified to be constructed, and stamped in accordance with
ASME requirements.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. The Owner may elect before the date of final acceptance of the work have
capacity and efficiency tests conducted by a qualified testing organization.
Results to indicate that items of work do or do not meet the requirements of the
drawings and specifications of such items and for the cost of additional work
necessary to meet the specifications.

1. The Architect shall deduct such costs from the final payment to the
contractor.

B. Contractor shall guarantee in writing that all materials, equipment and
workmanship furnished and installed under contract shall be free from defects,
for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion and shall further
guarantee to replace any and all such defects occurring within said one (1) year
without cost to the Owner. Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all
manufacturer's guarantees applicable to equipment provided by the contractor.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of the equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,
address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous
15010 - 5 01/09/2009

place. The name plate of a distributing agent is not acceptable. ASME Code
Ratings, or other data which is die stamped into the surface of the equipment
shall be stamped in an easily visible location.

B. Manufacturer's name plate, identification or symbol shall not be permitted on
equipment, apparatus or material in finished or habitable spaces, located so as to
be visible or exposed to view.

1.9 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTORS

A. Each Contractor, in the event of separate contracts, in laying out his work shall
cooperate with the other contractors on the work, so as to avoid any
interferences with their work. If this is not done, Architect reserves the right to make
such changes in the work as are necessary to avoid interferences and such changes
will not be considered as cause for additional compensation or extension of time
for the contractor.

1.10 J URISDICTION OF WORK

A. Where it becomes necessary for contractor, in order to fulfill his contract, to
furnish labor or materials other than that which is generally accepted by trade
agreement or general practice to belong to his particular trade or branches of
work, the contractor shall sublet same to subcontractor engaged in the type of
work involved to the end that there will be no stoppage of work due to violations
of trade agreements as to jurisdiction.

1.11 WORK PRIORITY OVER OTHER TRADES

A. The mechanical trades are to be governed as follows: Work in cooperation with
one another to fit piping and ductwork into structure as job conditions may
demand. All final decisions as to right of way and run of pipe, ducts, to be made
by the Architect. In general, priority is to be arranged as follows:

1. Recessed lighting fixtures
2. Sheet metal ductwork
3. Plumbing, waste lines, downspouts and vents
4. Sprinkler piping
5. Plumbing water lines
6. Refrigeration piping
7. Electrical conduit
8. Control air lines or conduit

1.12 INSTALLATION OF WORK

A. All work shall be installed in accordance with approved drawings, in consultation
with all other trades involved in the construction of the building and with the
Architect and at such time as to maintain the progress of construction.

B. In general, all work shall be concealed.

15010 - 6 01/09/2009

1. Concealed work in walls of exposed masonry construction shall be
installed before or during wall construction to the end that no cutting and
patching shall be required.

2. Cutting and patching of plastered, tiled, or similarly finished construction
shall be strictly prohibited without the consent of the Architect.

3. If such cutting and patching is required due to contractor's neglect in
conforming to these specifications, the Architect shall take all necessary
steps to restore the building finish to the state intended by the drawings
and specifications and the cost of such restoration shall be deducted from
payments to the contractor.

C. Furnish sleeves and inserts, and exact location with dimensions of all holes,
slots, chases and other openings in the building to the trades involved in the
construction of same and contractor shall be responsible for the supervision of
the installation of such openings.

1. Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement shall make him
entirely liable for all cutting and patching necessitated.

D. Contractor shall give three (3) working days notice in writing to the Architect
when any work which will be concealed is in place and ready for test and inspection.
He shall be responsible for keeping such work exposed for the full three (3) working
days and shall be equipped during such period to perform required tests.

1. The Architect, upon Contractor's failure to comply with these
requirements, may order the work involved exposed for inspection and
test and the cost of all cutting and patching in accordance with methods
herein outlined shall be deducted from payments to the contractor.

E. Any discrepancies between the building as constructed and the drawings shall
immediately be reported to the Architect and his written instructions shall be
obtained for changes as may be required.

1. Changes made without written instructions shall not warrant additional
compensation.

1.13 LINES AND LEVELS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the lines and levels of the ductwork, piping,
and conduits based on established benchmarks, lines and elevations.

1.14 PUMPING AND DRAINING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for the pumping and draining of trenches or parts
necessary for the installation of his work.

15010 - 7 01/09/2009


1.15 METERING

A. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of obtaining, setting and connecting
all metering equipment for services for which he is responsible. Charges normally
made by Utilities, Service Companies, or municipalities for furnishing, setting or
connecting required metering equipment shall be included in the contract sum
without additional cost to the Owner.

1.16 CLEANING

A. During the course of construction, Contractor shall be responsible for the removal
of all rubbish, dirt, resulting from the execution of this contract.

B. Upon the completion of construction and before final acceptance by the Owner,
clean all work of paint, plaster, grease, dirt and all foreign matter, to the
satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner.

C. Failure to comply shall empower the Architect to order such cleaning done and to
deduct the cost of same from payments to the Contractor.


08-7910 CODES, PERMITS & INSPECTIONS
15024 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15024

CODES, PERMITS & INSPECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 CODES

A. The Plumbing installation and equipment shall conform to the following:

1. City of Chicago Code, current edition.

B. The heating, air conditioning and ventilation installation and equipment shall
conform to the following:

1. City of Chicago Code

C. Fire protection system installation and equipment shall conform to the following:

1. N.F.P.A.

D. Municipal Codes and Ordinances:

1. All materials and installation work must conform to the local building
codes and ordinances.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 PERMITS

A. Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of this work and pay all
charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of said inspection
issued by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS

A. The workmanship and materials covered by these specifications shall conform to
all ordinances and regulations of the town, county and/or other authorities having
jurisdiction.


08-7910 STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
15040 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15040

STARTING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Construction Manager

1. Provide material and labor required for start-up of all equipment and
systems installed under General Contract.

B. Plumbing Contractor

1. Provide all material and labor required for start-up of all equipment and
systems installed under Plumbing Contract.

C. HVAC Contractor

1. Provide all material and labor required for start-up of all equipment and
systems installed under Heating Contract, provide all information and
assistance required for cooperation with testing, adjusting and balancing
services.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere:

1. 15045 - Balancing Air Systems

1.3 START-UP PROCEDURES

A. Bearings

1. Inspect for cleanliness, clean and remove foreign materials.
2. Verify alignment.
3. Replace defective bearing and those which run rough or noisy.
4. Lubricate as necessary in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

B. Drives

1. Adjust tension in V-belt drives and adjust varistitch sheaves and drives for
proper equipment speed.
2. Adjust drives for alignment of sheaves and V-belts.
3. Clean, remove foreign materials before starting operation.

C. Motors
15040 - 2 01/09/2009


1. Check each motor for amperage comparison to nameplate value.
2. Correct conditions which produce excessive current flow which exist due
to equipment malfunction.

D. Pumps

1. Check mechanical seals for cleanliness and adjustment before running
pump.

2. Inspect shaft sleeves for scoring.

3. Inspect mechanical faces, chambers and seal rings; replace if defective.

4. Verify that piping system is free of dirt and scale before circulating liquid
through pump.

E. Control Valves

1. Inspect both hand and automatic control valves, clean bonnets and
stems.

2. Tighten packing glands to assure no leakage, but permit valve stems to
operate without galling.

3. Replace packing on any valve which continues to leak.

4. Remove and repair bonnets which leak.

5. Coat packing gland threads and valve stems with surface preparation
after cleaning.

F. Verify that control valve seats are free from foreign materials and are properly
positioned for intended service.

G. Tighten flanges after system has been placed in operation.

1. Replace flange gaskets which show signs of leakage after tightening.

H. Inspect screwed joints for leakage.

1. Promptly remake each joint which appears to be faulty; do not wait for
rust to form.

I. After system has been placed in operation, clean strainers, dirt pockets, orifices,
valve seats and headers in fluid systems to assure being free of foreign
materials.

J . Open stem traps and air vents; remove operating elements.

15040 - 3 01/09/2009


1. Clean thoroughly, replace internal parts and put back into operation.

K. Remove rust, scale and foreign materials from equipment and renew defaced
surfaces.

L. Set and calibrate draft gauges of air filters and other equipment.

M. Inspect fan wheels for clearance and balance.

1. Provide factory authorized personnel for adjustment when needed.

N. Inspect each electrical control circuit to assure that operation complies with
specifications and requirements to provide desired performance.

O. Inspect each pressure gauge and thermometer for calibration.

1. Replace items defaced, broken or read incorrectly.

P. Repair damaged insulation.

Q. Vent gases trapped in system.

1. Verify that liquids are drained from all parts of gas or air systems.
2. Inspect piping for leaks at every joint and at every screwed, flanged or
welded connection, using a proper leak detecting method.

S. Provide such periodic adjustment services as necessary to insure proper
functioning of mechanical systems after occupancy of project and during
warranty period.


08-7910 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS
15045 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15045

BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall contract an independent certified
Test and Balance Contractor to balance the system.

B. System shall be completely installed and in continuous operation to
accomplish balance work.

C. Balancing shall be performed when outside conditions approximate
design conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR BALANCE INSTRUMENTS

A. Alnor Velometer with Probes and Alnor Pitot Tube.

B. Rotating Anemometer. Taylor Instrument Co., 4" size.

C. ASHRAE Standard Pitot Tubes, stainless steel 5/16" outside diameter,
lengths 18" and 36", Dwyer Model 160.

D. Magnehelic Differential Air Pressure Gauges. 0" to 0.5", 0" to 1.0", and
0" to 5.0" water pressure ranges, each arranged as a portable unit for
use with a standard Pitot Tube, Dwyer Series 2000.

E. Combination Inclines-vertical Portable Manometer. Range 0" to 5.0"
H2O. Dwyer Number 400.

F. Portable Flexible U-Tube Manometer. Magnetic mounting clips, range
18" to 0.18" H2O, Dwyer Number 1215-20.

2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
08-7910 BALANCING OF AIR SYSTEMS
15045 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Insertion thermometers, with graduation at 0.5 degree F. for air.

B. Sling psychrometer

C. Tachometer, centrifugal type

D. Revolution counter

E. Clamp-on volt-ammeter, minimum ranges: 0/600 volts on three scales;
0/800 volts on five scales.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 AIR SYSTEMS

A. Test, adjust and balance air systems in accordance with AABC
National Standards for Field Measurements, Total System Balance,
Air Distribution, Volume Two, Number 12173, dated 1974. Submit four
(4) sets of Test & Balance reports to the Architect/Engineer for review.


08-7910 BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

15050 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15050

BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. General Provisions: Section 15010 - General Provisions is a part of this section
of the Specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. This Section 15050 shall be a part of each Section of Division 15.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Valves shall be furnished and installed wherever shown or specified, using
adapters where required. All removable or replaceable equipment shall have
shut-off valves. Gate, Globe and swing check valves shall be manufactured by
Stockham, Milwaukee, Walworth or equal. Walworth and Nibco numbers are
used below. Check valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be non-slam type, Mission or
equal. Balancing valves shall be Dezurik. All valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be
flanged.

1. All gate valves 3" and smaller shall be wedge disc pattern, with non-rising
stem for not less than 125 psig steam working pressure,
Milwaukee 115 for copper and 105 for steel pipe.

2. Stop and waste valves shall be bronze, composition disc. solder joint,
Nibco Husky No. 262 or equal.

2.2 UNIONS

A. Unions shall be provided at each screwed type valve and at each piece of
equipment having screwed connections.

1. Unions in steel pipe shall be heavy-duty malleable screwed type with
brass to iron ground joints.

2. Unions in copper tube shall be copper with solder connections and
copper-to-copper ground joints. Nibco No. 633 or equal.

3. Dielectric Unions: EPCO or equal shall be provided at all connections
between ferrous and nonferrous piping and at all connections between
piping and equipment where one is ferrous and the other nonferrous.

15050 - 2 01/09/2009


2.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Furnish and install flexible connectors for all rotation and reciprocating
equipment. Connectors must be equal to and incorporate the following features:

1. Sizes 1/2" through 2": Flexonics RW-81 bronze hose and braid, brazed
male thread ends, annular hose, proper lengths as follows:
1/2" x 10", 3/4" x 11", 1" x 12", 1-1/4" x 13", 1-1/2" x 14", 2" x 15"

2. Sizes 2-1/2" through 8": Resistoflex type 6904, molded teflon
convolutions 2500 minimum tensile, ductile iron flanges, limit bolts.

B. Support piping so that connectors do not carry pipe load. Anchor piping at
change of direction after the flexible connector.

2.4 THERMOMETERS

A. Furnish and install thermometers where shown on the details. Thermometers
installed in water lines shall be of bimetal dial type, 3" dial, Weksler Company,
Type 3A of 3S thermometers, or Moeller No. 4250 or 4750. Thermometers shall
have suitable ranges and shall be mounted for convenient reading. Angle type
shall be used if necessary for convenient reading. Thermometers shall have
separate thermometer wells.

2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Provide pressure gauges, U.S. Gauge, or approved equal, with white dial and
black scale, size 4" dial. These gauges shall be located for convenient reading.
Angle type shall be used if necessary for convenient reading. Gauges shall be
installed as shown on the drawings and details. Each gauge shall be connected
by means of pipe and fittings containing shut-off valves or ball valves, Crane or
equal.

2.6 MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. Contractor shall provide motors for their equipment. Contractor shall furnish
starters and magnetic contactors and controls for his equipment for installation
under the Electrical Section of the Specifications.
Motors 1/3 H.P. and less shall be for 120 volt, single phase operation; motors
over 1/3 H.P. shall be for 208 volt (unless otherwise indicated) three-phase
operation. All motors shall be of NEMA manufacture, G.E., Westinghouse,
Louis-Allis or Marathon. Starters for single phase motors shall be manual motor
controller with thermal overload protection and indicating bulls-eye. Starters for
three phase motors shall have three (3) thermal overloads, 208/120 volt control
circuit transformer, low voltage protection, Hand-Off-Automatic selector switch in
cover with indicating pilot light, and fusible disconnect switch. Starters shall be
Square D Company, Allen Bradley Cutler-Hammer, or G.E. Contractor shall

15050 - 3 01/09/2009


coordinate work with other trades to assure all starters shall be the product of a
single manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Piping trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform support on
undisturbed soil for piping. Excavations for joints shall be made after grading
trench bottom and shall be as small as possible.

B. Excavations made too deep shall be filled with fill sand and compacted to density
of surrounding undisturbed soil. Unstable soils not suitable for proper pipe
support shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials as directed.

C. Care shall be taken to avoid injury to foundations or footings. Sheeting, shoring,
and bracing shall be provided where necessary in deep trenches or unstable
soils. Necessary grading shall be done to prevent surface water from entering
trenches or excavations. Water accumulating in trenches or excavations shall be
removed as soon as possible. The last 4" depth of all trenches shall be
excavated by hand to fit the pipe in the grade.

3.2 BACKFILLING

A. After the installation has been tested and approved, trenches and excavations
shall be backfilled in the following manner:

1. Pipe and structures in pavement areas within 4 ft. of paved surfaces to be
backfilled with washed uniformly graded mixture of crushed or
uncrushed gravel passing 1-1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing
a No. 4 sieve.

2. Trenches outside paved areas, backfill with materials excavated from
trench.

3. Place initial backfill within 12" above pipe in 6" layer and compact with
mechanical compactor.

4. Place backfill above initial filling in 12" layers and compact by tamping or
puddling method.

5. Backfill masonry structures after 48 hours of curing.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. All motors and bearings shall be covered with watertight and dustproof covers
during the construction period.


15050 - 4 01/09/2009


B. All piping connections to equipment shall be made with shutoff valves and unions
or flanges to permit dismantling. Flanges and unions shall also be installed in the
piping systems to permit disassembly, consistent with good installation practice.

C. All belt driven, flexible couplings and other exposed rotating or reciprocating
parts shall be covered with approved safety covers. Covers shall be permanent type
and easily removed.

D. Each pump shall have a check valve and gate valve in the discharge line.

E. All piping connections to rotating or reciprocating equipment shall be made with
flexible piping connections. All floor mounted equipment items shall be installed
on a concrete base 3-1/2" above the floor.


A. Pipe hangers: All piping shall be securely supported by means of pipe hangers.
Due provision shall be made for expansion of piping. Pipes shall be securely
anchored where necessary to properly distribute stresses. Pipe hangers shall be
spaced as as specified in section 15140. All pipes passing through rated walls
shall be firestopped. All exposed piping passing through walls, floors or ceiling
shall have chrome plated escutcheon plates at penetrations.

3.5 ACCESS

A. All motors, valves, control devices, specialties, etc. shall be so located as to
provide for easy access for operation, repair and maintenance; if concealed,
access doors shall be provided. Access doors for concealed valves, control
devices and other specialties shall be of steel, 24" x 24", complete with steel
frame, as manufactured by Milcor Division, Inland Steel Company, or equal.
Frames shall be designed for masonry, plaster, or drywall as required. 1-1/2 hour
fire rated.

3.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Each piece of equipment shall have a plastic or metal identification plate securely
fastened to the equipment in a position to be easily read. Plate shall have name
and mark shown on the drawings, such as "Air Handling Unit AH-1." This name
and mark shall be used in referring to items of equipment in the operating and
maintenance manual.


08-7910 COLOR CODING AND VALVE TAGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
SECTION 15051

COLOR CODING AND VALVE TAGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. All above ground piping inside the building shall be identified with color bands at each
shut-off valve, each piece of equipment, branch take-off, and 20 foot maximum on
straight pipe runs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MARKINGS

A. Marking shall be "Seton" set mark pipe markers.

1. Band and letter size

TABLE 1

Outside Diameter Width of Size of Legend
of Pipe or Color Band Letters and
Covering Numerals

3/4" to 1-1/2" 8 1/2
1-1/4" to 2" 8 3/4
2-1/2" to 6" 12 1-1/4
8" and larger 24 2-1/2

All dimensions are given in inches

2. Identification

TABLE 2

Piping Band Legend Letters Band Color

Cold Water CW (dom.) Black Green
(Domestic)

Hot Water HW (dom.) Black Yellow
15051 - 1 01/09/2009

(Domestic)

08-7910 COLOR CODING AND VALVE TAGS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

Hot Water HW (dom.) Black Yellow
Return
(Domestic)

Gas Gas Black Yellow

B. Valve Tags

1. Each gate valve, plug valve, butterfly valve, globe valve in the domestic water
systems shall have a valve tag affixed to the valve body. Valve tags shall be a
minimum of 18 gauge brass, a minimum of 1-1/4" in size, and shall have
identification numbers stamped into the tags and filled black enamel. Valve
tags, shapes and numbering shall be as follows:

IDENTIFICATION
SYSTEM SHAPE NUMBERS

Cold Water Round C.W. - 1,2,3.......

Hot Water Round H.W. - 1,2,3.......

Gas Square GAS - 1,2,3.......

2. Each valve tag shall be attached to the handwheel with brass S hooks as
manufactured by Seton.

3. A valve chart, framed under glass and wall mounted, shall be located in the
mechanical room and shall list each valve by identification number, its location
in the piping system (i.e., shut-off, balancing, drain, etc.).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Pipe marking shall be applied by using stencils and spray-on stencil ink. Band and
letter sizes and identification shall be as shown in Tables I and II. Direction of flow
arrows shall be placed next to color bands. A white background of stencil ink shall be
provided where black letters are used on pipe material and pipe insulation that is
already black.

15051 - 2 01/09/2009


08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15100 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Special purpose valves are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
2. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list
indicating valve and its application.

C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling,
and repairing.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section
"Materials and Equipment," under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.

B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1
for power piping.

C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 2 01/09/2009



A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

1. Gate Valves:

a. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
b. Hammond Valve Corporation.
c. Kitz Corp. of America.
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NIBCO Inc.
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

2. Ball Valves:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 3 01/09/2009


c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
d. NIBCO Inc.
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe.
g. Victaulic Company of America.

3. Plug Valves:

a. Grinnell Corp.
b. Huber: J .M. Huber Corp.; Flow Control Division (Resun Valves).
c. NIBCO Inc.
d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
e. Victaulic Company of America.

4. Globe Valves:

c. Kitz Corp. of America.
d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
f. NIBCO Inc.
g. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

5. Butterfly Valves:

a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. General Signal; DeZurik Unit.
d. Grinnell Corp.
e. Hammond Valve Corporation.
f. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NIBCO Inc.
i. Red-White Valve Corp.
j. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
k. Tyler Pipe.
l. Ultraflo Corporation.
m. Victaulic Company of America.

6. Swing Check Valves:

a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Kitz Corp. of America.
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 4 01/09/2009


f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
g. NIBCO Inc.
h. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
k. Victaulic Company of America.

7. Wafer Check Valves:

a. Cla-Val Co.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
e. Kitz Corp. of America.
f. Metraflex Company.
g. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
h. NIBCO Inc.
k. Tyler Pipe.
l. Val-Matic Valve & Mfg. Corp.
m. Victaulic Company of America.

8. Lift Check Valves:

b. Kitz Corp. of America.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
d. NIBCO Inc.
e. Powell: Wm. Powell Company (The).
f. Red-White Valve Corp.
g. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.

1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this
Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:

08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 5 01/09/2009


1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches (DN150) and smaller, except for plug
valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug
valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 4 inches (DN100) and larger, installed 96 inches
(2400 mm) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves 8 inches (DN200) and larger.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.

H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.

I. Solder J oint: ASME B16.18.

1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 840 deg F (450 deg C) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F (216
deg C) for ball valves.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
cold working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze
body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated
packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or
malleable-iron handwheel.

B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw
and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa)
CWP, ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball,
standard port for 1/2-inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch
(DN20) valves and larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; teflon seats and seals; threaded
or soldered end connections:

1. Operator: Steel handwheel.
2. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 6 01/09/2009


3. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel tee handle.
4. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
5. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
6. Memory Stop: For operator handles.

2.5 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves: MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet,
cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:

1. Operator: Lever.
2. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes 6 inches (DN150) and larger.
4. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes 6 inches (DN150) and larger, 96
inches (2400 mm) or higher above floor.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed
bonnet, rubber, bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing
with bronze nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
handwheel.

B. Globe Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and
disc, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron
follower, flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.

2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035- kPa) maximum
pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel
stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, wafer, lug, or grooved style:

1. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
3. Disc Type: Elastomer-coated ductile iron.
4. Disc Type: Epoxy-coated ductile iron.
5. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches (DN50) to 6 Inches (DN150): Standard lever handle.
6. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches (DN50) to 6 Inches (DN150): Standard lever handle with
memory stop.
7. Operator for Sizes 2 Inches (DN50) to 6 Inches (DN150): Lever handle with latch lock.
8. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) to 24 Inches (DN600): Gear operator with position
indicator.
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 7 01/09/2009


9. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) to 24 Inches (DN600): Gear operator with position
indicator and chain wheel.
10. Operator for Sizes 8 Inches (DN200) and Larger, 96 Inches (2400 mm) or Higher above
Floor: Chain-wheel operator.

2.8 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi
(1380-kPa) CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern,
ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition
seat, threaded or soldered end connections:

B. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or
grooved end connections.

C. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body,
bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.

D. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal
or vertical pattern, lift-type, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder
threaded or soldered end connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable
for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 8 01/09/2009


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches (1500 mm) above finished floor
elevation.

H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a
bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate
tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the
solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 9 01/09/2009


A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.

3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as
flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoff and retention.

3.6 VALVE END SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide
threaded ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe, ball, and
butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve
applications and arrangements.

B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or
teflon disc.
08-7910 VALVES
15100 - 10 01/09/2009


5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or elastomer-coated
ductile iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.

C. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze
disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: Nickel-plated ductile iron, aluminum bronze, or epoxy-coated ductile
iron disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be
Class 150 with bronze seat ring.

D. Low-Pressure Steam and Condensate Return Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 150, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze body with teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
5. Check Valves: Class 150, bronze body swing check with composition seat; Class 150,
cast-iron body swing check with bronze seat ring; or Class 125, cast-iron body wafer
check.

E. Condenser Water Systems: Use the following valve types:

1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze body; or Class 125, cast-iron body.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi (4140-kPa) CWP, with memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-iron
body.
5. Butterfly Valves: Aluminum bronze, epoxy-coated ductile iron disc; EPDM sleeve and
stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-
iron body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron
body lift check.

3.8 ADJ USTING

A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

08-7910 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15121 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems, and the
following:

1. Metal-bellows expansion joints.
2. Expansion compensators.
3. Rubber expansion joints.
4. Flexible-hose expansion joints.
5. Slip expansion joints.
6. Flexible ball joints.
7. Pipe bends and loops.
8. Guides and anchors.


A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.

B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and design
of expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of
assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
15121 - 2 01/09/2009


D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion
fitting and loop.


A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

following:

1. Metal-Bellows Expansion J oints:

a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.
b. Anamet, Inc.
c. Badger Industries, Inc.
d. Expansion J oint Systems, Inc.
e. Flexicraft Industries.
f. Flex-Weld, Inc.
g. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
h. Metraflex Co.
i. Pathway Bellows, Inc.
j. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
k. Proco Products, Inc.
l. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion J oint Div.
m. Wahlco Engineered Products, Inc.

2. Expansion Compensators:

15121 - 3 01/09/2009


b. Flexicraft Industries.
c. Flex-Weld, Inc.
d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
e. Metraflex Co.
f. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion J oint Div.

3. Rubber Expansion J oints:

a. Flexicraft Industries.
b. Flex-Weld, Inc.
c. Garlock, Inc.
d. General Rubber Corp.
e. Mercer Rubber Co.
f. Metraflex Co.
g. MG Piping Products Co.
h. Proco Products, Inc.
i. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion J oint Div.
j. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

4. Flexible-Hose Expansion J oints:

a. Flexicraft Industries.
b. Metraflex Co.

5. Slip Expansion J oints:

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

6. Flexible Ball J oints:

a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

7. Guides:

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. B-Line Systems, Inc.
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.

2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION J OINTS

15121 - 4 01/09/2009


A. Metal-Bellows Expansion J oints: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating, with end
fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections, unless

1. Configuration: Single-bellows type.
2. Configuration: Double-bellows type, with base.
3. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise indicated.
4. J oints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shrouds.
5. J oints for Copper Piping: Single-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
6. J oints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass
shroud.
7. J oints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-steel-
pipe end connections, and steel shroud.
8. J oints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
9. J oints for Steel Piping: Single-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
10. J oints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel
shroud.

B. Expansion Compensators: 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum pressure rating, with internal guides,
antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.

1. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded.
2. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
3. J oints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. J oints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.

C. Rubber Expansion J oints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated for
175 psig at 240 deg F (1200 kPa at 116 deg C) minimum.

1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control rods;
and steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Type: Single sphere.
3. Type: Double sphere.

D. Flexible-Hose Expansion J oints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs
joined by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-
metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.

1. J oints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.

a. NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with
450 psig at 70 deg F (3100 kPa at 21 deg C) and 340 psig at 450 deg F (2340 kPa
at 232 deg C) minimum pressure ratings.
b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN65 to DN100): Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F (2060 kPa at 21 deg C) and 225
psig at 450 deg F (1550 kPa at 232 deg C) minimum pressure ratings.
c. NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with
700 psig at 70 deg F (4800 kPa at 21 deg C) and 500 psig at 450 deg F (3450 kPa
at 232 deg C) minimum pressure ratings.
15121 - 5 01/09/2009


d. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN65 to DN100): Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,

2. J oints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.

a. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded.
b. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
c. J oints for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid,
d. J oints for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN65 to DN150): Stainless-steel hoses and single-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F (1380 kPa at 21 deg C) and
145 psig at 600 deg F (1000 kPa at 315 deg C) minimum pressure ratings.
e. J oints for NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN200 to DN300): Stainless-steel hoses and single-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70 deg F (860 kPa at 21 deg C) and
90 psig at 600 deg F (625 kPa at 315 deg C) minimum pressure ratings.
f. J oints for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
g. J oints for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 (DN65 to DN150): Stainless-steel hoses and
double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70 deg F (1900 kPa at
21 deg C) and 200 psig at 600 deg F (1380 kPa at 315 deg C) minimum pressure
ratings.
h. J oints for NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,

2.3 PACKED EXPANSION J OINTS

A. Slip Expansion J oints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for repacking
under pressure and pressure rated for 250 psig at 400 deg F (1725 kPa at 204 deg C) minimum
with compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, drip connection if
used for steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.
2. Single-Slip Type: With base, if indicated.
3. Double-Slip Type: With base.

B. Flexible Ball J oints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing, designed
for 360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 250 psig at 400 deg F (1725 kPa at 204 deg
C) minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II,
"Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials
and design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.

1. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded.
2. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
3. J oints for NPS 6 (DN150) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
15121 - 6 01/09/2009


4. J oints for NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.

2.4 GUIDES

A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of
piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.
2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland
cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable
for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic
grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

15121 - 7 01/09/2009


A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written
instructions.

3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS

A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in
main.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including
tee in riser.

C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings,
including tee in main.

3.4 GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9
and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include
embedded fasteners.
15121 - 8 01/09/2009


D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if
expansion fittings are indicated.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on
or in concrete.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas
immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting.
Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05
mm).

B. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

08-7910 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15140 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15140

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary
labor, supervision, materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the
pipe hanger and supports as described in this specification.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B633- Specification for Electro deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel.

B. ASTM A123- Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and
Strip.

C. ASTM A653 G90-Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process.

D. MSS SP58- Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and
Supports- Materials, Design, and Manufacture.

E. MSS SP69- Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and
Supports- Selection and Application.

F. NFPA 13- Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.


A. Hangers and supports used in fire protection piping systems shall be listed and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories.

B. Steel pipe hangers and supports should have the manufacturers name, part
number, and applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.

C. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with
MSS SP58.

D. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

15140 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Submit product data on all hanger and support devices, including shields and
attachment methods. Product data to include, but not limited to materials,
finishes, approvals, load ratings, and dimensional information.

PART II- PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and
support systems shall be as manufactured by B-Line Systems, Inc.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. HANGERS

1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170.
b. Adjustable steel swivel J -hanger, B-Line B3690.
c. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198R or hinged ring hanger,
B3198H.
d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173
with B3222.
e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104 or B3100.

2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger:

a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3100.
b. Pipe roll with sockets, B-Line B3114.
c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line B3110.

3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping:

a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with
galvanized sheet metal shield or pre-insulated calcium
silicate shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 or B3380 series.

b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:

i. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering
protection saddle or pre-insulated calcium silicate
shield. B-Line B3110 with B3160-B3165 series or
B3380 series.

ii. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection
saddle or pre-insulated calcium silicate shield, B-
Line B3114 with B3160-B3165 series or B3380
series.

15140 - 3 01/09/2009


4. Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping:

a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with
galvanized sheet metal shield or pre-insulated calcium silicate
shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 or B3380CW series.

b. 6 inch and larger pipes:

i. Adjustable steel clevis with pre-insulated calcium silicate
shield, B-Line B3100 with B3380CW series or greater.
ii. Pipe roll with sockets with pre-insulated calcium silicate
shield, B-Line B3114with B3380CW series or greater.
iii. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pre-insulated calcium
silicate shield. B-Line B3110 with B3380CW series or
greater.

B. PIPE CLAMPS

1. When flexibility in the hanger assembly is required due to horizontal
movement, use pipe clamps with weldless eye nuts, B-Line B3140 or
B3142 with B3200. For insulated lines use double bolted pipe clamps, B-
Line B3144 or B3146 with B3200.

C. MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS

1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM
A570 Gr. 33 structural steel channel, 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 minimum, B-Line B22
strut or stronger as required.

2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter
of pipe, B-Line B2000 Series.

3. For insulated lines, use pre-insulated calcium silicate shields mounted to
strut with 2 piece pipe straps.

4. For pipes subjected to axial movement:

a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection
saddles or pre-insulated calcium silicate shields on insulated lines.
b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417.

D. WALL SUPPORTS

1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller:

a. Carbon steel hook, B-Line B3191.
b. Carbon steel J -hanger, B-Line B3690.

2. Pipes larger than 4 inch:
15140 - 4 01/09/2009


a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line B3064 and B2000 series.
b. Welded steel brackets, B-Line B3066 or B3067, with roller chair or
adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. B-Line B3120 or B3110. Use pipe
protection saddles or pre-insulated calcium silicate shields on
insulated lines.

E. FLOOR SUPPORTS

1. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping:

a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel
base stand sized for pipe elevation. B-Line B3093 and B3088T or
B3090 and B3088. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to
appropriate base stand.

2. Hot piping 6 inch and larger:

a. [Adjustable] Roller stand with base plate, B-Line B3117SL [or
B3118SL]
b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation. B-
Line B3124

F. VERTICAL SUPPORTS

1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B3373.

G. COPPER TUBING SUPPORTS

1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170CT.
b. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198RCT or hinged ring
hanger B3198HCT.
c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173CT
with B3222.
d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104CT.

2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser
clamps, B-Line B3373CT or B3373CTC.

3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized
for copper tubing, B-Line B2000 series, or plastic inserted vibration
isolation clamps, B-Line BVT series.

4. For supporting insulated lines, use pre-insulated calcium silicate shields
sized for copper tubing, B-Line B3380CT series.

15140 - 5 01/09/2009


NOTE: Copper plating of hangers is for identification only. This
superficial coating does not provide significant protection in corrosive
areas.

H. PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORTS

1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18 gauge continuous support
channel, B-Line B3106 and B3106V.

I. SUPPLEMENTARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS

1. Design and fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing
materials as manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll
formed, 12 gauge ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 or greater
as required by loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels, pipe
galleries, etc. to engineer for approval. Use clamps and fittings designed
for use with the strut system.

2.3 PRE-INSULATED CALCIUM SILICATE SHIELDS

A. Provide 360
o
water resistant high density (140 psi compressive strength) calcium
silicate shields, encased in galvanized sheet metal.

B. Pre-insulated calcium silicate shields to be installed at the point of support during
pipe erection.

C. Shield insulation thickness shall match the piping insulation.

D. The type of shield is selected by the temperature of the pipe, the load it must
carry, and the type of support it will be used with.

1. Shields for supporting chilled or cold water should have insulation that
extends a minimum of 1 past the sheet metal. Provide for an adequate
vapor barrier on chilled lines.

2. The pre-insulated calcium silicate shield shall support the maximum
allowable water filled span as indicated in part 3, section 3.01-B & C. To
support the load, shields may have one or more of the following features:
structural inserts (600 psi compressive strength), an extra bottom metal
shield, or formed structural steel (ASTM A36) wear plates welded to the
bottom sheet metal jacket.

3. Shields may be used on steel clevis hanger type supports, roller supports,
or flat surfaces. Select shield series as follows:

a. Above ambient temperature piping with steel clevis hanger type
supports: B-Line B3380, B3380X, or B9080 series as required by
loading.
15140 - 6 01/09/2009


b. Above ambient temperature piping with roller supports: B-Line
B3380X, B3380P, B8080P, B8280P, or B8480P series as required
by loading.

c. Above ambient temperature piping with flat surface supports: B-
Line B3380, B3380X, B3380P, B7080P, B7280P, or B7480P
series as required by loading.

d. Below ambient temperature piping with steel clevis hanger type
supports: B-Line B3380CW, B3380CWX, or B9080 series as
required by loading.

e. Below ambient temperature piping with roller supports: B-Line
B3380CWX, B3380CWP, B8080P, B8280P, or B8480P series as
required by loading.

f. Below ambient temperature piping with flat surface supports: B-
Line B3380CW, B3380CWP, B7080P, B7280P, or B7480P series
as required by loading.

2.4 UPPER ATTACHMENTS

A. BEAM CLAMPS

1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from
building steel. Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be
supported, and load configuration.

2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, B-Line B351L,
or B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger
rod to the top flange of structural shapes, B-Line B3034 or B3033. Refer
to manufacturers recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps
shall be used to maintain the position on the beam where required.

3. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps
shall be B-Line B3050, or B3055. Malleable iron or forged steel beam
clamps with cross bolt shall be B-Line B3054 or B3291-B3297 Series as
required to fit beams.

B. CONCRETE INSERTS

1. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable, either
steel or malleable iron body, B-Line B2500 or B3014. Spot inserts shall
allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms.
Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes, B-Line N2500 or
B3014N series.

2. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels
shall be 12 gauge, ASTM A 570 Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel,
15140 - 7 01/09/2009


complete with styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for
attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shall have a load
rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete, B-Line B22I, 32I, or 52I. Select channel
nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes.

2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS

A. For refrigeration, air conditioning, hydraulic, pneumatic, and other vibrating
system applications, use a clamp that has a vibration dampening insert and a
nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use B-Line BVT series
Vibraclamps, for pipe sizes use BVP series.

B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers
as required.

C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or
spring mounts as required.

D. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of
circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and
hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed.

B. Shields shall be 180
o
galvanized sheet metal, 12 minimum length, 18 gauge
minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated
pipe, B-Line B3151.

C. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum
thickness, sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12
inch shall have a center support rib.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Hangers not in direct contact with copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance
with ASTM B633, SC3 or have a green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen.

B. Strut channels shall be electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen.

C. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123.

D. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be type 304 [316] stainless
steel with stainless steel hardware.

E. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be painted with
copper colored epoxy, B-Line Duracopper.
15140 - 8 01/09/2009


PART III- EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Pipe shall be adequately supported by pipe hanger and supports specified in
PART II- PRODUCTS. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to
accommodate insulation thickness.

B. Horizontal steel piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables
3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below:

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING
1/2-1-1/4 3/8 7
1-1/2 3/8 9
2 3/8 10
2-1/2 1/2 11
3 1/2 12
3-1/2 1/2 13
4 5/8 14
5 5/8 16
6 3/4 17
8 3/4 19
10 7/8 20
12 7/8 23
14 1 25
16 1 27

C. Horizontal copper tubing shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69
Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below:

NOMINAL TUBE SIZE ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM SPACING
1/2-3/4 3/8 5
1 3/8 6
1-1/4 3/8 7
1-1/2 3/8 8
2 3/8 8
2-1/2 1/2 9
3 1/2 10
3-1/2 1/2 11
4 1/2 12
5 1/2 13
6 5/8 14
8 3/4 16

D. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated
hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non adhesive isolation tape- B-Line Iso-
pipe. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used, B-Line
B3195CT.

15140 - 9 01/09/2009


E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum
spacing between hangers.

F. Install hangers to provide a minimum of 1/2 inch space between finished
covering and adjacent work.

G. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

H. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support
vertical pipes at every [other] floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps
directly below pipe couplings or shear lugs.

I. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation,
provide trapeze hangers as specified in section 2.02 C. Trapeze hangers shall
be spaced according to the smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports
according to schedule in section 3.01 B.

J . Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment which is not
building structure.

3.2 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Provide inserts for placement in formwork before concrete is poured.

B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides
of reinforced concrete beams.

C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts to be flush with slab
surface.

D. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches.


08-7910 HYDRONIC PUMPS
15185 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:

1. In-line circulators.


1. Division 15 Section "Motors" for general motor requirements.
2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for inertia
pads, isolation pads, spring supports, and spring hangers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller dimensions; and accessories for each
type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include Setting Drawings with templates
for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.


A. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label pumps to comply with UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water
Pumps," for construction requirements.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements
of pumps and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers'
15185 - 2 01/09/2009


pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Substitutions."

C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-
1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation," and HI 1.6,
"Centrifugal Pump Tests."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces
and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe
openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


15185 - 3 01/09/2009


following:

1. In-Line Circulators:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
e. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
f. MEPCO (Marshall Engineering Products Co.).
g. Scot Pump; Div. of Ardox Corp.
h. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.

2. Compact In-Line Circulators:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Div. of ITT Fluid Technology Corp.
d. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
e. Hartell Div.; Milton Roy Co.
f. PACO Pumps.
g. Taco; Fabricated Products Div.

3. Automatic Condensate Pump Units:

a. Beckett Corp.
b. Hartell Div.; Milton Roy Co.
c. Little Giant Pump Co.
d. Marsh Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.

B. Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings.
Select each motor to be nonoverloading over full range of pump performance curve.

C. Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to
IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.

2.3 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially split case
design; rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).
15185 - 4 01/09/2009


1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections, and threaded
gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.

a. Connection Option: Unions at connections for casings that are not available with
threaded companion flanges.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled-temper-brass fabrication, statically and
dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring,
ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
7. Motor Bearings: Oil-lubricated, sleeve type.
8. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
9. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.

2.4 COMPACT IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

A. Description: Water cooled, horizontal, in-line, compact design, seal-less, centrifugal, and single
stage. Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in hermetically sealed unit,
without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include lubrication of sleeve bearing and cooling of
motor by circulating pumped liquid through motor section, and isolation of motor section from
motor-stator windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmagnetic, alloy liner. Include design rated for
125-psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of
225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Description: Cartridge type, horizontal, in-line, compact, seal-less, centrifugal, and single stage.
Include pump and motor assembled on a common shaft in cartridge-type, hermetically sealed
unit, without stuffing boxes or mechanical seals. Include isolation of motor section from motor-
stator windings by corrosion-resistant, nonmagnetic, alloy liner. Include design rated for 125-
psig (860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F
(107 deg C).

1. Casing: Cast bronze or cast iron, with stainless-steel liner, static O-ring seal to separate
motor section from motor stator, and flanged piping connections.
2. Impeller: Overhung, single suction, closed or open, nonmetallic.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with carbon-steel sleeve.
4. Motor: Single speed.
5. Motor: Multispeed.

2.5 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS

A. Description: Vertical, in-line, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, radially split case
design. Include vertical-mounting, bronze-fitted design and mechanical seals rated for 125-psig
15185 - 5 01/09/2009


(860-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F
(107 deg C).

1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller than
NPS 3 (DN80), drain plug at low point of volute, and threaded gage tappings at inlet and
outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Shaft: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with axially split spacer coupling.
6. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,
and flexible bellows and gasket.
7. Seals: Stuffing box, with at least four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with
bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.
8. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with lifting and supporting lugs in top of
motor enclosure.

2.6 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body
and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent
strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-
fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron
body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check
valve features.

2.7 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS

A. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and
automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- (1800-mm-)
minimum, electrical power cord with plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation.

1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
15185 - 6 01/09/2009


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install pumps according to HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature,
Definitions, Application and Operation."

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.

D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers.
Install seismic bracing as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting.
Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.

1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to
38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

F. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open
drain.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have
been made.

B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-
1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
15185 - 7 01/09/2009


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install check valve and throttling valve on discharge side of in-line circulators.

F. Install nonslam check valve and globe valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.

G. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line pumps.

H. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of vertical in-line pumps.

I. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.

J . Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of base-mounted pumps.

K. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between
pump casing and valves.

L. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings
where provided.

M. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around
each pump.

N. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

O. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

P. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

Q. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

15185 - 8 01/09/2009


B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and
the Contract Documents.

C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:

1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked
on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids are
free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound or drag,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.

D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as follows:

1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where applicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Observe leakage from stuffing boxes and adjust sealing liquid valve for proper flow to
ensure lubrication of packing. Let packing "run in" before reducing leakage through
stuffing boxes; then tighten glands.
10. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
11. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.

E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves open,
steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.

F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for
testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below:

15185 - 9 01/09/2009


1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.


08-7910 NOISE VIBRATION
15200 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15200

NOISE VIBRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Vibration Isolators

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15050 - HVAC Basic Materials and Methods

B. Section 15840 - Ductwork

C. Section 15829 - Exhaust Fans

D. Section 15771 Rooftop Units

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE - Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves


A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full
load condition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Amber Booth

B. Consolidated Kinetics Corporation

15200 - 2 01/09/2009

C. Korfund Dynamics Corporation

D. Mason Industries

2.2 GENERAL

A. The Contractor and the Vibration Isolation Manufacturer or his regularly designated
and factory authorized representative shall perform the following tasks in addition
to the supply and installation of isolation equipment.

1. Obtain from the Architect the approved manufacturer's name, model number,
and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical equipment
to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate all resilient mounting systems with the
exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator locations,
weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between the
vibration isolation device fabricator and the equipment manufacturer will be
required.

2. Obtain all necessary data in regard to piping systems which are to be
selected. Select piping systems isolators for proper coordination with the
physical arrangement of pipe lines and with the physical characteristics of the
building.

3. Submit shop drawings as required by Section 15010. These drawings shall
include specification information as follows:

a. Manufacturer's model number for each isolator the machine to which it
is to be applied, and the number of isolators to be furnished for each
machine.

b. For steel spring mounts or hangers - free height, deflected height, solid
height, isolator loading, and diameter of spring coil.

c. For elastomer or glass fiber isolator - free height, deflected height, and
isolator loading.

d. Dimensional and weight data for steel and rail bases, and details of
isolator attachment to bases.

e. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of r
esiliently mounted equipment to assure that all vibration isolators are
15200 - 3 01/09/2009

installed in strict accordance with normally accepted practices for
critical environments.

f. Replace at no extra cost to the owner any isolators which do not
produce the required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below
their correct operating height, or which in any way do not produce the
required isolation.

g. Cooperate with all other contractors engaged in this project so that the
installation of vibration isolation devices will proceed in a manner that
is to the best interests of the owner.

2.3 RESILIENT MOUNTING SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT

A. Isolators:

1. Isolators shall be selected on the basis of the required static deflection as
listed in Part 3. Isolators shall be of the free standing unhoused type.
Horizontal spring stiffness shall not be less than 0.8 of vertical stiffness.
Isolators shall be selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into
consideration any difference in machine weight at each supporting point, but
deflection of each spring shall not be less than that specified for each
classification of mechanical equipment.

2. The isolator deflection from the point of rated deflection to the point at which
the spring is solid shall not be less than one-half of the rated static deflection.
The yield point of the steel used in the isolator may be compressed for
shorted turns without danger of failure. At least two layers of ribbed waffle
pattern neoprene pads or equivalent glass fiber pads shall be installed under
the base plate of each isolator. Isolators shall have leveling bolts and proper
means for bolting to the machine.

3. Isolators shall be selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into
consideration any difference in machine weight at each supporting point, but
deflection shall not be less than that specified for each classification of
equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MOUNTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS

15200 - 4 01/09/2009

A. All piping which connects to resiliently mounted equipment shall be suspended with
resilient hangers or supported by floor mounted isolators for a distance of 100 pipe
diameters from the connected machine or within the mechanical equipment room
whichever is the greater distance. The first three supports from the vibrating
machine shall have static deflection at least equal to one-half of the deflection of
the machine isolators, but not less than 0.5". The remaining pipe supports shall
provide deflection of 0.4" minimum.

B. Steel spring hangers shall be as specified for the Type "E" mounting. Where
elastomer hangers can provide the required deflection, they shall be of the double
deflection neoprene-in-shear type, Mason Industries Type HD or PHD, or Amber
Booth BRD.

C. Where piping passes through mechanical equipment room walls, floors, or ceilings,
an approximate 1" clearance shall be provided between the pipe and the partition
sleeve or hole in the partition. The pipe shall be supported on each side of the
partition so that it does not touch the partition sleeve or hole in the partition. The
space between the pipe and sleeve or partition shall be stuffed with glass fiber and
exposed joint caulked on each side.

3.2 AIR HANDLING DUCTS, ETC.

A. All duct connections to resiliently mounted fans must be made with flexible duct
connections at least 4" long.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO RESILIENTLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical connections to equipment which is supported or suspended by vibration
isolators shall be made with long lengths of flexible conduit of flexible armored
cable. These flexible connections must be located so as to prevent rigid conduit
connections between the resiliently mounted equipment and the building structure.


08-7910 ROOF DRAIN LEADER (DOWNSPOUT) PIPING INSULATION
15249 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15249

ROOF DRAIN LEADER (DOWNSPOUT) PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install complete, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all
insulation for the roof drain and downspout piping systems and roof drain body as
indicated on the drawing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shops drawings in accordance with division one.

B. Submit as part of shop drawing manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Acceptable manufacturers:

J ohns-Manville
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
Armstrong Cork Co.
Gustin-Bacon

B. Quality Control

1. Only skilled pipe covering and insulation mechanics regularly employed and
engaged in the application of insulation materials shall be employed.

2. All materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation.

3. All mastics, sealers and cements shall be suitable for the service intended and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Surface
preparation and temperature limitations shall be rigidly followed.

C. Fire Hazard Classification

1. Materials herein specified shall be labeled, listed and inspected by Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc.

2. The flame spread rating, fuel contributed and smoke developed as shown in the
listing shall be determined by ASTM E-84 "Method of Tests for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials." Each product shall bear the label of
Underwriter's Laboratories. All products used on this project shall be classified as
non-combustible in NFPA National Fire Code.

15249 - 2 01/09/2009


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation

1. All insulation, unless otherwise specifically called for, shall have composite
(insulation, jacket and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as indicated in
manufacturer's product literature, and as specified above.

2. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have
the same component ratings as listed above unless otherwise specifically called
for below.

3. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame
and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements.

4. Paper laminate jacket, if used, shall be permanently fire and smoke resistant.
Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water-soluble
and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.

5. Vapor barrier where specified shall be 0.001 inch thick aluminum foil bonded to
chemically treated Kraft paper. Staples are not to be used on vapor barrier jacket,
unless approved and vapor barrier sealant is applied over all staples.

2.2 ROOF DRAIN LEADER (DOWNSPOUT) PIPING INSULATION

A. Minimum 3 1/2 lb. density fiberglass, factory molded or spun pipe insulation with a
factory applied fire retardant jacket, "K" factor shall be 0.24 at 75 degrees F., similar to
Fiberglass 25 ASJ . But joints between sections shall be covered with a 3-ft. butt strip.
All fittings, valves, unions, flanges and specialties shall be insulated with molded
fittings insulation or mitered segments of fiberglass pipe insulation to a thickness flush
with adjoining insulation.

Vapor seals the fitting insulation with a 1/8" thick wet coat of the vapor barrier coating
extending 2" onto adjacent pipes. While still tacky, embed a layer of glass, lagging
tape in the mastic; finish the surface with an additional 1/8" thick wet coat to a smooth
the neat contour. Seal insulation ends at butt joints with mastic.

B. Roof drain leader (downspout) piping shall be insulated 1" thick, and shall include pipe
hubs.

C. Roof drain body shall be insulated 1" thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Do not installs covering before equipment has been tested and approved.

15249 - 3 01/09/2009


B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before
and during application. Finish with system at operating condition.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Clean thoroughly to remove rust, plaster and dirt before insulation is applied.
Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surface only. Piping shall have been tested
and approved before covering.

B. Exposed insulated piping shall be provided with a finish of an adequate surface for a
final coat of paint. Pressurized jackets, aluminum, vinyl and other prefinished jackets
are acceptable as installed; however, canvas and similar material shall be filled and
sealed or dipped, if necessary, to provide a good surface for painting.

C. Seal ends of insulation left exposed with vapor barrier mastic.

D. Sealer shall be Benjamin Foster "Tite-Fit" #30-35 fitting finishes master.


08-7910 COLD WATER PIPING INSULATION
15251 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15251

COLD WATER PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide complete, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all insulation for the
domestic cold water piping systems as indicated on the drawing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.

B. Submit as part of shop-drawing manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Acceptable manufacturers:
J ohns-Manville
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
Armstrong Cork Co.
Gustin-Bacon

B. Quality Control:


recommendations.


C. Fire Hazard Classification:

1. Materials herein specified shall be labeled, listed and inspected by Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc.

Underwriters' Laboratories. All products used on this project shall be classified as

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
15251 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Insulation:
1. All insulation, unless otherwise specifically called for, shall have composite
(insulation, jacket and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as indicated in
manufacturer's product literature, and as specified above.
2. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics and cements for fittings shall have the
same component ratings as listed above unless otherwise specifically called for
below.
3. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame
and smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements.
Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluable
and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.
unless approved, and vapor barrier sealant is applied over all staples.

2.2 COLD PIPING INSULATION

A. Minimum 3 1/2 lb. density fiberglass, factory molded or spun pipe insulation with a
factory applied fire retardant jacket, "K" factor shall be 0.24 at 75 degrees F., similar to
Fiberglass 25 ASJ . But joints between sections shall be covered with a 3 ft. butt trip. All
fittings, valves, unions, flanges and specialties shall be insulated with molded fitting
insulation or mitered segments of fiberglass pipe insulation to a thickness flush with
adjoining insulation. Vapor seal the fitting insulation with a 1/8" thick wet coat of the
vapor barrier coating extending 2" onto adjacent pipes. While still tacky, embed a layer
of glass, lagging tape in the mastic, finish the surface with an additional 1/8" thick wet
coat to a smooth and neat contour. Seal insulation ends to butt joints with mastic.

B. Domestic cold water pipe, concealed piping to vacuum breakers and all makeup and fill
lines shall be insulated 1/2" thick through 6" and 1" thick for over 6".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Do not install covering before equipment has been tested and approved.

B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application. Finish with system at operating condition.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Clean thoroughly to remove rust, plaster and dirt before insulation is applied. Insulation
shall be applied on clean dry surfaces only. Piping shall have been tested and approved
before covering.

B. Exposed insulated piping shall be provided with a finish of an adequate surface for a
final coat of paint. Pressurized jackets, aluminum, vinyl and other prefinished jackets are
acceptable as installed; however, canvas and similar material shall be filled and sealed
or dipped, if necessary, to provide a good surface for painting.
15251 - 3 01/09/2009


C. At contractors option, canvas jacket may be replaced by glass cloth.

D. Branch piping in plumbing partitions from riser to fixtures need not be insulated.

E. Where insulated piping extends to the floor, provide a sheet metal guard around the
insulation to extend from the floor up to 12 inches. Guard shall be made from at least 26
gauge galvanized sheet metal fabricated in a smooth cylinder. Guard shall fit tightly to
the insulation and shall be adhered to the insulation by a suitable cement.

F. Seal ends of insulation left exposed with vapor barrier mastic.

G. Sealer shall be Benjamin Foster "Tite-Fit" #30-35 fitting finish mastic.


08-7910 HOT WATER PIPING INSULATION
15254 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15254

HOT WATER PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install complete, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all
insulation for the Domestic hot water, hot water return, & system as indicated on the
drawing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings.

B. Submit as part of shop drawing manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

J ohns-Manville
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
Certain-Teed
Knauf

B. Quality Control:


recommendation.


C. Fire Hazard Classification:

1. Materials herein specified shall be labeled, listed and inspected by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc.

Underwriter's Laboratories. All products used on this project shall be classified as

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

15254 - 2 01/09/2009


2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation:

1. All insulation, unless otherwise specifically called for, shall have complete (insulation,
jacket, and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard ratings as indicated in manufacturer's
product literature, and as specified above.

2. Accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, and cements for fittings shall have the
same component ratings as listed above unless otherwise specifically called for
below.

3. All products or their shipping cartons shall have a label affixed, indicating flame and
smoke ratings do not exceed the above requirements.

Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and
shall be unaffected by water and humidity.

unless approved and vapor barrier sealant is applied over all staples.

2.2 HOT PIPING INSULATION

A. Minimum 3-1/2 lb. density fiberglass, factory molded or spun pipe insulation with a factory
applied fire retardant jacket, "K" factor shall be 0.24 at 75 degrees F., similar to Fiberglass
25 ASJ . But joints between sections shall be covered with a 3 ft. butt strip. All fittings,
valves, unions, flanges and specialties shall be insulated with molded fitting insulation or
mitered segments of fiberglass pipe insulation to a thickness flush with adjoining insulation.
Vapor seal the fitting insulation to a thickness flush with adjoining insulation. Vapor seal the
fitting insulation with a 1/8" thick wet coat of the vapor barrier coating extending 2" onto
adjacent pipes. While still tacky, embed a layer of glass, lagging tape in the mastic, finish
the surface with an additional 1/8" thick wet coat to a smooth and neat contour. Seal
insulation ends at butt joints with mastic.

B. Domestic hot water piping and hot water return piping, and hot water heating supply and
return piping to vacuum breakers and all makeup and fill lines shall be insulated with 1/2"
thick insulation up through 6" and 1" thick for piping over 6".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Do not install covering before equipment has been tested and approved.


15254 - 3 01/09/2009

B. Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application. Finish with system at operating condition.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Clean thoroughly to remove rust, plaster, and dirt before insulation is applied. Insulation
shall be applied on clean dry surface only. Piping shall have been tested and approved
before covering.

B. Exposed insulated piping shall be provided with a finish of an adequate surface for a final
coat of paint. Pressurized jackets, aluminum, vinyl and other prefinished jackets are
acceptable as installed; however, canvas and similar material shall be filled and sealed or
dipped, if necessary to provide a good surface for painting.

C. At Contractor's option, canvas jacket may be replaced by glass cloth.

D. Branch piping in plumbing partitions from riser to fixtures need not be insulated.

E. Where insulated piping extends to the floor, provide a sheet metal guard around the
insulation to extend from the floor up to 12 inches. Guard shall be made from at least 26
gauge galvanized sheet metal fabricated in a smooth cylinder. Guard shall fit tightly to the
insulation and shall be adhered to the insulation by a suitable cement.

F. Seal ends of insulation left exposed with vapor barrier mastic.

G. Sealer shall be Benjamin Foster "Tite-Fit" #30-35 fitting finish mastic.

H. Zeston's fitting may be used at Contractor's option.


08-7910 DUCT INSULATION
15258 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15258

DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Duct insulation

B. Duct liner

C. Insulation jackets

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 15840 - Ductwork

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

B. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation

C. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

E. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

F. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each
service and location.

1.5 REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with
ASTM E84.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum three years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

15258 - 2 01/09/2009

A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Division 1.

B. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging labeled with manufacturer's
density and thickness.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of
adhesives, mastics and insulation cements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE DUCT WRAP (TYPE A):


1. Owens Corning Corp.
2. Certain Teed Corp.
3. Knauf Fiberglass
4. Manville
5. No substitutions

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. R Value: ASTM C518, 5.7 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.20 percent by volume
4. Density: 1.0 lb./cu. ft.

C. Vapor Barrier J acket:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm

3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape

D. Vapor Barrier Tape:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film,
with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gauge.

2.2 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINES, FLEXIBLE (TYPE B):


1. Owens Corning Corp.
2. Knauf Fiberglass
3. Manville
15258 - 3 01/09/2009

4. Certain Teed Corp.
5. No substitutions

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. K Value: ASTM C518, 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.
3. Density: 2.0 lb/cu.ft.
4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4,000 ft/min.

C. Adhesive:

1. Waterproof fire-retardant type

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or impact applied with
press on head. Install in accordance with the requirements of SMACNA
Standards. Compression of linear surface not to exceed 10% of thickness.

E. Liner shall be attached to sheet metal using adhesive covering 90% of the metal
surface.

F. Coat edge of upstream end of liner with adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers and other duct
preparations.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers,
flexible connections and expansion joints.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with standard vapor barrier jacket.

15258 - 4 01/09/2009

2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and
seal ends of insulation.

D. External Duct Insulation Application

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with
vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical
fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze
hangers and insert spacers.

3. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier
adhesive.

4. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to
allow operation without disturbing wrapping.

E. Duct and Plenum Liner Applications:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA
Standards for spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

3.3 TOLERANCE

A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent
at normal conditions, as materials indicated.

3.4 FLEXIBLE GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE

THICKNESS
TYPE DUCTWORK INCHES TYPE

All Square or Rectangular 1" Lining
Supply & Return Ductwork.

All Combustion Air Intake 1-1/2" Wrap
Ductwork.

All ConcealedRound
Supply & Return 1-1/2" Wrap
15258 - 5 01/09/2009

Ductwork.

Exposed Round & Spiral None

Exterior Supply & Return 2 Lined & Paintable Hard Cast Wrap


08-7910 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
15350 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15350

NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnishing of all labor, materials and accessories for a proper operable and complete
installation for the gas supply system.

B. This includes:

1. New gas service.
2. Gas distribution piping within building.
3. Final connections of gas service to all gas fired equipment.
4. Provide ignition of all gas fired equipment, adjust flame, gas pressure, etc.

C. A new gas service and meter shall be extended from existing gas main by utility
company to building.

D. The Heating Contractor shall arrange for the gas service from the gas utility and shall
pay all charges thereby incurred.

E. Metering and Shut-Off: The gas meter setting shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Gas metering pressure will be two pounds. This Heating Contractor shall provide a gas
tight sleeve at entrance to building, and a main gas shut-off valve immediately inside of
building entrance.

F. Pressure Regulation: Provide a gas pressure regulator at gas-fired equipment as
required to reduce metering pressure to required inlet pressure of equipment. Regulator
valves must be vented to outside.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GAS PIPING

A. All gas piping shall be black steel pipe, Schedule No. 40. All elbows, tees, etc., fittings
shall be standard screwed black iron malleable.

B. All gas cocks to be lubricated plug type, bronze body.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Steel pipe

1. All pipe, fittings, valves, etc., shall be carefully inspected and thoroughly cleaned
before installation. All special lengths of threaded pipe shall be cut accurately and
be worked into place without springing or forcing. Cut sections of pipe shall be
08-7910 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM

15350 - 2 01/09/2009

reamed to remove all burrs.

B. Excavation, trenching and backfilling as required to complete the gas supply system shall
be performed by the Heating Contractor.


08-7910 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
15400 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15400

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This specification and the accompanying drawings are to govern the labor, materials,
equipment, and services necessary and reasonably incidental to the proper completion
of all work for the plumbing system, as shown on the drawings, and specified herein.

B. The work under these specifications shall include the complete furnishings and
installation of all excavations, shoring, and pumping required for the plumbing work,
waste and sanitary sewers and piping, vents, floor drains, flashings, inserts, sleeves,
pipe supports, hangers, water service, cold water, hot water, hot water return, piping,
fittings and valves, pipe covering and insulation, plumbing fixtures, and trim, and such
other items or equipment as specified or as may be required for a complete approved
plumbing system acceptable to the Architect and to the Owner.

C. Plumbing installer shall rough-in and make final connections to equipment furnished and
set in place by others only to certified construction drawings furnished him by suppliers of
the equipment so involved.

1.2 WORK DONE BY OTHERS

A. Wiring of all motors and controls will be done by the electrical trade unless hereinafter
noted.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit for the following:

1. Access Panels
2. Floor Drains
3. Cleanout
4. Plumbing Fixtures
5. Plumbing Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Provide for all drains, not more than 50 feet apart on all straight runs of sanitary sewers,
not more than 75 feet apart in all straight runs of storm sewers, at the end of all
branches, at the base of all riser lines, all traps, and at all points of the system requiring
cleanouts. Verify locations of cleanouts with Architect before installing.

B. Screw plugs or caps for cleanouts: Solid cast brass, countersunk holes in finished areas,
tapped for finishing cover plate, and bars or square heads where they occur in unfinished
areas.
15400 - 2 01/09/2009


C. Cleanout shall be full size of the trap or pipe up to four inches in diameter, and not less
than four inches for larger pipes and traps. Full

size Y, T, or combination Y and 1/8 bend branches, provided for all clean on house
drains and branches.

2.2 FLASHING

A. Install around each vent pipe passing through the roof, flashing of three pound sheet
lead extending 14 inches in all directions from the pipe and underneath the roofing
material, carried up, over and down at least two inches into the pipe.

B. All flashing thoroughly coated with asphaltum before installation.

2.3 DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS

A. J .R. Smith or equivalent by Wade, J osam or Zurn.

B. Roof Drains: See schedule on drawings.

C. Floor cleanouts in finished areas: Smith with N.B. top cover.

D. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas: Smith with C.I. top.

E. Wall cleanouts: Smith with stainless steel plate.

F. Wall Hydrants (non-freeze): Smith non-freeze wall hydrant, with vacuum breaker, bronze
casing, and N.B. finish.

2.4 FIXTURES, GENERALLY

A. Furnish and install all necessary supports in connection with all fixtures to be installed.
Fixtures shall not be supported by the piping connections.

B. All lavatories and sinks shall be provided with hot and cold water. All fixtures except flush
valve operated shall be provided with Dole, or equal, flow restricting valves sized for
particular use.

C. All fixtures shall be provided with waste and vent connections as shown on the drawings
and as required by local or state code.

D. Provide all waste and supply pipes at all fixtures with chromium-plated cast brass and
wall flanges with set screws. All valves, faucets, traps, covers, stops, trimmings and all
exposed metal-work of fixtures shall be brass chromium plated. Chromium plated
one-piece brass wall and floor plated shall be furnished and installed on waste and
supply piping. Provide stop valves on water service to all fixtures.

E. China Fixtures: Twice-fired white, or color as specified, vitreous china free from any
warps, blemishes or blisters.

15400 - 3 01/09/2009

F. Where fixtures are in battery, they shall be factory matched and so identified before
shipment and they shall be so installed in each respective location for which they have
been selected.

G. Where fixtures are wall hung, wall surfaces shall be without warps or irregularities
between wall surfaces and fixtures.

H. Contractor shall be held responsible for the proper protection of all fixtures after
installation.

I. See schedule of drawings for fixture list.

J . All fixtures to be caulked at contact with floors & walls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Connections to water main, sanitary sewer and storm sewer systems shall be made by
this Contractor as indicated. All materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with
requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WORK

A. Before installation of any of the plumbing work, examine Architectural, Structural,
Electrical and Mechanical drawings, and if any discrepancies occur between them and
these specifications, report same at once to Architect and obtain written instructions for
changes in work.

B. Confer with other Contractors installing work which may affect this work and make proper
arrangements to avoid interference in a manner approved by the Architect. Changes
made necessary through the neglect of the Contractor to make proper arrangements
shall be made by Contractor at his own expense.

C. In all cases, piping which is suspended shall be installed as high as possible, regardless
of where it occurs, above suspended ceiling or exposed to view. Pipes which run parallel
to one another shall be installed as close together as possible but allow for the proper
application of covering and painting.

3.3 GROUNDS

A. All carpentry work required for, or necessary for supports, grounds, for setting, fixtures,
shall be done by the Carpentry Contractor, under this Contractor's directions.

3.4 VERIFICATION

A. The run of all sewers, drains and water lines shown on the drawings are to be regarded
as diagrammatic and tentative.

B. Before running the lines, carefully verify the locations, depth and size of sewers to which
connection is proposed. Before running any drains or sewers within building, or drain
15400 - 4 01/09/2009

lines outside of the buildings, or any vent, waste or soil stacks or any water lines, verify
that they can be run as contemplated without trapping, sagging, or interfering with
columns, beams, other piping, fixtures, ducts. Any necessary deviations shall be referred
to the Architect for approval before lines are run.

3.5 CHASES

A. Construction Manager shall provide all chases in walls, for the plumbing pipes where so
indicated on the drawings. Check the location and furnish all information to the General
Contractor as to size, etc. If plumbing installer fails to supply this information, cut all
openings required, as approved by the Architect.

3.6 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. All underground waste, soil or water pipe shall be service weight C.I. and shall be laid in
trenches with the full length of the barrel of the pipe laid in undisturbed soil. Cut bell hole
at joints so that joints can be properly made.

B. All sewers shall be laid to pitch in direction of flow. Minimum coverage of sewers exterior
to the building shall be 3'-0".

C. Minimum cover of water pipe outside of building shall be 5'-0".

D. J oints in chromium plated brass pipe shall be made without exposed threads. Ream and
use compound for joints as for steel pipe.

E. Piping for any service shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign matter before being
installed.

F. Water piping systems shall be so installed that the entire systems can be drained dry.

3.7 CLEANING UP

A. After all fixtures have been set and ready for use, thoroughly clean all fixtures, removing
all plaster, rust stains and any other foreign matter or discoloration on fixtures, leaving
every part in perfect condition and ready for use.


08-7910 DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY
15401 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15401

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install complete systems of cold, hot and hot return water piping and
accessories so that every fixture and piece of water using equipment in the building will
be furnished with a water supply.

B. Provide and install cold water service from a point shown on drawings and extend the
water system to all fixtures, equipment, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and fittings shall be as listed herein and shall be used on the services indicated.

1. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing, Fed. Spec. No. "WW-T-799, with soldered
joints and wrought copper socket fittings for:

a. All above ground water piping 3" in size and under.

2. Schedule #40 galvanized steel ASTM A120-84.

a. All above ground water piping 4" in size and larger.

3. Type "K" hard drawn copper tubing, Fed. Spec. No. "WW-T-799", with brazed
joints and cast bronze socket fittings for:

a. All underground water supply piping 2" in size and under.

4. Ductile cast iron water pipe AWWA C-151, Class 52.

a. All underground water supply piping 3" in size and larger.

2.2 J OINTS

A. Solder joints (for type "L" copper tubing) shall be made with 125 pound soldered cast
bronze flanges with non- metallic gaskets, bolts and nuts.

B. Solder joints for type "K" copper tubing same as above.


15401 - 2 01/09/2009

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General - See Section 15400

B. Unions shall be provided at all piping connections to equipment.

C. The cold water main shall slope back to the main shut-off valve and the hot water shall
slope back to the water heater.

D. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. No bushings will be allows.

3.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS AND AIR CHAMBERS

A. Shock absorbers shall have a stainless steel casing, flexible mechanical bellows,
pressurized inert gas chamber, and certification stamp as conforming to Standard PD1
WH-201 of the Plumbing and Drainage Institute.

J .R. Smith "Hydrotrol" Series
J osam "Absorbotron" Series
Wade "Shokstop" Series

B. Air chambers shall not be used for shock absorbing purposes unless specifically called for
on the drawings.

3.3 ADJ USTING

A. Adjust and balance all water systems to obtain operating flows at all fixtures and water
using equipment. Also, adjust and balance the hot water circulation from all portions of the
building.

3.4 DISINFECTION

A. All domestic water service and supply piping installed under this DIVISION shall be
disinfected with chlorine before it is placed in operation. The chlorinating material shall be
liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 and shall be introduced to the
system by experienced operators only. The chlorine solution applied to the piping sections
or system shall contain at least fifty (50) parts per million of available chlorine and shall
remain in the sections or system for a period of not less than sixteen (16) hours. During the
disinfection period all valves shall be opened and closed at least four (4) times. After the
disinfection period the chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clear water
until the residual chlorine content is not greater than two-tenths (0.2) parts per million. The
Contractor shall submit to the Owner lab tests that the system was disinfected.


15401 - 3 01/09/2009


08-7910 SOIL, WASTE, VENT & DRAINAGE PIPING
15405 - 1 01/09/2009

SECTION 15405

SOIL, WASTE, VENT & DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS

A. This Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, etc. as required to provide the
following:

1. Soil, waste, vent and drain piping for sanitary drainage shall be of the sizes
noted, and shall be run as indicated.

1.2 UNDERGROUND SOIL, WASTE VENT PIPING

A. Sanitary

1. Underground building sanitary drain lines inside the building and from the
building to five feet outside the building, and cleanouts, shall be
hub-and-spigot cast-iron pipe.

1.3 ABOVE GROUND SOIL, WASTE & VENT PIPING

A. Soil and Waste

1. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, soil and waste piping shall be
threaded steel, galvanized threaded cast-iron, or hub-and-spigot cast-iron
pipe shall not be used for piping 1 1/2" inches and smaller.

B. Hub-and-spigot cast-iron pipe not larger than 15-inch size shall be service weight
cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, either coated or uncoated. All changes steel pipe
shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM
Specification A-120.

2.1 MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings

1. All piping material installed under this Contract shall be new and the best of
its kind; material referred to as "approved" shall, on request, be submitted to
the Architect by sample or manufacturer's trade name and shall be
approved by the Architect/Engineer before being ordered. All workmanship shall
be neat and first-class in every respect, and shall be performed by skilled
mechanics recognized as such in their respective trades.

2. Piping J oints and Fittings

a. Provide dielectric connectors between two dissimilar metals.

2.2 CAST IRON PIPE & J OINTS
15405 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Hub-and-spigot cast-iron pipe not larger than 15-inch size shall be service weight
cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, either coated or uncoated. All changes in pipe size
of soil, waste, and drain lines shall be made with reduction fittings or reducers.
Changes in direction horizontal where space permits, shall be made with long
sweep bend, Y-fittings and 1/8 or 1/16 bends, or combination Y and 1/8 bends.
Sanitary tee branches may be used for connection of branch lines to fixtures on
vertical drops only.

B. J oints in cast-iron hub-and-spigot pipe shall be made with a jute gasket and 99%
lead. At least 12 ounces of lead per inch of pipe diameter shall be used for each
joint, joint shall be run full at one pouring and be caulked solid, flush with the hub.
J oints between cast-iron hub-and-spigot pipe and threaded pipe to have a ring or
part of a coupling screwed on to form a spigot. J oints between cast-iron and clay
pipe shall be made as herein after specified for clay pipe.

C. In lieu of lead caulked joints for cast-iron soil pipe, Contractor may except for joints
between hub-and-spigot and threaded pipe, furnish and install molded neoprene
compression type gaskets. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM Standard C564, and
pipe, fittings and gaskets shall bear the symbol of the Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured with the spigot end plain and beveled, and
the bells shall be modified to receive the gaskets. Service weight soil pipe and
fittings shall be joined with gaskets. Gaskets shall be clearly designated and
identified. A lubricant shall be used in making the joints. When the joint is
completed, a tight seal shall be formed between the external face of the pipe and
the internal face of the bell. Gaskets shall be capable of making and maintaining a
tight seal with a deflection not to exceed 5 degrees. Deflection of pipe will not be
allowed to avoid the use of a fitting.

D. J oints shall be assembled by the use of tools and as recommended by the pipe,
fittings and gasket manufacturers. Pipe and fittings manufactured by one
company, including its divisions and subsidiaries, shall be used for the entire
installation except as noted below. The gaskets and lubricants shall be supplied
by the manufacturer of the pipe and fittings who shall certify that they are acceptable
and satisfactory for use with their pipe and fittings.

E. ASTM Specification

Cast Iron Soil Pipe ASA 21.50
J oints ASA A21.11

2.3 NON-FERROUS PIPING

A. In lieu of ferrous piping, copper tubing may be used for above ground soil, waste,
vent and drainage systems. Copper tubing shall by Type M, in accordance with
ASTM Specifications B306. Ends of tubing shall be cut square and shall be
reamed before being made up. Tubing ends shall enter the full depth of the fitting
recesses without binding.

B. Fitting for copper tubing shall be solder joint type, recessed drainage pattern
fittings of wrought copper or cast brass. Recesses shall be smooth and correctly
15405 - 3 01/09/2009

sized to provide copper clearance over the tubing. Solder shall be composition SN
50. Flux shall be non-corrosive. Tubing ends and fitting recesses shall be
thoroughly cleaned. Solder shall penetrate fully and shall fill the joint completely.

2.4 FITTINGS, COUPLINGS, ETC.

A. Fittings on threaded ferrous soil, waste and drain piping, including storm drainage
piping and couplings on pipes six inches and smaller, shall be threaded cast-iron
drainage fittings. Fittings may be galvanized or black, coated or uncoated.
Couplings on pipes 8 inches and larger shall be standard weight steel or wrought
iron, zinc coated (galvanized) and need not be recessed steel or wrought iron
couplings shall not be used on piping 6 inches and smaller.

B. Fittings on threaded ferrous vent pipes may be as specified above for soil, waste
and drain piping, may be cast-iron fittings or malleable iron fittings, (galvanized).
Couplings shall be as specified above for soil, waste, and drain piping.

C. Mechanical couplings may be used in lieu or threaded soldered pipe couplings on
all above ground storm drainage piping. Fittings with grooved or shouldered ends
for use with mechanical pipe couplings may be used on ferrous above ground
storm drainage systems only, in lieu of threaded fittings.

Couplings shall be self centering and shall engage and lock in place the grooved
or shouldered pipe and pipe fitting ends in a positive water-tight couple, fittings
shall provide some degree of angular pipe deflection, contraction and expansion.

Coupling housing clamps shall be fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron
castings. Housing clamps shall hold in place a composition water-sealing gasket
designed so that internal water pressure serves in increasing the seals water
tightness. Water sealing gasket shall be of molded synthetic rubber in accordance
with ASTM Specification D735.

Coupling assembly shall be securely held together by two or more trackhead,
square or oval-neck, steel bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be heat-treated carbon steel
and shall be in accordance with ASTM Specification A-183.

Entire coupling installation shall be accomplished in accordance with
manufacturers latest published literature. Pipe sizes 3/4 inch through 24 inches
may be cut grooved, except that pipe and tubing having wall thickness less than
the minimum recommended by the manufacturer for cut-grooving shall be
roll-grooved without the removal of any metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: See Section 15400.

B. Changes in sizes of soil, waste and drain piping shall be made with reducing
fittings, tapered increasers. Changes in pipe sizes of vent pipes shall be made
with reducing fittings.
15405 - 4 01/09/2009


C. Pipes must be run in straight lines and have a uniform grade between elevations
noted. No branch drain shall have a grade less than that indicated for the main
drain to which it is connected. Where elevations are not given, pipes shall have a
uniform grade of 1/4 inch per foot, except that where such grade on overhead
pipes would reduce the head room materially, the grade may be reduced to not
less than 1/8" inch per foot. All overhead pipes shall be kept above the ceiling
where possible unless otherwise indicated or noted. Vent pipes shall project
above roof line not less than 10 inches or more than 18 inches unless other
dimensions are noted on drawings.

Ends of threaded piping shall be cut square so as to seat in bottom of recess of
fittings, and must be reamed out. All changes in direction of piping shall be made
with fittings, bending of pipes shall not be permitted.

Threaded joints shall be made with a noncorrosive lubricant applied on the male
thread only. They shall be made metal to metal and shall not be caulked to stop or
prevent leaks. Long screws and bushings, shall not be used on soil, waste, vent
or drain piping.

D. Provide open site or hub drains as shown on the drawing to receive condensate
from other apparatus such as humidifiers, air conditioning condensate lines, boiler
blow-down lines, etc.

These indirect waste pipes must discharge into, and above, the overflow rim of
slope sinks and floor drains, or through an air gap to the inlet side of a trap
serving the fixture, device or apparatus. The air gap should have an opening at
least twice the effective opening of the waste pipe. Vent connections to horizontal
drains shall be made above the center lines of the drains, either at the top or at an
angle of 45 degrees.

3.2 ROOF OPENINGS

A. Openings in roof for cast-iron hub-and-spigot vent pipes shall be flashed and
soldered watertight, as required for screw-jointed pipe, except that the pipe shall
terminate at least 10 inches above the roof and the lead shall be turned over and
down into the pipe.

08-7910 FIRE PROTECTION
15500 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15500

FIRE PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this heading shall include designing, furnishing and installing all
material as hereinafter specified necessary for an automatic Fire Sprinkler system.
The system shall cover the entire facility. Sprinkler system design, installation shall
conform to NFPA 13, and City of Chicago codes and ordinances.

B. Piping in areas not subject to freezing shall be a wet pipe system. Piping in areas
subject to freezing shall be a dry pipe system.

C. System shall cover entire garage area.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section of the Specifications sets forth and indicates items required for complete
sprinkler system. The following items shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.

1. Complete hydraulically calculated automatic sprinkler system for entire building
including attic per NFPA 13, and City of Chicago codes and ordinances.

2. All necessary sprinkler system components including pipe, valves, dry valves,
air compressors, sprinkler heads at top of elevator shaft, bottom of elevator
shaft and machine room with valve and tamper switch, Siamese connections,
drains, reduced pressure backflow preventer, test connections, tamper
switches, flow switches, spare heads and related items required by project
conditions and by the local governing authorities having jurisdiction.

3. All related services incidental to placing all equipment operation including
design, supervision, scaffolding, flushing and testing of equipment.

4. Upon completion of the work, make any corrections to shop drawings and
furnish the Owner with one complete set of transparencies of "As-Built" prints
and hydraulic calculations.

5. Submit 2 sets of operations and maintenance manuals on all equipment
installed under this contract.

A. The Contractor shall include the cost for all work of this Section in the bid supplied.
Contractor to thoroughly familiarize himself with all of the bidding documents for all
trades, existing conditions and code requirements before submitting a bid. No
additional compensation will be granted the Contractor for compliance with the
provisions of the work noted herein (including but not limited to such things as
additional piping, heads, offsets, elbows, connectors, drains, valves, etc.). The bid
15500 - 2 01/09/2009


submitted shall be for a complete system including all labor and materials for all
aspects of the work.

B. Work by Others: The inspection of the automatic sprinklers necessitates the
following work, which will be furnished and installed by other trades.

1. All electrical wiring of the sprinkler alarm devices.

2. Water connection from water supply into the building terminating with a flanged
outlet in a plumb and level position.

3. Any painting of sprinkler piping or equipment.

4. Furnish and install central station supervisory equipment required, including
alarm panels, pull stations.

5. Portable fire extinguishers.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND APPROVALS

A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer and the owners insurance
underwriter, for approval, complete installation drawings showing the sprinkler
system layouts. The layout shall indicate all of the sprinkler piping, sprinkler head
locations and details of anchors and supports as required. The sprinkler system
shall be laid out to eliminate all conflicts between the sprinkler system and the
structure including the mechanical and electrical systems as they are shown on the
contract drawings. The layout shall indicate coordination between such items as
duct work, lights, structural members, etc.

B. The Contractor shall obtain approval of his detailed shop drawings from the office of
Bureau of Fire Prevention, and any other body having jurisdiction.

C. Copies of the completed shop drawings bearing the aforementioned approvals shall
be submitted in accordance with Section 15010. Do not submit prior to receipt of
stamped approval.

D. Fabrication and construction shall not be started until after return of the shop
drawings by the Architect and approval by the local Bureau of Fire Prevention.

E. Upon completion of the automatic sprinkler installation and prior to final payment for
the work, this Contractor shall make necessary corrections to his shop drawings and
furnish the Owner with two (2) complete sets of "As-Built" drawings.


A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain approval from the governing
authorities for the sprinkler system design and installation.

B. Contractor is responsible for system design spacing, pipe size, offsets, clearances,
valves, elbows, hangers, all accessories and quantities for all.
15500 - 3 01/09/2009


C. In room with suspended or concealed ceiling system, all piping shall be made to be
concealed and hidden from view.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SPRINKLER SYSTEM

A. Sprinklers in areas of exposed construction shall be quick response brass upright,
1/2 orifice.

B. Sprinklers in areas which contain suspended and drywall ceilings shall be quick
response white concealed type, 1/2" orifice. All piping to be installed above
suspended ceilings or in attic space and sprinklers to be located on the centerline of
the ceiling tile.
C. Areas where combustible construction is above suspended ceiling furnish and install
brass upright sprinkler, 1/2" orifice.

D. Sprinkler head temperatures to be approved by the Bureau of Fire Prevention.

E. Fire stops around all pipe penetrations thru rated assemblies.

2.2 SPRINKLER HEAD CABINET

A. Furnish and install a spare head cabinet for emergency use. Cabinet shall have a
capacity of twelve (12) sprinkler heads. Cabinet shall be equipped with twelve (12)
sprinklers of assorted types and temperatures used throughout the building, and
shall, in addition, contain a special sprinkler head wrench.

2.3 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION

A. The automatic sprinkler system shall be equipped with a one (1) inch Inspector's test
connection, piped and arranged according to the applicable standards of N.F.P.A.
No. 13.

2.4 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

A. Main piping for above grade shall be new Schedule 10 standard weight steel and
branch piping for above grade shall be new Schedule 40 standard weight steel
designed for 200 lb. working pressure, conforming to A.S.A. B36.10
manufactured in the U.S.

B. Fittings shall be new, 125 lb. cast iron screwed or flanged conforming to A.S.A.
816.4, manufactured in the U.S. and approved for fire protection sprinkler systems.

C. Screwed pipe shall have threads cut to American Standard Pipe Thread and shall be
clean and free from burrs and fins.

D. Mechanical pipe couplings used shall be Victaulic, type 77 and/or style 75, having
malleable iron body type H molded synthetic gasket and steel nuts and bolts.
15500 - 4 01/09/2009


E. All piping shall be installed in a uniform manner, direct as possible. Horizontal
piping shall be run at right angles and carefully installed to provide proper pitch. In
general, all piping shall be pitched back to riser in accordance with N.F.P.A. #13.
Where piping is trapped, provide drain plugs or valves and plugs as required.
Whenever possible, trapping of pipe shall be avoided.

F. Field welding and gas cutting shall not be employed for assembly of pipe and fittings
of the fire protection work. `

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate valves shall be the indicating type - O.S. & Y., Mueller or equal.

B. Check valves are to have rubber faced disc, horizontal or vertical sign type, Mueller
or equal.

2.6 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. The sprinkler risers, mains, and branch piping shall be supported from the building
structure, using approved type steel hangers, anchors and studs, of size and
number in accordance with N.F.P.A. #13.

B. The hangers and supports shall be capable of screw adjustment after erection of the
piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTS

A. The Automatic Sprinkler Contractor shall arrange and pay for the following tests on
his equipment. Each test shall be conducted in the presence of the applicable code
authority and the Owner (or his duly designated representative) who shall, upon
satisfactory completion, sign an acceptance certificate produced by Automatic
Sprinkler Contractor.

1. All overhead piping shall be tested at 200 psi for a continuous two hour period.
Each system shall be tested and accepted separately.

3.2 GUARANTEE

A. All equipment and material installed by this Contractor shall remain free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date the equipment
is placed in service. The Contractor shall execute a written guarantee so stating and
further stipulating that any such defects that appear within one (1) year shall be
repaired or corrected by him at no additional cost to the Owner.

08-7910 HYDRONIC PIPING

15510 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled water cooling, and
condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blow-down drain lines; and
condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include the
following:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Special-duty valves.
3. Hydronic specialties.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for materials and methods for sealing pipe penetrations
through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 7 Section "J oint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for general piping
materials and installation methods.
4. Division 15 Section "Valves" for gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves.
5. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports.
6. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic
systems.
7. Division 15 Section "HVAC Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
systems.
8. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for temperature-control valves and
sensors.
9. Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for hydronic system adjusting
and balancing.


A. Hydronic systems are low water temperature, forced, recirculating systems and include 4-pipe,
hot water, and chilled water systems, and condenser water systems.


15510 - 2 01/09/2009


B. Four-Pipe System: The 4-pipe system includes independent chilled water and hot water supply
and return piping mains in a closed loop, connecting chillers and boilers to terminal heat-
transfer units by means of primary and secondary piping loops. Circulation is accomplished by
parallel, constant volume, primary pumps; and independent secondary pumps. Design flow
rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications and
schedules. Control sequences and temperature-reset schedules are specified in temperature-
control specifications.

C. Condenser Water System: This system is an open piping loop connecting chillers to cooling
tower. Circulation is accomplished by parallel, constant volume pumps. Design flow rates and
water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications and schedules. Control
sequences and temperature-reset schedules are specified in temperature-control specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic
specialty and special-duty valve specified.

1. Submit flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,
based on manufacturer's testing.

C. Shop Drawings detailing pipe anchors, special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, and
expansion joints and loops.

D. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with performance
requirements specified in Part 3 of this Section.

E. Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions:

1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1.6 COORDINATION

15510 - 3 01/09/2009


A. Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.

E. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.

F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for
fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

following:

1. Grooved Mechanical-J oint Fittings and Couplings:

a. Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
b. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Calibrated Plug Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Flow Design, Inc.
d. Gerand Engineering Co.
e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett.
f. Taco, Inc.


15510 - 4 01/09/2009


3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
d. ITT Hoffman; ITT Fluid Handling Div.

4. Safety Relief Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT McDonnell & Miller.

5. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

a. Griswold Controls.

6. Compression Tanks:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett.
d. Taco, Inc.

7. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

8. Air Separators:

a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett.
d. Taco, Inc.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Pipe Applications" Article for identifying where the following
materials are used.

B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

C. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).

D. Steel Pipe, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedule 40, plain ends.

15510 - 5 01/09/2009


E. Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN300): ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance
welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends.

1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, carbon steel,
seamless for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 2-1/2-
inch NPS (DN65) and larger.

F. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441, Schedules 40 and 80,
plain ends.

G. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.

H. Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTR) Pipe: ASTM D 2310, Type I (filament-wound pipe),
Grade 1 (glass-fiber-reinforced, epoxy-resin pipe), Class A (no liner).

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

B. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.

D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.

E. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

F. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt holes
spot faced.

G. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234 (ASTM A 234M), Standard Weight.

H. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets
of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.

I. Grooved Mechanical-J oint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47
(ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated
steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept
grooved end couplings.

J . Grooved Mechanical-J oint Couplings: Consist of ductile- or malleable-iron housing, a
synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking
pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

15510 - 6 01/09/2009


K. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings,
ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

L. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for
Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

M. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket; 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C)
maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to
match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.

N. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body, steel flanges drilled to
align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F (121
deg C) and pressures up to 150 psig (1035 kPa).

O. Packed, Slip, Expansion J oints: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum working pressure, steel pipe
fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods,
flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.

2.4 J OINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (silver).

C. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being
welded.

D. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

E. Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for specific uses and applications for each valve
specified.

C. Calibrated Plug Valves: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C)
maximum operating temperature, bronze body, plug valve with calibrated orifice. Provide with
connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve

15510 - 7 01/09/2009


shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening. Valves 2-
inch NPS (DN50) and smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65)
valves shall have flanged connections.

D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet
pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive
valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve
shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.

E. Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working
parts; to suit system pressure and heat capacity; according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section IV.

F. Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) cold working pressure (CWP),
250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum operating temperature, brass housing, stainless-steel operating
parts; for soldered, threaded, or compression connections. Factory set to automatically control
flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-
pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide
metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification,
valve model number, and flow rate.

G. Cast-Iron, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Class 150, cast-iron housing, stainless-steel
operating parts; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, flanged connections
for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within
plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-pressure differential.
Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification
tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number,
and flow rate.

H. Plastic Ball Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73 deg F (22.7 deg C) maximum operating
temperature, full port design, CPVC body and ball, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) seats,
EPDM seals, tee handle; threaded, socket, union, or flanged connections.

I. Plastic Butterfly Valves: 150-psig (1035-kPa) CWP, 73 deg F (22.7 deg C) maximum operating
temperature, 1- or 2-piece body design, PVC body and ball, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
seats, lever lock handle, wafer style for installation between flanges.

2.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working
pressure, 225 deg F (107 deg C) operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or
thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) inlet
connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure, 240 deg F (116 deg C)
operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS (DN8) discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS
(DN15) inlet connection.

15510 - 8 01/09/2009


C. Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 375 deg F
(191 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting;
taps in end of tank for gage glass. Factory test tank with taps fabricated and labeled according
to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Furnish with the
following fittings and accessories:

1. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and
stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank
diameter. Design tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250 deg F
(121 deg C) maximum operating temperature.
2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure and 240 deg F (116 deg C) maximum operating temperature; designed to admit
air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.
3. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter
gage glass, and slotted metal glass guard.

D. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig (860-kPa) working
pressure, 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from
system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible diaphragm securely sealed
into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting, and drain fitting. Support
vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Fabricate and
test tank with taps and supports, and label according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section VIII, Division 1.

E. Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa)
minimum working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature;
perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into compression tank;
tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS (DN50) and
smaller; flanged connections for 1-1/2-inch NPS (DN40) and larger; threaded blow-down
connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity.

F. Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. (19-L) capacity, welded steel
construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet,
and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in
piping system and connected equipment, and based on a water analysis of makeup water.

G. Diverting Fittings: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure, 250 deg F (121 deg C) maximum
operating temperature; cast-iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with soldered
ends. Indicate flow direction on fitting.

H. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126,
Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, threaded connections for 2-inch
NPS (DN50) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom
drain connection.


15510 - 9 01/09/2009


I. Basket Strainers: 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body
(ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-
steel basket, and bottom drain connection.

J . T-Pattern Strainers: 750-psig (5170-kPa) working pressure; ductile-iron or malleable-iron
body, grooved end connections, Type 304 stainless-steel strainer basket with 57 percent free
area; removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B)
drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints.
Belowground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints belowground and within slabs.

B. Hot and Chilled Water: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints. Belowground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper
tubing with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints belowground and within slabs.

C. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: RTR pipe with mechanical joints.

D. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Smaller: RTR pipe with heat-fusion joints.

E. Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Steel pipe with welded and
flanged joints.

F. Condenser Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L (Type B)
drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints.
Belowground or within slabs, use Type K (Type A) annealed-temper copper tubing with brazed
joints.

G. Condenser Water: Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.

H. Condenser Water: Schedule 80 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.

I. Condenser Water: Schedule 40 CPVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.

J . Condenser Water: Schedule 80 CPVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.

K. Condenser Water: Schedule 40 steel pipe with mechanical couplings.

L. Condenser Water, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: RTR pipe with mechanical joints.

M. Condenser Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Smaller: RTR pipe with heat-fusion joints.


15510 - 10 01/09/2009


N. Condensate Drain Lines: Type L (Type B) drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or
Schedule 40 PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.


A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves.
2. Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connections to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as
required to facilitate system balancing.

E. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for
system drainage.

F. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow
direction.

G. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

H. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate
system pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install piping according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.

C. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch
NPS (DN20) ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded nipple and cap.

D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.


15510 - 11 01/09/2009


F. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of main,
except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.

G. Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at
flanged connections.

H. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger
connections.

I. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except in-line pumps)
and other vibration-producing equipment.

J . Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, pressure-
regulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS
(DN20) nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS (DN50) and
larger.

K. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers
and Supports." Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6 m) in
length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m)
or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet (6 m) or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
4. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).

15510 - 12 01/09/2009


5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
6. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
mm).
mm).
mm).
mm).
mm).

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and
maximum spacing:

1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4
mm).
3. 1-1/2-Inch NPS (DN40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
mm).
5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch
(10 mm).
mm).

E. Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's
recommendations for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with
the least practical number of rigid anchor points.

F. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.5 PIPE J OINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for joint construction
requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged
joints in steel piping; and solvent-welded joints for PVC and CPVC piping.

B. Mechanical J oints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Heat-Fusion J oints in RTR Pipe: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written
instructions.


15510 - 13 01/09/2009


3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points in system, heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as
required for system air venting.

C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2
percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS (DN50) and larger.

E. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression
tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow-down piping with gate valve;
extend to nearest drain.

F. Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated; in upright position
with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor. Install feeder in bypass
line, off main using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass
connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.

G. Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gage glass and cocks on end of tank.
Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish
proper water level in tank.

1. Support tank as detailed on Drawings. In the absence of details, provide support from
floor or structure above sufficient for weight of tank, piping connections, and fittings,
plus weight of a full tank of water. Do not overload building components and structural
members.

H. Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor as indicated. Vent and purge air from
hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install pressure gage at coil inlet connections.


15510 - 14 01/09/2009



A. Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to
isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without
damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not
be tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:

1. Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with
piping system components.
2. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system.
Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid.
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are
properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low-pressure
filling lines are disconnected.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve,
or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at
bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield
strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure
Piping, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.

3.9 ADJ USTING AND CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.

B. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable
fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been
completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

15510 - 15 01/09/2009


D. Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to
determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform initial
treatment after completing system testing.

3.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.

B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely
full of water.

C. Perform these steps before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.


08-7910 FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS

15514 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15514 - FINNED WATER-TUBE BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gas-fired, finned water-tube boilers for heating hot water.


1. Division 15 Section "Chemical Water Treatment" for feedwater treatment and
connections.
2. Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for connections to breechings,
chimneys, and stacks.
3. Division 15 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and feedwater
system.
4. Division 15 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate

C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements before shipping.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts
list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.


15514 - 2 01/09/2009



A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National-Board listed.

C. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM.

D. I=B=R Compliance: Boilers tested and rated according to the Hydronics Institute's "Testing and
Rating Standard for Heating Boilers," with I=B=R emblem on a nameplate affixed to the boiler.

E. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI.

F. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be
in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat
exchanger.

1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


15514 - 3 01/09/2009


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide boilers by one of the
following:

1. Harsco Corp.; Patterson-Kelley Co.
2. Allied Engineering Co.
3. Lochinvar Corp.
4. Raypak, Inc.
5. Rheem/Ruud Water Heater.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Combustion Chamber Internal Insulation: Interlocking panels of vermiculite refractory
insulation, high-temperature cements, mineral fiber, and refractory clay for service temperatures
to 2100 deg F (1150 deg C).

B. Heat Exchanger: Finned copper tubing with stainless-steel baffles and sealed into bronze, steel,
or cast-iron headers with silicone O-ring gaskets; for 160-psig (1105-kPa) working pressure.

C. Heat Exchanger: Finned steel tubing with baffles and welded into steel headers; for 160-psig
(1105-kPa) working pressure.

D. J acket: Galvanized steel with factory-applied baked enamel, insulated with foil-faced, glass
fiber insulation.

E. Gas Burner: Stainless-steel burners with adjustable combustion-air supply, gas-pressure
regulator, diaphragm gas valves, manual shutoff, thermistor flame-sensing device, and
automatic 100 percent safety gas shutoff. Include the following features:

1. Burner Firing: On/off.
2. Burner Firing: High/low/off.
3. Burner Firing: Modulating.
4. Burner Ignition: Intermittent spark or glow coil.
5. Burner Ignition: Standing pilot.
6. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishing flame, prevent opening of
gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, and allow gas
valve to open.
7. Flue-Gas Collector and Draft Hood: Integral with boiler casing.
8. Flue-Gas Collector and Draft Hood: External draft diverter.
9. Flue-Gas Collector and Draft Hood: External draft diverter with automatic, motorized
vent damper.
10. Flue-Gas Collector and Draft Hood: Integral with boiler casing with built-in induced
draft fan, with draft gage and draft-providing switches.
11. Flue-Gas Collector: Enclosed combustion chamber with integral combustion-air blower
and single venting connection.

2.3 BOILER TRIM

A. Safety-Relief Valve: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping.

15514 - 4 01/09/2009


B. Gage: Combination water pressure and temperature.

C. Low-Water Cutoff and Inlet Flow Switch: Prevent burner operation when water falls below a
safe level or when water flow is low.

D. Operating Controls: Prewired, factory-assembled electric control including pilot safety and
thermocouple transformer, 24-V gas valve, manual main and pilot valves, and junction box.

E. Operating Temperature Control: Electric indoor/outdoor controller maintains boiler water
temperature with outdoor temperature reset.

F. Operating Temperature Control: Electronic-operating temperature controller maintains boiler
water temperature, with electronic primary and outdoor sensors. Reset ratio of outside-air
temperature change to discharge control point change adjustable from 1:2 to 100:1, with
adjustable initial set point from 80 to 230 deg F (27 to 110 deg C). Mounted in NEMA 250,
Type 1, wall-mounted enclosure with full cover.

G. High Limit: Temperature control with automatic-reset limits boiler water temperature.

H. Boiler air vent.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Circulator: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for
in-line mounting, oil lubricated, mounted on boiler.

B. Expansion Tank: Welded steel, ASME tested and stamped, rated for working pressure of 125
psig (860 kPa), with flexible diaphragm sealed into tank, pressure gage, and air-charging fitting.

2.5 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for factory-installed motors.

B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation.


A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


15514 - 5 01/09/2009


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced
standards.

B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Support boilers on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick concrete base, 4 inches (100 mm) larger on each
side than base of unit.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.

B. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.

C. Install piping from safety-relief valves to nearest floor drain.

D. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.

E. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

F. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise
the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.

1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

15514 - 6 01/09/2009


B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips,
scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.

3.6 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.

B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:

1. Boiler is level on concrete base.
2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure.
Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
10. Control installations are completed.

D. Ensure pumps operate properly.

E. Check operation of pressure-reducing valve on gas train, including venting.

F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.

G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency.

1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.

15514 - 7 01/09/2009


2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and firing
sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature
interlocks.
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.

H. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and 33
percent load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate.
Measure and record the following:

1. Gas pressure on manifold.
2. Combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
3. Flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
4. Flue-gas carbon-dioxide and oxygen concentration.
5. Natural flue draft.

I. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each boiler.

J . Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve, water
level, and backflow preventer.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below:

1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance with
requirements.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract
Closeout."
4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.


08-7910 FURNACES
15530 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15530
FURNACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
PART 2 - RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
2.2 SUMMARY
1. Furnaces and accessories complete with controls.
2. Direct-expansion cooling coils with refrigerant piping.
3. Humidifiers.
4. Ventilation heat exchangers.
1. Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" for condensing units used with
cooling coils provided in furnaces.
2.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Condensing Furnace: Furnace with annual fuel utilization efficiency rating more
than 88 percent; designed to vent saturated flue gas.
B. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.
C. Noncondensing Furnace: Furnace with annual fuel utilization efficiency rating
ranging from 78 to 85 percent; designed to vent dry flue gas.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
2.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each furnace. Include rated capacities of selected models;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
Include plan and elevation views of units, minimum clearances, and data on
ratings and capacities.
08-7910 FURNACES
15530 - 2 01/09/2009


B. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Closeout Procedures and Operation and Maintenance Data," include
the following:
1. Furnaces and accessories complete with controls.
2. Direct-expansion cooling coils with refrigerant piping.
3. Humidifiers.
4. Ventilation heat exchangers.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements
of furnaces and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the
following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by the manufacturers specified.
3.2 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING

1. Manufacturer[s]:
2. Carrier; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
3. Trane Company (The).
4. Bryant Heating & Cooling Systems; Carrier; Div. of United Technologies
Corp.
5. Lennox Industries, Inc.
B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with
ANSI Z21.47, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas
Code"; and bearing label of American Gas Association.
08-7910 FURNACES
15530 - 3 01/09/2009


C. Cabinet: Steel, with interior insulation around heat exchanger. Lift-out panels
expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance.
1. Interior Insulation: Mineral-fiber board thermal insulation manufactured with
glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612,
Type IB, with aluminum foil jacket.
D. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Factory painted, manufacturer's
standard color.
E. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.
F. Fan Motors: Energy-efficient type as specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."
Open dripproof, with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
G. Fan Motors: Multitapped, multispeed, with internal thermal protection and
permanent lubrication.
H. Type of Gas: Natural.
I. Heat Exchanger:
1. As specified
J . Heat Exchanger:
K. Burner Controls: Solid state; control gas valve and ignition.
1. Gas Valve: 24 V, 100 percent safety gas shutoff, pressure regulator, and
manual shutoff.
2. Ignition: Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter.
L. Automatic Controls: Solid-state board delays fan start and shutdown.
M. Accessories:
1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine
combustion-air inlet and vent through outside wall.
3.3 AIR FILTERS AND CLEANERS
A. Filters: 1-inch-thick, disposable, fiberglass type in sheet metal frame.
3.4 HUMIDIFIERS
A. As specified.
3.5 PLASTIC VENT MATERIALS
08-7910 FURNACES
15530 - 4 01/09/2009


A. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.
1. PVC Plastic, Schedule 40 Fittings: ASTM D 2466, socket type.
2. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 FURNACE INSTALLATION
A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems
according to NFPA 54.
B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure
base if required by installation conditions.
1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.
C. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches
above floor.
D. Control Wiring: Install control wiring as specified in Division 16 Section
"Control/Signal Transmission Media."
E. Identify furnaces according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods and Mechanical Identification."
4.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect water piping and humidifiers according to Division 15 Section "Domestic
Water Piping."
C. Connect gas piping according to Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."
D. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect
plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors.
Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect
against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.
1. Plastic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
E. Connect ducts according to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."
F. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
08-7910 FURNACES
15530 - 5 01/09/2009


G. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
H. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
4.3 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance
and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers,
and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.
4.4 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.

08-7910 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

15550 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15550 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Type B gas vents.
2. Steel, positive-pressure, double-wall vents.
3. Steel, positive-pressure, triple-wall vents.
4. Fabricated metal breechings.
5. Mechanical-draft vent fans.
6. Induced-draft fans.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for breechings, chimneys, and stacks.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Detail assemblies
and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.

D. Engineering Report: Certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.

E. Maintenance Data: For vent fans to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.



15550 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing refractory-lined stacks
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain Type B vent system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.

C. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code,"
for duct joint and seam welding.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Comply with AWS D1.1 for welder qualifications, welding details, and workmanship standards.

F. Comply with SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."

G. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for
fabricated breechings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Type B Gas Vents:

a. American Metal Products; a Masco Company.
b. General Products Co.; Air-J et Div.
c. Hart & Cooley, Inc.
d. Selkirk Metalbestos.
e. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.
f. United McGill Corp.; Airflow Group.
g. Van-Packer Co.

2. Steel, Positive-Pressure, Double-Wall Vents:

b. General Products Co.; Air-J et Div.
c. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

15550 - 3 01/09/2009


e. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.
f. Van-Packer Co.

3. Thermally Actuated Vent Dampers:


4. Induced-Draft Vent Fans:

a. FAMCO.
b. Field Controls.
c. Metal Fab, Inc.
d. Quickdraft; Div. of C. A. Litzler Co., Inc.
e. Selkirk Metalbestos.
f. Smith, J ay R. Manufacturing Co.
g. Snappy Air Distribution Products.
h. Tjernlund Products, Inc.

5. Mechanical-Draft Vent Fans:

a. FAMCO.
b. Field Controls.
c. Metal Fab, Inc.
e. Smith, J ay R. Manufacturing Co.
f. Snappy Air Distribution Products.
g. Tjernlund Products, Inc.
h. Van-Packer Co.

2.2 TYPE B GAS VENTS

A. Description: Double-wall gas vents complying with NFPA 211, Type B. Inner pipe of sheet
aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel sheet, each with the following minimum thicknesses:

1. Round, 6-Inch (152-mm) and Smaller ID: 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) inner pipe, 0.0187-inch
(0.5-mm) outer pipe.
2. Round, 7- to 18-Inch (178- to 457-mm) ID: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm) inner pipe, 0.0187-
inch (0.5-mm) outer pipe.
3. Round, 20- to 24-Inch (508- to 610-mm) ID: 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) inner pipe, 0.0217-
inch (0.55-mm) outer pipe.
4. Oval, 4-Inch (102-mm) and Smaller Size: 0.012-inch (0.30-mm) inner pipe, 0.0187-inch
5. Oval, 5- to 6-Inch (127- to 152-mm) Size: 0.014-inch (0.36-mm) inner pipe, 0.0187-inch

B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and
fasteners; fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.

15550 - 4 01/09/2009


2.3 STEEL, POSITIVE-PRESSURE, DOUBLE-WALL VENTS

A. Description: Double-wall metal stacks complying with NFPA 211, suitable for use with
building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.

B. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 1/2-inch (13-mm) airspace, with
positive sealing joints.

C. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 1-inch (25-mm) airspace, with
positive sealing joints.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel of the following thicknesses:

1. 6- to 36-Inch (152- to 914-mm) Size: 0.035 inch (0.89 mm) thick.

E. Outer J acket: Aluminum-coated steel of the following thicknesses:


F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, termination, adjustable roof
flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated of
similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.

1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude 90 percent of rainfall.
2. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.
3. Termination: Exit cone with drain section incorporated into riser.

2.4 FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS

A. Breechings Less Than 24 Inches (610 mm) in Diameter: Galvanized-steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; minimum metal thickness
corresponding to duct sizes in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and
Flexible."

B. Breechings Less Than 24 Inches (610 mm) in Diameter: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M),
alloy 3003, temper H14, aluminum sheet with standard, one-side bright finish where exposed to
view and with mill finish where concealed; minimum metal thickness corresponding to duct
sizes in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Breechings: Black, carbon, hot-rolled steel complying with ASTM A 569/A 569M; minimum
metal thickness for corresponding sizes as indicated for the following diameters or long-side
dimensions:

1. 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller: 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm).
2. 13 to 24 Inches (330 to 610 mm): 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm).

15550 - 5 01/09/2009


5. Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm): 0.1345 inch (3.4 mm).

D. Fabricate breechings in shop to minimize field welding. Match-mark sections for field
assembly.

1. Longitudinal Seams: Welded, except longitudinal seams for breechings less than 24
inches (610 mm) in diameter may be grooved with pipe-lock, flat-lock, or snap-lock
seams.
2. End J oints: Weld, lap, and bolt, or use companion flanges; except breechings less than
24 inches (610 mm) in diameter may have beaded and crimped joints.
3. Fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to associated breeching width. Limit
angular tapers to 20 degrees maximum for expanding tapers. Install accessories during
fabrication to greatest extent possible.
4. Support Lug: Welded to fabricated breechings for attachment to building structure.

E. Reinforce rectangular breeching with angle frames as follows for corresponding long-side
dimensions:

1. 30 Inches (762 mm) and Smaller: No reinforcement required.
2. 31 to 36 Inches (787 to 914 mm): 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch (38 by 38 by 5 mm), 30
inches (760 mm) o.c.
3. 37 to 60 Inches (940 to 1524 mm): 2 by 2 by 1/4 inch (51 by 51 by 6 mm), 30 inches
(760 mm) o.c.
4. Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm): 3 by 3 by 1/2 inch (76 by 76 by 13 mm), 30 inches
(760 mm) o.c.

F. Reinforce round breechings with either flanged girth joints or angle frames as follows for
corresponding diameter:

1. 30 Inches (762 mm) and Smaller: No reinforcement required.
2. 31 to 36 Inches (787 to 914 mm): 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch (38 by 38 by 5 mm), 30
inches (760 mm) o.c.
3. 37 to 60 Inches (940 to 1524 mm): 2 by 2 by 1/4 inch (51 by 51 by 6 mm), 30 inches
(760 mm) o.c.
4. Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm): 3 by 3 by 1/2 inch (76 by 76 by 13 mm), 30 inches
(760 mm) o.c.

G. Barometric Dampers: Adjustable, self-actuating draft dampers, where indicated, full size of
breeching.

H. Cleanout Doors: Same weight as breeching, bolted and gasketed.

I. Thermally Actuated Vent Dampers: Tested according to AGA standards, design certified to
comply with ANSI Z21.66, and sized to match draft hood collar; constructed of stainless-steel
housing and brackets with four quadrants secured to brackets constructed of corrosion-resistant
bimetal. Brass weights secured to quadrants to prevent vibrations and noise during high-draft
conditions.

15550 - 6 01/09/2009


2.5 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS

A. Cable: Galvanized, stranded wire of the following thickness:

1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
2. For ID Sizes 4 to 15 Inches (100 to 381 mm): 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter.
3. For ID Sizes 18 to 24 inches (457 to 610 mm): 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) in diameter.
4. For ID Sizes 27 to 30 inches (685 to 762 mm): 7/16 inch (11 mm) in diameter.
7. For ID Sizes 51 to 60 inches (1295 to 1524 mm): 5/8 inch (16 mm) in diameter.

B. Pipe: 1-1/4-inch- (32-mm-) diameter, galvanized steel.

C. Angle Iron: Galvanized steel 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 3/16 inch (380 by 380 by 4.8 mm).

2.6 INDUCED-DRAFT VENT FANS

A. Fabrication: Enameled-steel venturi tube for sizes 20 inches (508 mm) and smaller in diameter,
and ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless-steel venturi tube for sizes 22 to 48 inches (559 to 1219
mm) in diameter.

B. Fan: Radial-blade venturi type, with motor.

1. Fan Motor: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for factory-installed motors.

C. Accessories: Provide the following:

1. Tapered extension.
2. Straight extension.
3. Cylindrical storm shield.
4. Conical rain cap.
5. Spark arrester.
6. Curb cap.
7. Shock (flexible) connector.
8. Volume damper.
9. Blast gate damper.
10. Vibration isolators.

2.7 MECHANICAL-DRAFT VENT FANS

A. Forward-curved or radial-blade fan and scroll fabricated of mild steel with direct-drive, shaded-
pole motor with ball bearings, internal cooling fan, stainless-steel shaft, and integral pressure-
sensing switch.


15550 - 7 01/09/2009



B. Accessories: Provide the following:

1. Water heater control, including safety interlock controls.
2. Secondary safety switch.
3. Post purge kit.
4. Gas spillage sensing kit.
5. Wall vent hood.

2.8 COMBUSTION-AIR FAN

A. Forward-curved fan and scroll fabricated of mild steel with direct-drive, shaded-pole motor with
ball bearings, internal cooling fan, stainless-steel shaft, and integral pressure-sensing switch.


B. Accessories: Provide the following:

1. Appliance relay.
2. High-limit safety switch.
3. High-limit alarm.
4. Low room-temperature switch.
5. Intake hood.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

A. Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate to comply with minimum
clearances from combustibles.

B. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.

C. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.

D. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support weight of vent and all
accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.

1. Where maximum unsupported lengths of stack are exceeded, support chimneys as
follows:

a. Guy wires.
b. Rigid pipe braces.
c. Rigid angle-iron braces.

15550 - 8 01/09/2009


3.2 INSTALLATION OF REFRACTORY-LINED BREECHINGS AND STACKS

A. Assemble and erect stack sections and accessories according to manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles.

B. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.

C. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by
manufacturer.

D. J oin sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior
finish.

E. Erect stacks level and plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch (25 mm) out of plumb
from top to bottom.

F. Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to
nearest drain.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED BREECHINGS

A. Install concrete inserts in formwork to support breeching independent of its appliance
connection.

B. Assemble and erect fabricated breechings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.

D. Align breechings at connections, with smooth internal surface and 1/8-inch (3-mm)
misalignment tolerance.

E. Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to
nearest drain.

F. Install accessories, dampers, fans, equipment, controls, and other supports.

G. Anchor breechings to building structure with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors,
welded studs, C-clamps, or special beam clamps.

H. Support vertical stacks at 12-foot (3.6-m) intervals by attaching to adjacent vertical structural
surfaces or by direct bearing at floor penetrations and similar locations.

1. 24 by 20 Inches (610 by 508 mm) and Smaller: Use straps or formed angles 1-1/2 by
0.0598 inch (38 by 1.6 mm).

15550 - 9 01/09/2009


2. Larger Than 24 by 20 Inches (610 by 508 mm): Use steel angle brackets 1 by 1/8 inch
(25 by 3 mm) for sizes 36 by 18 inches (915 by 457 mm) or smaller; 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch
(38 by 3 mm) for larger sizes.

I. Support horizontal breechings located against structural walls and other similar adjacent vertical
surfaces at 96-inch (2438-mm) intervals for units with horizontal dimensions of 40 inches (1016
mm) and smaller, and at 48-inch (1219-mm) intervals for larger breechings.

1. Where Width Is Less Than Height: With straps 1-1/2 by 0.0598 inch (38 by 1.6 mm).
2. Where Width Is More Than Height: With shelf-type fabricated angle brackets; 1 by 1/8
inch (25 by 3 mm) for widths 18 inches (457 mm) and smaller; 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 3
mm) for larger widths.

J . Support horizontal rectangular breechings from overhead structure with bolted hangers at 120-
inch (3048-mm) intervals for unit widths 60 inches (1524 mm) and smaller, and 96-inch (2438-
mm) intervals for larger breechings.

1. Breechings 60 Inches (1524 mm) and Smaller in Width: Straps 1 by 0.0598 inch (25 by
1.6 mm).
2. Breechings 61 to 96 Inches (1549 to 2438 mm) in Width: Straps 1-1/2 by 0.1046 inch
(38 by 2.7 mm).

K. Trapeze Hangers: Support breechings with horizontal angles and vertical supports according to
the following long-side dimensions:

1. 30-Inch (762-mm) and Smaller Size: 1-by-1/8-inch (25-by-3-mm) angle, with 1-by-
0.0478-inch- (25-by-1.3-mm-) or 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter hangers.
2. 31- to 60-Inch (787- to 1524-mm) Size: 1-1/2-by-1/8-inch (38-by-3-mm) angle, with 1-
1/2-by-0.0598-inch- (38-by-1.6-mm-) or 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter hangers.
3. 61- to 84-Inch (1549- to 2134-mm) Size: 2-by-1/8-inch (51-by-3-mm) angle, with 1-1/2-
by-0.0747-inch- (38-by-1.9-mm-) or 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter hangers.
4. Larger Than 84-Inch (2134-mm) Size: 2-by-1/4-inch (51-by-6-mm) angle, with 5/8-inch-
(16-mm-) diameter hangers, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Support horizontal round breechings with girth strap and strap hanger (of same size). Install
pair of strap hangers bolted to opposite sides of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints.
Support breechings at 120-inch (3048-mm) intervals with hangers as follows for corresponding
diameters:

1. 30 Inch (762 mm) and Smaller Diameter: Strap hangers 1 by 0.0598 inch (25 by 1.6
mm).
2. 31- to 50-Inch (787- to 1270-mm) Diameter: Strap hangers 1-1/2 by 0.0598 inch (38 by
1.6 mm).
3. 51- to 84-Inch (1295- to 2134-mm) Diameter: Pairs of strap hangers 1-1/2 by 0.0598
inch (38 by 1.6 mm).

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS


15550 - 10 01/09/2009


A. Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Secure fans to appliances, breechings, or stacks with hardware matching connected materials.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including terminals, inspect exposed finishes. Remove
paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean breechings internally, during and on completion of installation, to remove dust and
debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.

C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings and chimneys that are not completed or
connected to equipment.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for fans.

B. Verify that fans are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions, and
confirm fan interlocks.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain fans as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining fans.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.


15550 - 11 01/09/2009



08-7910 FUEL-FIRED HEATERS
15620 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15620

FUEL-FIRED HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired heater types:

1. Gas-fired unit heaters.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:

1. Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for vents for
heaters.
2. Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment" for control for heaters.
3. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for power and control wiring of
heating units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data for each heater including weights, dimensions, metal gages, and
data on features and components. Include plan and elevation views of units,
minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities.

C. Shop Drawings detailing layout and installation of heaters including plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of
Work.

D. Coordination Drawings including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to
scale. Show heater layout and relationships between components and adjacent
structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.

15620 - 2 01/09/2009


E. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units detailing wiring
for power and control systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.

F. Maintenance data for heaters to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70
and that are listed and labeled by UL where available.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Heaters: Submit a written warranty signed
by manufacturer agreeing to replace components within specified warranty
period indicated below. Warranty covers failure due to normal conditions of use.

1. Special Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years
after date of installation.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A . Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are
packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels
describing contents.

1. Fan Belts: Furnish one belt for each heater with belt-driven fans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:

1. Unit Heaters, Gas, Propeller Fan:

15620 - 3 01/09/2009


a. Modine Mfg. Co.
b. Reznor/Thomas & Betts.
c. Sterling Gas-Fired Heating Equipment Div.

2.4 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS, SEPARATED COMBUSTION

A. Comply with AGA Z83.8, "Gas Unit Heaters."

1. AGA Approval: Bear label of American Gas Association.
2. Type of Gas: Natural.

B. Assembly and Wiring: Heaters factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested for
120 VAC.

C. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting
rods.

1. External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corrosion-resistant-
treated surface.

E. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel.

F. Burners: Cast iron or aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts.

H. Concentric, Terminal Vent Assembly: Combined combustion-air inlet and power-
vent outlet. Include adapter assembly for connection to inlet and outlet pipes,
and flashing for wall or roof penetration.

J . Unit Fan Type: Centrifugal fan, factory balanced, resilient mounted, steel, belt
driven with adjustable-pitch motor sheave.

1. Motors: Totally enclosed with internal thermal overload protection and
complying with Division 15 Section "Motors."

K. Automatic Gas Control: Single-stage, 24 VAC valve.

L. Automatic Gas Control: 2-stage, 24 VAC valve.

1. Ignition: Standing pilot.
2. Ignition: Electronically controlled spark with flame sensor.
3. Automatic Fan Thermal Switch: Delays fan start until discharge air is heated,
and delays fan shutdown until air cools to comfort threshold.

N. Accessories: Furnish the following accessories for field assembly:

1. Vertical discharge louvers.
2. Discharge Nozzle: Discharge at 25 to 65 degrees from horizontal.
3. Discharge Nozzle: Discharge at 50 to 90 degrees from horizontal.
4. Summer fan switch.
5. Unit-mounted thermostat bracket.
15620 - 4 01/09/2009


2.10 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

A. Wires and cables are specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."

B. Sensors, Components, and Wiring: Specified in Division 15 Section "Control
Systems Equipment."

C. Thermostat: Single-stage, 24 VAC, wall-mounting type with 50 to 90 deg F
operating range and FAN ONLY switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install heaters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install and connect gas-fired heaters and associated fuel and vent features and
systems, installed and connected according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes
and regulations, and manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

C. Install and connect oil-fired heaters and associated fuel and vent piping
according to NFPA 31, applicable local codes and regulations, and
manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

D. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers,
and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust
hangers so unit is plumb and level.

1. Spring hangers are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."

E. Substrate Mounted Units: Provide supports connected to substrate. Secure
units to supports.

F. Controls: Wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and
Cables."

G. Install controls as specified in Division 15 Section "Control Systems Equipment."

H. Identify furnaces and connections according to Division 15 Section "Basic

I. Identify furnaces and connections according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

15620 - 5 01/09/2009


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
2. Gas Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Natural Gas Piping Systems." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide
union with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. Provide AGA-
approved flexible units.
3. Fuel Oil Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section
"Fuel Oil Piping Systems." Connect to fuel oil supply and return piping with
shutoff valve and union at each connection.

B. Connect vents according to Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and
Stacks."

C. Connect ducts according to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."

D. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections.

1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory
mounted.

E. Connect heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated
and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,
including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.3 ADJ USTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and
efficiency. Adjust heat distribution features, including louvers, vanes, shutters,
dampers, and reflectors, to provide optimum heat distribution for objects,
personnel, and spaces served.

B. After completing system installation, inspect heaters and associated
components. Repair scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.
Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by
manufacturer.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Startup Services: Provide startup service, as specified below.

1. Start units and operate controls and safeties.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
15620 - 6 01/09/2009


3. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.

08-7910 REFRIGERANT PIPING
15652 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15652
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 7 Section "J oint Sealants" for materials and methods for sealing pipe
penetrations through exterior walls.
3. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe supports and installation
requirements.
4. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying
refrigerant piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated.
Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for thermostatic expansion
valves, solenoid valves, and pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube,
and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of
horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment
connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and
equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the actual
piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube
sizes, to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected
equipment.
15652 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX; "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
C. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing
Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated
Valves."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of refrigerant piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for penetrations in exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7
Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials and methods for sealing
pipe penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Refrigerants:
a. Allied Signal, Inc./Fluorine Products; Genetron Refrigerants.
b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Elf Atochem North America, Inc.; Fluorocarbon Div.
d. ICI Americas Inc./ICI KLEA; Fluorochemicals Bus.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
15652 - 3 01/09/2009


a. Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration &
Air Conditioning Division.
b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.
c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Sporlan Valve Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: drawn-copper tubing.
A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of
compressor, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on each side of strainers.
B. Install check valves in compressor discharge lines and in condenser liquid lines on
multiple condenser systems.
C. Install packed-angle valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and thermostatic
expansion valve for system charging.
D. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves on each side of strainers and
dryers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around each dryer.
F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.
1. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
2. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections.
Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.
G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to evaporator.
1. If refrigerant distributors are used, install them directly on expansion-valve outlet.
2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb
straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.
4. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
H. Install pressure-regulating and pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15. Pipe
pressure relief valve discharge to outside.
15652 - 4 01/09/2009


3.3 SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver,
and on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream from each automatic valve, including expansion
valves, solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers in main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral
strainers are used.
D. Install strainers in suction line of steel pipe.
E. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic
expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
F. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers; pipe discharge to outdoors.
G. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and
before each solenoid valve.
H. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic
compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
I. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in
oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction
line when system shuts down.
J . Install receivers, sized to accommodate pump-down charge, on systems 5 tons (17.5
kW) and larger and on systems with long piping runs.
K. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors.
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic
C. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,
and fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
15652 - 5 01/09/2009


F. Belowground, install copper tubing in protective conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
H. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away
from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I. Install bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than NPS 2.
J . Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, and
expansion valves and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
K. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve
stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do
not apply heat near expansion valve bulb.
L. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers
and Supports."
M. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet
long.
2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported by a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
N. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches ; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3.5 PIPE J OINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Braze joints according to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and
Methods."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to
prevent scale formation.
15652 - 6 01/09/2009


A. Test and inspect refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor,
condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure.
2. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system at not less than the lower
of the design pressure or the setting of pressure relief device protecting high and
low side of system.
a. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout
duration of test.
b. Test joints and fittings by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerine
solution over joint.
c. Fill system with nitrogen to raise a test pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) or
higher as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
3.7 ADJ USTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat
requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of the conditioned air or chilled-water controllers to the
system design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according
to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.
2. Check compressor oil level above center of sight glass.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves, except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check compressor-motor alignment, and lubricate motors and bearings.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Before installing copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
B. Replace core of filter-dryer after system has been adjusted and design flow rates and
pressures are established.
3.9 SYSTEM CHARGING
15652 - 7 01/09/2009


A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter-dryer after leak test but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to a vacuum of 500
micrometers If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig .
4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-
operating charge.

08-7910 CONDENSING UNITS
15671 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15671
CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Air-cooled condensing units.

1. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for valves and accessories for piping
connections to units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights;
dimensions; required clearances; methods for assembling components; furnished
specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions for each model
indicated.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For each condensing unit to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
1. Include a parts list for each condensing unit, control, and accessory;
troubleshooting maintenance guide; and servicing and preventive maintenance
procedures and schedule.
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
15671 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section
that is listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. Fabricate and label water-cooled condensers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by Contractor and signed by
manufacturer, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials and workmanship
within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for
installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5 years from date of
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
15671 - 3 01/09/2009


offering condensing units that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide condensing units by
1. Condensing Units, Air Cooled, 1 to 5 Tons:
a. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
b. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.
c. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc. Div.
2.2 CONDENSING UNITS, AIR COOLED, 1 TO 5 TONS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, air cooled; consisting of casing,
compressors, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Compressor: Hermetic or semihermetic compressor designed for service with
crankcase sight glass, crankcase heater, and backseating service access valves on
suction and discharge ports.
1. Capacity Control: Cylinder unloading.
2. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass.
C. Condenser: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil, with separate and independent
refrigeration circuit for each compressor. Include liquid accumulator and subcooling
circuit and backseating liquid-line service access valve. Factory test coils at 450 psig
(3105 kPa), then dehydrate by drawing a vacuum and fill with a holding charge of
nitrogen.
D. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type vertical discharge; either directly or belt driven.
Include the following:
1. Permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors.
2. Separate motor for each fan.
3. Motors with thermal-overload cutouts.
4. Dynamically and statically balanced fan assemblies.
5. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control, or
fan-cycling control.
E. Operating and safety controls include the following:
1. Manual reset, high-pressure cutout switches.
2. Automatic reset, low-pressure cutout switches.
3. Low oil pressure cutout switch.
4. Compressor-winding thermostat cutout switch.
5. 3-leg, compressor-overload protection.
6. Control transformer.
7. Magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
15671 - 4 01/09/2009


8. Automatic, nonrecycling pump down and a timing device to prevent excessive
compressor cycling.
F. Unit Casings: Designed for outdoor installation with weather protection for components
and controls and with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls,
condenser fans, motors, and drives. Additional features include the following:
1. Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and
finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating.
2. Lifting lugs to facilitate rigging of units.
3. Gasketed control panel door.
4. Unfused disconnect switch, factory mounted and wired, for single external
electrical power connection.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed
motors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install condensing units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Install ground-mounted units on 4-inch- thick, reinforced concrete base, 4 inches larger
than condensing unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to
supports with removable fasteners.
E. Install units on spring isolators specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration
Controls and Seismic Restraints."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to unit's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing so
it does not interfere with access to unit. Install furnished accessories.
B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled condensing units; maintain required access to
unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories.
15671 - 5 01/09/2009


C. Connect refrigerant and condenser water piping to water-cooled condensing units.
Maintain clear tube removal space.
D. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Clean units to remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions and do the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.
2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
C. Lubricate bearings on fans.
D. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
E. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
15671 - 6 01/09/2009


F. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
G. Measure and record airflow over coils.
H. Check operation of condenser capacity control device.
I. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
J . After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
Closeout."
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data."
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance
notice.
08-7910 PACKAGED ROOF TOP HEAT & COOL UNITS
15771 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15771

PACKAGED ROOF TOP HEAT & COOL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Packaged Roof Top Heat/Cool Units shall be a one-piece air-to-air electric
cooling, gas heating unit. This assembly will be completely enclosed in a
weather-proof housing with removable service panels.

B. Accessories:

1. Filter section
2. Controls
3. Supply fan
Full perimeter, insulated roof curb

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING - COOLING UNIT GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be combination heating/cooling packaged
rooftops as specified on the contract documents and within these specifications.
Cooling capacity ratings shall be based upon ARI Standard 360. Unit(s) shall
consist of insulated weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser
coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, filters, supply and exhaust fan motors and
drives, unit controls and, gas-fired heating section.

B. Unit(s) shall be single piece construction as manufactured at the
factory. Site assembled sub-assemblies will not be allowed.

C. Unit(s) shall be factory run tested to include the operation of all fans,
compressors, heat exchangers, and control sequences.

D. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and
indicate caution areas.

2.2 UNIT CASING

A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint
coating durable enough to withstand 670 consecutive-hour salt spray application
in accordance with standard ASTM B 117. Structural members shall be 14
gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 18 gauge steel. Roof
panels shall be sloped to provide positive drainage of rain water/melting snow
away from the cabinet.

15771 - 2 01/09/2009


B. Access Doors: Fully gasketed hinged doors of double wall construction with
fluted knob fasteners and chained "tie-backs" to provide access to filters, heating
section, return/exhaust air fan section, supply air fan section and evaporator coil
section. The unit control panel section shall be compartmented to separate high
and low voltage components. The control panels shall also be fully gasketed,
hinged and provided with quick release latches for easy access. The high voltage
control panel shall be provided with a door handle disconnect switch to facilitate
convenient, safe disconnection of main three phase power.

C. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass internal liner on all exterior
panels in contact with the conditioned air stream.

2.3 AIR FILTERS

A. Provide forward curved supply fan with fixed-pitscheaver drive assemblies.
Dynamically balance all fans and the unit's running fan assembly fan mounted on
actual shaft, bearing and in scroll housing to assure smooth operation of the fan
and its associated assemble. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable.

B. Mount fan motor(s) and fan on a common base assembly and isolated from unit
with 2" spring isolators. Provide thrust restraint isolation on the fan housing/fan
board to assure smooth fan startup transitioning and operation.

C. Fan shall be mounted on grease ball bearings.

D. Motor shall be open drip-proof. Motor shall have a standard T-frame and a
minimum service factor of 1.15. All drive components shall be accessible without
the use of scaffolds or ladders, to facilitate periodic maintenance checks and for
operator safety.

2.4 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system integral to unit. UL
approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from
refrigerant cooling coils. Provide capability for threaded gas piping connection
through side or bottom of unit.

B. Heating section shall be factory tested prior to shipment.

C. Gas Burner: Forced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, gas
valve, manual shut-off, direct spark or pilot ignition, and flame sensing monitoring
electrode. Provide air proving switch to prevent burner operation when burner is
open for maintenance or inspection.

D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide electronic flame safety controls for the
proving of combustion air prior to ignition sequence with prepurge cycle, and
continuous electronic flame supervision.

E. Combustion Blower: Provide centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload
protection on fan motor.
15771 - 3 01/09/2009


F. Heat Exchanger: Provide factory pressure and leak tested tubular two pass heat
exchanger of free floating design manufactured of 16-gauge stainless steel
primary surface and 18-gauge stainless steel secondary surface.

2.5 EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION

A. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper
tubes. Evaporator coil shall be inter-circuited to maintain active coil face area at
part load conditions. Coil shall also utilize internally enhanced tubing for
maximum efficiency.

B. Provide a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit. Factory
pressure and leak test coil at 300 psi.

C. Provide pitched drain pan to assure positive drainage of condensate from the unit
casing.

2.6 CONDENSER SECTION

A. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper
tubes. Factory leak test coil under 450 psia pressure.

B. Provide subcooling circuit(s) integral with condenser coil to maximize efficiency
and prevent premature flashing of liquid refrigerant, to a gaseous state,ahead of
the expansion valve.

C. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with steel blades, and three phase
motors. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with built-in current and thermal overload
protection in a weathertight casing.

D. Condenser coils shall be V-banked for cleaning ease. The coils shall not exceed
14 fins per inch density in order to permit routine cleaning, and prevent excessive
air pressure drop across the condenser coil.

2.7 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Compressor shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of Rooftop unit.

B. Compressor: Hermetic compliant 3-D scroll 3600 rpm (20-60 ton units) with
vibration isolation mounting, oil sight glass, discharge valves.

C. Provide with thermostatic motor winding temperature control to protect against
motor temperatures resulting from over/under-voltage or loss of charge. Provide
high and low pressure cutouts, and reset relay.

D. Provide coil frost protection compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit
suction temperature to prevent coil frosting with minimum energy usage for all
15771 - 4 01/09/2009


VAV units. As an alternate, factory installed hot gas bypass shall be required on
all VAV units to prevent coil frosting.

2.10 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a minimum of
five years successful experience in the manufacture and service support of the
rooftop packages specified herein. Manufacturers with less than five years
experience in the production of rooftop units of the sizes and types specified
shall not be acceptable.

1. Aaon
2. Carrier
3. Trane
4. Lennox

B. Substitutions: Prior approval required as indicated under the general and/or
supplemental conditions of these specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings. Illustrated by the manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Warranty & Guarantee: This shall be provided by this Section. Refer to Section
15010.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory trained service engineer without additional
charge to start the unit(s).

B. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the
package unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.


08-7910 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15784 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15784

PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, freestanding or through-the-wall, terminal air-
conditioning and heat-pump units, and their accessories and controls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, furnished specialties, and accessories
for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail layout and installation of wall penetrations.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

C. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1,
"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
15784 - 2 01/09/2009



E. Comply with AGA Z223.1 for gas-fired furnace section.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and wall construction where unit penetrates
wall or is supported by it.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made

B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the
Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within
the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for
installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.

1. Warranty Period, Compressors: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 5
years after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Warranty Period, Heat Exchangers: Manufacturers standard, but not less than
10 years after date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:

the following:

1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.
2. Climate Master, Inc.
3. Friedrich Air Conditioning Co.
4. GE Co.; GE Appliances.
5. Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

15784 - 3 01/09/2009


A. Description: Packaged, self-contained, through-the-wall terminal units with room
cabinet, electric refrigeration system, heating, and temperature controls; fully charged
with refrigerant and filled with oil.

B. Cabinet: 0.052-inch thick, galvanized steel with removable front panel with concealed
latches.

1. Mounting: Wall with wall sleeve.
2. Mounting: Floor with subbase.
3. Finish: Epoxy coating.
4. Finish: Baked enamel.
5. Discharge Grille and Access Door: Punched-louver discharge grilles allowing 4-
way discharge air pattern, with hinged door in top of cabinet for access to
controls.
6. Discharge Grille and Access Door: Extruded-aluminum discharge grilles with
hinged door in top of cabinet for access to controls.
7. Cabinet Extension: Matching cabinet in construction and finish, allowing
diversion of airflow to adjoining room, with grille.
8. Subbase: Enameled steel with adjustable leveling feet and adjustable end
plates.
9. Subbase: Enameled steel with adjustable leveling feet and adjustable end
plates, with factory-installed and -wired, fused disconnect switch and receptacle
sized for unit.
10. Wall Sleeves: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized steel with polyester finish.
11. Louvers: Extruded aluminum with enamel finish.

C. Refrigeration System: Direct-expansion indoor coil with capillary restrictor, hermetically
sealed compressor with internal spring isolation, external isolation, permanent-split-
capacitor motor, and overload protection. Include the following:

1. Outdoor coil and fan.
2. Coaxial tube-in-tube condenser with water-regulating valve.
3. Accumulator.
4. Capillary restrictor and constant-pressure expansion valve.
5. Reversing valve.

D. Air System: Forward-curved, centrifugal, indoor fans with permanent-split-capacitor
motor, permanent washable filters, and positive-pressure ventilation damper with
concealed manual operator.

E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium wire, electric-resistance heating
elements with contactor and high-temperature-limit switch.

F. Condensate Drain: Drain pan to direct condensate to outdoor coil for re-evaporation.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Control Module: Unit-mounted adjustable thermostat with heat anticipator, off-heat-
auto-cool switch, and high-low fan switch.

15784 - 4 01/09/2009


B. Low Ambient Lockout Control: Prevents cooling cycle operation below 40 deg F,
outdoor-air temperature.

C. Heat-Pump Ambient Control: Field-adjustable switch changes from heat-pump
operation to electric-resistance heating between 35 and 60 deg F.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of
Outdoor Unitary Equipment."

B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with ARI 310/380, "Packaged
Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Coordinate installation of wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and
weatherproof.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
2. Gas Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Natural
Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to heat exchanger to gas train inlet, with union.
3. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 15
Section "Hydronic Piping." Provide shutoff valve on supply line and balancing
valve on return line. Provide air vent, complete with stop valve, at high points.
4. Steam and Condensate Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of
Division 15 Section "Steam and Condensate Piping." Provide shutoff valve and
vacuum breaker in steam line. Install steam traps with outlet below coil return
connection.
5. Condensate Drain: Make indirect connection at nearest floor or equipment drain.

B. Electrical: Connect units to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed
by manufacturer.

C. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not

15784 - 5 01/09/2009


3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged
finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. After installation, check the following:

1. Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior wall.
2. Unit casing has no visible damage.
3. Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
4. Labels are clearly visible.
5. Controls are connected and operable.
6. Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
7. Filters are installed and clean.
8. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
9. Acoustic insulation is present.

B. Lubricate bearings on fan.

C. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.

D. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.

E. After starting and performance test, change filters.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel as specified below:

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to
Closeout."
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance
notice.


08-7910 UNIT HEATERS
15835 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15835 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

D. Samples of cabinet finish colors for approval.

E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.

F. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and
interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of unit heaters.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing unit heaters similar to those
indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

15835 - 2 01/09/2009


1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article
100.
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective
covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.

B. Cabinet Unit Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering unit
heaters that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide unit heaters by one of the
following:

1. Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc.
2. Cadet Manufacturing Company.
3. Carrier Corp.
4. Emerson Electric Co.; Wiegand Division.
5. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
6. Edwards Engineering Corporation.
7. Hydrotherm Corporation, (The); A Mestek Co.
8. Lennox Industries Inc.
9. Markel Products Company.
10. Marley Electric Heating Company; Berko Division.
11. Reed National Corp.; L.J . Wing Division.
12. Sterling Radiator Division/Mestek, Inc.
13. Trane Co.

2.2 ELECTRICAL UNIT HEATERS

A. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and 60-
Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel or
corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch (4 mm). Element ends are
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F (288 deg C) at
any point during normal operation.

15835 - 3 01/09/2009


B. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.

C. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer's standard motor. Motors sized 1
hp and less include motor overload protection.

D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

E. Discharge Configuration: Horizontal discharge with horizontal, adjustable louvers.

F. Discharge Configuration: Vertical discharge with radial louver diffuser.

G. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Timer switch.
2. Wall thermostat.
3. Safety-switch disconnect on cover of terminal box.
4. Mercury contactors.
5. Fan-delay relay.

2.3 ELECTRICAL CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.

B. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and top air outlet.

C. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with bottom air inlet and front air outlet.

D. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with bottom air inlet and top air outlet.

E. Description: Semirecessed, wall-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.

F. Description: Semirecessed, ceiling-mounting cabinet.

G. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and 60-
Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel or
corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch (4 mm). Element ends are
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F (288 deg C) at
any point during normal operation.

H. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.

I. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal blower, direct driven by a single-phase, 2-speed electric motor with
inherent overload protection and resilient motor/fan mount.

J . Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

15835 - 4 01/09/2009


K. Filter: Manufacturer's standard throwaway filter, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, on inlet of each fan.

L. Filter: Manufacturer's standard washable filter, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, on inlet of each fan.

M. Unit Controls: Thermostat, fan-speed switch, fan ON-AUTOMATIC switch, night-setback
relay, interval timer, and outside air-damper control switch.

N. Unit Controls: Contactor rated for 100,000 duty cycles, control transformer, fan ON-
AUTOMATIC switch, and outside air-damper control switch.

O. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Timer switch.
2. Wall thermostat.
3. Outside air damper and duct collar, adjustable to 50 percent outside air.
4. Disconnect switch.
5. Mercury contactor.
6. Fan-delay relay.
7. Kickplate base for floor-mounted units.

P. Cabinet finish suitable for field-applied paint.

Q. Finish cabinet with manufacturer's standard enamel, color as selected by Architect.

2.4 HYDRONIC AND STEAM UNIT HEATERS

A. Casing: Steel or aluminum with removable access panels to remove, service, and maintain
major components.

B. Coil: Fin-and-tube coil fabricated of copper, with copper or aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm). Test for leaks to450 psig (3103 kPa) under water.

C. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer's standard motor. Motors sized 1
hp and less include motor overload protection.

D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

E. Unit Configuration: Horizontal discharge with horizontal, adjustable louvers.

F. Unit Configuration: Vertical discharge with radial louver diffuser.

2.5 HYDRONIC AND STEAM CABINET UNIT HEATERS

A. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.

B. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and top air outlet.

15835 - 5 01/09/2009


C. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with bottom air inlet and front air outlet.

D. Description: Surface-mounting cabinet with bottom air inlet and top air outlet.

E. Description: Semirecessed, wall-mounting cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.

F. Description: Semirecessed, ceiling-mounting cabinet.

G. Coil: Fin-and-tube coil fabricated of copper, with copper or aluminum fins spaced no closer
than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm). Test for leaks to 450 psig (3103 kPa) under water.

H. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal blower, direct driven by a single-phase, 2-speed electric motor with
inherent overload protection and resilient motor/fan mount.

I. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

J . Filter: Manufacturer's standard throwaway filter, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, on inlet of each fan.

K. Filter: Manufacturer's standard washable filter, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, on inlet of each fan.

L. Unit Controls: Thermostat, fan-speed switch, fan ON-AUTOMATIC switch, night-setback
relay, and outside air-damper control switch.

M. Unit Controls: Fan ON-AUTOMATIC switch and outside air-damper control switch.

N. Optional Accessories: Include the following:

1. Outside air damper and duct collar, adjustable to 50 percent outside air.
2. Disconnect switch.
3. Kickplate base for floor-mounted units.

O. Cabinet finish suitable for field-applied paint.

P. Finish cabinet with manufacturer's standard enamel, color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and supports to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

15835 - 6 01/09/2009


A. Install unit heaters as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
NFPA 90A.

B. Connect unit heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,
according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors
and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.


A. Testing: After installing unit heaters and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Replace filters in each cabinet unit heater.

08-7910 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES
15840 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15840

DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide low pressure steel ductwork, acoustic and thermal lining and all accessories
and specialties incidental to the construction of the heating, ventilating, air
conditioning and exhaust systems, including all plenums and housing, and the like,
necessary and required by the system.

B. Prior to Shop Drawing submittal meet with Construction Manager and truss
manufacturer to coordinate locations of all ductwork systems with truss design and
layout to avoid all conflicts.


A. Construction of ductwork shall be in accordance with the recommendation of the
ASHRAE Handbook, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National
Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Manual, for Low Pressure Duct, SMACNA Manual, for
Duct Liner Application Standards.

B. Conflicts between ASHRAE and SMACNA duct construction recommendations shall
be resolved at Engineer's discretion.

C. All installations of sheet metal and PVC ducts and related work shall comply with all
applicable local, state, and national codes, rules, regulations, and ordinances.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 15010 for required ductwork submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK

A. All ductwork shall be constructed of new prime grade galvanized sheet steel,
manufactured in accordance with ASTM A525 standards for hot dip galvanized
sheet. Coating weight shall not be less than 1.25 ounces per square foot where
used in normal applications. Sheets having coating that will flake or peel under any
forming operation will not be allowed.

2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTS

A. Low pressure ductwork (pos. or neg.) shall be designed for static pressure rating up
to 2" WG, with normal duct air velocities of 2,500 fpm or less. Class B seals shall be
used in the construction of the ductwork to make all duct joints and connections air
15840 - 2 01/09/2009


tight.

B. All galvanized air ducts shall be constructed of the following gauges except where
specifically noted otherwise on the drawings.

Duct Sizes in
Either Direction U.S. Gauge

0" to 12" #26
13" to 30" #24
31" to 42" #22
43" and Up #20

C. All ducts over 18" in either direction shall have the following transverse joints and
galvanized angle iron stiffeners.

Duct Size Type J oints and Bracing

19" to 30" S slip 1" pocket lock on 8' centers with 1" x
1/8" angles 4' from joint of S slip, 1" locks on 4'
centers.

D. Fittings shall be as described in the SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction
Standards, Section 2, except as described below.

1. Radius fittings shall be used wherever space permits with R/W =1.5.

2. All square fittings shall have turning vanes.

a. Vanes must be parallel to duct side at air entry and exit.

b. Airfoil type vanes shall be used in ducts having a minimum dimension
of 18" or larger.

3. Splitter dampers shall be used at all branch take-offs as indicated on the
drawings.

4. Sub-branch tap into mains shall be made with a 45 degree entry.

2.3 DUCT LINING

A. Duct sound lining shall be as manufactured by CSG, J ohns-Manville or Ownes-
Corning.

B. Liner shall have an amber core composed of glass fibers firmly bonded together
with the air side coated with a tough, fire safe neoprene coating for absolute
elimination of surface fiber erosion.

C. Duct liner shall be 1" thick with 2 pound minimum density for all Low Pressure
15840 - 3 01/09/2009


Supply Ductwork and all Return Air Ductwork.

2.3 DUCT SEALER

A. Duct sealer shall meet the intent of SMACNA Class B sealant. Sealer may be
brushed on type liquid, a tube feed caulking compound or a hard cast type tape,
standard foil backed or cloth backed duct tape will not be acceptable.

B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets on sealer for approval.

2.4 ROUND DUCTS

A. Round ducts and fittings shall be factory fabricated spiral lock seam duct with
machine formed fittings as manufactured by United Sheet Metal or approved equal.
All fittings shall be sealed with United Fire Retardant Duct Sealer or approved equal.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT WRAP

A. Flexible duct wrap of 1 1/2" thickness 0.75 pcf density and factory laminated with fsk
shall be provided and installed on all high pressure supply and round low pressure
supply ductwork in accordance with the latest applicable edition of the Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association Standard for Wrapped
Insulation.

2.6 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Volume dampers to be opposed blade (or splitter single blade type where denoted)
designed for reduced volume control shall be provided where indicated on the
drawings or as required for proper air balancing. Damper hardware must be durable
and in installed properly. Damper blades should be stiffened by forming or other
method, as required for the duty. Damper to have locking device to hold damper in a
fixed position without vibration.

2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Turning Vanes shall be provided where denoted on drawings and in all square
elbows, designed to carry the air around the 90 degree bend without eddying or
pressure fluctuation in the turn. Vanes shall be formed blade type and of standard
catalog product of reputable manufacturer. Manufacturer of the air turns shall
recommend the number of size of blades. Air turns shall be the complete unit type
installed along the diagonals of each square elbow.

1. Vanes shall be constructed and installed to limit pressure loss to not more
than 20% of the velocity pressure.

2.8 FLUES & COMBUSTION AIR

A. Furnish and install double wall flues for gas fired equipment of size indicated on the
drawings. Provide all necessary steel supporting members, insulated thimbles,
flashing and accessories. The complete installation to comply with manufacturer's
15840 - 4 01/09/2009


recommendation.

2.9 DUCT SEALER

A. Duct sealer shall meet the intent of SMACNA Class B sealant. Sealer may be
brushed on type liquid, a tube feed caulking compound or a hard cast type tape,
standard foil backed or cloth backed duct tape will not be acceptable.

B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets on sealer for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Duct shall be installed substantially as indicated on the drawings. However, where
conflicts occur with other trades, the Architect/Engineer reserves the right to require
the contractor to make minor changes in duct locations without extra cost to the
Owner.

3.2 DUCTWORK

A. Duct sized indicated on the accompanying drawings are inside dimensions and
where ductwork is acoustically lined the duct shall be oversized accordingly to
provide the same minimum cross sectional area.

3.3 ELBOWS AND FITTINGS

A. Sheet metal elbows and fittings shall be constructed to comply with the following:

1. Curved elbows shall have a radius not less than 150% of duct width to the
centerline of the duct (R/D=1.5).

2. Where R/D ratio is less than 1.5, use hollow vane (air foil) vanes or turn
blades.

3. Call elbows and other fittings shall be constructed the same as required for
straight runs of ductwork. Round elbows shall be crimped and beaded on the
downstream end. All square elbows must have turning vanes.

4. When air foil vanes are used in elbows, elbows may have square throat and
heel, or radius throat. Failure to install square elbows with turning vanes will
result in rejection of that portion of work.

5. The dimensions of ducts shown on the drawings shall not be considered as
absolute but any change from same shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval, all changes or transitions in shapes shall be done with long slants
not to exceed 24 degree angle.

6. Change shapes of ducts shown; equivalent areas shall be maintained. In no
case shall area be changed without special permission.
15840 - 5 01/09/2009


3.4 FLEXIBLE J OINTS

A. Provide flexible joints at suction and discharge connections of sheet metal ductwork
and all supply and exhaust fans and/or other equipment employing such fans.
Fabricate of 30 ounce "Ventglas" or equal neoprene coated fabric properly secured
by bolted angles or band iron. No metal-to-metal contact will be allowed. Flexible
connection fabric shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and
comply with UL-191-1967.

3.5 HANGERS

A. Support horizontal ductwork runs with suitable strap or trapeze hangers on 6'
center, except where duct weight for the 8' length is less than 40 pounds space
hangers 8' on center. When weight of the duct between hangers does not exceed
60 pounds, hangers shall be 1" wide x 18 gauge; for greater weights use hangers
6'-0" on center, as approved by Architect/Engineer. Support verticle risers at floors
with galvanized steel angles riveted to duct on all sizes and not less than at least
two (2) long sides. Size of angles shall be one (1) size heavier than scheduled, for
stiffer angles. Perforated strap iron hangers will not be permitted.

3.6 J OINTS

A. Weld, and/or seal, all leaks in plenums, ductwork, housing, etc., where more than
1% air leakage occurs in low pressure systems, all as approved by the Architect.
Sealant shall be approved by the Architect.

B. All joints and seams including longitudinal seams on plenums and ducts shall be
airtight or sealed as required.

C. Poorly made joints, splits, visible holes at corners, etc., shall be reworked or new
pieces of ductwork installed as directed by the Engineer. Where excessive pulsating
of ductwork or plenum housing is found, additional stiffeners shall be added as
directed.

3.7 CAULKING

A. Pack and caulk around ductwork passing through floors or walls where required to
prevent sound transmission, using fiberglass packing and metal collar.

3.8 DUCTWORK

A. The contractor shall locate ductwork within walls, ceilings, utility or pipe spaces,
chases, joist spaces and the like, insofar as is practical and so that such work will
be properly concealed.

B. Space sufficiently distant from other work and from adjacent lines, ducts, etc., to
permit maintenance, replacement, insulation, etc., so not less than 1" space will
exist in between completed finished surfaces.

15840 - 6 01/09/2009


C. Space parallel runs of ductwork so that each individual run of duct can be
separately insulated. Parallel runs of duct or piping, insulation as a bundle, will not
be acceptable.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean the interior of all ductwork and fitting, leaving area clean and free of all loose
insulation and/or other construction debris.

3.10 FLASHING

A. Flash and counterflash wherever sheet metal ducts of other sheet metal
construction passes through roof or outside walls. Flash and counterflash at all roof
fans. Flashing to be 18 gauge galvanized metal constructed so as to make
watertight in a neat appearing manner (unless stated otherwise on the plans).

3.11 DUCT SEALING AND LEAK TESTING

A. Weld, and/or seal, all leaks in plenums, ductwork, housing, etc., where more than
1% air leakage occurs in low pressure systems, all as directed by the
Architect/Engineer. Sealant shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.

1. All joints and seams including longitudinal seams on plenums and ducts
shall be airtight or sealed as required.

2. Poorly made joints, splits, visible holes at corners, etc., shall be reworked or
new pieces of ductwork. Where excessive pulsating of ductwork plenum
housing is found, additional stiffeners shall be added as directed.


08-7910 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15849 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15849

DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - DESCRIPTION

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials and accessories for a proper and complete duct
hanger system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide ductwork hangers as follows:

1. Horizontal flat sided galvanized steel ductwork shall be supported by
means of hot dipped galvanized steel strap, not perforated, or steel angle.
Hangers shall be provided at both sides of ducts for the full height of
ducts.

2. Regardless of the hereinbefore mentioned ductwork hanger spacing for
any kind of ductwork, provide hangers of the types specified at the center
of every "L" or change in direction of horizontal ductwork.

3. Drive screws, pins, studs, of the type which are secured in place by
means of explosive force are not permitted as a means of securing any of
the hangers. No strap or perforated hangers will be permitted for any
ductwork.

4. All hangers, frames, supports, nests, bolts, washers, nuts, rivets, cleats,
screws, shall be of same material as ducts. All items shall be as
recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association, Inc. "Low Velocity Duct Construction", 1976.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Care shall be taken not to weaken any structural portion of the building.


08-7910 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15851 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15851

CENTRIFUGAL FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL


Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.

Section:

1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration hangers and supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches.


SELECT 1 OF 2 PARAS BELOW.

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

C. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule
on the Drawings.

1. Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound
power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations,
and required accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
2. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
3. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

15851 - 2 01/09/2009


C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

E. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."


A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and
that are listed and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.


C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are
licensed to use the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping
limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location
following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are
lubricated, and fans have been commissioned.

15851 - 3 01/09/2009


1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3 Sections.

B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal fans by

SEE EDITING INSTRUCTION NO. 1 IN THE EVALUATIONS FOR CAUTIONS
ABOUT NAMING PRODUCTS AND MFRS.

1. Greenhech
2. Exhausto
3. Kanalflakt, Inc.
4. Carnes Co.
5. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

2.2 FAN UNITS

A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.

B. Description: Direct Drive centrifugal in-line fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan
shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.

2.3 HOUSINGS

A. Materials and Fabrication: Fan housing shall be constructed of galvanized sheet
metal. Curb cap, with integal inlet cone, shall be constructed in one piece for weather
tightness. Fan shall e supplied with mounted electrical terminal box with pre-wired
terminal strip connections. Integral disconnect switch shall be provided on all single
phase models. Three phase disconnect shall be provided as specified.

2.4 FAN WHEELS

A. Backward curved centrifugal type: Fan housing shall incorporate a well designed
inlet venturi for maximum performance. Motorized impeller shall be both statically
and dynamically balanced as one integral unit to provide for vibration free
performance.

15851 - 4 01/09/2009


2.5 MOTORIZED IMPELLER

A. External Rotor Type: Class B insulation, totally enclosed with permanent split
capacity (except three phase). Motor shall be a permanently sealed self lubricating
ball bearing type. Motor shall be equipped with automatic reset thermal overload
protection. Motor shall be acceptable for continuous duty. Sufficient service factor
shall be provided to ensure long maintenance free operation over maximum load
conditions.

PERFORMANCE

Fan air flow and sound performance data shall be based upon tests conducted in
accordance with AMCA 210 and AMCA 300. Fan shall be licensed to bear the AMCA
Certified Ratings Label for air performance.

CODE APPROVAL

Fan shall be tested and approved by UL and CSA (or equals) for safety. KRU Series
Shall be manufactured under the authority of Kanalflakt, Inc., Sarasota, FL.

2.9 MOTORS

A. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.

B. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation.
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.

2.10 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat
aluminum parts.

B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.


A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
15851 - 5 01/09/2009


2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices
are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene
pads. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.

C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and
vibration isolation springs. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15
Section "Vibration Control."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,
including grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.6 ADJ USTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

15851 - 6 01/09/2009


C. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum
clean fan wheel and cabinet.

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before
startup:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify
that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive
system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for
air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."

15851 - 7 01/09/2009


C. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance
notice.

D. Demonstrate operation of fans. Conduct walking tour of the Project. Briefly identify
location and describe function, operation, and maintenance of each fan.


08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15852

AXIAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Propeller fans.

Section:

1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration hangers and supports.
2. Division 16 Section "Disconnects and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches.


SELECT 1 OF 2 PARAS BELOW.

A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

D. Fan Unit Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on
the Drawings.

1. Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound
power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations,
and required accessories.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:

1. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 2 01/09/2009


2. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
3. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.

D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly

E. Maintenance data for air-handling units to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1 and in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Requirements."


A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and
that are listed and labeled by UL where available.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article
100.


C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are
licensed to use the AMCA Seal.

D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,
with protective crating and covering.

B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated,
and fans have been commissioned.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 3 01/09/2009


A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:

SEE EDITING INSTRUCTION NO. 1 IN THE EVALUATIONS FOR CAUTIONS ABOUT
NAMING PRODUCTS AND MFRS.

1. Propeller Fans:

a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp.
b. Carnes Co.
c. Greenheck Fan Corp.
d. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.

2.2 PROPELLER FANS

A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan
blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.

B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with
baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.

C. Cast-Aluminum Fan Wheels: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-
aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.

D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, statically and
dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan
speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.4.
2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.

a. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 100,000 hours.

4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at factory.
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 HP; fixed pitch for use
with motors larger than 5 HP. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 4 01/09/2009


6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.

E. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with nylon
bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed
motors.


C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.


A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.


A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed
of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 5 01/09/2009



B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."

C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation springs.
Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Control."

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical
Identification."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15
Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
Make final duct connections with flexible connector.

B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.

C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including
grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A
and UL 486B.

3.5 ADJ USTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Lubricate bearings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.

B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean
fan wheel and cabinet.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before
startup:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
08-7910 AXIAL FANS
15852 - 6 01/09/2009


3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

B. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Contract Closeout."

C. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

D. Demonstrate operation of products specified in this Section. Conduct walking tour of the
Project. Briefly identify location and describe function, operation, and maintenance of
each product.

08-7910 FIRE DAMPERS
15864 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15864

FIRE DAMPERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. All fire dampers shall meet local cods and the standard of the National Fire
Protection Standards contained in Bulletin 90A. Fire dampers shall be sized so
that the free air space is not l less than the connected duct free air space. Fire
dampers shall possess 1 1-1/2 hour standard fire protection rating in accordance
with NFPA #252.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL - HORIZONTAL AIR FLOW

A. The fire damper frame shall be constructed of such meal that it will be unaffected
by corrosion of high heat. Mechanical parts shall have bronze non-corrosive
pins. When closed, the dampers shall be held closed by a positive catch
arrangement.

B. Fire dampers shall be compatible with firewalls, partitions, or ducts within which
they are to be installed. They shall be complete with a 212 degrees F. fusible
link and link retainer, approved by Municipal authorities having jurisdiction over
these dampers. Blades shall be designed for full 180 rotation on damper closure
without obstruction or attachments so as to provide a vertical fire curtain for
maximum protection.

2.2 MATERIAL - VERTICAL AIR FLOW

A. Where dampers are installed in vertical airflow position, they shall be provided
with stainless steel closure springs and can type blade locks, to assure complete
damper blade closure. The locking device shall be so designed so as to permit
dampers to be reset easily without being removed from partitions, walls or ducts
in which they are installed.

2.3 MANUFACTURER

A. Prefco
B. Air Balance
C. Or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fire dampers in all ducts penetrating fire walls, where required and as
required by local authorities.
08-7910 FIRE DAMPERS
15864 - 2 01/09/2009


B. Provide hinged access openings in ducts with tightly fitted doors to make the
dampers accessible for inspection and maintenance. Access doors shall be
provided at each damper location. See drawings and drawing detail.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP

A. Fire dampers shall be installed so as to provide a barrier to passage of air when
a closed position. Fire dampers shall be installed so they will be self-supporting
in case of duct destruction due to heat. Care shall be exercised when installing
damper frame so that the closing device will not bind.


08-7910 REGISTERS, GRILLES & DIFFUSERS
15867 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15867

REGISTERS, GRILLES & DIFFUSERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Items specified as steel and or aluminum shall be provided with a factory applied
finish.

B. Finish and color is to be selected by the Architect.

C. Items mounted in plaster walls or ceilings shall be provided with plaster frames.

D. See Grille-Register schedule on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS

A. Supply Air Registers (steel) shall be double deflection .66 inch vane spacing,
individually adjustable vanes, vertical vanes at front vanes to be able to give 45
degrees deflection in all four (4) directions include opposed blade damper.

2.2 RETURN AIR & EXHAUST AIR REGISTERS

A. Return Air and Exhaust Air Registers - Fixed horizontal vanes on .66 inch centers
or less (40 degree angle) include opposed blade damper.

2.3 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Ceiling diffusers (steel) adjustable type with opposed blade damper. Blower shall
be fully adjustable. Diffuser shall fit 24" x 24" acoustical tile ceiling with frame to
suit ceiling grid system (contractor to provide blankoffs where 1, 2 or 3-way blow is
required).

2.4 LINEAR SUPPLY AIR REGISTERS

A. Linear supply grilles shall have streamlined blades with 15 degree deflection, 1/8 x
08-7910 REGISTERS, GRILLES & DIFFUSERS
15867 - 2 01/09/2009


3/4 inch on 1/2 inch centers.

B. Fabricate of aluminum extrusions.

C. Provide 1-1/4 inch margin frame with countersunk screw holes.

D. Provide registers with integral gang-operated opposed blade damper with
removable key operator, operable from face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers, grilles, diffusers, etc. where indicated on Drawing.


08-7910 TESTING, ADJ USTING, AND BALANCING

15990 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJ USTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems to produce design
objectives, including the following:

1. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including submains,
branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Measuring sound and vibration.
7. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.


1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to design quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.

15990 - 2 01/09/2009


E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.

J . Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.

K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.

L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing and reporting
the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

M. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

N. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

O. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

P. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

Q. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article below.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3 of this
Section.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as
specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article below. Include a complete set of report forms intended
for use on this Project.

15990 - 3 01/09/2009


D. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit 2 sets of sample testing, adjusting, and balancing report forms.

F. Warranty: Submit 2 copies of special warranty specified in the "Warranty" Article below.


A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by AABC.

B. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by NEBB.

C. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB.

D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and the Architect's
representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures
plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing,
adjusting, and balancing team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance
notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements.
b. Contract Documents examination report.
c. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
d. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

E. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adjusting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the approved
testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.

F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

G. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

15990 - 4 01/09/2009


H. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

I. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent's
standard forms approved by the Architect.

J . Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC national standards.

K. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required
Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

L. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently if
required by the instrument manufacturer.


A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire
testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting,
and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing, adjusting, and balancing
operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The national project performance guarantee specified in this Article shall
not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made

B. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC'S "National
Standards" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing the requirements of the Contract

15990 - 5 01/09/2009


Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent fails to comply with the Contract
Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

C. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing the requirements of the Contract Documents if the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following
provisions:

1. The certified Agent has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of
systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and
equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine project record documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."

D. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including HVAC system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,

15990 - 6 01/09/2009


"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have been
performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and their locations are accessible
and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.

J . Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to verify that they
are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for supply air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine open-piping-system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes,
and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including 2-way valves and 3-way mixing and
diverting valves, are properly connected.
5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.

15990 - 7 01/09/2009


6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
8. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions to
changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
9. Interlocked systems are operating.
10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-by-step
procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC national standards and this Section.

B. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems" and this Section.

C. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

D. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this Project.

E. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings.

15990 - 8 01/09/2009


3.4 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J . Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

3.5 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems. Additional procedures are required for variable-air-volume, multizone, dual-duct,
induction-unit supply-air systems and process exhaust-air systems. These additional procedures
are specified in other articles in this Section.

B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.

15990 - 9 01/09/2009


d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Architect. Make
required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to
accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.

D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.

E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances
of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at the air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.


15990 - 10 01/09/2009


3.6 MULTIZONE SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.

B. Adjust each zone damper to design airflow.

3.7 FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2. Check expansion tank liquid level.
3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at design flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type, unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-
displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Verify with
the pump manufacturer that this will not damage pump. Read pressure differential across
the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the
point on the manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the
intended impeller size.
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump
and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until design water flow is achieved.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on the pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

15990 - 11 01/09/2009


4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than design flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over design flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.9 VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum
flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

3.10 PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS' ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, then balance the secondary system.

3.11 MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper

15990 - 12 01/09/2009


operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers,
and nameplate data.

3.12 CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record
compressor data.

3.13 BOILERS

A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

3.14 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperatures.
2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperatures of entering and leaving air for cooling coils designed for less than
7500 cfm (3540 L/s).
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

3.15 TEMPERATURE TESTING

A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation
within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2 successive 8-
hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings.
Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.


15990 - 13 01/09/2009


3.16 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Verify sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and
correlate with airflow and water-flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input
changes.

G. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J . Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.17 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.18 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices
to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions
to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.


15990 - 14 01/09/2009


B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.19 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-
ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:

1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:

a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.

11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:


15990 - 15 01/09/2009


a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
with single-line diagrams and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
j. Number of belts, make, and size.
k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.

15990 - 16 01/09/2009


d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).
j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).
k. Outside-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils, include the following:

1. Coil Data: Include the following:

a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm o.c.).
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
h. Tube size in NPS (DN).
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).
d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).
h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to the manufacturer's factory
startup equipment reports, include the following:



15990 - 17 01/09/2009


b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW).
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).


b. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Air temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).
h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW).
i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW).
j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F (deg C).
l. Operating set point in Btuh (kW).
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).

I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in
central-station air-handling units, include the following:


b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in Btuh (kW).
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


15990 - 18 01/09/2009



a. Heat output in Btuh (kW).
b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Voltage at each connection.
g. Amperage for each phase.

J . Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data: Include the following:

b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data: Include the following:

a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.


b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. System and air-handling unit number.
b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

15990 - 19 01/09/2009


d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
e. Duct size in inches (mm).
f. Duct area in sq. ft. ( (sq. m)).
g. Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
h. Design velocity in fpm (m/s).
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).
k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:


a. System and air-handling unit identification.
c. Test apparatus used.
d. Area served.
e. Air-terminal-device make.
f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number.
h. Air-terminal-device size.
i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. ( (sq. m)).


b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).
c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).
e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).
g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:


a. System and air-handling unit identification.
c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.


b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa).

15990 - 20 01/09/2009


e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

N. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone
refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include
the following:


b. Location.
c. Unit make and model number.
d. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.
e. Compressor make.
f. Compressor model and serial numbers.
g. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg).
h. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F (deg C).


a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).
c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
g. Condenser water temperature differential in deg F (deg C).
h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
j. Condenser water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
k. Control settings.
l. Unloader set points.
m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa).
o. Suction pressure in psig (kPa).
p. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C).
q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa).
r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C).
s. Oil pressure in psig (kPa).
t. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).
u. Voltage at each connection.
v. Amperage for each phase.
w. The kW input.
x. Crankcase heater kW.
y. Number of fans.
z. Condenser fan rpm.
aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s).
ab. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.
ac. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.

15990 - 21 01/09/2009


ad. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

O. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller size by plotting
the shutoff head on pump curves.


b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).
b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).
d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).
e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).
i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.

Q. Boiler Test Reports: For boilers, include the following:


b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and type.
e. Model and serial numbers.
f. Fuel type and input in Btuh (kW).

15990 - 22 01/09/2009


g. Number of passes.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.


a. Operating pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Operating temperature in deg F (deg C).
c. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).
e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS (DN).
f. Safety valve settings in psig (kPa).
g. High-limit setting in psig (kPa).
h. Operating-control setting.
i. High-fire set point.
j. Low-fire set point.
k. Voltage at each connection.
l. Amperage for each phase.
m. Draft fan voltage at each connection.
n. Draft fan amperage for each phase.
o. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).

R. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

1. Report Data: Include the following:

a. Instrument type and make.
b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.

3.27 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct
unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

16010 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16010

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The "Instructions to Bidders", the standard form of General Conditions of the
"Contract for Construction", the "Supplementary General Conditions", and
Division I requirements are a part of this Specification and together with
applicable notes on Drawings govern all work.

B. The work includes the furnishing by each contractor of all materials, supplies,
labor, equipment, tools, transportation, facilities and services necessary for and
required in connection with or properly incidental to all work as shown on the
Drawings and specified herein or reasonably implied therefore.

C. Electrical Contractor shall firestop all penetrations thru rated assessments with
metacaulk firestop.

1.2 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES

A. It is presumed that the Contractor has visited the site and has familiarized himself
with the conditions under which the work must be carried out before submitting
his bid. No additional compensation and/or extension of time will be allowed on
account or errors or omissions by the Contractor in this connection.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings show generally the arrangement of equipment, but, due to their
small scale, are essentially diagrammatic and do not detail every point at which
exigencies of construction may occur. Should conditions necessitate any
deviation from the general layout shown on the Drawings of if such deviations are
advantageous, Drawings shall be submitted for approval showing the proposed
method of installation and if approved shall become part of the contract to which
they are applied.

1.4 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. These contractors shall obtain all charges in connection with all permits and
inspections, related to their work as required by governing authorities having
jurisdiction and as outlined in the Specifications.


A. Standards and Regulations: The work under the Mechanical sections shall
16010 - 2 01/09/2009


comply with the latest editions of the following applicable Standard Specifications
and Codes.

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
and Air Conditioning Engineers

ACRI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

ASTM American Society of Testing Materials

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AWWA American Waterworks Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association

UL Underwriters' Laboratories

NEMA National Electric Manufacturer's Association

CEC Chicago Electric Code

B. Include all items of labor and material required to comply with such codes in
accordance with the Contract Documents. Where quantities, sizes or other
requirements indicated on the Drawings or herein specified are in excess of
Code requirements, the Specifications and/or Drawings shall govern regardless
of Code requirements.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings

1. Refer to Division 1.

2. Submit shop drawings for all special equipment such as lighting fixtures,
power and lighting distribution panel and cabinets, terminal boxes, special
equipment, and all stock devices, apparatus, equipment, that require
modification before installation.

B. Record Drawings

1. Submit to the Architect two (2) copies of drawings "as built" showing
complete electrical plans, with all changes correctly shown thereon.
16010 - 3 01/09/2009


Drawings shall be mylar sepias.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. The Owner may elect before the date of final acceptance of the work to have
capacity and efficiency tests conducted by a qualified testing organization.
Results to indicate that items of work do or do not meet the requirements of the
drawings and specifications of such items and for the cost of additional work
necessary to meet the specifications.

1. The Architect shall deduct such costs from the final payments to the
contractor.

B. Contractor shall guarantee in writing that all materials, equipment and
workmanship furnished and installed under contract shall be free from defects,
for a period of one (1) year from final date of acceptance and shall further
guarantee to replace any and all such defects occurring within said one (1) year
without cost to the Owner. Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all
manufacturer's guarantees and/or guarantees applicable to equipment provided
by the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials used through this installation shall be the best of their respective
kind. They shall be installed in a neat, accurate, and workmanlike manner and in
a manner to permit the work of other trades to also be installed wherever the
work covered by this Specification meets with or must be considered in
connection with the work of other trades working on this installation. This
workmanship and these materials must be executed and furnished in a manner
entirely satisfactory to the Architect.

B. Wherever in the Specifications a particular article or material is definitely
mentioned, it shall be provided and no substitutions will be allowed, especially
insofar as the submittal of the Base Bid is concerned. Should Contractor desire
to substitute other materials for those specified he may submit these
substitutions in the form of alternates to the Base Bid designating appropriate
additions or deductions for each alternate. Should no alternates be submitted,
the Contract will be entered into on the basis of the specified equipment. Final
approval of all equipment will be by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Layout all work in consultation with the Architect, and in coordination with all
16010 - 4 01/09/2009


trades engaged on the project whenever work of other trades is likely to affect
the electrical installation. Cooperate with all other trades in order to coordinate all
work and eliminate conflicts between this work and that of other trades.

B. Contractor shall confer with the other contractors regarding the locations and
sizes of pipes, conduits, ducts, openings, switches, outlets, in order that there
may be no interferences between installation or the progress of the work for any
Contractor on the building.

C. All electrical wiring, conduits or electrical equipment, which has been installed
without checking for interferences and without thorough coordination with other
trades, shall be moved or relocated without additional expense to the Owner.

3.2 CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all conflicts between this work and that of
other trades, and make the necessary changes in this work without additional
cost to the Owner if work does not comply properly with these requirements.
Compare Drawings with those of the trades before proceeding with any part of
the installation.

B. Minor changes in the location of the outlets, and other items, from those shown
on the Drawings shall be made without charge if so directed by the Architect,
prior to rough-in.

C. All changes or deviations from the Contract, including those for extra or for
additional work, must be submitted in writing for an approval of the Architect. No
verbal orders will be recognized.

3.3 J URISDICTION OF WORK

A. Whenever it becomes necessary for the complete fulfillment of this Specification
for contractor to furnish labor or materials other than that which is generally
accepted by trade agreement or general practice to belong to this particular trade
or branch of work, he shall sublet such work or shall employ workmen regularly
employed to the end that there will be no delay or stoppage of work due to
infringement or alleged infringement of trade agreements as to jurisdiction.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting and patching of masonry, steel or iron work belonging to the new
construction which must be done, in order that the Electrical work may be
properly installed, shall be done by this Contractor. All disturbed construction or
finish must be replaced or repaired to the Architect's satisfaction, at Contractor's
expense. Under no condition must structural work be cut except upon approval
of the Architect.

16010 - 5 01/09/2009


B. In general, cutting through floors, walls, and partitions is to be avoided and only
where absolutely necessary will same be permitted. When it is necessary, cutting
shall be done by Contractor with a power drill in a careful manner and the
openings filled about pipes as directed by the Architect.

3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Contractor shall do all excavating required for his work. All excavations are to be
conducted so that no walls or footings are disturbed or injured in any way.
Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same.

3.6 SCOPE OF WORK - ELECTRICAL

A. Mentioned in these Specifications, indications or reasonable implications on
Drawings whereby articles, materials, operations or methods related to electric
wiring are noted, specified, drawn or described thereby requires that this
Contractor shall execute each such item of work mentioned, noted, specified,
drawn or described and shall provide labor, materials, equipment and
appurtenances required for execution of such work.


08-7910 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16050

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C80-1 Rigid conduit
C80-3 Thinwall conduit
ASTM A165 Electrodeposited coating of cadmium of
steel
B3 Soft or annealed copper wire
B48 Soft rectangular and square base copper
wire for electrical conductors
B496 Compact round concentric-lay stranded
copper conductors
D2937 Standard test for density of soil in place
NEMA AB-1 Molded case circuit breakers
FU-1 Low-voltage cartridge fuses
IS-1.1 Enclosures for controls and systems
KS-1 Enclosed switches
WD-1 General purpose wiring devices
WD-5 Specific purpose wiring devices
UL 98 Enclosed switches
198.4 Class R fuses
514 Outlet boxes and fittings

1.2 REVIEW OF MATERIALS

A. Shop drawings are required for equipment as follows:

1. Lighting fixtures
2. Safety switches, motor starters
3. Panelboards, switchboards, transformers
4. Fire alarm system
5. Generator, Transfer switches
16050 - 2 01/09/2009


6. Door Intercom system
7. Rescue Assistance Intercom System

B. A complete list is required as follows, itemizing materials proposed for use on
the project; for each item show manufacturer and type of model number. Shop
drawings are not required for these items.

1. Conduit
2. Surface raceway
3. Wireway
4. Outlet boxes
5. J unction boxes
6. Building wire
7. Switches
8. Receptacles

C. For the requirement of uniformity, the material and Equipment specified in
Section 16010, General Provisions, shall be grouped together and each group
shall be by one manufacturer throughout the project.

1. Switches and receptacles, both general use and heavy duty, shall be as
specified.

2. Safety switches, manual and magnetic motor controllers, pushbuttons
and contactors shall be Square D, Allen-Bradley, General Electric or ITE.
Heavy duty type.

1.3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS

A. Equipment and fittings required for installation in interior finished areas shall
be factory finished in a manner so as to eliminate field painting.

B. J unction boxes and equipment cabinets shown in such areas and usually
manufactured with a factory prime coat will be painted after installation under
another Division.

C. Hanger rods, brackets, angle supports and straps not usually manufactured
16050 - 3 01/09/2009


with finished coatings will not be painted after installation.

D. Equipment and fittings required for installation outdoors if of ferrous metal shall
be
Cadmium plated, ASTM A165, type NS, after fabrication.

E. Screws, nuts, washers and similar fastenings shall be:

1. Stainless steel for ferrous equipment bodies.

2. Aluminum for aluminum equipment bodies.

3. Brass for copper-base non-ferrous metal bodies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Rigid metal conduit: Steel, hot-dip galvanized inside and outside.

B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Galvanized outside, enamel finish on inside.

C. Flexible conduits (1/2 inch minimum diameter):

1. General use: Flexible metal "Greenfield" conduit: armored cable is not
acceptable.

2. Special use, as shown and described: Liquid tight flex-conduit, with liquid
tight fittings; Anaconda "Sealtite" type UA or equal.

D. Connectors and Fittings:

1. Rigid Steel: Threaded, malleable iron, galvanized of cadmium plated.

2. EMT: Seamless steel construction compression type make, or approved
equal; die-cast fittings of any type are not acceptable.

16050 - 4 01/09/2009


3. Outlet fittings: UL Standard 514, for rigid conduit or EMT; type and size
as required; Appleton "Unilet," Crouse Hinds "Condulet," Pyle National
"Pylet" or equal.

4. Expansion fittings: O.Z. types AX, TX and EXDS as required with copper
bonding jumpers; or equal.

E. Wireway: Steel enclosures, hinged cover having full lay-in facility and with
means for screw fastenings; finish baked enamel.

2.2 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes:

1. Construction:

a. General use, and where recessed, galvanized steel; thickness as
required by NEC.

b. Exposed boxes in wet or damp areas: NEMA 3R watertight.

2. Size: As required NEC, and as shown for special uses.

B. Pull and junction boxes:

1. Material: Galvanized steel; thickness as required by NEC.

2. Size: As shown or as required by NEC.

3. Cover: Flat; attached with no less than four (4) screws.

4. "LB" fittings in lieu of junction boxes. If used, they shall be of the "mogul"
type.

C. Cast boxes:

1. Fitting and cover: cast iron, zinc electro deposited inside and out with
16050 - 5 01/09/2009


lacquer protective coating.

2. Gaskets: rubber or neoprene.

3. Make: Appleton "Unilets," Crouse Hinds "Condulets," Pyle National
"Pylets" or equal.

2.3 BUILDING AND CONTROL WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS

A. Conductors: commercial grade annealed copper having conductivity 98%
based on International Annealed Copper Standard.

B. Marking: outside of insulation stamped at regular intervals with conductor size,
insulation type, voltage and manufacturer's name.

C. Building Wire: 600 volt insulation, allowable ampacity 75 degree C.: conductor
sizes #10 and smaller solid, sized #8 and larger stranded.

D. Fixture Wire: 600 volt insulation, UL type THHN 90 degree C.: conductor
stranded.

E. High Temperature Wire: 600 volt insulation, UL type AVA 110 degree C.:
conductor stranded.

F. Control Wire: 600 volt insulation, UL type THWN 75 degree C.: conductor
solid.

G. Connectors:

1. Branch circuit sizes:

a. Crimp type: one or two piece insulated pressure connectors having
copper splice cap and nylon insulator; Buchanan "Pressure"
connectors, Ideal "Crimp Sleeves" with "Wrap-Cap" or T & B
"Sta-Kon" or equal.

b. Twist-on type: phenolic, nylon or vinyl covered metal body with
expandable coil spring insert; Ideal "Super Nut" or "Wing Nut",
16050 - 6 01/09/2009


Minnesota Mining "Scotchlok", T & B "Piggy" or equal.

2.4 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Heavy duty, NEMA KS-1 type HD, UL 98.

B. Construction: Blades visible in OFF position with door open, lugs front
removable, UL listed for wire specified, current carrying parts shall be
electro-plated.

C. Mechanism: Single-throw, fusible; sizes up to 600 A., converted with rejection
clips for fuses; quick-make, quick-break, switch handle integral with box;
arrangement for padlocking in open or closed position; cover interlock voidable
for inspection and maintenance.

D. Ratings:

1. Voltage: 240 or 600 v.a.c. for two pole, three pole, and three wire or four
wire S/N applications.

2. Current: as shown for general use and feeder switches.

3. Horsepower: to suit motor applications and to hold required fuses.

4. Withstand: fault current 200,000 amp. RMS symmetrical switch-fuse
combination; break twelve times rated continuous current; carry six times
rated continuous current for 30 second.

2.5 FUSES

A. Fuse types as scheduled below unless otherwise noted: NEMA FU-1.

1. System calculations are based on characteristics of the fuses specified;
consideration of other makes will be given only after submittal of
complete calculations based on characteristics of other Conditions.

2. All fuses for mains current-limiting, non-renewable, 200,000 amp., RMS
16050 - 7 01/09/2009


interrupting capacity.

3. Provide ampere ratings as described in Part 3, and below.

B. 250 volt, 600 ampere and below: (Class R, UL 198.4)
1. Feeder protection: Fast acting high current- limiting manufacturer
Bussman "Limitation" KTN-R.

2. Protection of motors: Dual element, time-delay, moderate current
limiting: Manufacturer - Bussman "Fuseton" FRN-R or high current
limiting, Bussman "Low-Peak" LPN-R, size maximum of 125% of
full-load circuit.

C. 250 volt above 600 ampere; Class L, dual-element, time-delay; Manufacturer
Bussmann "Hi-Cap" KRP-C.

D. Furnish fuses as loose equipment.

E. Identification labels as specified.

2.6 ENCLOSURES AND SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Enclosures for safety switches, unit circuit breakers, starters, control stations,
relays and similar equipment.

1. NEMA 1, general-purpose enclosure of code gauge sheet steel is
required unless otherwise shown.

2. NEMA 3R, raintight, where shown in outdoor locations; galvanized sheet
steel, with raintight cover securable in open position.

B. Supporting devices:

1. Structural channel wireway.

a. Material: steel with galvanized or enamel finish, or aluminum 16
gauge for luminaire support, 12 gauge for structural use.
16050 - 8 01/09/2009


b. Minimum size: 1-5/8" for steel, 1-5/8" by 2" for aluminum.

c. Fastening devices: As supplied by wireway manufacturer.

d. Closures: cover strips and end caps as required to make an
approved enclosed wireway.

e. Make: Globe, Harvey Alstrut, Kindorf, Multi-A-Frame, Unistrut or
approved equal.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION MEANS

A. General use labels: adhesive plastic strip with raised characters. Size as
specified
for application. Make Dymo or approved equal.

B. Wiring markers: Plastic coated adhesive tape with printed characters. Make
Brady "Quick Label" or approved equal.

C. Fuse identification: adhesive backed labels, furnished with each size and type
fuse by fuse manufacturer.

D. Engraved plastic plate: laminated melamine plastic, 1/8" thick with contrasting
core, machine engraved to produce white letters in black background; letter
size as shown. Provide positive fastening by screws or rivets.

E. Engraved wall plates: stainless steel as specified for general use plates.
Machine engraved lettering. Size as shown. Black filling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRIOR INSPECTION

A. Inspect all material for damage, improper construction and missing
components upon receipt at job site.

16050 - 9 01/09/2009


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Locate work below slabs on grade, coordinating with work of other trades.

B. Excavate lot work below slabs.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Conduit within buildings:

1. Use of material:

a. General use, dry locations: EMT, (above ceiling or in walls, dry
locations only) rigid; flexible whip 6' maximum.

b. Wet locations: rigid, liquid-tight flexible whip 6' maximum.

c. Connection to motors, transformers and adjustable equipment:
Flexible, 6' maximum length.

d. Connection to motors and adjustable equipment in wet areas:
Liquid-Tight, flexible; 6' maximum length.

2. Size: as required by CEC, Table 4, for allowable ampacity 75 degrees C.
of size and number shown, unless conduit is shown larger, 3/4"
minimum.

3. Location:

a. Exposed on wall and overhead in equipment rooms, unfinished
mechanical and service rooms.

b. No electrical work may be run in or attached to removable
partitions.

4. Support: Use approved devices and hangers spaced to hold conduit
rigidly; perforated strap or wire is not acceptable.
16050 - 10 01/09/2009


a. Conduit mounted on concrete surfaces must be supported at least
1/4 inches away from surface.

b. Attachment to other pipes, ceiling support wires or ducts if not
acceptable.

c. Use of wood plugs in masonry is not acceptable.

d. Install straight runs; exposed work parallel to wall and floor lines.

e. Pitch to provide drainage in wet areas.

f. Make bends without injury to conduit or reduction in diameter.

g. Ream all field-cut ends.

h. Install no conduit with 6 inches of hot water piping.

5. Installation in concrete slabs and encasements:

a. In structural slabs; conduit size shall not exceed that which allows
1-1/2" minimum concrete coverage, top and bottom.

b. Spacing: Minimum spacing between conduits, three times the
diameter
of the largest conduit.


08-7910 CONDUITS
16111 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16111

CONDUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Conduit and couplings

B. Flexible conduit

C. Non-metallic ducts


A. Regulatory Requirements

1. Chicago Electrical Code, CEC

a. Comply with NEC/NFPA No. 71 as applicable to construction and
installation of electrical conduit.

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, NEMA

a. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to
non-metallic duct and fittings for underground installation.

3. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL

a. Provide electrical conduit listed and labeled by UL.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide color-coded end-cap thread protectors on exposed threads of
threaded metal conduit.
Storage:

1. Store pipe and tubing inside and protect from weather.
08-7910 CONDUITS
16111 - 2 01/09/2009


2. When necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above grade and
enclose with durable, watertight wrapping.

B. Handle conduit and tubing carefully to prevent bending and end damage and
to avoid scarring the finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Conduit
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation
2. Wheatland Tube Company, Inc.
3. Steelduct Conduit Products

B. Couplings

1. Appleton Electric Company
2. Crouse-Hinds Company
3. Killark Electric Manufacturing Company

C. Flexible Conduit

1. Anaconda Metal Hose
2. I.B.C. Corporation
3. Electri-Flex Company

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Conduit

1. Rigid Threaded: Steel, ANSI C80.1; Intermediate Steel, ANSI C80.1.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing: ANSI C80.3

B. Couplings: Threaded, set-screw, liquid-tight, compression gland.

C. Flexible Conduit: Steel armour, flexible plastic jacketed type with liquid-tight
connectors.

08-7910 CONDUITS
16111 - 3 01/09/2009


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Utilize rigid galvanized steel or intermediate metallic conduit in concrete.

B. Utilize electrical metallic tubing in other above-grade locations.

C. Connections:

1. For motors and equipment: minimum 1/2" size, PVC jacketed flexible
conduit and liquid-tight connectors.

2. Flexible conduit sufficient length to avoid vibration transmission.

3. Use 1/2" flexible conduit only for fixture and control wiring.

D. Install conduit and tubing products as indicated, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and applicable requirements of CEC and
NECA, Standard of Installation.

E. Install conduit concealed in all areas excluding mechanical, electrical and
other unfinished rooms, connections to motors and connections to surface
cabinets.

F. Attach conduit with clamps.

G. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work.

H. Do not install conduit larger than 1" in concrete slab, unless indicated
otherwise.

I. Install conduit free from dents and bruises.

J . Plug conduit ends to prevent entry of dirt or moisture.

K. Clean out conduit before installation of conductor.

L. Alter conduit routing to avoid structural obstructions, minimizing crossovers.
08-7910 CONDUITS
16111 - 4 01/09/2009


M. Seal conduit with oakum or fiberglass where conduits leave heated area and
enter unheated area.

N. Roof Penetrations:

1. Provide flashing and pitch pockets making watertight joints where
conduits pass through roof or waterproofing membrane.

O. Building Expansion J oints:

1. Install UL listed expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers
where conduits cross building expansion joints.
2. Provide bends or offsets in conduit adjacent to building expansion joints
where conduit is installed above suspended ceiling.

P. Route all exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

Q. Allow minimum 6 inch clearance at flues, steam pipes and heat source.

R. Cap all spare conduits.

S. Provide pull tape in all empty conduits.

08-7910 WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16120

WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCE

A. Requirements of the applicable portions of Section 16010, General Electrical
Requirements, apply to all work under this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide wiring of size and type as called for on drawings or as called for.


A. Shall be of Anaconda, General, Hatfield or American.

B. Shall be UL listed and rated as per CEC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING AND MATERIALS

A. Conductors shall be #12 copper or larger except control wires which may be
#14 copper.

B. #10 and smaller may be solid or stranded copper.

C. #8 and larger shall be stranded copper.

D. All conductors shall be of minimum sizes called for on drawings and latest
requirements by CEC.

E. Conductor insulation shall be:

1. 600 volt THNN/THWN for all dual rated service, panel feeders,
underground
16120 - 2 01/09/2009


and exterior work, at warm or hot equipment, valves and controls and
near any hot surface unless otherwise noted.

2. 600 volt THNN/THWN #14, #12 only, in all other areas except as
otherwise noted.

3. No substitutes for specified conductor insulation shall be allowed.

F. Provide separate green insulated grounding wire in all conduits. Do not use
conduit for grounding. Drawings may not show ground wire. Where not shown,
include as part of base work.

G. Wiring for special systems (other than power) shall conform to system
manufacturer's standards or requirements as to size, type, insulation, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. #8 and smaller conductor joints shall be thoroughly cleaned to bright metal and
joined with UL listed pressure type connectors and connector covers.

B. Conductors larger than #8 shall be thoroughly cleaned to bright metal and
joined with split bolt connectors.

C. All exposed wires, clamps or connectors shall be completely insulated with
PVC electrical tape or rubber and friction tapes.

D. All joints must be made in boxes where they will be accessible.

E. Pull or junction boxes must be provided as required to facilitate installation of
conductors.

F. Support of vertical conductors shall be in accordance with CEC.

G. All branch circuit wires shall be permanently identified with circuit numbers,
securely fastened to wire at cabinets at the time wires are pulled in and tested.
Identification shall not be removed for any reason.

16120 - 3 01/09/2009


H. Sufficient wire shall be left at each junction box and outlet to accommodate
future taps.

I. Color code all wiring using the same color as phase throughout building as
follows (120/208 Volt):

1. Phase A - Black
2. Phase B - Red
3. Phase C - Blue
4. Neutral - White
5. Ground - Green
6. #8 and larger may be identified with approved color tapes.


08-7910 PULL AND J UNCTION BOXES
16131 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16131

PULL AND J UNCTION BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDES

A. Base Bid:

1. Electrical Contractor:

a. Pull boxes
b. J unction boxes
c. Outlet boxes

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Specified Elsewhere

1. 16111 - Conduit
2. 16120 - Wires and Cables
3. 16140 - Wiring Devices


A. Regulatory Requirements

1. Chicago Electrical Code CEC

a. Comply with CEC/NFPA No. 70, as applicable to construction and
installation of electrical boxes and fittings.

2. Underwriter's Laboratories, UL:

a. Boxes and fittings listed and labeled UL.
B. References:

1. National Electrical Contractor's Association, NECA:

16131 - 2 01/09/2009


a. Comply with applicable portions of NECA, Standard of Installation.

2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, NEMA:

a. Comply with NEMA standards as applicable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Boxes:

1. Appleton Electric Company
2. Raco, Inc.
3. Thomas and Betts Company, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Pull Boxes and J unction Boxes

1. Pull boxes and junction boxes: CEC construction with screw or hinged
cover.

2. Flush mounted pull boxes: Overlapping covers with flush head cover
retaining screws, prime coated.

B. Outlet Boxes

1. Boxes:

a. Hot dipped galvanized, 1.25 oz. per square foot or cadmium plated.

2. Interior Boxes:

a. Pressed sheet steel, blanked for conduit.
b. Provide attached lugs for locating.

3. Exterior Boxes:

a. Cast aluminum, deep type, corrosion proof fasteners, water tight,
16131 - 3 01/09/2009


gasketed with threaded hubs.

4. Ceiling Boxes:

a. 4 inch octagon boxes for 1 fixture, including fixture studs and
maximum 2 connecting conduits.

5. Flush Mounting in Walls:

a. Boxes with matching plaster cover for single or two gang outlets.

b. Two gang box or larger or deep masonry box for conductors,
conductor joints, conduit terminations and wiring devices.

6. Surface mounted: 4 inches square.

C. Conduit Bodies

1. Galvanized or aluminum cast-metal of type, shape and size to fit each
respective location.

2. Constructed with threaded conduit ends, removable cover and
corrosion-resistant screws.

D. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts

1. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures,
conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, type and size to
suit respective use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Pull Boxes and J unction Boxes:

1. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above removable ceilings or
storage areas.

2. Where mounted on conduit floor stubs, provide independent anchorage
16131 - 4 01/09/2009


to floor to prevent fitting movement.

B. Outlet Boxes:

1. Mount outlet boxes flush in areas other than mechanical rooms, and
above removable ceilings.

2. Adjust position of outlets in finished masonry walls to suit masonry
course lines.

3. Do not install boxes back-to-back in same wall.

4. Masonry walls:

a. Coordinate cutting of masonry walls to achieve neat openings for
boxes.

b. Locate boxes in masonry walls so that only corner need be cut
from masonry walls.

5. Do not use sectional or handy boxes unless specifically requested.

6. For boxes mounted in exterior walls, make sure that there is insulation
behind outlet boxes.

7. Adjust outlet mounting height to agree with required location for
equipment served.

C. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have
been removed.

D. Support all boxes independently of conduit.


08-7910 WIRING DEVICE
SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCE


1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide wiring devices as scheduled on drawings and as called for.

B. Provide plates for each wiring device.


A. Shall be of Leviton Decora Series.

B. Shall be UL listed and rated as per CEC.

C. In general, devices throughout shall be the same manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WIRING DEVICE MATERIALS

A. Switches shall be quiet type, rated 20 amps at 120 volts, mounted 48" above
floor color shall be white or as selected by Architect.

B. Duplex convenience outlets shall be grounding type, rated 20 amps at 120
volts,
mounted 15" above floor unless otherwise noted. Color shall be white or as
selected by the Architect.

C. Ground fault interrupter - GFI, receptacle shall be Leviton. Color shall be white
as selected by the Architect.

16140 - 1 01/09/2009


08-7910 WIRING DEVICE
2.2 FINISH PLATE MATERIALS

A. Plates for boxes, switches, outlets, devices, etc., shall be as specified in
Section 16147.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Each outlet, device or piece of equipment of every kind shall be located
approximately as called for and as directed. No outlet shall be installed until its
location has been checked for interference with all plumbing, heating,
ventilating, other work, and with architectural plans. Outlets must be located in
harmony with architectural design of ceiling, walls and floors. Switches must
be located on latch side of doors; outlets must be located to avoid interference
with all other equipment provided under all other contracts.

B. All outlets and devices which do not conform to the above shall be relocated
by Electrical Contractor.

C. No device, piece of equipment, box, fixture, conduit, wiring shall be located
where condensation or fluid leak from a higher pipe, vessel, or tank could drop
on it.

D. Unless otherwise noted, switches, convenience outlets, devices, etc., shall be
fully recessed with boxes and plates properly arranged to cover all cracks or
spaces between boxes and wall finish.

16140 - 2 01/09/2009


08-7910 PLATE COVERS
16147 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16147

PLATE COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide wall plates for single and combination wiring devices of types, sizes,
with ganging and cutouts as indicated or required. Select plates which mate
and match wiring devices to which attached plates shall be furnished with
metal screws for securing plates to devices and in matching colors. Plates and
devices shall match in color unless otherwise directed by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Plastic, White, Decora Series.

2.2 PLATES

A. Flush mounting plates: Bevelled type with smooth rolled outer edge, stainless
steel.

B. Surface box plates: Bevelled, steel, pressure formed for smooth edge to fit
box.

C. Weatherproof plates: Cast metal, gasketed, for receptacles provide spring
loaded gasketed doors.

D. Where two-gang boxes are required for single gang devices, provide special
plates with device opening in one gang and second gang blank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cover plates on wiring devices as required.

08-7910 PLATE COVERS
16147 - 2 01/09/2009


08-7910 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

16400 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16400

SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Contract Agreement, any
Supplementary Conditions and all Division 1 Sections, apply to work of
this section. All Contractors shall be responsible for the review of and
adherence to these documents.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Provide all service and distribution as shown and specified. Work of this
section shall include all accessories and appurtenances required for a
complete installation.

1.3 STANDARDS

A. All work shall comply with the following codes:

1. Chicago Electrical Code

2. State and Local Codes

B. All materials and equipment shall be new and shall conform to NEMA,
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., ANSI and IPCEA Standards where
applicable standards have been established, except as noted otherwise
per Drawing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit vendor shop drawings for panelboards, main distribution &
transformers

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION

2.1 PANEL AND CABINETS

A. See Section 16160.

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. All safety disconnect switches shall be fused or unfused as noted, Type "A", in
NEMA-1 enclosures. Disconnect switches mounted at exterior locations shall
be weatherproof, in NEMA-3R enclosures. (See Section 16170.)

16400 - 2 01/09/2009


2.3 IDENTIFICATION NAME PLATES

A. All electrical service equipment including disconnects, starters, panels,
cabinets, pull boxes, etc., shall be identified on the front cover or trim
with its name and/or designation number or letter as shown on the
drawings and with the voltage available within the panel, as indicated on
the following example.

Panel LP
120/208 Volt
1 Phase/3 Wire

B. Identification shall be in the form of approved laminated
(black-white-black) plastic name plates. Name plates shall be securely
fastened to each piece of equipment by use of machine or approved
cement or adhesive.

2.4 FUSES

A. This electrical contractor shall furnish and install fuses in all fuseholders
when equipment is ready to be energized. Electrical contractor shall
replace those fuses burned out in testing and normal operation of the
equipment.

B. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. Fuses shall be Bussman,
dual element type, 0-600 Ampere FRN-R or FRS-R, 601-6000 Ampere
KRP-C fuses.

C. All fuses used for motors shall not be in excess of 125 percent of the
name plate rating of the motor.

D. This electrical contractor shall furnish to Owner 10% (minimum of three)
of each size and type of all fuses installed. Furnish and install Bussman
spare fuse cabinet #SFC to store the above spares, wall mounted
adjacent main switchboard.

2.5 TEMPORARY SERVICE

This contractor shall furnish and install the temporary service to keep
facility fully functional during construction. Provide temporary lighting
and power for use in construction areas including open branch circuit wiring
complete with sockets, lamps and receptacles with ground fault devices
as required by OSHA Code. Temporary service is to be 200 amp. capacity
having not less than sixteen (16) circuits. The Contractor is to provide not less
than one (1) ceiling outlet and one (1) receptacle for every 600 square feet of
floor space.

16400 - 3 01/09/2009


Temporary wiring shall also include a 240 volt line to point reasonably
convenient to the general location of all heavy power tools.

C. Cost of electric power used during construction of this building shall be
paid by General Contractor. This contractor shall furnish, install and
maintain the temporary wiring, including the meter, as required.

C. This contractor shall remove all temporary wiring upon completion of the
work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install where shown on Drawings and as required by local Codes and
Ordinances.


08-7910 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL
16403 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16403

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide panelboards as indicated on the drawings.

B. Panelboards must be properly hung and straight horizontally and vertically.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as part of shop-drawing manufacturers installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD

A. General:

1. Contractor shall furnish and install a main distribution panel as indicated
on the Drawings. Service rated.

2. The bussing shall be 98% conductivity copper and all bars shall be silver
plated for the continuous length of bus. Bus bars shall be braced for short
circuit currents of 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical short circuit
currents.

3. Power distribution panelboards shall be dead-front type equipped with
quick-make, quick-break fusible branch switches with rejection type fuses
and voltage as indicated on the drawings.

4. Panelboard Bus Assmebly: Bus bar connections to the branch circuit
breakers shall be the Distributed Phase or Phase Sequence type.
Three phase, four-wire busing shall be such that any three adjacent
single pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three
different phases in such a manner that two or three pole breakers can be
installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly
shall be copper and plated.

5. Lugs shall be as required for type and size of wire being used.

6. Panelboard assemble shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity
and gauge of steel shall be as specified in U.L. Standard 30 for cabinets.
Wiring gutters shall be sized in accordance with U.L. Standard 67.
Cabinet shall be painted ANSI gray.

16403 - 2 01/09/2009


7. Use twin units for circuits up to and including 100 ampre sizes.

8. U.L. Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories
and bear the UL label. Manufacturers shall be Square D, or General
Electric.

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. All safety disconnect switches shall be fused or unfused as noted in NEMA-1
enclosures. Disconnect switches mounted at exterior locations shall be
weatherproof, in NEMA-3R enclosures. (See Section 16160.)

2.3 IDENTIFICATION NAME PLATES

A. All electrical service equipment including disconnects, starters, panels, cabinets,
pull boxes, etc., shall be identified on the front cover or trim with its name and/or
designation number or letter as shown on the drawings and with the voltage
available within the panel, as indicated on the following example.

Panel
120/208 Volt
3 Phase/4 Wire

B Identification shall be in the form of approved laminated (black-white-black)
plastic name plates. Name plates shall be securely fastened to each piece of
equipment by use of screws or approved cement or adhesive.

2.4 TEMPORARY SERVICE

A. This contractor shall furnish and install the temporary service for light and power
use during construction, including open branch circuit wiring complete with
sockets, lamps and receptacles with ground fault devices as required by OSHA
Code. Temporary service is to be 200 amp. capacity having not less than sixteen
(16) circuits. The Contractor is to provide not less than one (1) ceiling outlet and
one (1) receptacle for every 600 square feet of floor space. Temporary wiring
shall also include a 240-volt line to point reasonably convenient to the general
location of all heavy power tools.

B. Cost of electric power used during construction of this building shall be paid by
General Contractor. This contractor shall furnish, install and maintain the
temporary wiring, including the meter, as required.

C. This contractor shall remove all temporary wiring upon completion of the work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. The electrical service and distribution system shall be installed as shown on the
drawings and in accordance with the National Electric Code and the paragraph
16403 - 3 01/09/2009


Installation in section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods of these
specifications.

Provide a detailed manual complete with all operating instructions, maintenance
procedures and a complete list of all parts.


08-7910 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16410 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers
used for the following:
1. Service disconnecting means.
2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection.
3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.
1.
2. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and
toggle switches used for disconnecting means.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
B. RMS: Root mean square.
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
16410 - 2 01/09/2009


a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Current and voltage ratings.
c. Short-circuit current rating.
d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
C. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to
include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements
specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit
breakers.
3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment
access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
the following:
the following:
16410 - 3 01/09/2009


1. Fusible Switches:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D Co.
2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
c. Klockner-Moeller.
d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
e. Square D Co.
3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip:
d. Square D Co.
4. Molded-Case, Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:
d. Square D Co.
5. Integrally Fused, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
d. Square D Co.
2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with
cover in closed position.
2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available
fault currents.
16410 - 4 01/09/2009


1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug;
with the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I
2
t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through
ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral
limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening
or on opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5 -mA trip
sensitivity.
7. Molded-Case Switch: Molded-case circuit breaker without trip units.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of
conductors.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75
percent of rated voltage.
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
16410 - 5 01/09/2009


B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
enclosures before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods ."
B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground
continuity to main electrical ground bus.
B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control
and indication devices.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
16410 - 6 01/09/2009


A. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-
case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.6 ADJ USTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist
in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

08-7910 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
16420 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16420

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ac general-purpose controllers rated 600 V and less that are
supplied as enclosed units.
1. Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" for monitoring and
control of motor circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Transient Voltage Suppression" for low-voltage power,
control, and communication surge suppressors.
3. Division 16 Section "Fuses" for fuses in fusible switches.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and
manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.
1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a. Enclosure types and details.
b. Nameplate legends.
c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
d. UL listing for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in combination
controllers.
e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices in combination controllers.
16420 - 2 01/09/2009


2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
C. Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers and components to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:
1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed
components.
2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been
installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor
nameplate full-load currents.
E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors
have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor
running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
enclosed controllers, including clearances between enclosed controllers, and for
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to
prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes,
water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
B. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect from
weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose
packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of
sufficient wattage to prevent condensation.
16420 - 3 01/09/2009


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and
panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices
and control circuits to which they connect.
E. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with
ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty
cycle of motor and load.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
the following:
the following:
1. Manual and Magnetic Enclosed Controllers:
b. General Electrical Distribution & Control.
c. Rockwell Automation Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group.
d. Siemens/Furnas Controls.
e. Square D Co.
16420 - 4 01/09/2009


2.2 MANUAL ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with toggle action and overload
element.
2.3 MAGNETIC ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with a control
power transformer of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and
control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect
switch.
1. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with
rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2
protection according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
2. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch.
3. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with
field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1,
unless otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty
type.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a
factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in
depressed position with control circuit open.
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
16420 - 5 01/09/2009


E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
enclosed controllers before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and
characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of
motor, drive, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting
controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for general
installation requirements.
B. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel
channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks
complying with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
C. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases complying with Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with
requirements in Division 16 Section "Fuses."
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
16420 - 6 01/09/2009


A. Identify enclosed controller components and control wiring according to Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 16 Section
"Conductors and Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where
applicable.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and
automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-
pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 16 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field
quality-control testing:
C. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control
testing:
D. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection indicated in
NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16.
16420 - 7 01/09/2009


2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting
and adjusting solid-state controllers.
F. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1. Test procedures used.
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
3.8 ADJ USTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean enclosed controllers internally, on completion of installation, according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air
to assist in cleaning.
3.10 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. Verify that enclosed controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed
controllers.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting
and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and
schedules.
16420 - 8 01/09/2009


2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation
4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days'
advance notice.

08-7910 PANELBOARDS

16442 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16442

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide panelboards as indicated on the drawings.

B. Panelboards must be properly hung and straight horizontally and vertically.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as part of shop drawing manufacturer installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING OR RECEPTACLE PANELBOARD

A. Furnish and install circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard
schedule and where shown on the Plans.

B. Panelboard shall be of a dead front safety type, equipped with thermal magnetic
molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the
schedule. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic,
trip indicating and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Connections to
the bus assembly shall be BOLT-ON.

C. Panelboard Bus Assembly: Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers
shall be the "Distributed Phase" or "Phase Sequence" type. Three phase, four
wire busing shall be such that any three adjacent single pole breakers are
individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner
that two or three pole breakers can be installed at any location. All current
carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be copper and plated.

D. U.L. Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear
the UL label. Manufacturers shall be I.T.E., Siemens, Cutler-Hammer or Square
D.

E. Where panelboard is used as service entrance equipment, they shall be labeled
as suitable for that purpose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The Electrical service and distribution system shall be installed as shown on the

08-7910 PANELBOARDS

16442 - 2 01/09/2009


drawings and in accordance with the Chicago Electrical Code and Paragraph -
Installation in Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods of these
Specifications.

08-7910 GROUNDING

16450 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16450

GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCE


1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide and install all materials for a complete grounding system in accordance with
the Chicago Electrical Code and all applicable local codes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Materials used for grounding conductors shall be as called for in Chicago Electrical
Code, Article #250.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GROUNDING

A. All convenience outlets, switches, fixtures, boxes, and plates in damp locations or
outdoors shall be fully grounded by a separate green grounding conductor.

B. Conduit shall not be used for grounding, provide insulated grounding conductor in
all conduits.
08-7910 GROUNDING

16450 - 2 01/09/2009


C. All new panelboard feeders to include grounding conductor from switchboard to panelboard.

08-7910 FUSES
16491 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16491

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work included by Electrical Contractor:

1. Furnish and install all the fuses to the main service distribution panel, as
indicated.

2. Provide fuses to equipment as required.


A. Qualifications:

1. Contractor: Use sufficient electricians and competent supervisors in the
execution of the work to ensure proper and adequate installation.

1.3 J OB CONDITIONS

A. Make sure that electrical work may be installed in strict accordance with all
specified codes and regulations and the approved shop drawings.

B. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect/Engineer in
writing.

C. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide Contractor's one-year warranty in accord with General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
08-7910 FUSES
16491 - 2 01/09/2009


A. Fuses for main switches of circuit capacity 601 Amperes and greater shall be
U.L., Class L, rated for 600 volt, and have a 200,000 Amperes interrupting
capacity in symmetrical RMS.

B. For distribution panels or motor circuits use UL Class RKI, dual element with
time delay for circuits up to 600 ampere capacity, with interrupting capacity of
200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

C. Ascertain proper size for protection of equipment.

D. Provide three spare fuses for each size but not less than three. Store in metal
cabinet labeled "Spare Fuses" and fasten on wall in the main Electrical Room.

E. Fuses shall be Bussman.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LAYOUT

A. Lay out the electrical system in careful coordination with the approved shop
drawings to complete the system properly.


08-7910 LIGHTING
16500 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16500

LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following items as specified herein
and indicated on the drawings.

1. Lighting fixtures, with lamps and ballasts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION

2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

A. Furnish and equip all lighting outlets with lighting fixtures in accordance with
the schedule shown on the drawings. All lighting fixtures shall be of the type,
quality, finish and manufacture listed. All fluorescent fixtures shall have
electronic type ballast and meet NEMA Class "P" ballast requirements.

B. Contractor's attention is called to the type of ceiling construction, so that he
can furnish proper and sufficient support for all fixtures as required.

C. No breakable part of light fixtures shall be installed until so ordered by the
Architect or his representative.

2.2 LAMPS

A. Furnish and equip all lamp holders with the proper size and type of H.I.D.,
incandescent and fluorescent lamps, upon the completion of the work. See
light fixture schedule.

B. All incandescent lamps shall be rated 130 volt.

C. All rapid start fluorescent lamps shall be General Electric, Sylvania, or
Westinghouse (T8 Lamps SPX35).

08-7910 LIGHTING
16500 - 2 01/09/2009


2.3 BALLASTS

A. All fluorescent lighting fixtures using 32 watt, T-8 electronic lamps shall be
furnished with high power factor series type, electronic ballasts, sound rated
"A". These electronic ballasts shall contain the ETL and UL seals, Class "P"
rated.

B. Provide proper ballast for number of lamps (EX) 4 lamp - ballast if not switched
in half.

C. All ballasts shall be as manufactured by EBT, Advance or Motorola.


08-7910 EXIT/EMERGENCY LIGHTING
SECTION 16615

EXIT/EMERGENCY LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following items as specified herein
and indicated on the drawings.

1. Emergency, exit lighting and security lighting systems.

B. Related work specified elsewhere.

1. Basic materials and methods: Section 16050

2. Lighting: Section 16500

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Emergency and Exit Lighting

A. Furnish and install a complete emergency and exit lighting system as required
by the Chicago Electrical Code, NFPA, and all applicable local codes with
separate conduit, wiring, fixtures, as indicated on the plans.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install where shown on Drawings and as required by local codes and
ordinances.

16615 - 1 01/09/2009


08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire alarm systems for the following:
1. New addressable fire alarm systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.
B. LED: Light-emitting diode.
C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
A. A new microprocessor controlled fire detection and alarm system.
A. Comply with NFPA 72.
B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:
1. Manual stations.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Smoke detectors.
4. Duct detector
C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 2 01/09/2009


1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.
2. Identify alarm at the FACP.
3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
4. Activate voice/alarm communication system.
5. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm
mode.
6. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was
initiated.
D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or
actions:
1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line,
and notification-appliance circuits.
2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-
initiating devices.
3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.
4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.
5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.
6. A break in standby battery circuitry.
7. Failure of battery charging.
8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.
9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at
the FACP.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.
b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level II.
2. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including
method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of
operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
3. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
4. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire
types and sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for
equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified.
Show wiring color code.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 3 01/09/2009


6. Batteries: Size calculations.
7. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each
detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air
velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is
operating.
8. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and
access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of
sampling tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.
Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
9. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
10. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A,
recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for
mounting at the FACP.
E. Submittals to Authorities Having J urisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements
for submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal
to authorities having jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated
Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to
make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from
authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
F. Documentation:
1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to
NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according
to NFPA 72 to Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction. Format of
the written sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.
a. Hard copies on paper to Owner, Architect, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: Work of this Section be performed by a UL-listed company.
C. Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level II.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 4 01/09/2009


D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
the following:
the following:
1. FACP and Equipment:
a. SIMPLEX
b. NOTIFIER
c. OR EQUAL
2. Wire and Cable:
a. Comtran Corporation.
b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.; a Draka USA Company.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation; a Marmon Group Company.
d. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.
3. Audible and Visual Signals:
a. System Sensor.
2.2 FACP
A. General Description:
1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.
B. Circuits:
1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style 2 5 6 7.
2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A, Style Z.
3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, annunciation, smoke control, shall
occur within 20 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.
4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for
mechanical equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not
required, provided a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical
equipment to shut down.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 5 01/09/2009


C. Smoke-Alarm Verification:
1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP.
2. Activate a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the
detector.
3. Record events by the system printer.
4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.
5. Cancel FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.
D. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying
with ANSI S3.41.
E. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for
supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for
the dc component shall be from the ac supply.
F. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP
after initiating devices are restored to normal.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and
activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device
is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification
appliances until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is
operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
G. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of
initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The
FACP and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If
testing ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall
automatically return to normal.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm,
trouble, and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm
communicator transmitter and telephone lines.
I. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.
Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory
signal supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the
24-V dc source.
1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80
percent of the power-supply module rating.
2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at
the service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with
"FIRE ALARM SYSTEM POWER."
J . Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger
and an automatic transfer switch.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 6 01/09/2009


1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.
2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.
K. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a
plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and
describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional
operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.
2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES
A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating
instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation.
Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide
manufacturer's surface back box.
1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass type. With integral addressable
module, arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or
trouble) to the FACP.
2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, breaking-
glass type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-
station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at
the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates
an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm
operation.
2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A. General Description:
1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in
the fixed base for connection of building wiring.
3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when
tested according to UL 268A.
C. Ionization Smoke Detector:
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 7 01/09/2009


1. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. Self-
compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot smoke obscuration when
tested according to UL 268A.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration
when tested according to UL 268A.
2. Ionization Smoke Detectors:
a. Sensor: Responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion.
Self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions.
b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 0.5 and 1.7 percent/foot smoke obscuration
when tested according to UL 268A.
3. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
5. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall
be designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed
base for connection to building wiring.
a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied
detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for
Type 4X.
6. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after
actuation to restore them to normal operation.
7. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and
power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station
where indicated.
8. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for
the specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.
2.5 HEAT DETECTORS
A. General: UL 521 listed.
B. Heat/Smoke Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of
135 deg F or smoke, unless otherwise indicated.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 8 01/09/2009


1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a
fixed temperature of 135 deg F.
1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of
90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.
C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal
white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.
1. Rated Light Output: 75 candela.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
2.7 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER
A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.
B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from
the FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset
number for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s),
the signal is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where
supervising 2 lines, if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds,
the unit initiates a local trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of
telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. When
telephone service is restored, unit automatically reports that event to the central
station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.
C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery
capacity is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.
D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central
station.
2.8 WIRE AND CABLE
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 9 01/09/2009


A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with
NFPA 70, Article 760.
B. Signaling Line Circuits: not less than No. 18 AWG.
C. Notification Circuits: Not less than No. 14 AWG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:
1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.
2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction,
and for high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in
NFPA 72.
3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and
recommendations in NFPA 72.
B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air
opening.
C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes
so they extend the full width of the duct.
D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector that is not
readily visible from normal viewing position.
E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling.
Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating
mechanism concealed behind a grille.
F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and
at least 6 inches below the ceiling.
G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
H. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the
finished floor.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring according to the following:
1. NECA 1.
2. TIA/EIA 568-A.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 10 01/09/2009


B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 16 Section
"Raceways and Boxes."
1. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm
system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not
be used for any other wire or cable.
C. Wiring Method:
1. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring
associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.
D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors
as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any
enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-
on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets,
or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building
power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for
supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-
initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire
alarm system junction boxes and covers red.
G. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 3/4-inch conduit between the FACP and
the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting
wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 16
Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground
wire from main service ground to the FACP.
08-7910 FIRE ALARM
16721 - 11 01/09/2009


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement
using the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in
NFPA 72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted
under the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm
Systems program at Level II.
3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built
drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly
located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning
tests.
4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in
NFPA 72.
a. Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including
demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in
Appendix A in NFPA 70.
3.6 ADJ USTING
A. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire
alarm system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. .
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and
devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

08-7910 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
16725 - 1 01/09/2009


SECTION 16725

EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS

A. The contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the
installation of a complete computerized Emergency Call System and Alarm Moni-
toring System.

B. The system shall be electrically supervised, connected, tested and left in first
class operating condition.

C. The system shall be guaranteed for a period of one year. Provide labor, re-
placement parts, and materials necessary to repair defects, unless damage or
failure is cause by misuse, abuse or accident.

PART 2 PRODUCT OPERATION

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Senior Sentry manufactured by CISCOR,
as distributed by Sound Incorporated (630)369-2900 no exceptions will be al-
lowed.

2.2 OPERATION OF CPU, DATA CONTROL MODULES AND COMPONENTS

A. The project described in this specification includes the system equipment
specified, installation and necessary control wiring. The initial installation
shall include all computer hardware and peripheral equipment, data col-
lection equipment and detection devices for a completely operable sys-
tem in accordance with these specifications.

B. The system shall be micro-computer based and use digital communica-
tion.

C. The central computer (CPU) shall be located in the main building and
shall be equipped with a printer for hardcopy of reports for all system ac-
tivity. Location of the controls, alarm actuating devices and audible sig-
naling devices shall be as shown on the plans.

D. STAND-BY POWER: The system shall be equipped with battery standby
for system operation during commercial power outages and the system
shall instantly revert to the batteries upon the loss of 60 Hz, 120V supply.
When commercial power is restored, the system shall revert back to the
120V 60Hz supply and be fully operational without any operator interven-
tion or manual restart procedures.

E. SUPERVISION: A trouble condition shall be generated when the central
computer or any peripheral electronic equipment experiences AC failure
16725 - 2 01/09/2009


or a low battery condition or if any field electronic equipment should fail.
The system shall back up the configuration database onto the hard drive.
A copy of the configuration database shall also back up to a Zip disk
every 24 hours.

F. CENTRAL COMPUTER: The system computer shall be equipped with a
keyboard and 15 VGA LCD screen video monitor for displaying all active
emergency conditions, system data, Courtesy Check-In and other events;
as well as entering and modifying resident data. A printer shall, on de-
mand, provide a hard copy report of user specified events. The console
shall also be used for system testing and service. The computer shall
make an automatic backup of the configuration database and the histori-
cal archive database on a daily basis.

G. INPUTS: The system capacity shall have the capacity of monitoring at
least 7,000 hardwired zones and 65,000 wireless transmitter zones with
user definable time zones and holiday zones for shunting alarm activation
which shall be independently assignable by zone. Zones shall be capa-
ble of being independently defined as normally open or normally closed.

H. OUTPUTS: The system shall be capable of providing at least 3,500 relay
outputs.

I. MODEM: The system shall be equipped with a telephone modem and
remote communications capability for remote diagnostics and upgrading.

J . 2-WAY RADIOS: A base radio and hand held portable radios with DTMF
keypads shall be included with the system. Radios shall be available for
"everyday use" by the maintenance and security personnel, but shall be
capturable by the system upon any occasion of a reportable event. The
system shall allow a hand held radio to activate relays for controlling facil-
ity equipment and for the purpose of entering individual acknowledge
codes. The system shall be capable of detecting busy carrier and with-
hold alarm announcements until the channel is clear. The system shall
allow hand held radios to answer facility telephone calls, engage facility
intercom stations and make calls over a standard telephone line to other
telephones.

K. RADIO PARTITIONING: The system software shall be able to assign
alarm announcement to any of 6 available radio channels for the purpose
of grouping radios to alarms.

L. LAST ALARM AUTO DIAL: Upon command from any hand held radio, the
system computer shall be capable of automatically looking up and then
dialing the telephone number of the apartment that was last to generate
any alarm condition. Also, the carrier of a hand held radio shall be able to
call any apartment whether or not an alarm has been received from it by
simply entering the apartment number (i.e. 121). The system shall be ca-
pable of allowing the carrier of a hand held radio to call out on a tele-
16725 - 3 01/09/2009


phone line. The system shall be capable of detecting an incoming facility
telephone call and of patching the call to the 2-way radio network.

M. TELEPHONE INTERFACE: The system shall be capable of calling any
onsite portable telephone system in the event of an alarm. It shall be able
to display a user-defined text string in the caller ID window. Upon answer-
ing the incoming call, the system shall announce the alarm in computer
generated voice derived from a user defined text message. Staff shall be
able to acknowledge alarms by entering their unique staff ID number into
their portable telephone for the purpose of logging who responded to the
alarm.

N. WATCHDOG: The system shall be capable of notifying staff if the com-
puter should fail or the computer shall have the means of automatically
restarting (rebooting).

O. INTERCOM: Activation of an apartment assistance call switch shall cause
an intercom path to open between the apartment and the central console.
The conversation on the part of the resident will be "hands free". A hand
set shall be provided at the central computer for intercom conversation
and additionally any hand held radio shall be capable of accessing the in-
tercom call.

P. FACP INTERFACE: The system shall provide input from the general
building fire alarm control panel serial printer output port. All fire alarm
control events shall be programmable for display and annunciation the
same as for all other events.

Q. REMOTE DIALER: A remote dialer shall be given access to a facility tel-
ephone line for the purpose of initiating a call to staff and supervisory per-
sonnel should a tardy acknowledge and/or tardy restoral event occur.
The dialer shall have phone line seizure capability and shall be capable of
dialing up to four user defined numbers. A pre-recorded voice message
shall be activated upon the answer of any of the calls. Any of the four
numbers may also be assigned to call a digital area wide pager and dis-
play a user defined numeric message. The dialer shall be programmable
for at least 9 repetitions should any of the calls end in a no answer or
busy signal.

AA. PAGERS: The system shall have the capability of transmitting an alpha
numeric alarm description to a proprietary on-site paging system. It shall
be capable of assigning user definable groups of pagers to any alarm in-
put zone.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. CPU (CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT)

1. CENTRAL COMPUTER: The central computer shall be a Pentium
4 (or better) personal computer with minimum 512 megabytes of
16725 - 4 01/09/2009


RAM, 80 Gigabyte hard drive, 128 Mb removable flash drive, LCD
monitor, laser printer and 650va UPS. The UPS shall also provide
surge protection and EMI/RF filtering. If a facility back up genera-
tor is available, contractor shall coordinate with electrical contrac-
tor to provide outlets at the CPU which will be powered by the
back up generator.

2. USB-SERIAL CONVERTERS: Provide Edgeport brand USB to
RS232 serial converters for each COM port needed at the central
computer.

3. RI400 RADIO INTERFACE with LAAD
The RI400 shall provide interface with two (2) base radios and
shall provide access from hand held radios to intercom and tele-
phone activity. Base radio antennae shall be separated by a min-
imum of 50 feet.

4. HAND HELD: Hand held radios shall have an output power of 5
watts and be equipped with DTMF keypads.

B. PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT - HARDWIRED

1. AC-01 ASSISTANCE CALL SWITCHES: Each wall mounted assis-
tance call switch shall be equipped with a brass ball chain. The
switch plate shall have a red LED that lights to indicate the switch has
been activated. The AC-01 shall mount in a single gang back box.

2. AC-02 ASSISTANCE CALL SWITCHES: Each wall mounted as-
sistance call switch shall be equipped with a push button for acti-
vating the call. A red LED light will indicate that the switch has
been activated. The AC-02 shall mount in a single gang back box.

PART 3 - ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

3.1 INDICATING ALARMS AND EVENTS

A. The system shall provide, at a centrally located attendant console, instan-
taneous alarm annunciation of any and all activations of emergency
switches located in individual apartments and common areas. The sys-
tem shall differentiate between alarm types.

B. The system shall indicate all alarms including those occurring simultane-
ously. Alarm indication shall be audible and visual. Each occurrence of
an emergency alarm or event shall require an acknowledge and then a
reset (non-latching wireless pendants excepted). Each event shall be
stored and printed in English format for later verification. Log entries shall
include:

16725 - 5 01/09/2009


ALARM ACTIVATED: Type, time, date, location

ALARM ACKNOWLEDGED: Type, time, date, location, identity of person
acknowledging by radio, elapsed time from alarm to acknowledge

ALARM RESTORED: Type, time, date, location, elapsed time from alarm
to restoral

C. Audible alarm indication shall be by synthesized speech and shall be op-
erator silenced by the entry of a number sequence at the computer key-
board or on any hand held radio equipped with a DTMF keypad. This en-
try shall cause the computer to log the identity of the person acknowledg-
ing the alarm. The system shall have the capability of capturing the radio
base station and automatically call for help through the use of a synthe-
sized voice feature. The voice announcement shall be user definable by
typing a text string into the software setup screen. The console shall
continue to announce until acknowledged or, with a portable radio, shall
continue to broadcast the alarm type and location until it is acknowledged
by pressing the staff identity code on any hand held radio keypad.

The system shall allow partitioning of alarm events. Up to 6 radio chan-
nels shall be available with the capability of assigning any alarm event to
any channel.

D. Visual alarm indication shall be on an industry standard SVGA color
monitor with display of apartment or zone location, type of event, and de-
scription.

E. The system shall calculate, display, and record the time elapsed between
the initial alarm and the acknowledge and between the initial alarm and
the restoral. The user shall be able to set a required acknowledge time
window and a required restoral time window and if these windows are ex-
ceeded, the system shall generate a tardy acknowledge alarm or a tardy
restoral alarm.

The user shall be able to make a software selection causing the tardy re-
storal alarm to repeat until all pending restorals are removed. The fre-
quency of the repetition shall be user definable from 1 to 30 minutes.

3.2 EVENT RESPONSE INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION

A. Resident or Alarm Information Display: System software shall allow for 1)
the differentiation between the types of inputs, 2) the assigning of resident
name and phone number or common area location descriptive data to
each appropriate input for display on the color monitor during activation.
System software shall allow for the storing and subsequent displaying of
resident emergency medical data. This data shall include, but not be lim-
ited to: resident's nearest relative, physician, hospital or health care facil-
ity, emergency health data, etc. A printout of the resident information
screen shall be available on demand.
16725 - 6 01/09/2009


3.3 EVENT HISTORY ARCHIVAL

A. Alarm/Event History Database: The system shall store the previous
500,000 alarms/events on the hard drive. These archival records shall be
available for search by user defined parameters to include date, time, lo-
cation, or type of alarm.

PART 4 - SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS

4.1 OPERATIONAL AND CONFIGURATION FEATURES

A. Time Zones: The system shall allow for unlimited user defined time zones
for the purpose of shunting or de-activating an alarm input zone for speci-
fied times on specified days. A holiday scheduler shall be provided to by-
pass the time zone scheduler.

B. Arming Groups: The system shall allow arm and disarm of any defined
group or groups of alarm input devices by use of either a maintained key
switch(s) or a numeric digital keypad(s). The system shall allow for any
number of groups or any number of devices in any group within the con-
fines of the number of available hardware zone inputs.

C. Acknowledging Alarms and Events: The system shall require entry of per-
sonal staff ID numbers to acknowledge alarms and events. Entry of staff
ID numbers shall be by hand held radios equipped with DTMF keypads,
at the computer keyboard, and/or by wireless keypad. The system shall
make a record of each acknowledging staff person. The system shall al-
low the configuration of acknowledge groups so that staff persons may be
prevented from acknowledging alarms or events which are not applicable
to them. If the time taken to acknowledge exceeds user defined parame-
ters (e.g. 5 minutes) the system shall create a tardy acknowledge alarm.
Tardy alarms can be programmed to a activate a dialer, email, pager, or
fax.

D. Boolean Logic: The system software shall provide Boolean operators
such as IF/ELSE/AND/OR for the configuration of alarm and event sce-
narios.

E. Timer Events: User defined time events may be used to generate relay
closures, time announcements or other effects.

F. Output: The system shall be capable of outputting any alarms in any
combination to hand held radios, telephones, on-site pagers, subscription
pagers, fax and email.

G. Graphic Display: A software generated graphic display shall be available
to show a customized floor plan of the facility and show devices in alarm.
These shall be indicated by various descriptive icons that are user select-
16725 - 7 01/09/2009


able. The user shall be able to create map display icons as needed and
add them to the map display.

4.2 REPORT GENERATION

A. The software shall be capable of printing user defined reports on demand.
Users shall be able to define reports by at least 4 criteria and sort by 3 le-
vels.

B. The software shall allow export of alarm and event data to an Access da-
tabase which shall be accessible by other users via LAN or WAN.

4.3 MANUAL

A. The entire system manual shall be included in the main computer soft-
ware and it shall be thoroughly indexed and cross-referenced. An addi-
tional How To section shall be provided for end users detailing step by
step instructions for everyday operational situations. Training videos shall
be available for the commonly used How To sections. These videos shall
be computer generated and require no additional equipment to view.

PART 5 SYSTEM DEFENSE AND SUPERVISION

5.1 LIGHTNING AND SURGE RESISTANCE

A. Where all components use the same building all processing equipment,
including the central computer and Data Control Modules shall operate on
a common ground service. With any components not on the same
ground service, the central computer shall be isolated from these compo-
nents by fiber optic cable.

B. Input from any device, such as an assistance call switch or be opto-
isolated from the system rated to at least 5KV. Further, inputs shall be
protected by clamp diodes with a rating of at least 800 volts 1 amp and
varistors.

C. All 120VAC outlets servicing the Senior Sentry shall be fitted with surge
protectors/noise suppressors.

5.2 SUPERVISION

A. Zone wiring for assistance call shall be on a closed loop for circuit super-
vision. All electronic field equipment shall be supervised for failure.
When the Senior Sentry main computer is booted up, it shall automati-
cally check the status of all alarm points indicating which ones are in an
alarm state.

5.3 TROUBLE INDICATORS

16725 - 8 01/09/2009


A. Audible and visual indication of any trouble condition shall be provided at the
central console. A single keystroke by the operator shall acknowledge and
silence the audible trouble indicator. The visual indication display of each ac-
tive emergency/alarm shall remain ON the screen (active) until it has been
restored.

PART 6 - INSTALLATION

6.1 SYSTEM CABLING

A. Use of wire nuts shall not be allowed. Wire to wire connections shall be
made with telephone company approved gel filled low voltage crimp con-
nectors.

B. A telephone modular jack and telephone line shall be provided next to the
computer for modem operation.

1. For LAAD (Last Alarm Auto Dial) operation, either radio or telephone, a
dedicated outside telephone line or extension should be provided with a
modular jack at the computer.

2. The installing company shall be responsible for requesting product cut
sheets, wiring instructions and installation diagrams from CISCOR for all
of the above mentioned CISCOR products prior to the installation of any
aspect of the system including wire.

6.2 TRAINING

The installing company shall provide, as part of this contract, four (4) hours sys-
tem operation training for the facility owner to be presented by a CISCOR factory
technician.

PART 7 - RADIO INSTALLATION

7.1 BASE RADIOS

A. Two base radios shall be provided for use by the central computer. One
base radio shall be for receiving and the second radio shall be set to a dif-
ferent frequency for transmitting. The antennae shall be installed as high
as possible to afford maximum range. The transmit antenna shall be at
least 50 feet from the system computer to avoid complications from in-
duced RF. Care should be taken to see that the antenna is at least 15
feet away from any Senior Sentry wiring. The output power of the trans-
mit base radio should be adjusted to the lowest usable level. The base
radios shall be provided with their own 500 volt/amp back-up battery
16725 - 9 01/09/2009


power supply and shall not be allowed to share the computer's back-up
battery power supply.

B. Hand held radios shall be equipped with a touch tone keypad, spare bat-
tery and charger. They shall have a die-cast aluminum case for durability.

C. Installing company shall be responsible for procuring the FCC site li-
cense.

PART 8 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SUPPLIERS

8.1 TELEPHONE AND MODEM ACCESS
Provide an analog telephone port at the computer location. This can be an ex-
tension on the existing facility phone system or a standard telephone line.

8.2 ETHERNET
Provide an Ethernet port to the facility Local Area Network (LAN).


08-7910 DVR SECURITY SYSTEM

16730 - 1 01/09/2009

1.1.1 Owner: __________ Architect: __________ Contractor: __________ Bonding:__________

SECTION 16730

DVR SECURITY SYSTEM

1 Digital Video Recorder and Remote Video Surveillance
1.1 DVR Server Software Applications
Record, Playback, Live Display, and Remote View. The DVR shall have a full multiplex capability. All
functions shall be performed simultaneously. There shall be no interruption of recording during
playback. The DVR shall store the recorded images in an encrypted digital format on a hard disk drive.
There shall be no limit to the amount of disk space the DVR will use for any and all recording types.
The DVR shall play multiple video images while recording takes place. The DVR shall be capable of
producing live video in digital format from color or black and white analog NTSC or PAL cameras. The
DVR shall be capable of recording in black and white only as an option. The digital output shall be
framed in a graphical user interface that enables a user to manipulate the arrangement of the video at
will. It shall output to a standard SVGA color monitor capable of displaying 1024x768 screen resolution
at 16-bit color depth or higher. The DVR shall have a remote viewing capability that can transmit video
images and accept control from a Personal Computer, designated the receiver. The PC shall send
commands to the DVR (designated the transmitter) through the use of proprietary software. The
receiving PC shall not require any special hardware for video display and playback.
2 Standard Features
Recording
2.1 Continuous Recording
The DVR shall be capable or recording 24 hours, 7 days a week, or by daily schedule. The DVR shall
record directly to internal or external hard drives. Networked drives can be mapped to the DVR for
additional storage space. The Continuous Recording module shall record by dayany part of the day
or all day. Scheduled recording mode shall include a schedule sheet to turn recording on and off.
Continuous recording mode shall have the capability to record 24/7.
All recording modes shall record on a First In, First Out (FIFO) basis. The first recorded file shall be
overwritten when all recording space has been used. The recording shall take place in a cycle,
requiring no action by the user for the first file recorded in the cycle to be the first file taken out of the
cycle.
2.2 Video Motion Detection Recording
The Video Motion Detection Recording module shall record only when the video image has changed.
There shall be 10 separate parts of the video frame that can be activated for Video Motion Detection
Recording in user defined rectangular areas. The Video Motion Detection Recording module shall
provide a method for the masking and for setting different sensitivity for each camera.
Video Motion Detection Record shall have the capability to be set to record 24/7 or only during
specified hours. Video Motion Detection Record shall record on a First In, First Out (FIFO) basis. The

16730 - 2 01/09/2009


first recorded file shall be overwritten when all recording space has been used. The recording shall
take place in a cycle, requiring no action by the user for the first file recorded in the cycle to be the first
file taken out of the cycle.
2.3 Alarm/Event Recording
The DVR shall have the ability to record upon alarm trigger. The trigger can be a dry contact Physical
Input (where dry contact means no voltage in the wires, just metal touching metal, like a push button) or
Video Motion (Whenever the video image changes because of movement). The DVR shall have the
ability to overwrite video that has been recorded on alarm.
Alarm/Event Recording shall have a method for recording to be by any part of the day, or all day.
Alarm/Event Record shall record on a First In, First Out (FIFO) basis. The first recorded file shall be
overwritten when all recording space has been used. The recording shall take place in a cycle,
requiring no action by the user for the first file recorded in the cycle to be the first file taken out of the
cycle.
2.4 Audio Recording
Audio Recording shall take place with any recording type. Audio Recording shall be associated with
recording types and cameras. A microphone that attaches to a 1/8 (.125 mm) RCA jack and speakers
suitable for any PC audio card, or comparable, shall be required. Recording shall take place with any
recording type. As such, it shall be done at all times with Continuous Recording, or on event, such as
with Video Motion. Audio data and video data shall be recorded in the same file on a First In, First Out
(FIFO) basis. The recording shall take place in a cycle, requiring no action by the user for the first file
recorded in the cycle to be the first file taken out of the cycle.
2.5 Audio Over IP
The DVR and Client Software shall provide a method to send audio across a LAN or WAN, using the
Internet Protocol. Audio Over IP shall have adjustable quality levels to vary the data transmission rate.
2.6 Access Rights
The DVR shall provide a method to protect the system configuration from intruders. After the DVR has
been carefully and systematically set up, it must prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the
setup program to stop recording, disable cameras or alarm inputs. User groups shall be used to give
each user specific access to only the features that they are authorized to use.
2.7 Remote Setup
The DVR shall provide a method for connecting to the system via IP or modem and make any change
to the setup that would normally be done locally. Anything that can be done in setup locally shall be
done with remote setup. A fully qualified dealer shall connect to the system remotely and set up the
cameras, recording schedules, alarms, etc. If the communication setup is done before installation,
either at the factory or installing dealers facility, the installer on site can literally set it and forget it.

16730 - 3 01/09/2009


2.8 Alarm Input/Output Control
The DVR shall provide a method to manually trigger an output device, or accept input from a dry
contact trigger. The dry contact trigger shall be of a type that is a circuit with no current running through
it. A push button can be a dry contact trigger as can a pair of wires. Most commonly, window and door
alarm or Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensors shall be used, which are fully compatible with the DVR
with nothing more than wires attaching them to the system.
2.9 PTZ Control
The DVR shall have a Virtual joystick and Speed Control. Most surveillance systems that implement
Pan Tilt Zoom cameras require the use of a separate hardware joystick. The system shall include the
ability to connect a joy stick to the users PC (the Receiver) and pass-through the RS232 commands
from the joystick, in-band with the video, to the DVR, which shall output it as RS232 to the remote PTZ.
The DVR shall include a Virtual J oystick in the user interface. The pan speed of the camera can also
be set up with variable speed slider control from low to high speed. The DVR shall provide a method
for alarms to activate presets. Preset positions shall be programmed into the system, just by pointing
the camera and clicking the mouse. The DVR shall provide a method for the camera to move to any of
the pre-programmed positions whenever an input device is triggered, or if a user selects it.
2.10 Notify
The DVR shall provide a method to sequence Notify events or broadcast them. The DVR shall be able
to call a PC running Client Software Receiver Software when an event occurs. Such events can be
alarms, video motion, video loss, or a soft trigger. The DVR shall be able to call out to several
receivers at the same time.
2.11 Event Log
The DVR shall provide a method for a user to review event activity at any time. Notification events shall
be logged at the transmitter. The Event Log shall contain the date and time that the event occurred, in
addition to the device that triggered it.
2.12 Bandwidth Throttle
The DVR shall provide a method for user-selectable variable bandwidth or fixed bandwidth usage and
control. Bandwidth limit shall be a hard ceiling, not a targeted rate. Bandwidth is the amount of data
that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time. Most corporate networks must manage their
bandwidth carefully. Software that uses network bandwidth, but does not furnish a way to control it,
cannot be installed in some companies. Even if the bandwidth is not set to a specific limit, the DVR
shall not dominate the network. As more bandwidth becomes available, the DVR shall use it. As less
becomes available, the DVR shall back off and reduce the amount it uses. Bandwidth management
shall be provided both on the Receiver and Transmitter ends as well as a separate control for
downloading video clips through the Client Software.
2.13 Built-in CD R/RW Burner
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to back up files to CD/RW and DVD. A
simple process shall be all that is required to put a file on CD, once the image has been retrieved.

16730 - 4 01/09/2009


Video files can be searched for and sent directly to disk. File size will not be limited and the DVR will
continue to ask for additional CDs/DVDs until all selected files are archived should more that 650MB of
files be selected. The CD/DVD shall include a built-in player so that the video can be viewed on any
PC without running additional software (for example, by police and other investigative personnel).
2.14 Hardware WatchDog
The DVR shall include a hardware Watchdog to monitor the system for errors and will reset the system
to restore normal operation. This will re-launch the operating system and DVR software to resume
normal operation.
2.15 Spot Monitor Display
System shall provide spot monitor output of one or more cameras. If multiple cameras are to be
displayed, the user shall be able to select which cameras to display on the spot monitor. The user shall
also be able to specify a dwell time, which is the period of time that video from a particular camera is
displayed on the spot monitor before cycling to the next camera.

Remote Video Surveillance
2.16 Remote control PTZ/Domes
The Client Software shall provide a method to control of Pan Tilt Zoom cameras via software. Control
Preset positions, Focus, Iris and Focus. A remote user shall have full control of the camera without any
hardware interface connected to their PC.
2.17 Remote Alarm Control
The Client Software shall provide a method for a remote user to acknowledge alarm Input triggers, or
manually activate output devices via software interface. A remote user will have the ability to respond
to alarm input triggers by clicking an icon to signify that the alarm has been acknowledged.
Alternatively, the user will be able to trigger an output device at the DVRs location, such as a light or
siren, using the remote viewing software.
Playback
2.18 Playback Search Engine
The DVR shall have a Playback Search Engine to retrieve video files by date & time, camera name,
recording type, transaction number, badge number, POS device name, or searching path.
2.19 Multi-Camera Playback
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to view and play up to 16 cameras
simultaneously. When viewing multiple cameras, the user will be able to click a button to play them all
at the same and pause all at once.

16730 - 5 01/09/2009


2.20 Multi-speed playback
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to playback the video from one to 240
frames per second, or frame-by-frame. A Fast-Forward mode is available during playback.
2.21 Full Screen Playback
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to fill the entire screen with the playback
image.
2.22 Image Download
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to copy entire video files to the Receiver
via modem or network. Video files can be retrieved remotely. The user on the receiving end need not
be concerned about where to store the video, since the local directory for storing files will be pre-
determined when the Client Software Receiver Software is first set up. It will be downloaded in its
original format. Download options include retrieving audio and pre-event/post-event video, if
applicable.
2.23 Playback with Data
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to view Cash Register or ATM
transaction data in a companion window with the video frame. This will be so the data does not
obscure the picture. Every transaction is to be date stamped and saved with the video frames.
2.24 Image Printing
Both the DVR and the Client Software shall provide a method to print out a hard copy of the video
image. A single frame can be printed out with the time, date and camera name. Additional text can be
added anywhere on or around the image by 3rd party software.
3 Optional Modules
3.1 ATM Transaction Recording
ATM Recording shall take place whenever a transaction occurs. DVR shall display the data alongside
the playback window so that the video is not obscured. An advantage over text overlay, which blocks
portions of the screen. Whatever shall appear on the transaction receipt shall be saved with the video.
The DVR and Client Software shall provide a method for the files to be searched by transaction number
in playback. The DVR shall integrate with most ATM machines through the TVC-2101 interface. ATM
Recording shall record on a First In, First Out (FIFO) basis. The first recorded file shall be overwritten
when all recording space has been used. The recording shall take place in a cycle, requiring no action
by the user for the first file recorded in the cycle to be the first file taken out of the cycle.
3.2 Cash Register Recording
Recording shall take place whenever an operator rings up a sale. The Point of Sale Recording module
shall support the following cash register models:
Aloha Electralogics QuikServe Panasonic 7750 Samsung 6500

16730 - 6 01/09/2009


Aloha Spy Fujitsu ICL POSitouch IBM Sharp UP3300
AutoGas Gilbarco GSite POSitouch J avelin Sharp UP5700
Casio QS2000 Micros 3700 Quest Sharp UP700
CCIS Tech Micros SubShop Radiant Squirrel
C-Star Microsoft Retail Radiant Server TDL NCR
Documentor 5000 NCR 745x Samsung 5100 Ruby Verifone
Dresser Wayne
Nucleus
NCR 7454 Samsung 5240 McGunn Smart Safe
Dresser Wayne
Nucleus Base 8
Panasonic 5500 Samsung 650 PAR 3000/4000
Pinnacle Panasonic 7500 MSI
Gilbarco Passport
Pole
The Point of Sale module shall also be capable of capturing transaction data via TCP/IP and XML.
Transaction data shall be displayed in a separate window and not overlaid on the video. Transaction
data and video data shall be recorded in the same file and shall record on a First In, First Out (FIFO)
basis. The first recorded file shall be overwritten when all recording space has been used. The
recording shall take place in a cycle, requiring no action by the user for the first file recorded in the
cycle to be the first file taken out of the cycle. Transaction data shall be searchable with video through
the Client Software.
Application Note: SYS Technologies can integrate support for POS systems that are not listed.
Contact your dealer or Regional Sales Manager for details.
3.3 Video Intelligence (VI) Integration
The DVR shall perform raw processing of images as seen by each camera in the field prior to any
image compression. The result shall be very low bandwidth data which is transmitted to the VI-Server
for further processing. All the system data, including event detection rules and detailed event history,
shall reside on a central database that also provides backup, retrieval, and extensive reporting
capabilities. The VI System shall allow for simultaneous handling of multi-type events, multi-camera
events, sequence of events, and alert levels. The VI System shall have the ability to detect directional
movement, suspicious objects, loitering, missing objects, tailgating, overcrowded areas, etc. The VI
System shall also have the ability to count cars or people. The VI System shall send VI Event
Notifications real time to the Client Software. Recorded Video shall be tagged whenever VI Events are
triggered thus enabling it to later be Searched-based on these VI Events.

4 Hardware
4.1 Image Resolution
320x240
640x480

16730 - 7 01/09/2009


4.2 Frame Rate
From 1 fps to 480 fps
4.3 Communication
POTS, ISDN, LAN, WAN, xDSL, Wireless, T1
4.4 Cameras
4, 8, 16, or 32 cameras per system. NTSC, PAL.
4.5 Alarm I/O
Up to 16 Inputs. 2 Form C Relay Outputs.
4.6 Signal Inputs
BNC Composite Video
4.7 Hardware Watchdog
Monitors system for errors. Resets and restores system to operational state.
4.8 Compression Engine
Proprietary Wavelet
4.9 Storage
Direct to any configuration of Hard Disks

16730 - 8 01/09/2009


5 Electrical Specifications

Video Input 1 Vpp Composite Video, 75 ohm, Unbalanced, Terminated
Video Format NTSC or PAL
Video Output AGP/Horizontal Frequency: 24 KHz - 65 KHz
Vertical Frequency 50 Hz - 100 Hz
Relay Output Max Ratio of Relay 250 V, 15A
Audio Input Computer Audio (Mono)
Frequency Response 10 Hz - 100 KHz
Signal to Noise Ratio 48 dB
Sampling Rate 5 KHz - 22.1 KHz (Playback/Recording)
Mic Impedance 39k Ohms
Line-In Impedance 600k Ohms
Mic Sensitivity 10 - 200 mVpp
Line-In Sensitivity 0 - 2 Vpp
AD/DA Resolution 8 bits

6 Mechanical (Desktop) Specifications

Keyboard PS/2 Connector
Mouse PS/2 Connector
Ethernet RJ 45 10/100BaseT (Auto Sense)
Video In 4, 8, 16, or 32 BNC (Model Dependent)
Video Out 15-pin High Density
Audio In/Out Computer Audio (Mono)
Hard Drives Max 2 Drives for Desktop; Max 1 Removable Hard Drive
RS-232 One 9-Pin Serial Port
Dimensions Std Desktop: (1 box x 14.5 W x 16.25 D x 5.4 H)
Construction Steel with Injection-Molded Front Panel
Weight 35 lbs
USB 4 Rear Panel, 2 Front Panel


16730 - 9 01/09/2009


7 Mechanical (Industrial 4U) Specifications

Accessibility
Lockable Door with Access to CDRW, On/Off Reset, Reset Switch, or
Disk drive
Keyboard PS/2 Connector
Mouse PS/2 Connector
Ethernet RJ 45 10/100BaseT (Auto Sense)
Video In 4, 8, 16, or 32 BNC (Model Dependent)
Video Out 15-pin High Density
Audio In/Out Computer Audio (Mono)
Hard Drives Max 7 Drives for 4U
RS-232 One 9-Pin Serial Port
Dimensions 1 box x 17 W (w/o Ears/Handles) x 18.5 D x 7 H
Rack Mount
19 Rack; Rack Mount Ears/Handles Included; Rack Mount Slider
Optional
Construction Steel with Aluminium Front Panel
Weight 45 lbs
USB 4 Rear Panel, 2 Front Panel

8 Listings/Conformity

Power Supply UL, Listed, Level III & CE
FCC Compliance Designed in Accordance with FCC Part15, Subpart A

9 Environmental Specifications

Operating Temperature 5-55C; 41-131F
Operating Humidity 5 - 90% Relative Humidity Non-Condensing

APPENDIX A

UL RATINGS

UL NO. J 912
UL NO. J 953
UL NO. K912
UL NO. N505
UL NO. U415
UL NO. U419
UL NO. U420
UL NO. U901
UL NO. X536
UL NO. F-A-1045
UL NO. W-J -1063
UL NO. W-L-1146

BXUV.J 912 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:36 AM
BXUV.J912
Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Page Bottom
Design/System/Construction/Assembly Usage Disclaimer
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted in all cases as to the particular requirements covering the installation and use of UL
Listed or Classified products, equipment, system, devices, and materials.
Authorities Having Jurisdiction should be consulted before construction.
Fire resistance assemblies and products are developed by the design submitter and have been investigated by UL for compliance with
applicable requirements. The published information cannot always address every construction nuance encountered in the field.
When field issues arise, it is recommended the first contact for assistance be the technical service staff provided by the product
manufacturer noted for the design. Users of fire resistance assemblies are advised to consult the general Guide Information for each
product category and each group of assemblies. The Guide Information includes specifics concerning alternate materials and alternate
methods of construction.
Only products which bear UL's Mark are considered as Classified, Listed, or Recognized.
See General Information for Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263
Design No. J912
February 26, 1997
Restrained Assembly Rating 3 Hr.
Unrestrained Assembly Rating 3 Hr.
1. Concrete Topping 3000 psi compressive strength, 110 + or - 3 pcf unit weight.
Rating Hr Topping Thkns In.
3 1-1/2
2. Precast Concrete Units* Lightweight aggregate, cross section similar to the above illustration.
See Precast Concrete Units category for names of manufacturers.
3. Min. Bearing 1-1/2 in.
4. Grout Sand cement grout, 3500 psi. Grout stop used to keep grout from bottom 3-1/8 in. of joint. Weld tie plates
instead of or in conjunction with grout.
5. Clearance Between slabs at bottom full length of joint, 1/16 in. min, 1/4 in. max.
*Bearing the UL Classification Mark
Last Updated on 1997-02-26
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:36 AM
Questions? Notice of Disclaimer Page Top
Copyright 2009 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
The appearance of a company's name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured
under UL's Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL's Follow-Up
Service. Always look for the Mark on the product.
UL permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide
Information, Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the
data (or drawings). 2. The statement "Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc."
must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format:
"Copyright 2009 Underwriters Laboratories Inc."
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:37 AM
BXUV.J953
Page Bottom
Design No. J953
October 20, 1998
Restrained Assembly Rating 2 Hr.
Unrestrained Assembly Rating 1-1/2 Hr.
1. Precast Concrete Units* Nom 8, 10 or 12 in. deep by 48 in. wide units. Lightweight aggregate. Cross-section
similar to above illustration.
2. End Details Restrained and unrestrained.
3. Joint Clearance between slabs at bottom, full length, 1/16 in. min, 5/16 in. max, grouted full length with
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:37 AM
sand-cement grout (3500 psi min compressive strength) to a max depth of 4-1/2 in. This depth may be maintained by
placing a compressible material in the bottom of the joint before applying grout.
Note: A-3/4 in. lateral expansion joint to be provided the full length and depth of the slabs every 14 ft. Expansion
should be obtained with noncombustible, compressible material, for example, 24 sheets of 1/16 in. thick ceramic fiber
paper (total thickness equals 1-1/2 in.).
4. End Clearance Clearance for expansion at each end of slabs shall be equal to (3/16 +or- 1/16 in.) L/17 in., where
"L" is equal to length of span in feet.
5. Minimum Bearing 1-1/2 in.
BXUV.K912 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 4 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
BXUV.K912
Page Bottom
Design No. K912
August 05, 2008
Restrained Assembly Ratings - 3 Hr (See Item 2)
Unrestrained Assembly Ratings - 2 Hr
Unrestrained Beam Ratings - 2 Hr
Load Restricted for Canadian Applications See Guide BXUV7
2 of 4 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
1. Steel Beam Composite dissymmetric steel beam fabricated from structural steel members in accordance with the
Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, published by the American
Institute of Steel Construction. The steel beam, with an open web, has a 34.7 lb/ft min weight. The beam consists of the
bottom flange and partial web of a min. W10(x)49 with a bar welded to the web that serves as the top flange. Top bar
min dimensions of 1x3 in., a min overall beam depth of 8 in. and a min avg cross-section are of 10.2 in
2
.
2. Concrete Topping (Optional for unrestrained rating) 3000 psi compressive strength, 150 (+or-) 3 pcf unit
weight. Normal weight concrete. Min 1-1/8 in. thickness required for 3 hr Restrained Assembly Rating.
3. Precast Concrete Units* Carbonate, siliceous or lightweight aggregate. Min 8 in. thick by 4 or 8 ft wide units with
cross section similar to that shown for Design No. J952. Openings may be provided through the units for piping, ducts or
similar services and should be suitably enclosed with constructions having at least equal resistance, acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Units have a min 1-1/2 in. bearing on the bottom flange of Item 1.
3 of 4 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
IOWA PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INC
KNOXVILLE CAST STONE INC
OLDCASTLE PRECAST INC
TPAC, DIV OF KIEWIT WESTERN CO
4. Grout Sand-cement grout (3500 psi min compressive strength). Min avg thickness of 9/16 in. above top bar.
Hollow cores in precast concrete units grouted 6 in. min from beam web.
5. Runner Channel Fabricated from 25 MSG galv steel, min 1/2 in. deep, with 1 in. legs, fastened to steel beam with
XZF powder actuated pins spaced 12 in. OC.
6. Gypsum Board* 1/2 or 5/8 in. thick gypsum board fastened to runner channels with 1 in. long, 0.150 in. diam
steel screws spaced 16 in. OC.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO Types AG-C
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type C
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM INC Type FRPC, SF3 or ProRoc Type C
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM CANADA INC ProRoc Type C
GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM L L C Type 5
LAFARGE NORTH AMERICA INC Types LGFC-C, LGFC-C/A
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO Types FSW-C, FSW-G
PABCO BUILDING PRODUCTS L L C, DBA
PABCO GYPSUM Types C, PG-C
TEMPLE-INLAND FOREST PRODUCTS CORP Type TG-C
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type C
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type C
7. Corner Bead Fabricated from min 28 MSG galv steel to form an angle with 1-1/4 in. legs. Legs perforated with 1/4
in. diam holes approximately 1 in. OC. Attached to runner channel through gypsum board with 1 in. long, 0.150 in. diam
steel screws spaced 16 in. OC.
8. Joint Compound (Not shown) 1/32 in. thick on bottom and sides of wallboard from corner beads and feathered
out. Paper tape embedded in joint compound over joints with edges of compound feathered out.
9. Spray-Applied Fire Resistive Material* As an alternate to Items 5 through 8, the bottom flange of the steel
beam may be protected with a spray applied fire resistive material. Applied in one coat to a final untamped thickness of
3/8 in. to steel surfaces which are free of dirt, oil or scale. Min avg untamped density of 13 pcf with min ind untamped
density of 11 pcf for Types II and D-C/F. Min avg and min ind untamped densities of 22 and 19 pcf, respectively, for
Type HP. For Type I, min avg density of 15 pcf with min ind value of 12 pcf.
ISOLATEK INTERNATIONAL Type D-C/F, HP, I or II, Type EBS or Type X Adhesive/Sealer optional
9A. Spray-Applied Fire Resistive Material* As an alternate to Items 5 through 9, the bottom flange of the steel
beam and the flange tips may be protected with a spray applied fire resistive material. Applied in one coat to a final
untamped thickness of 1/2 in. to steel surfaces which are free of dirt, oil or scale. Min avg and min ind density of 15/14
pcf respectively. For method of density determination, see Design Information Section.
W R GRACE & CO - CONN Types MK6/HY, MK-6ES, MK-6s, RG, Z-106, Z-106G, Z-106HY, Z-146, Z-146 PC, Z -146T,
Z-156, Z-156 PC, and Z-156T.
4 of 4 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
BXUV.N505 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 3 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
BXUV.N505
Page Bottom
Design No. N505
December 23, 2008
Restrained Beam Rating 3 Hr.
Unrestrained Beam Rating 2 Hr.
Load Restricted for Canadian Applications See Guide BXUV7
2 of 3 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
Steel Beam Min size, a W8 x 24 with outside dimensions of 7 -7/8 x 6-1/2 in. with a flange thickness of 3/8 in., a web thickness of
1/4 in., and a cross-sectional area of 7.06 sq in.
1. Normal Weight Concrete 151 pcf.
2. Steel Floor and Form Units* 1-1/2 in. fluted type, welded to beam.
3. Drill Screw No. 8-18 by 1/2 in. long Phillips panhead drill screws, self-drilling and tapping, made of case-hardened
steel.
4. Runner Channel Fabricated from 25 MSG galv steel, 1-11/16 in. deep with 1-in. legs. Fastened to steel deck with
drill screws, 12 in. O.C.
5. Bracket Same material as runner channel or 24 MSG galv steel angle with 1 and 2-in. legs, and fastened to runner
channels with drill screws (Item 3). Brackets spaced 24 in. O.C.
6. Corner Angle No. 24 MSG galv steel with 1 and 2-in. legs, fastened to brackets with drill screws (Items 3).
7. Gypsum Board* 5/8 in. thick. Inner layer fastened with 1 in. long 0.150 in. diam screws and spaced 16 in. OC.
Middle layer attached with 1-5/8 in. long 0.150 in. diam screws spaced 12 in. OC. Outer layer attached with 2-1/4 in.
long, 0.150 in. diam screws spaced 8 in. OC. At least one screw at mid-depth of brackets in each layer. Screws are
self-drilling and self-tapping Phillips head made of case-hardened steel.
AMERICAN GYPSUM CO Types AG-C, AGX-1 .
BEIJING NEW BUILDING MATERIALS PUBLIC
LTD CO Type DBX-1.
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM INC Types 1, FRPC, EGRG, ProRoc TypeC, or ProRoc Type X.
CERTAINTEED GYPSUM CANADA INC ProRoc Type C, ProRoc Type X, ProRoc Type Abuse-Resistant.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type C, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX or WRX.
GEORGIA-PACIFIC GYPSUM L L C Types 5, 9, C, DGG, DAP, DAPC , DD, DA, GPFS6.
LAFARGE NORTH AMERICA INC Types LGFC6, LGFC6A , LGFC-C, LGFC-C/A.
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO Types FSK-C, FSW, FSW-C, FSW-G.
PABCO BUILDING PRODUCTS L L C, DBA
PABCO GYPSUM Type C, PG-9, PG-11 or PG-C.
PANEL REY S A Type PRC
3 of 3 1/20/2009 10:38 AM
SIAM GYPSUM INDUSTRY (SARABURI) CO LTD Type EX-1
TEMPLE-INLAND FOREST PRODUCTS CORP Type TG-C, GreenGlass Type X.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type C, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX or WRX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type C, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX or WRX.
8. Wire Netting No. 20 SWG hexagonal mesh with 20 SWG longitudinal stiffener at third points of 3-ft wide roll.
Installed on bottom, bent up approx 1-1/2 in. on each side, and secured to sides with same screws used to hold middle
layer or wallboard.
9. Corner Bead Fabricated from 20 MSG galv steel to form an angle with 1-1/4 in. legs. Legs perforated with 1/4 in.
diam holes approx 1 in. OC. Attached to wallboard with 4d nails approx 12 in. OC in both legs.
10. Joint Compound 1/32 in. thick on bottom and sides of wallboard from corner beads and feathered out. Paper
tape embedded in joint compound over joints with edges of compound feathered out. Nom 3/32 in. thick gypsum veneer
plastic may be applied to the entire surface of Classified veneer baseboard. Joints reinforced.
11. Protective Material Spray-Applied Fire Resistive Materials* Spray applied contour of the units to a
thickness of 7/8 in.
See Spray-Applied Fire Resistive Materials (CHPX) category for names of manufacturers.
12. Alternate Construction - Steel Framing Members-* As an alternate to Items 3, 4, 5, 6 and 8 steel clips
attached to both sides of beam flanges 2 ft OC and at ends of beam. Inner layer of gypsum board fastened to steel clips
with 1-1/4 in. long Type S drywall screws. Middle layer fastened to steel clips with 2 in. long Type S drywall screws. 2 in.
by 2 in. 25 MSG angle fastened to clips on bottom portion of assembly with 2 in. long Type S drywall screws. Outer layer
of gypsum board fastened to angle and clips with 2-1/4 in. long Type S drywall screws, spaced 2 ft OC. Screws are
self-drilling and self-tapping Phillips head made of case-hardened steel.
JOHN WAGNER ASSOCIATES INC, DBA
GRABBER Type CB Clip.

BXUV.U415 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
BXUV.U415
Page Bottom
Design No. U415
July 30, 2007
Nonbearing Wall Ratings 1, 2, 3 or 4 Hr
2 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
3 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
1. Floor, Side and Ceiling Runners "J" - shaped runner, min 2-1/2 in. deep (min 4 in. deep when System C is
used), with unequal legs of 1 in. and 2 in., fabricated from min 24 MSG (min 20 MSG when Item 4A or 7 are used) galv
steel. Runners positioned with short leg toward finished side of wall. Runners attached to structural supports with steel
fasteners located not greater than 2 in. from ends and not greater than 24 in. OC. "E" - shaped studs (Item 2A) may be
used as side runners in place of "J" - shaped runners.
2. Steel Studs "C-H" - shaped studs, min 2-1/2 in. deep (min 4 in. deep when System C is used), fabricated from min
25 MSG (min 20 MSG when Items 2D, 5C, or 7 is used) galv steel. Cut to lengths 3/8 to 1/2 in. less than floor-to-ceiling
height and spaced 24 in. or 600 mm OC.
2A. Steel Studs (Not Shown) "E" - shaped studs installed back to back in place of "C-H" - shaped studs (Item 2)
"E" - shaped studs secured together with steel screws spaced a maximum 12 in. OC. Fabricated from min 25 MSG (min
20 MSG when Item 2D or Item 7 is used) galv steel, min 2-1/2 in. deep (min 4 in. deep when System C is used), with
one leg 1 in. long and two legs 3/4 in. long. Shorter legs 1 in. apart to engage gypsum liner panels. Cut to lengths 3/8 to
1/2 in. less than floor to ceiling heights.
2B. Furring Channels (Optional, not shown) For use with single or double layer systems. Resilient furring channels
fabricated from min 25MSG corrosion protected steel, installed horizontally, and spaced vertically a max 24 in. OC.
Flange portion of channel attached to each intersecting "C-H" or "E" stud on side of stud opposite the 1 in. liner panels
with 1/2 in. long Type S or S-12 pan-head steel screws. When furring channels are used, wallboard to be installed
vertically only. Not to be used with Type FRX or FRX-G gypsum wallboard (Item 4A) or cementitious backer units (Item
7).
2C. Furring Channels For use with System I - "Hat" - shaped, 25 MSG galv steel furring channels attached directly
4 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
over the inner layers of wallboard to each stud with 2 in. long Type S pan head steel screws. Screws alternate from top
flange to bottom flange at each stud intersection. Furring channels spaced vertically max 24 in. OC.
2D. Steel Framing Members* (Optional, not shown) For use with single or double layer systems. Furring
channels and Steel Framing Members as described below. Not to be used with Type FRX or FRX-G gypsum wallboard
(Item 4A) or cementitious backer units (Item 7):
a. Furring Channels Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced
max. 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b.
Gypsum board installed vertically only and attached to furring channels as described in Item 3.
b. Steel Framing Members* Used to attach furring channels (Item 2Da) to studs (Item 2 or
2A). Clips spaced max. 24 in. OC., and secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum
self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet. Furring channels are friction fitted
into clips.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC Type RSIC-1.
3. Gypsum Board* Gypsum liner panels, nom 1 in. thick, 24 in. or 600 mm (for metric spacing) wide. Panels cut 1
in. less in length than floor to ceiling height. Vertical edges inserted in "H" portion of "C-H" studs or the gap between the
two 3/4 in. legs of the "E" studs. Free edge of end panels attached to long leg of vertical "J" - runners with 1-5/8 in. long
Type S steel screws spaced not greater than 12 in. OC. When wall height exceeds liner panel length, liner panel may be
butted to extend to the full height of the wall. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. In System I, butt
joints in liner panels are staggered min 36 in. Butt joints backed with 6 in. by 22 in. strips of 3/4 in. thick gypsum
wallboard (Item 4). Wallboard strips centered over butt joints and secured to liner panels with six 1-1/2 in. long Type G
steel screws, three screws along the 22 in. dimension at the top and bottom of the strips.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type SLX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type SLX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type SLX
4. Gypsum Board*
System A - 1 Hr
Gypsum panels, with beveled, square or tapered edges, nom 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. or 1200 mm wide, applied vertically or
horizontally, attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 12 in. when installed vertically or 8 in OC when
installed horizontally. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
System B - 2 Hr
Gypsum panels, with beveled, square or tapered edges, nom 1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. or 1200 mm wide, applied
vertically or horizontally in two layers. Inner or base layer attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced
24 in. OC when installed vertically or 16 in. OC when installed horizontally. Outer or face layer attached to studs with
1-5/8 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 12 in. OC when installed vertically and staggered 12 in. from base layer screws
or 8 in. OC when installed horizontally and staggered 8 in. from base layer screws. Horizontal joints between inner and
outer layers staggered a min of 12 in. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Vertical joints centered over
studs and staggered 24 in.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY 1/2 in. Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2,
IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO 1/2 in. Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1,
IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V 1/2 in. Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR,
SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
5 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
System C - 2 Hr
horizontally, secured with 1-1/4 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 8 in. OC along vertical edges and 12 in. OC in the
field when installed vertically or 8 in. OC along the vertical edges and in the field when installed horizontally. Horizontal
joints need not be backed by steel framing. Screws along side joints offset 4 in. Requires min 4 in. deep framing per
Items 1, 2 and 3. Requires min 3 in. thick mineral wool batts per Item 6.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
System D - 2 Hr
horizontally, attached directly to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 24 in. when installed vertically or 16 in.
OC when installed horizontally. . Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Requires face layer of 1/2 or 5/8
in. thick cementitious backer units per Item 7 and min 1-1/2 in. thick mineral wool batts per Item 6.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
System E - 2 Hr
vertically or horizontally, attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 12 in. OC when installed vertically
or 8 in. when installed horizontally. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY 1/2 in. Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR,
SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO 1/2 in. Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2,
IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
USG MEXICO S A DE C V 1/2 in. Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX,
SHX, WRC, WRX
System F - 2 Hr
vertically in two layers. Inner or base layer attached to resilient furring channels (Item 2B) with 1 in. long Type S steel
screws spaced 24 in. Outer or face layer attached to resilient furring channels (Item 2B) with 1-5/8 in. long Type S steel
screws spaced 12 in. OC and staggered 12 in. from base layer screws. Joints between inner and outer layers staggered
24 in.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY 1/2 in. Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1,
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO 1/2 in. Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1,
USG MEXICO S A DE C V 1/2 in. Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. Types AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR,
SCX, SHX, WRC, WRX
System G - 3 Hr
6 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
horizontally in three layers. Inner or base layer attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 24 in. OC
when installed vertically or 16 in OC when installed horizontally. Middle layer attached to studs with 1-5/8 in. long Type S
steel screws spaced 24 in. when installed vertically or 16 in. OC when installed horizontally. Outer or face layer attached
to studs with 2-1/4 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 16 in. when installed vertically or 12 in. OC when installed
horizontally. Screws offset 6 in. from layer below. Horizontal joints on adjacent layers staggered a min of 12 in. .
Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered 24 in. on
adjacent layers.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
System H - 3 Hr
horizontally, two layers over the flange of the "C" section of the studs, one layer over the flange of the "H" section of the
studs. Inner or base layer attached to studs with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 24 in. OC when installed vertically
or 16 in. OC when installed horizontally. Face layer attached to studs with 1-5/8 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 16
in. when installed vertically or 12 in. OC when installed horizontally. Screws offset 6 in. from layer below. Horizontal
joints on adjacent layers staggered a min of 12 in. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Vertical joints
centered over studs and staggered 24 in. on adjacent layers.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types C, IP-X2, IPC-AR, WRC
System I - 4 Hr
Gypsum panels, with beveled, square or tapered edges, nom 3/4 in. thick, 4 ft wide (or 1200 mm for metric spacing)
wallboard with square or tapered edges. Total of four layers to be used. First and second (inner) layers applied vertically
or horizontally over the steel studs. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. When applied vertically, joints
centered over studs and staggered min 24 in., otherwise all joints staggered min 12 in. First layer secured to studs with
1-1/4 in. long Type S self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head steel screws spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer secured to studs
with 2-1/4 in. long Type S self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. Third layer applied
vertically over the furring channels (Item 2C) with a 1-1/4 in. long Type S self-drilling, self-tapping bugle-head steel
screws spaced 12 in. OC. Fourth layer applied vertically or horizontally with 2-1/4 in. long Type S self-drilling,
self-tapping bugle-head steel screws spaced 12 in. OC. When applied vertically, joints to be staggered min 24 in. from
third layer, otherwise all joints staggered min 12 in.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types IP-X3, or ULTRACODE
4A. Gypsum Board* (As an alternate to Item 4 Systems A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, and I when used as the base layer,
For direct attachment only) - Nom 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges,
applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of studs.
Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC in the
field.
RAY-BAR ENGINEERING CORP Type RB-LBG
5. Joint Tape and Compound (Not Shown)
Systems A, B, C, E, F, G, H, I
Joints on outer layers of gypsum boards (Item 4 and 4A) covered with paper tape and joint compound. Paper tape and
joint compound may be omitted when gypsum boards are supplied with square edges. Exposed screw heads covered
with joint compound.
7 of 7 1/20/2009 10:39 AM
6. Batts and Blankets*
Systems A, B, E, F, G, H, I
(Optional) Mineral wool or glass fiber batts partially or completely filling stud cavity. Any mineral wool or glass fiber
batt mineral bearing the UL Classification Marking as to Fire Resistance.
Systems C & D
Min 3 in. (System C) and min 1-1/2 in. (System D) thick mineral wool batts, friction fitted between the studs and floor
and ceiling runners.
THERMAFIBER INC Type SAFB
7. Cementitious Backer Units* (System D) Nom 1/2 or 5/8 in. thick panels, square edge, attached to studs over
gypsum wallboard with 1-5/8 in. long, Type S-12, corrosion resistant steel screws spaced 8 in. OC and staggered 8 in.
from gypsum wall board screws. Joints covered with glass fiber mesh tape. Vertical joints staggered one stud cavity from
gypsum wallboard joints. Horizontal joints staggered a min of 12 in. from the gypsum wallboard joints.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO DUROCK Exterior Cement Board or DUROCK Brand Cement Board.
8. Laminating Adhesive* (Optional, Not Shown) Used to bond outer layer of Cementitious Backer Units (Item 7)
to inner layers of Gypsum Board (Item 4) in System D. ANSI A136.1 Type 1 organic adhesive applied with 1/4 in. square
notched trowel. See Adhesives (BYWR) in the Fire Resistance Directory or Adhesives (BJLZ) in the Building Materials
Directory for names of Classified companies.
9. Lead Batten Strips (Not Shown, For Use With Item 4A) - Lead batten strips, min 1-1/2 in. wide, max 10 ft long
with a max thickness of 0.125 in. Strips placed on the interior face of studs and attached from the exterior face of the
stud with two 1 in. long Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip.
Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead batten strips
required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 4A) and optional at remaining stud locations.
Required behind vertical joints.
10. Lead Discs or Tabs (Not Shown, For Use With Item 4A) - Used in lieu of or in addition to the lead batten strips
(Item 9) or optional at other locations - Max 3/4 in. diam by max 0.125 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or adhered
over steel screw heads or max 1/2 in. by 1-1/4 in. by max 0.125 in. thick lead tabs placed on gypsum boards (Item 4A)
underneath screw locations prior to the installation of the screws. Lead discs or tabs to have a purity of 99.9% meeting
the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".

1 of 5 1/20/2009 10:40 AM
BXUV.U419
Page Bottom
Design No. U419
November 12, 2008
Nonbearing Wall Ratings 1, 2, 3 or 4 Hr (See Items 4 & 5)
1. Framing Members - Floor and Ceiling Runners (Not shown) For use with Item 2 - Channel shaped,
fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min width to accommodate stud size, with min 1-1/4 in. long
legs, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
1A. Framing Members - Floor and Ceiling Runners* Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 For use with Item 2A,
proprietary channel shaped, min. 3-5/8 in. wide with 1-1/4 in. long legs, fabricated from min. 0.0150 in. (0.0146 in., min
bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
CLARKWESTERN BUILDING SYSTEMS INC UltraSteel
DIETRICH INDUSTRIES INC UltraSTEEL.
1B. Framing Members - Floor and Ceiling Runners (Not shown - In lieu of Item 1) For use with Item 2A,
proprietary channel shaped, min. 2-9/16 in. wide with 1-3/16 in. wide flanges, fabricated from min. 0.0150 in.
galvanized steel, attached to floor and ceiling fasteners 24 in. OC. max.
2 of 5 1/20/2009 10:40 AM
1C. Framing Members - Floor and Ceiling Runner* Not shown - In lieu of Item 1 For use with Item 2C,
proprietary channel shaped runners, 3-5/8 in. wide attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners 24 in. OC max.
MARINO\WARE A DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES
INC ViperTrack
2. Framing Members - Steel Studs Channel shaped, fabricated from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, min
width as indicated under Item 5, min 1-1/4 in. flanges and 1/4 in. return, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/8
to 3/4 in. less than assembly height.
2A. Framing Members - Steel Studs* In lieu of Item 2 - Proprietary channel shaped studs, min. width as indicated
under Item 5, min. 1-1/4 in. long legs and 1/4 in. long folded back return flange legs, fabricated from min. 0.0155 in.
(0.0149 in., min bare metal thickness) galvanized steel, spaced a max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in. less than
assembly height. Allowable use of studs is shown in the table below. For direct attachment of gypsum board only.
2B. Framing Members - Steel Studs (As an alternate to Item 2, For use with Item 5B) Channel shaped, fabricated
from min 20 MSG (0.0327 in. thick) corrosion-protected or galv steel, 3-1/2 in. min width, min 1-1/2 in. flanges and 1/4
in. return, spaced a max of 16 in. OC. Studs friction-fit into floor and ceiling runners. Studs to be cut 5/8 to 3/4 in. less
than assembly height.
2C. Framing Members - Steel Studs* In lieu of Item 2 - Proprietary channel shaped studs, 3-5/8 in. wide spaced a
max of 24 in. OC. Studs to be cut 3/4 in less than the assembly height and istalled with a in. gap between the end of
the stud and track at the bottom of the wall. For direct attachment of gypsum board only. For vertical application of
gypsum board only per Item 5C.
MARINO\WARE A DIV OF WARE INDUSTRIES
INC ViperStud
3. Wood Structural Panel Sheathing (Optional, For use with Item 5 Only.)- (Not Shown) - 4 ft wide, 7/16 in. thick
oriented strand board (OSB) or 15/32 in. thick structural 1 sheathing (plywood) complying with DOC PS1 or PS2, or APA
Standard PRP-108, manufactured with exterior glue, applied horizontally or vertically to the steel studs. Vertical joints
centered on studs, and staggered one stud space from wallboard joints. Attached to studs with flat-head self-drilling
tapping screws with a min. head diam. of 0.292 in. at maximum 6 in. OC. in the perimeter and 12 in. OC. in the field.
When used, fastener lengths for gypsum panels increased by min. 1/2 in.
4. Batts and Blankets* (Required as indicated under Item 5) Mineral wool batts, friction fitted between studs and
runners. Min nom thickness as indicated under Item 5. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV or BZJZ) Categories for
names of Classified companies.
4A. Batts and Blankets* (Optional) Placed in stud cavities, any glass fiber or mineral wool insulation bearing the
UL Classification Marking as to Surface Burning Characteristics and/or Fire Resistance. See Batts and Blankets (BKNV
or BZJZ) Categories for names of Classified companies.
5. Gypsum Board* Gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically or horizontally. Vertical
joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers
(multilayer systems) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal joints need not be backed by steel framing. Horizontal edge
joints and horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered. Horizontal edge joints and horizontal
butt joints in adjacent layers (multilayer systems) staggered a min of 12 in. The thickness and number of layers for the 1
hr, 2 hr, 3 hr and 4 hr ratings are as follows:
Wallboard Protection on Each Side of Wall
Rating
Min
Stud
Depth,
Item 2
Min
Stud
Depth,
Item 2A
No. of
Layers
& Thkns
of Panel
Min
Thkns of
Insulation
(Item 4)
1 3-1/2 3-5/8 1 layer, 5/8 in. thick Optional
1 2-1/2 3-5/8 1 layer, 1/2 in. thick 1-1/2 in.
1 1-5/8 3-5/8 1 layer, 3/4 in. thick Optional
2 1-5/8 2-1/2 2 layers, 1/2 in. thick Optional
3 of 5 1/20/2009 10:40 AM
2 3-1/2 3-5/8 1 layer, 3/4 in. thick 3 in.
4 2-1/2 2-1/2 2 layers, 3/4 in. thick 2 in.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2 or IPC-AR; WRC, 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1,
IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRX or WRC; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type SCX, SHX, WRX, IP-X1,
AR, C, WRC, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X2, IPC-AR ; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
USG MEXICO S A DE C V 1/2 in. thick Type C, IP-X2, IPC-AR or WRC; 5/8 in. thick Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2,
IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRX, WRC or; 3/4 in. thick Types IP-X3 or ULTRACODE
When Item 7B, Steel Framing Members*, is used, Nonbearing Wall Rating is limited to 1 Hr. Min. stud depth is 3-1/2 in.,
min. thickness of insulation (Item 4) is 3 in., and two layers of gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) shall be
attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. One layer of gypsum board panels (1/2 in. or 5/8 in. thick) attached
to opposite side of stud without furring channels as described in Item 6.
5A. Gypsum Board* (As an alternate to Item 5) 5/8 in. thick, 24 to 54 in. wide, applied horizontally as the outer
layer to one side of the assembly. Secured as described in Item 6.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type SHX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type FRX-G, SHX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type SHX.
5B. Gypsum Board* (As an alternate to Item 5 when used as the base layer on one or both sides of wall, For direct
attachment only, not to be used with Item 3) - Nom 5/8 in. thick lead backed gypsum panels with beveled, square or
tapered edges, applied vertically. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered min 1 stud cavity on opposite sides of
studs. Wallboard secured to studs with 1-1/4 in. long Type S-12 steel screws spaced 8 in. OC at perimeter and 12 in. OC
in the field.
RAY-BAR ENGINEERING CORP Type RB-LBG
5C. Gypsum Board* (For Use With Item 2C) Rating Limited to 1 Hour. 5/8 in. thick, 48 in. wide, Gypsum panels with
beveled, square or tapered edges, applied vertically. The gypsum board is to be installed on each side of the studs with 1
in. long Type S coated steel screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the edge of the board at the vertical edges and 12
in. OC starting 6 in. from the edge of the board at the center of each board. Gypsum boards are to be secured to the top
and bottom track with screws spaced 8 in. OC starting 4 in. from the board edge. Fasteners shall not penetrate through
both the stud and the track at the same time. Vertical joints are to be centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity
on opposite sides of studs.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type SCX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type SCX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type SCX.
6. Fasteners (Not shown) For use with Item 2 - Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs (Item
2) or furring channels (Item 7). Single layer systems: 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for
3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 8 in. OC when panels are applied horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges
and 12 in. OC in the field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8
in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8
in. thick panels or 2-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer.
4 of 5 1/20/2009 10:40 AM
Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in.
long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or
2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. Four-layer systems:
First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in.
thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick
panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth layer- 2-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 3 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced
12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below.
6A. Fasteners (Not shown) For use with Item 2A - Type S or S-12 steel screws used to attach panels to studs (Item
2A). Single layer systems: 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced
8-1/2 in. OC with additional screws 1 in. and 2-1/2 in. from edges of the board when panels are horizontally. or 8 in. OC
along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the field when panels are applied vertically. Two layer systems
applied vertically: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels,
spaced 16 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or 2-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels,
spaced 16 in. OC with screws offset 8 in. from first layer. Two layer systems applied horizontally: First layer- 1 in.
long for 1/2 and 5/8 in. thick panels or 1-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC starting 8 in. from each
edge of the board with an additional screw placed 1-1/4 in. from each edge of the board. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for
1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or 2-1/4 in. long for 3/4 in. thick panels, spaced 16 in. OC starting 8 in. from each edge of
the board with an additional screw placed 1-1/4 in. from each edge of the board with screws offset 8 in. from first layer.
Three-layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in.
long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels or
2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6 in. from layer below. For all layers, an
additional screw shall be placed 1-1/4 in. from each edge of the board. Four-layer systems: First layer- 1 in. long for
1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Second layer- 1-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in., 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in.
OC. Third layer- 2-1/4 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 2-5/8 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 24 in. OC. Fourth
layer- 2-5/8 in. long for 1/2 in. thick panels or 3 in. long for 5/8 in. thick panels, spaced 12 in. OC. Screws offset min 6
in. from layer below. For all layers, an additional screw shall be placed 1-1/4 in. from each edge of the board.
7. Furring Channels (Optional, not shown, for single or double layer systems) Resilient furring channels fabricated
from min 25 MSG corrosion-protected steel, spaced vertically a max of 24 in. OC. Flange portion attached to each
intersecting stud with 1/2 in. long Type S-12 steel screws. Not for use with Item 5A.
7A. Steel Framing Members (Not Shown)* (Optional on one or both sides, not shown, for single or double layer
systems) As an alternate to Item 7, furring channels and Steel Framing Members as described below:
a. Furring Channels Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel. 2-3/8 in. wide by 7/8 in. deep, spaced
max. 24 in. OC perpendicular to studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b.
Gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in Item 6. Not for use with Item 5A.
b. Steel Framing Members* Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Aa) to studs (Item 2).
Clips spaced max. 48 in. OC. RSIC-1 clips secured to studs with No. 8 x 1-1/2 in. minimum
self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center grommet. RSIC-V clips secured to studs with
No. 8 x 9/16 in. minimum self-drilling, S-12 steel screw through the center hole. Furring channels
are friction fitted into clips.
PAC INTERNATIONAL INC Types RSIC-1, RSIC-V.
7B. Steel Framing Members (Optional, Not Shown)* As an alternate to Item 7, furring channels and Steel
Framing Members on only one side of studs as described below:
a. Furring Channels Formed of No. 25 MSG galv steel, spaced 24 in. OC perpendicular to
studs. Channels secured to studs as described in Item b. Batts and Blankets placed in stud cavity
as described in Item 5. Two layers of gypsum board attached to furring channels as described in
Item 5. Not for use with Item 5A.
b. Steel Framing Members* Used to attach furring channels (Item 7Ba) to one side of studs
(Item 2) only. Clips spaced 48 in. OC., and secured to studs with two No. 8 x 2-1/2 in. coarse
drywall screws, one through the hole at each end of the clip. Furring channels are friction fitted
into clips.
KINETICS NOISE CONTROL INC Type Isomax
7C. Steel Framing Members* Optional - Not Shown - Used as an alternate method to attach resilient channels (Item
7). Clips attached at each intersection of the resilient channel and the steel studs (Item 2). Resilient channels are friction
fitted into clips, and then clips are secured to the steel stud with min. 1 in. long Type S-12 steel screws through the
center hole of the clip and the resilient channel flange.
KEENE BUILDING PRODUCTS CO INC Type RC Assurance.
8. Joint Tape and Compound Vinyl or casein, dry or premixed joint compound applied in two coats to joints and
screw heads of outer layers. Paper tape, nom 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints of outer
layer panels. Paper tape and joint compound may be omitted when gypsum panels are supplied with a square edge.
9. Siding, Brick or Stucco (Optional, not shown) Aluminum, vinyl or steel siding, brick veneer or stucco, meeting
the requirements of local code agencies, installed over gypsum panels. Brick veneer attached to studs with corrugated
metal wall ties attached to each stud with steel screws, not more than each sixth course of brick.
10. Caulking and Sealants* (Optional, not shown) A bead of acoustical sealant applied around the partition
perimeter for sound control.
5 of 5 1/20/2009 10:40 AM
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type AS
11. Lead Batten Strips (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Lead batten strips, min 1-1/2 in. wide, max 10 ft long
with a max thickness of 0.125 in. Strips placed on the interior face of studs and attached from the exterior face of the
stud with two 1 in. long Type S-12 pan head steel screws, one at the top of the strip and one at the bottom of the strip.
Lead batten strips to have a purity of 99.9% meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C". Lead batten strips
required behind vertical joints of lead backed gypsum wallboard (Item 5B) and optional at remaining stud locations.
Required behind vertical joints.
12. Lead Discs or Tabs (Not Shown, For Use With Item 5B) - Used in lieu of or in addition to the lead batten strips
(Item 11) or optional at other locations - Max 3/4 in. diam by max 0.125 in. thick lead discs compression fitted or
adhered over steel screw heads or max 1/2 in. by 1-1/4 in. by max 0.125 in. thick lead tabs placed on gypsum boards
(Item 5B) underneath screw locations prior to the installation of the screws. Lead discs or tabs to have a purity of 99.9%
meeting the Federal specification QQ-L-201f, Grade "C".

1 of 3 1/20/2009 10:42 AM
BXUV.U420
Page Bottom
Design No. U420
August 15, 2008
Nonbearing Wall Rating 1 or 2 HR.
1. Studs Channel shaped 1 5/8 in. wide with 1 3/8 in. legs and 1/4 in. stiffening flanges. Fabricated from No. 25
MSG galv steel. Studs to be cut 1/4 in. less than assembly height.
2. Bracing Cut from the steel runners, min. 4-1/4 in. long, fastened to the studs with two No. 8 by 1/2 in. long
self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws in each stud. As an alternate, but limits the stud cavity depth to maximum 9-1/2
in., cut from the gypsum wallboard, 9-1/2 in. long and 12 in. wide, fastened to the studs with three Type S wallboard
screws in each stud. Vertical spacing of bracing not to exceed 48 in. OC.
3. Floor and Ceiling Runners Channel shaped 1 5/8 in. wide with 1 in. legs, fabricated from No. 25 MSG galv
steel. Attached to floor and ceiling with fasteners spaced 24 in. OC.
4. Gypsum Board* Any 5/8 in. thick wallboard for fire resistance Classified with beveled, square, or tapered edges.
For 1 Hr Rating One layer of wallboard to be used. Applied vertically with joints centered over studs. Fastened to studs
with 1 in. long, Type S, wallboard screws spaced 8 in. OC at the joints, located 3/8 in. from the edges, and 12 in. OC in
the field. Fasteners to be spaced 8 in. OC at the runners.
For 2 Hr Rating Two layers of wallboard to be used. The inner layer to be applied in the same manner as for the 1 Hr
2 of 3 1/20/2009 10:42 AM
Rating. The outer layer to be fastened to the studs (through the inner layer) using 1 5/8 in. long, Type S, wallboard
screws spaced 8 in. OC at the joints, located 3/8 in. from the edges and 12 in. OC in the field.
Fasteners to be spaced 8 in. OC at the runners. Joints to be staggered 24 in. from the inner layer.
See Gypsum Board (CKNX) category for names of manufacturers.
4A. Gypsum Board* (As alternate to Item 4) - Nom 5/8 in. thick gypsum panels with beveled, square or tapered
edges, applied vertically or horizontally. Vertical joints centered over studs and staggered one stud cavity on opposite
sides of studs. Vertical joints in adjacent layers (2-hr system) staggered one stud cavity. Horizontal edge joints and
horizontal butt joints on opposite sides of studs need not be staggered or backed with steel framing. Horizontal edge
joints and horizontal butt joints in adjacent layers (2-hr system) staggered a minimum of 12 in. For the single layer
system, panels attached to steel studs and floor runner with 1 in. long Type S steel screws spaced 8 in. OC when applied
horizontally, or 8 in. OC along vertical and bottom edges and 12 in. OC in the field when applied vertically. For the
double layer system, base layer panels attached to steel studs and floor runner with 1 in. long Type S steel screws
spaced 16 in. Face layer panels attached to steel studs and floor runner with 1-5/8 in. long Type S steel screws spaced
16 in. OC.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC or WRX.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type AR, C, FRX-G, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC or WRX.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type AR, C, IP-AR, IP-X1, IP-X2, IPC-AR, SCX, SHX, WRC or WRX.
4B. Gypsum Board* (As an alternate to Items 4 or 4A) - Nom 3/4 in. thick, 4 ft wide, installed as described in Item
4A with screw length increased to 1-1/4 in.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Types AR, IP-AR.
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Types AR, IP-AR.
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Types AR, IP-AR.
5. Joint Tape and Compound Vinyl or casein, dry or premixed joint compound applied in two coats to joints and
screw heads. Paper tape, 2 in. wide, embedded in first layer of compound over all joints.
6. Batts and Blankets* (Optional, not shown) Glass fiber batts may be installed in the interior or wall cavity. The
max thickness of the batts shall be 2 1/2 in. for the walls with 2 Hr assembly ratings and 3 1/2 in for the walls with 1 Hr
assembly ratings. Attached to wallboard with wire staples spaced horizontally 12 in. OC and vertically 24 in. OC.
CERTAINTEED CORP
GUARDIAN FIBERGLASS INC
JOHNS MANVILLE INTERNATIONAL INC
OWENS CORNING
6A. Fiber, Sprayed* As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 6) Spray applied cellulose insulation material.
The fiber is applied with water to completely fill the enclosed cavity in accordance with the application instructions
supplied with the product. Nominal dry density of 3.0 lb/ft
3
. Alternate application method: The fiber is applied with U.S.
Greenfiber LLC Type AD100 hot melt adhesive at a nominal ratio of one part adhesive to 6.6 parts fiber to completely fill
the enclosed cavity in accordance with the application instructions supplied with the product. Nominal dry density of 2.5
lb/ft
3
.
U S GREENFIBER L L C Cocoon2 Stabilized or Cocoon-FRM (Fire Rated Material)
6B. Fiber, Sprayed* As an alternate to Batts and Blankets (Item 6) and Item 6A - Spray applied cellulose insulation
material. The fiber is applied with water to interior surfaces in accordance with the application instructions supplied with
the product. Applied to completely fill the enclosed cavity. Minimum dry density of 4.3 pounds per cubic ft.
NU-WOOL CO INC Cellulose Insulation
7. Cementitious Backer Units* (Optional Item Not Shown - For Use On Face Of 1 Hr Or 2 Hr Systems With All
Standard Items Required) - 1/2 in., 5/8 in., 3/4 in. or 1 in. thick, min. 32 in. wide.- Applied vertically or horizontally with
vertical joints centered over studs. Fastened to studs and runners with cement board screws of adequate length to
penetrate stud by a minimum of 3/8 in. for steel framing members spaced a max of 8 in. OC. When 4 ft. wide boards are
used, horizontal joints need not be backed by framing. 2-Hr System - Applied vertically with vertical joints centered over
studs. Face layer fastened over gypsum board to studs and runners with cement board screws of adequate length to
penetrate stud by a minimum of 3/8 in. for steel framing members, and a minimum of 3/4 in. for wood framing members
spaced a max of 8 in. OC.
3 of 3 1/20/2009 10:42 AM
NATIONAL GYPSUM CO Type PermaBase

1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:44 AM
BXUV.U901
Page Bottom
Design No. U901
October 26, 1998
Bearing Wall Rating 4 HR.
Nonbearing Wall Rating 4 HR.
1. Concrete Blocks* Various designs. Classification B-4 (4 hr).
See Concrete Blocks category for lists of eligible manufacturers.
2. Mortar Blocks laid in full bed of mortar, nom. 3/8 in. thick, of not less than 2-1/4 and not more than 3-1/2 parts of
clean sharp sand to 1 part Portland cement (proportioned by volume) and not more than 50 percent hydrated lime (by
cement volume). Vertical joints staggered.
3. Portland Cement Stucco or Gypsum Plaster If used, add 1/2 hr. to Classification.
4. Loose Masonry Fill If all core spaces are filled with loose dry expanded slag, burned clay or shale (rotary kiln
process), water repellant vermiculite masonry fill insulation, or silicone treated perlite loose fill insulation, Class D-2 (2
hr) or C-3 (3 hr) concrete blocks will provide a 4 hr fire resistance rating.
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:44 AM
BXUV.X536 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:45 AM
BXUV.X536
Page Bottom
Design No. X536
July 24, 2000
Rating - 1, 2, 3, and 4 Hr (See Item 4)
1. Steel Column Min. size column W10X49.
2. Structural Framing Members* Galv. steel clips spaced 4 ft OC and 1-1/4 in. from top and bottom of column.
CLAW INTERNATIONAL The "CLAW"
BXUV.X536 - Fire Resistance Ratings - ANSI/UL 263 http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:45 AM
3. Support Angle No. 25 MSG galv. steel with 1-1/2 in. legs placed over clips before first layer of gypsum board and
after the second layer of gypsum board when three or more layers of gypsum board are used. Angle secured to clips and
gypsum board using 1-5/8 in. self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws, spaced 4 ft. OC and 1-1/4 in. from the top and
bottom of the column. Angle cut 1 in. less than asembly height. Spliced in angles to occur over clips.
4. Gypsum Board* 5/8 in. thick Type C board, one to four layers, see below and Item 5, corner bead.
CANADIAN GYPSUM COMPANY Type C or IP-X2
UNITED STATES GYPSUM CO Type C or IP-X2
USG MEXICO S A DE C V Type C or IP-X2
1 Hour Rating
First layer attached with 1 in. long self-drilling, self-tapping, type "S" steel screws attached through the gypsum board
and the clips (Item 2), screws spaced 12 in. OC and 1-1/4 in. from the top and bottom of the column.
2 Hour Rating
Second layer attached with 1-5/8 in. long self-drilling, self-tapping, type "S" steel screws attached through gypsum
board and the clips, screws spaced 12 in. OC and 1-1/4 in. from the top and bottom of the column.
3 Hour Rating
Third layer attached with 1 in. long self-drilling, self-tapping, type "S" steel screws attached through the support angle
and gypsum board, screws spaced 12 in. OC, starting 9 in. up from the bottom of the column. Screws placed a min of 1
in. from the edge of the board and a max of 1-1/4 in. from the edge of the board.
4 Hour Rating
Fourth layer attached with 1-5/8 in. long self-drilling, self-tapping, type "S" steel screws attached through the angle and
gypsum board, screws spaced 12 in. OC, starting 6 in. from the bottom of the column. Screws placed a min of 1 in. from
the edge of the board and a max of 1-1/4 in. from the edge of the board.
5. Corner Bead No. 26 gauge galv steel, 1-1/4 in. legs attached to gypsum board with 4d by 1-3/8 in. long nails,
spaced 12 in. OC, starting 6 in. from the bottom of the column. Nails placed a min. of 3/4 in. from the edge of the board
and a max of 1-1/8 in. from the edge of the board. For each hourly rating, corner bead is to be applied after the final
layer of gypsum board (Item 4) as well as one layer of joint compound.
XHEZ.F-A-1045 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:46 AM
XHEZ.F-A-1045
Through-penetration Firestop Systems
Page Bottom
See General Information for Through-penetration Firestop Systems
System No. F-A-1045
December 06, 2002
F Rating 3 Hr
T Rating 1/4 Hr
1. Floor Assembly Min 4-1/2-in. thick lightweight or normal weight (100-150 pcf) concrete floor assembly. Floor may
also be constructed of any min 6 in. thick hollow core Precast Concrete Units*. Max diam of opening in floors
constructed of hollow core precast concrete units is 7 in. Otherwise, max diam of opening is 2 in. larger than OD of
penetrant (Item 2).
See Precast Concrete Units (CFTV) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of
manufacturers.
2. Through Penetrant One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing installed concentrically or eccentrically within the opening
XHEZ.F-A-1045 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:46 AM
such that annular space ranges from min 0 in. (point contact) to max 2 in. Metallic pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly
supported on both sides of floor assembly. One of the following types and sizes of metallic pipe, conduit or tubing may
be used:
A. Steel Pipe Nom 12 in. diam (or smaller) Schedule 5 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe Nom 12 in. diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe.
C. Conduit Nom 6 in. diam (or smaller) rigid steel conduit, 4 in. diam (or smaller) electrical
metallic tubing (EMT) or 1 in. diam (or smaller) flexible steel or aluminum conduit.
D. Copper Pipe or Tube Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing or
Regular copper pipe.
3. Firestop System The firestop system consists of the following items:
A. Packing Material Min 3 in. thickness of min 4 pcf density mineral wool batt insulation
tightly-packed into annular space. In floors constructed of hollow-core precast concrete units,
mineral wool packing material to extend above exposed cores in precast concrete units.. Packing
material recessed from bottom surface of floor assembly as required to accommodate fill material
(Item 3B).
B. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* - Sealant Min 1/2 in. thickness applied within annulus,
flush with bottom surface of floor. At point contact location, min 3/8 in. diam bead of fill material
to be applied at metallic penetrant/concrete interface.
SPECIFIED TECHNOLOGIES INC SpecSeal LCI Sealant
XHEZ.W-J -1063 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:46 AM
XHEZ.W-J-1063
Page Bottom
System No. W-J-1063
October 14, 2004
F Ratings 1, 2, 3 and 4 Hr (Item 1)
T Ratings 0 and 1/4 Hr (See Item 2)
1. Wall Assembly Min 4-7/8 , 6-1/8, 7-3/8 and 8-5/8 in. thick normal weight or lightweight (100-150 pcf) concrete
for 1, 2, 3 and 4 hr rated assemblies, respectively. Wall may also be constructed of any UL Classified Concrete Blocks*.
Max diam of opening is 14-1/8 in.
See Concrete Blocks (CAZT) category in the Fire Resistance Directory for names of manufacturers.
XHEZ.W-J -1063 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:46 AM
The F Rating of the firestop system is equal to the hourly fire rating of the wall assembly in which it is
installed.
2. Through Penetrants One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the
firestop system. The annular space between pipe, conduit or tubing and periphery of opening shall be min 0 in. to max
1-3/8 in. Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. The following types and sizes of
metallic pipes, conduits or tubing may be used:
A. Steel Pipe The following types and sizes of steel pipes may be used:
1A. Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) Schedule 7 (or heavier) steel pipe.
When steel pipe is used, T Rating is 1/4 hr for nom 4 in. diam (or
smaller) and 0 hr for steel pipes greater than nom 4 in. diam
B. Iron Pipe Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) cast or ductile iron pipe. When iron pipe is used T
Rating is 1/4 hr.
C. Conduit Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or steel conduit.
When EMT or steel conduit is used T Rating is 1/4 hr.
D. Copper Tubing Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing. When
copper tube is used T Rating is 0 hr.
E. Copper Pipe Nom 4 in. diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe. When copper
pipe is used T Rating is 0 hr.
3. Fill, Void or Cavity Material* Sealant Min 5/8 in. thickness of sealant for 1 hr rated wall assembly, and min 1
in. thickness of sealant for 2, 3 and 4 hr rated wall assemblies, applied within the annulus, flush with both surfaces of
wall. At point contact location between penetrant and periphery of opening, a min 1/2 in. diam bead of fill material shall
be installed at the concrete/penetrant interface on both surfaces of wall.
JOHNS MANVILLE INTERNATIONAL INC Firetemp CI or Firetemp CE
XHEZ.W-L-1146 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
1 of 2 1/20/2009 10:47 AM
XHEZ.W-L-1146
Page Bottom
System No. W-L-1146
September 03, 2004
F Ratings 1 and 2 Hr (See Item 1)
T Rating 0 Hr
1. Wall Assembly The 1 or 2 hr fire rated gypsum wallboard/stud wall assembly shall be constructed of the materials
and in the manner described in the individual U300 or U400 Series Wall or Partition Design in the UL Fire Resistance
Directory and shall include the following construction features:
A. Studs Wall framing may consist of either wood studs or steel channel studs. Wood studs to
XHEZ.W-L-1146 - Through-penetration Firestop Systems http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/showp...
2 of 2 1/20/2009 10:47 AM
consist of nom 2 by 4 in. lumber spaced 16 in. OC. Steel studs to be min 3-1/2 in. wide and
spaced max 24 in. OC. When steel studs are used and the diam of opening exceeds the width of
stud cavity, the opening shall be framed on all sides using lengths of steel stud installed between
the vertical studs and screw-attached to the steel studs at each end. The framed opening in the
wall shall be 4 to 6 in. wider and 4 to 6 in. higher than the diam of the penetrating item such
that, when the penetrating item is centered in the opening, a 2 to 3 in. clearance is present
between the penetrating item and the framing in all four sides.
B. Gypsum Board* The gypsum wallboard type, thickness, number of layers, fastener type
and sheet orientation shall be as specified in the individual U300 or U400 Series Design in the UL
Fire Resistance Directory. Max diam of opening is 26 in. in. for steel stud walls. Max diam of
opening is 14-1/2 for wood stud walls.
The hourly F Rating of the firestop system is equal to the hourly fire rating of the wall
assembly in which it is installed.
2. Through-Penetrant One metallic pipe, conduit or tubing installed either concentrically or eccentrically within the
firestop system. The annular space between pipe, conduit or tubing and periphery of opening shall be min of 0 in. (point
contact) to max 2 in. Pipe, conduit or tubing to be rigidly supported on both sides of wall assembly. The following types
and sizes of metallic pipes, conduits or tubing may be used:
A. Steel Pipe Nom 24 in. diam (or smaller) Schedule 10 (or heavier) steel pipe.
B. Iron Pipe Nom 24 in. diam (or smaller) service weight (or heavier) cast iron soil pipe, nom
12 in diam (or smaller) or Class 50 (or heavier) ductile iron pressure pipe.
C. Conduit Nom 6 in. diam (or smaller) steel conduit or nom 4 in diam (or smaller) steel
electrical metallic tubing
D. Copper Tubing Nom 6 in. diam (or smaller) Type L (or heavier) copper tubing
E. Copper Pipe Nom 6 in. diam (or smaller) Regular (or heavier) copper pipe.
3. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials* Caulk or Sealant Min 5/8 in. thickness of fill material applied within the
annulus, flush with both surfaces of wall. Min 1/2 in. diam bead of caulk applied to the penetrant/wallboard interface at
the point contact location on both sides of wall.
3M COMPANY CP25WB+ or FB-3000 WT

BidFile 100

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BidFile 100

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PROJ ECT MANUAL

Enola A. Dew Apartments

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi